Comtech EF Data Vipersat SLM-5650A Installation And Operation Manual
Реклама
Реклама
SLM-5650A
Satellite Modem
Installation and Operation Manual
IMPORTANT NOTE: The information contained in this document supersedes all previously published information regarding this product. This manual is subject to change without prior notice.
Part Number MN-SLM5650A Revision 8
Errata A
Comtech EF Data Documentation Update
Subject:
Original Manual Part
Number/Rev:
Errata Number/
PLM Document ID:
PLM CO Number:
Comments:
Revise to include extended temperature information for Network
Processor option
MN ‐ SLM5650A Rev 8
ER ‐ SLM5650A ‐ EA8
C ‐ 0027953
Updated Sections:
1.3.3.3.1
Network Processor
FAST Accessible Options
D.10
Extended Temperature Option
Revised pages follow.
ER-SLM5650A-EA8 THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT SUBJECT TO REVISION/UPDATE!
PLM CO C-0027953 Page 1 of 4
ER-SLM5650A-EA8 THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT SUBJECT TO REVISION/UPDATE!
PLM CO C-0027953 Page 2 of 4
ER-SLM5650A-EA8 THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT SUBJECT TO REVISION/UPDATE!
PLM CO C-0027953 Page 3 of 4
ER-SLM5650A-EA8 THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT SUBJECT TO REVISION/UPDATE!
PLM CO C-0027953 Page 4 of 4
Errata B
Comtech EF Data Documentation Update
Subject:
Original Manual Part
Number/Rev:
Errata Number/
PLM Document ID:
PLM CO Number:
Comments:
Revise to include extended temperature information for Network
Processor option
MN ‐ SLM5650A Rev 8
ER ‐ SLM5650A ‐ EB8
C ‐ 0028075
Updated page C ‐ 41:
Router Ethernet Interface Traffic IP Address and Range command, corrected typo
Revised pages follow.
ER-SLM5650A-EB8 This document is not subject to revision/update! CO C-0028075 Revision - Page 1 of 2
ER-SLM5650A-EB8 This document is not subject to revision/update! CO C-0028075 Revision - Page 2 of 2
SLM-5650A
Satellite Modem
Installation and Operation Manual
Part Number MN-SLM5650A
Revision 8
Copyright © 2013 Comtech EF Data. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA.
Comtech EF Data, 2114 West 7th Street, Tempe, Arizona 85281 USA, 480.333.2200, FAX: 480.333.2161
BLANK PAGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE ............................................................................................................................................... XXI
About this Manual ........................................................................................................................................... xxi
Conventions and References ............................................................................................................................ xxi
Patents and Trademarks ........................................................................................................................................ xxi
Related Documents ................................................................................................................................................ xxi
Military Standards .................................................................................................................................................. xxi
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes ............................................................................................................................. xxii
Examples of Multi-Hazard Formats ....................................................................................................................... xxii
Safety and Compliance .................................................................................................................................... xxii
Electrical Safety and Compliance .......................................................................................................................... xxii
Electrical Installation ............................................................................................................................................ xxiii
Operating Environment ........................................................................................................................................ xxiii
European Union Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) Directive (1999/5/EC) and EN 301 489-1 ................................................................................................................................................. xxiii
Contact Comtech EF Data ................................................................................................................................ xxv
Warranty Policy ............................................................................................................................................. xxvi
Limitations of Warranty ....................................................................................................................................... xxvi
Exclusive Remedies .............................................................................................................................................. xxvi
CHAPTER 1.
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................... 1–1
1.1
Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 1–1
1.2
Functional Description ........................................................................................................................ 1–2
1.3
SLM-5650A Features ........................................................................................................................... 1–3
1.3.1
Physical Description ................................................................................................................................. 1–4
1.3.2
Physical Features ...................................................................................................................................... 1–5
1.3.3
Operational Features ............................................................................................................................... 1–6
1.3.4
Interoperability ...................................................................................................................................... 1–11
1.4
Summary of Specifications ................................................................................................................ 1–12
1.4.1
Performance ........................................................................................................................................... 1–14
CHAPTER 2.
INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 2–1
2.1
Unpacking and Inspection ................................................................................................................... 2–1
2.2
Installation ......................................................................................................................................... 2–2
2.2.1
Installing the Optional Rear Support Brackets Kit .................................................................................... 2–4
2.2.2
Installing the Optional Bearingless Rack Slide Set .................................................................................... 2–6 iii
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
2.3
Connect External Cables ...................................................................................................................... 2–7
2.4
Configuration ...................................................................................................................................... 2–7
CHAPTER 3.
REAR PANEL CONNECTORS AND PINOUTS .................................................. 3–1
3.1
Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 3–1
3.2
IF Connectors ...................................................................................................................................... 3–3
3.2.1
J2, J4 L-Band IF Interface Connectors ....................................................................................................... 3–3
3.2.2
J11, J3 70/140 MHz IF Interface Connectors ............................................................................................ 3–3
3.3
Terrestrial Data Connectors ................................................................................................................ 3–3
3.3.1
J5 Ethernet Remote Control Connector (RJ-45) ....................................................................................... 3–3
3.3.2
P1 Overhead Data Interface Connector (DB-25M) ................................................................................... 3–4
3.3.3
J6 EIA-530 Connector (DB-25F) ................................................................................................................ 3–5
3.3.4
J7 HSSI Connector .................................................................................................................................... 3–6
3.3.5
Interface Option Slot ................................................................................................................................ 3–7
3.4
Utility Connectors ............................................................................................................................... 3–7
3.4.1
J1 Ext Ref (External Reference) (Type ‘TNC’) ............................................................................................ 3–7
3.4.2
J8 Alarms Connector (DB-9F) ................................................................................................................... 3–7
3.4.3
J9 Auxiliary Connector (HD-15F) .............................................................................................................. 3–8
3.4.4
J10 Remote Connector (DB-9F) ............................................................................................................... 3–8
3.5
Power/Ground Connectors ................................................................................................................. 3–9
3.5.1
AC Power Connector ................................................................................................................................ 3–9
3.5.2
Ground Connector (GND) ......................................................................................................................... 3–9
CHAPTER 4.
UPDATING FIRMWARE ........................................................................................ 4–1
4.1
Updating Firmware via Internet .......................................................................................................... 4–1
4.2
About Firmware Files, Naming, Versions, and Archive Formats ............................................................ 4–1
4.3
Bulk Firmware Update – Ethernet FTP Upload Procedure .......................................................................... 4–3
4.4
Network Processor (NP) Interface Module Update Procedure ............................................................. 4–5
4.5
TRANSEC Module Update Procedure ................................................................................................. 4–10
CHAPTER 5.
FRONT PANEL OPERATION ................................................................................ 5–1
5.1
Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 5–1
5.1.1
Keypad with Data Entry Array .................................................................................................................. 5–2
5.1.2
LED Indicators ........................................................................................................................................... 5–3
5.1.3
Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) .......................................................................................................... 5–4
5.2
SELECT: (Main) Menu .......................................................................................................................... 5–5
5.2.1
SELECT (Main) Menu Matrix..................................................................................................................... 5–6 iv
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.2.2
Navigating the Menu Screens .................................................................................................................. 5–7
5.2.3
SELECT: Configure .................................................................................................................................... 5–8
5.2.4
SELECT: Monitor ..................................................................................................................................... 5–34
5.2.5
SELECT: Test ........................................................................................................................................... 5–40
5.2.6
SELECT: Save/Load ................................................................................................................................. 5–42
5.2.7
SELECT: Utility ........................................................................................................................................ 5–43
CHAPTER 6.
ETHERNET-BASED MANAGEMENT .................................................................. 6–1
6.1
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 6–1
6.2
Ethernet Management Interface Protocols .......................................................................................... 6–1
6.2.1
Ethernet-Based Management via Secure Management Interfaces ......................................................... 6–2
6.3
HTTP/HTTPS (Web Server) Interfaces .................................................................................................. 6–4
6.4
SNMP Interface ................................................................................................................................... 6–5
6.4.1
Management Information Base (MIB) Files ............................................................................................. 6–5
6.4.2
SNMP Community Strings ........................................................................................................................ 6–5
6.4.3
SNMP Traps .............................................................................................................................................. 6–6
6.4.4
SNMPv3 (NP Interface Only) .................................................................................................................... 6–7
6.5
Telnet Interface .................................................................................................................................. 6–8
6.5.1
Telnet Operation via HyperTerminal ........................................................................................................ 6–9
6.6
SSH (Secure Shell) Interface .............................................................................................................. 6–10
CHAPTER 7.
BASE MODEM HTTP INTERFACE ...................................................................... 7–1
7.1
Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 7–1
7.2
Base Modem HTTP Interface Introduction ........................................................................................... 7–1
7.2.1
HTTP Interface Availability via Secure Management Interfaces .............................................................. 7–1
7.2.2
User Login................................................................................................................................................. 7–2
7.2.3
HTTP Interface – Operational Features .................................................................................................... 7–3
7.2.4
HTTP Interface Menu Tree ....................................................................................................................... 7–4
7.3
SLM-5650A Base Modem HTTP Interface Page Descriptions ................................................................ 7–5
7.3.1
Home pages.............................................................................................................................................. 7–5
7.3.2
Admin pages ............................................................................................................................................. 7–8
7.3.3
Config Mdm (Modem Configuration) pages .......................................................................................... 7–10
7.3.4
Stats (Statistics) pages ............................................................................................................................ 7–15
7.3.5
Maint (Maintenance) | Unit Info ........................................................................................................... 7–22
CHAPTER 8.
NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE ..................................................... 8–1
8.1
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 8–1
8.2
Functional Hardware Description ........................................................................................................ 8–2
8.2.1
Connector Pinout ..................................................................................................................................... 8–3 v
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
8.3
Interface Specifications ....................................................................................................................... 8–3
8.3.1
Physical Description ................................................................................................................................. 8–3
8.3.2
General Specifications .............................................................................................................................. 8–3
8.4
NP Interface Module Removal and Installation .................................................................................... 8–4
8.4.1
NP Interface Module Removal Procedure................................................................................................ 8–4
8.4.2
NP Interface Module Installation Procedure ........................................................................................... 8–4
8.5
BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode ............................................................................................. 8–5
8.6
Network Processor (NP) HTTP/HTTPS Interface ................................................................................... 8–5
8.6.1
HTTP/HTTPS Interface Introduction ......................................................................................................... 8–5
8.6.2
HTTP/HTTPS Interface Availability via Secure Management Interfaces .................................................. 8–5
8.6.3
User Login................................................................................................................................................. 8–7
8.6.4
HTTP/HTTPS Interface – Operational Features ........................................................................................ 8–8
8.6.5
HTTP/HTTPS Menu Tree ........................................................................................................................... 8–8
8.6.6
HTTP/HTTPS Page Descriptions ................................................................................................................ 8–9
CHAPTER 9.
NP INTERFACE TELNET/SSH CLI OPERATION ............................................. 9–1
9.1
Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 9–1
9.1.1
Telnet User Access ................................................................................................................................... 9–2
9.1.2
SSH (Secure Shell) User Access ................................................................................................................. 9–2
9.2
Command Line Interface Pages ........................................................................................................... 9–3
9.2.1
CLI Menu System – Parallel Functionality ................................................................................................ 9–3
9.2.2
CLI Menu – Common Information, Navigation, Operation Features ....................................................... 9–3
9.2.3
Main Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 9–5
9.2.4
Administration Menu page (A) ................................................................................................................. 9–6
9.2.5
Satellite Modem Configuration (Modem Menu) page (M) .................................................................... 9–14
9.2.6
LAN Menu page (N) ................................................................................................................................ 9–21
9.2.7
WAN Menu page (W) ............................................................................................................................. 9–25
9.2.8
Routing Table page (R) ........................................................................................................................... 9–26
9.2.9
OSPF Configuration page (F) .................................................................................................................. 9–27
9.2.10
IGMP Configuration page (I) .............................................................................................................. 9–28
9.2.11
Vipersat Configuration page (V) ........................................................................................................ 9–29
9.2.12
Redundancy Configuration page (E) .................................................................................................. 9–30
9.2.13
Operations & Maintenance page (O) ................................................................................................. 9–31
CHAPTER 10.
TRANSEC MODULE HTTPS INTERFACE .................................................... 10–1
10.1
TRANSEC Module Overview .............................................................................................................. 10–1
10.2
TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface .................................................................................................... 10–2
10.3
Accessing the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface ............................................................................... 10–2
10.3.1
HTTPS Interface – Operational Features ............................................................................................ 10–3
10.3.2
HTTPS Interface Menu Tree ............................................................................................................... 10–3
10.4
TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface Page Descriptions ........................................................................ 10–4
10.4.1
Home pages ....................................................................................................................................... 10–4 vi
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
10.4.2
Admin (Administrative) pages ........................................................................................................... 10–6
10.4.3
Stats (Statistics) | Module Status .................................................................................................... 10–13
10.4.4
Maint (Maintenance) | Unit Info ..................................................................................................... 10–14
CHAPTER 11.
TRANSEC MODULE SSH CLI OPERATION .................................................. 11–1
11.1
Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 11–1
11.1.1
SSH (Secure Shell) User Access .......................................................................................................... 11–2
11.2
Command Line Interface (CLI) Pages .................................................................................................. 11–3
11.2.1
CLI Menu System – Parallel Functionality .......................................................................................... 11–3
11.2.2
CLI Menu – Common Information, Navigation, Operation Features ................................................. 11–3
11.2.3
Main Menu ........................................................................................................................................ 11–5
11.2.4
Configuration page [C] ....................................................................................................................... 11–6
11.2.5
Module Status page [M] .................................................................................................................. 11–13
11.2.6
Event Log [E] .................................................................................................................................... 11–14
11.2.7
Unit Info [ I ] ..................................................................................................................................... 11–15
11.2.8
Comtech EF Data Information page [Z] ........................................................................................... 11–16
CHAPTER 12.
10/100/1000 BASET (GBE) INTERFACE ................................................. 12–1
12.1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 12–1
12.2
Physical Description .......................................................................................................................... 12–1
12.2.1
Connector Pinout ............................................................................................................................... 12–2
12.3
General Specifications ...................................................................................................................... 12–3
12.4
10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface Module Removal and Installation ...................................................... 12–5
12.4.1
GbE Interface Module Removal Procedure ....................................................................................... 12–5
12.4.2
GbE Interface Module Installation Procedure ................................................................................... 12–5
CHAPTER 13.
G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 INTERFACE ................................................................ 13–1
13.1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 13–1
13.2
Physical Description .......................................................................................................................... 13–2
13.2.1
Connector Pinouts ............................................................................................................................. 13–3
13.3
Summary of Specifications ................................................................................................................ 13–4
13.4
G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module Removal and Installation ........................................................ 13–5
13.4.1
G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module Removal Procedure ............................................................... 13–5
13.4.2
G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module Installation Procedure ........................................................... 13–5
CHAPTER 14.
LOW VOLTAGE DIFFERENTIAL (LVDS) INTERFACE ............................. 14–1
14.1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 14–1
14.2
Physical Description .......................................................................................................................... 14–2 vii
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
14.2.1
“J1” Connector Pinout ....................................................................................................................... 14–3
14.3
General Specifications ...................................................................................................................... 14–4
14.4
LVDS Interface Module Removal and Installation ................................................................................... 14–5
14.4.1
LVDS Interface Module Removal Procedure ...................................................................................... 14–5
14.4.2
LVDS Interface Module Installation Procedure .................................................................................. 14–5
CHAPTER 15.
DOUBLETALK CARRIER-IN-CARRIER OPTION ....................................... 15–1
15.1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 15–1
15.2
What is DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier? .............................................................................................. 15–1
15.3
Application Requirements ................................................................................................................. 15–2
15.3.1
Operational Recommendations ......................................................................................................... 15–4
15.4
System Functionality and Operational Considerations ....................................................................... 15–5
15.4.1
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Cancellation Process ........................................................................... 15–7
15.4.2
Margin Requirements ........................................................................................................................ 15–9
15.4.3
Carrier-in-Carrier Latency .................................................................................................................. 15–9
15.4.4
Carrier-in-Carrier and Adaptive Coding and Modulation ................................................................... 15–9
15.4.5
Carrier-in-Carrier Link Design ............................................................................................................ 15–9
15.4.6
Carrier-in-Carrier Commissioning and Deployment ........................................................................ 15–15
15.4.7
Validating Carrier-in-Carrier Performance ....................................................................................... 15–16
15.5
Operational References .................................................................................................................. 15–17
15.5.1
Carrier-in-Carrier Link Budget Calculation ....................................................................................... 15–17
15.5.2
Estimating PSD Ratio ........................................................................................................................ 15–18
15.6
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Specifications .................................................................................... 15–20
15.7
Carrier-in-Carrier Summary ............................................................................................................. 15–20
15.8
Glossary.......................................................................................................................................... 15–21
APPENDIX A.
TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................................................... A–1
A.1
Overview ........................................................................................................................................... A–1
A.2
System Checkout ............................................................................................................................... A–1
A.2.1
Interface Checkout .................................................................................................................................. A–2
A.2.2
Modulator Checkout ............................................................................................................................... A–3
A.2.3
Demodulator Checkout ........................................................................................................................... A–6
A.3
Fault Isolation .................................................................................................................................... A–9
A.4
System Faults/Alarms ...................................................................................................................... A–10
A.5
LED Display and Description ............................................................................................................. A–12 viii
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
APPENDIX B.
OPERATIONS REFERENCE ................................................................................ B–1
B.1
Overview ............................................................................................................................................ B–1
B.2
Modes ................................................................................................................................................ B–1
B.2.1
OM-73 Mode ........................................................................................................................................... B–1
B.2.2
MIL-STD-188-165A Mode ........................................................................................................................ B–2
B.2.3
MIL-STD-188-165A Mode – Sequential ................................................................................................... B–3
B.2.4
IESS-308 Mode – Standard Higher Rates ................................................................................................ B–4
B.2.5
IESS-308 Mode – Extended ..................................................................................................................... B–6
B.2.6
IESS-309 Mode – Extended (Closed Network) ........................................................................................ B–7
B.2.7
IESS-310 Mode – Extended Rates ........................................................................................................... B–7
B.2.8
Turbo Code Mode ................................................................................................................................... B–7
B.2.9
16-QAM Mode ........................................................................................................................................ B–8
B.2.10
AUPC Mode ......................................................................................................................................... B–9
B.2.11
AUPC Mode – Sequential .................................................................................................................... B–9
B.2.12
AUPC Mode – Turbo ......................................................................................................................... B–10
B.2.13
LDPC Mode – Ultra Low Latency (ULL) .............................................................................................. B–10
B.2.14
LDPC Mode – Low Latency (LL) ......................................................................................................... B–10
B.2.15
LDPC Mode – High Performance (HP) ............................................................................................... B–11
B.3
Clocking Options ............................................................................................................................... B–11
B.3.1
IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Master .............................................................................................................. B–11
B.3.2
IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Slave .................................................................................................................. B–13
B.4
Buffering .......................................................................................................................................... B–15
B.4.1
Buffer Size ............................................................................................................................................. B–16
APPENDIX C.
REMOTE CONTROL .............................................................................................. C–1
C.1
Overview ............................................................................................................................................ C–1
C.2
EIA-485 ............................................................................................................................................... C–1
C.3
EIA-232 ............................................................................................................................................... C–2
C.4
Basic Protocol ..................................................................................................................................... C–2
C.5
Packet Structure ................................................................................................................................. C–3
C.5.1
Start of Packet ..........................................................................................................................................C–3
C.5.2
Target Address .........................................................................................................................................C–4
C.5.3
Address Delimiter .....................................................................................................................................C–4
C.5.4
Instruction Code .......................................................................................................................................C–4
C.5.5
Instruction Code Qualifier ........................................................................................................................C–4
C.5.6
Optional Message Arguments ..................................................................................................................C–5
C.5.7
End Of Packet ...........................................................................................................................................C–5
C.6
Remote Commands / Queries ............................................................................................................. C–6
C.6.1
Initial Setup – Priority Commands / Queries ............................................................................................C–7
C.6.2
Modulator (Tx) Commands / Queries ......................................................................................................C–8
C.6.3
Demodulator (Rx) Commands / Queries ............................................................................................... C–14 ix
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
C.6.4
Modem, Unit Commands / Queries ...................................................................................................... C–21
C.6.5
Bulk Configuration Commands / Queries .............................................................................................. C–29
C.6.6
Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC) Commands / Queries ........................................................... C–32
C.6.7
G.703 Interface Commands / Queries ................................................................................................... C–37
C.6.8
Gigabit Ethernet Interface Commands / Queries .................................................................................. C–39
C.6.9
Network Processor (NP) Interface Commands / Queries ...................................................................... C–40
C.6.10
TRANSEC Interface Commands / Queries ......................................................................................... C–42
APPENDIX D.
MODEM OPTIONS ............................................................................................... D–1
D.1
Forward Error Correction Options ...................................................................................................... D–1
D.2
Viterbi ............................................................................................................................................... D–2
D.3
Reed-Solomon Outer Codec ............................................................................................................... D–3
D.4
Closed Network Modes ...................................................................................................................... D–4
D.5
Trellis Coding (FAST Option) ............................................................................................................... D–5
D.6
Turbo Product Codec (FAST Option) ................................................................................................... D–6
D.7
Sequential (FAST Option) ................................................................................................................... D–7
D.8
Low Density Parity Check (LDPC) coding ............................................................................................. D–8
D.8.1
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ D–8
D.8.2
LDPC versus TPC ...................................................................................................................................... D–9
D.9
Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) ......................................................................................... D–10
D.10
Extended Temperature Option ......................................................................................................... D–10
APPENDIX E.
VIPERSAT NETWORK APPLICATION EXAMPLES....................................... E–1
E.1
Overview ............................................................................................................................................ E–1
E.2
OSPFv2 in a Shared Outbound Satellite Network ................................................................................. E–1
E.2.1
Shared Outbound Satellite Network Overview ........................................................................................ E–1
E.2.2
OSPF Basics............................................................................................................................................... E–2
E.2.3
OSPF Challenges ....................................................................................................................................... E–2
E.2.4
OSPF Maritime Use Cases ........................................................................................................................ E–3
E.2.5
OSPF Deployment Solution ...................................................................................................................... E–5
E.2.6
OSPFv2 Summary ..................................................................................................................................... E–7
E.3
Network Processor (NP) Interface BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode ......................................... E–8
E.3.1
BPM Mode Functional Description .......................................................................................................... E–8
E.3.2
BPM Mode Configuration ...................................................................................................................... E–10
E.3.3
BPM Mode in Hub Data Traffic Networks .............................................................................................. E–11
E.3.4
Dynamic Hub Demodulators in a Multiple TDM Hubs Configuration .................................................... E–13
E.3.5
Remote Data Traffic Handling ................................................................................................................ E–14 x
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
TABLES
Table 1-1. Acquisition and Timing Performance Requirements ............................................................. 1–14
Table 1-2. Doppler Requirements ........................................................................................................... 1–14
Table 1-3. Viterbi Decoder BER .............................................................................................................. 1–17
Table 1-4. BSPK/QPSK/OQPSK Viterbi with Reed-Solomon Decoder BER Performance .................... 1–17
Table 1-5. 8PSK, Trellis Decoder BER Performance ............................................................................. 1–17
Table 1-6. 8PSK, Trellis Decoder with Reed-Solomon BER Performance ............................................. 1–18
Table 1-7. 16QAM, Viterbi Decoder with Reed-Solomon BER Performance ......................................... 1–18
Table 1-8. TPC Decoder BER Performance ........................................................................................... 1–18
Table 1-9. Sequential Decoding with / without Reed-Solomon BER Performance ................................ 1–19
Table 1-10. Acceptable ACI Degradation with Spacing Factor of 1.2 .................................................... 1–20
Table 3-1. SLM-5650A Rear Panel Connectors ....................................................................................... 3–2
Table 7-1. Summary of Attributes for Router Stats Pages ...................................................................... 7–20
Table 8-1. LAN Interface Connector Pinout (Typical) ............................................................................... 8–3
Table 10-1. Event Log Message Types ................................................................................................ 10–12
Table 12-1. Connector Pinout ................................................................................................................. 12–2
Table 13-1. “ J1 | BAL DATA” Connector Pinout .................................................................................... 13–3
Table 13-2. 75Ω BNC Connectors (G.703 Unbalanced) ........................................................................ 13–3
Table 14-1. “J1” Connector Pinout .......................................................................................................... 14–3
Table 15-1. Spectral Efficiency using DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier ...................................................... 15–7
Table A-1. Conversion to S/N and Eb/N0 Chart ....................................................................................... A–4
Table A-2. SLM-5650A Fault Tree .......................................................................................................... A–10
Table D-1. Viterbi Decoding Summary .................................................................................................... D–2
Table D-2. Open Network Modes ............................................................................................................ D–4
Table D-3. Concatenated RS Coding Summary ...................................................................................... D–4
Table D-4. 8PSK/TCM Coding Summary ................................................................................................ D–5
Table D-5. Available TPC Modes ............................................................................................................. D–6
Table D-6. Sequential Decoding Summary .............................................................................................. D–7
FIGURES
Figure 1-1. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem .................................................................................................. 1–1
Figure 1-2. SLM-5650A Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 1–2
Figure 1-3. SLM-5650A Dimensional Envelope ........................................................................................ 1–4
Figure 1-4. SLM-5650A Front Panel View ................................................................................................ 1–5
Figure 1-5. SLM-5650A Rear Panel View ................................................................................................. 1–5
Figure 2-1. Unpacking and Inspecting the SLM-5650A ............................................................................ 2–1
Figure 2-2. SLM-5650A Rack Enclosure Installation Example ................................................................. 2–3
Figure 2-3. Optional Rear Support Bracket Installation ............................................................................ 2–5
Figure 2-4. Optional Bearingless Rack Slide Set Installation .................................................................. 2–6
Figure 3-1. SLM-5650A Rear Panel ............................................................................................................ 3–1
Figure 4-1. Firmware Update via Internet ................................................................................................. 4–2
Figure 5-1. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem Front Panel .............................................................................. 5–1
Figure 7-1. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem Home page .............................................................................. 7–5
Figure 7-2. Home | Contact page .............................................................................................................. 7–6
Figure 7-3. Home | Support page.............................................................................................................. 7–7
Figure 7-4. Admin | Access page .............................................................................................................. 7–8
Figure 7-5. Admin | Remote page ............................................................................................................. 7–9
Figure 7-6. Config Mdm | Modem Config (Page 1) ................................................................................. 7–10
Figure 7-7. Config Mdm | Modem Utilities (Page 2) ................................................................................ 7–11 xi
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure 7-8. Config Mdm | Modem Utilities (Page 3) ................................................................................ 7–12
Figure 7-9. Config Mdm | Spreading page .............................................................................................. 7–13
Figure 7-10. Config Mdm | Automatic Uplink Power Control page ......................................................... 7–14
Figure 7-11. Stats | Modem Status page ................................................................................................ 7–15
Figure 7-12. Stats | Modem Event Log page .......................................................................................... 7–16
Figure 7-13. Stats | Modem Statistics Log page ..................................................................................... 7–17
Figure 7-14. Stats | Configuration Change Log page ............................................................................. 7–18
Figure 7-15. Stats | Router Statistics page ............................................................................................. 7–19
Figure 7-16. Stats | Modem Ethernet Statistics page ............................................................................. 7–21
Figure 7-17. Maint | Unit Information page ............................................................................................. 7–22
Figure 8-1. Network Processor (NP) Interface Module ............................................................................. 8–1
Figure 8-2. NP Interface Block Diagram ................................................................................................... 8–2
Figure 8-3. Info | Home Page .................................................................................................................... 8–9
Figure 8-4. Info | Contact page ............................................................................................................... 8–10
Figure 8-5. Info | Logoff page .................................................................................................................. 8–10
Figure 8-6. Admin | Vipersat Mode page ................................................................................................ 8–11
Figure 8-7. Admin | FAST Features page ............................................................................................... 8–13
Figure 8-8. Admin | Security (Management Security) page .................................................................... 8–14
Figure 8-9. Admin | SNMP page ............................................................................................................. 8–16
Figure 8-10. Admin | Upgrade page ........................................................................................................ 8–17
Figure 8-11. Admin | Defaults (Factory Default Configurations) page .................................................... 8–18
Figure 8-12. Admin | Time (Date & Time) page ...................................................................................... 8–19
Figure 8-13. Admin | Event Log page ..................................................................................................... 8–20
Figure 8-14. Admin | Reboot page .......................................................................................................... 8–21
Figure 8-15. Modem | Config (Modem Configuration) page ................................................................... 8–23
Figure 8-16. Modem | Monitor (Modem Status) page ............................................................................. 8–28
Figure 8-17. Modem |Events (Modem Events Log) page ....................................................................... 8–29
Figure 8-18. Modem | Stats (Modem Statistics Log) page ..................................................................... 8–30
Figure 8-19. Modem | Utility (Modem Utilities) page ............................................................................... 8–31
Figure 8-20. LAN | Interface page ........................................................................................................... 8–32
Figure 8-21. LAN | Ethernet Ports page .................................................................................................. 8–35
Figure 8-22. LAN | ARP page ................................................................................................................. 8–36
Figure 8-23. WAN | Quality of Service page ........................................................................................... 8–37
Figure 8-24. WAN | Quality of Service Statistics page............................................................................ 8–38
Figure 8-25. WAN | Loopback Test page ................................................................................................ 8–39
Figure 8-26. Routing | Routes page ........................................................................................................ 8–40
Figure 8-27. Routing | OSPF page.......................................................................................................... 8–41
Figure 8-28. Routing | IGMP page .......................................................................................................... 8–43
Figure 8-29. Stats | Ethernet Tx Statistics page ..................................................................................... 8–44
Figure 8-30. Stats | Ethernet Rx Statistics page ..................................................................................... 8–46
Figure 8-31. Stats | IP Statistics page ..................................................................................................... 8–48
Figure 8-32. Stats | WAN Statistics page ................................................................................................ 8–51
Figure 8-33. Stats | Clear All Statistics page .......................................................................................... 8–53
Figure 8-34. Vipersat pages .................................................................................................................... 8–54
Figure 8-35. Redundancy page .............................................................................................................. 8–55
Figure 8-36. Save page ........................................................................................................................... 8–56
Figure 10-1. Home | Home page ............................................................................................................. 10–4
Figure 10-2. Home | Contact page .......................................................................................................... 10–5
Figure 10-3. Admin | Config page ........................................................................................................... 10–6
Figure 10-4. Admin | Update page ........................................................................................................ 10–10
Figure 10-5. Admin | Event page .......................................................................................................... 10–11
Figure 10-6. Stats | Module Status page ............................................................................................. 10–13
Figure 10-7. Maint | Unit Info page ...................................................................................................... 10–14
Figure 12-1. 10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface Module (AS/11985) .................................................. 12–1
Figure 12-2. GbE Interface Functional Block Diagram ........................................................................... 12–2 xii
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure 13-1. G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module (AS/11579 shown) ................................................. 13–1
Figure 13-2. G.703T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Functional Block Diagram ................................................... 13–2
Figure 14-1. Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface Module (PL/12272-1) ....................................... 14–1
Figure 14-2. LVDS Interface Functional Block Diagram ......................................................................... 14–2
Figure 155-1. Conceptual Block Diagram ............................................................................................... 15–3
Figure 15-2. Conventional FDMA Link .................................................................................................... 15–5
Figure 15-3. Same Link Using SLM-5650A and DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier ...................................... 15–6
Figure 15-4. Duplex Link Optimization .................................................................................................... 15–6
Figure 15-5. DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Signals ................................................................................ 15–8
Figure 15-6. Carrier-in-Carrier Signal Processing Block Diagram .......................................................... 15–8
Figure A-1. Fault Isolation Test Setup ...................................................................................................... A–2
Figure A-2. Typical Output Spectrum – With Noise .................................................................................. A–5
Figure A-3. Typical Output Spectrum – Without Noise ............................................................................. A–5
Figure A-4. Typical Constellation Patterns – With Noise .......................................................................... A–7
Figure A-5. Typical Constellation Patterns – Without Noise .................................................................... A–8
Figure B-1. IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Master Clocking Diagram ................................................................ B–12
Figure B-2. IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Slave Clocking Diagram .................................................................. B–14
Figure B-3. Clock Slip ............................................................................................................................. B–15
Figure B-4. Doppler Shift ......................................................................................................................... B–16
Figure D-1. TPC & LDPC Modes Performance (Relative to Shannon Limit) ........................................... D–9
Figure E-1. Satellite Shared Outbound Network ....................................................................................... E–2
Figure E-2. OSPF Support at Shore ......................................................................................................... E–3
Figure E-3. OSPF Support at Sea ............................................................................................................ E–4
Figure E-4. OSPF Laboratory Test Network ............................................................................................. E–5
Figure E-5. OSPF Test Solution ............................................................................................................... E–6
Figure E-6. Ethernet Port Configuration in BPM Mode ............................................................................. E–8
Figure E-7. Hub Data Traffic Network ..................................................................................................... E–11
Figure E-8. Hub VLAN Configuration HTTP/HTTPS Interface Pages .................................................... E–13
Figure E-9. Remote (Spoke) Data Traffic Network ................................................................................. E–14 xiii
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
BLANK PAGE xiv
PREFACE
About this Manual
This manual describes the installation and operation for the Comtech EF Data SLM-5650A
Satellite Modem. This is a document intended for the persons responsible for the operation and maintenance of the SLM-5650A.
Conventions and References
Patents and Trademarks
See all of Comtech EF Data's Patents and Patents Pending at http://patents.comtechefdata.com.
Comtech EF Data acknowledges that all trademarks are the property of the trademark owners.
• DoubleTalk
• DoubleTalk
®
®
is licensed from “Raytheon Applied Signal Technology”.
is a registered trademark of “Raytheon Applied Signal Technology”.
• Carrier-in-Carrier ® is a registered trademark of Comtech EF Data.
Related Documents
The following documents are referenced in this manual:
• Department of Defense (DOD) MIL-STD-188-114A, Electrical Characteristics of Digital
Interface Circuits
• Department of Defense (DOD) MIL-STD-188-165A, Interoperability and Performance
Standards for SHF Satellite Communications PSK Modems (FDMA Operation) (dated
November 2005)
• INTELSAT Earth Station Standards IESS-308, -309, -310, and -315
• EUTELSAT SMS
Military Standards
References to “MIL-STD-188” apply to the 114A series (i.e., MIL-STD-188-114A), which provides electrical and functional characteristics of the unbalanced and balanced voltage digital interface circuits applicable to both long haul and tactical communications. Specifically, these references apply to the MIL-STD-188-114A electrical characteristics for a balanced voltage digital interface circuit, Type 1 generator, for the full range of data rates. For more information, refer to the Department of Defense (DOD) MIL-STD-188-114A, Electrical Characteristics of
Digital Interface Circuits . xxi
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Preface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
A WARNING gives information about a possible hazard that MAY CAUSE DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY.
A CAUTION gives information about a possible hazard that MAY CAUSE INJURY or PROPERTY DAMAGE.
A NOTE gives important information about a task or the equipment.
A REFERENCE directs the reader to more information.
Examples of Multi-Hazard Formats
Safety and Compliance
Electrical Safety and Compliance
The SLM-5650A complies with the EN 60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment
(Including Electrical Business Machines) safety standard.
If the unit is operated in a vehicle or movable installation, make sure the unit is stable. Otherwise, EN 60950 safety is not guaranteed. xxii
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Preface
Electrical Installation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Connect the unit to a power system that has separate ground, line and neutral conductors. Do not connect the unit without a direct connection to ground.
Operating Environment
Do not operate the unit in any of these extreme operating conditions:
Ambient temperatures less than 0° C (32° F) or more than 50° C (122° F).
(extended temperature option -32° to 50° C)
Precipitation, condensation, or humid atmospheres of more than 95% relative humidity.
Unpressurized altitudes of more than 2000 metres (6561.7 feet).
Excessive dust.
Flammable gases.
Corrosive or explosive atmospheres.
European Union Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment (R&TTE) Directive (1999/5/EC) and EN 301 489-1
Independent testing verifies that the unit complies with the European Union R&TTE Directive, its reference to EN 301 489-1 ( E lectromagnetic compatibility and R adio spectrum M atters [ERM];
E lectro M agnetic C ompatibility [EMC] standard for radio equipment and services, Part 1:
Common technical requirements), and the Declarations of Conformity for the applicable directives, standards, and practices that follow:
European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive
(2004/108/EC)
• Emissions: EN 55022 Class B – Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference
Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment.
• Immunity: EN 55024 – Information Technology Equipment: Immunity Characteristics,
Limits, and Methods of Measurement.
• EN 61000-3-2 – Harmonic Currents Emission
• EN 61000-3-3 – Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker.
• Federal Communications Commission Federal Code of Regulation FCC Part 15, Subpart B.
To make sure that the unit complies with these standards, obey these instructions: xxiii
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Preface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
• Use coaxial cable that is of good quality for connections to the L-Band Type ‘N’ Rx (receive) female connector.
• Use Type 'D' connectors that have back-shells with continuous metallic shielding.
• Type ‘D’ cabling must have a continuous outer shield (either foil or braid, or both). The shield must be bonded to the back-shell.
• Operate the unit with its cover on at all times.
European Union Low Voltage Directive (LVD) (2006/95/EC)
Symbol Description
<HAR> Type of power cord required for use in the European Community.
!
CAUTION: Double-pole/Neutral Fusing
ACHTUNG: Zweipolige bzw. Neutralleiter-Sicherung
International Symbols
Symbol Definition Symbol
Alternating Current
Fuse
Definition
Protective Earth
Chassis Ground
European Union RoHS Directive (2002/95/EC)
This unit satisfies (with exemptions) the requirements specified in the European Union Directive on the Restriction of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EU RoHS,
Directive 2002/95/EC).
European Union Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive
(91/263/EEC)
In accordance with the European Union Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive
91/263/EEC, the unit should not be directly connected to the Public Telecommunications
Network.
CE Mark
Comtech EF Data declares that the unit meets the necessary requirements for the CE Mark. xxiv
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Preface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Contact Comtech EF Data
Contact Comtech EF Data during normal business hours:
Monday through Friday, 8 A.M. to 5 P.M Mountain Standard Time (MST)
Be prepared to provide the product model and serial numbers.
SLM-5650A
Technical
Support and
Service
For:
Telephone
Fax
Contact:
+1.480.333.4357 [email protected]
+1.480.333.2500
Comtech EF
Data Web Site
Main Page
Customer and
Technical Support
RMA
(Return Material
Authorization)
Comtech EF Data Main Number http://www.comtechefdata.com http://www.comtechefdata.com/support.asp http://www.comtechefdata.com/rmaform.asp
Mailing Address
+1.480.333.2200
2114 West 7th Street
Tempe, Arizona 85281 USA xxv
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Preface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Warranty Policy
Comtech EF Data products are warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a specific period from the date of shipment, and this period varies by product. In most cases, the warranty period is two years. During the warranty period, Comtech EF Data will, at its option, repair or replace products that prove to be defective. Repairs are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or a 90 day extended warranty, whichever is longer. Contact
Comtech EF Data for the warranty period specific to the product purchased.
For equipment under warranty, the owner is responsible for freight to Comtech EF Data and all related customs, taxes, tariffs, insurance, etc. Comtech EF Data is responsible for the freight charges only for return of the equipment from the factory to the owner. Comtech EF Data will return the equipment by the same method (i.e., Air, Express, Surface) as the equipment was sent to Comtech EF Data.
All equipment returned for warranty repair must have a valid RMA number issued prior to return and be marked clearly on the return packaging. Comtech EF Data strongly recommends all equipment be returned in its original packaging.
Comtech EF Data Corporation’s obligations under this warranty are limited to repair or replacement of failed parts, and the return shipment to the buyer of the repaired or replaced parts.
Limitations of Warranty
The warranty does not apply to any part of a product that has been installed, altered, repaired, or misused in any way that, in the opinion of Comtech EF Data Corporation, would affect the reliability or detracts from the performance of any part of the product, or is damaged as the result of use in a way or with equipment that had not been previously approved by Comtech EF Data Corporation.
The warranty does not apply to any product or parts thereof where the serial number or the serial number of any of its parts has been altered, defaced, or removed.
The warranty does not cover damage or loss incurred in transportation of the product.
The warranty does not cover replacement or repair necessitated by loss or damage from any cause beyond the control of Comtech EF Data Corporation, such as lightning or other natural and weather related events or wartime environments.
The warranty does not cover any labor involved in the removal and or reinstallation of warranted equipment or parts on site, or any labor required to diagnose the necessity for repair or replacement.
The warranty excludes any responsibility by Comtech EF Data Corporation for incidental or consequential damages arising from the use of the equipment or products, or for any inability to use them either separate from or in combination with any other equipment or products.
Exclusive Remedies
Comtech EF Data Corporation’s warranty, as stated is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed, implied, or statutory, including those of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The buyer shall pass on to any purchaser, lessee, or other user of Comtech EF Data Corporation’s products, the aforementioned warranty, and shall indemnify and hold harmless Comtech EF Data Corporation from any claims or liability of such purchaser, lessee, or user based upon allegations that the buyer, its agents, or employees have made additional warranties or representations as to product preference or use.
The remedies provided herein are the buyer’s sole and exclusive remedies. Comtech EF Data shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages, whether based on contract, tort, or any other legal theory. xxvi
1.1 Overview
Chapter 1. INTRODUCTION
Figure 1-1. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem ( Figure 1-1 ) satisfies the requirements for government and military communications system applications that require state-of-the-art modulation and coding techniques to optimize satellite transponder bandwidth usage, while retaining backward compatibility.
The SLM-5650A:
• Supports baseband data rates up to 155.52 Mbps, and its flexible modulation and
F orward E rror C orrection (FEC) capabilities ensure that the throughput and BER over the satellite is optimized.
• Is compliant with the provisions of Department of Defense (DoD) Standard MIL-STD-
188-165A, Interoperability of SHF Satellite Communications PSK Modems (Frequency
Division Multiple Access [FDMA] Operation ).
• Is fully interoperable with legacy OM-73 modems and other Government owned
Commercial Off-the-Shelf (COTS) and International Telecommunications Satellite
Organization (Intelsat) compatible PSK modems.
• Can be controlled and monitored from a variety of platforms, including its own front panel controls and indicators, a co-located Personal Computer (PC), and remote control systems such as the V ipersat N etwork M anagement S ystem (VNMS).
1–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
1.2 Functional Description
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650AMN-SLM5650A
Figure 1-2. SLM-5650A Block Diagram
Figure 1-2 depicts the functional block diagram for the SLM-5650A. The modem has been designed to accommodate a wide range of currently required features, and to support both near- and far-term advances in software-defined radio technology as well as advances in FEC technology. It is designed for installation in fixed or mobile Earth Terminal (ET) facilities (sites) using Defense Satellite Communications System III (DSCS III), DSCS III/Satellite Life
Enhancement Program (SLEP), Wideband Gap filler System (WGS), and commercial satellites.
The user has the ability to:
• Add or change modular data interfaces and FEC assemblies;
• Utilize an extensive array of built-in test capabilities;
• Easily upgrade the modem’s operational capabilities in the field;
• Easily update the modem’s firmware in the field;
• Use a wide range of flexible remote control options.
As shown in Figure 1-2 , the modem accepts signals from a selected digital signal source and modulates either a 70/140 MHz or L-Band Intermediate Frequency (IF) carrier with these signals.
The demodulator receives the Rx signal from either the 70/140 MHz or L-Band IF input interface, then demodulates the IF carrier. Clock and data are recovered and output on a selected data interface.
The Tx and Rx functions are independent with respect to coding, interleaving, overhead, and scrambling. The modem does not allow simplex operation in the 70/140 and the L-Band IF interfaces at the same time. The modem allows duplex operation in either one of the two IF interfaces.
1–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650AMN-SLM5650A
1.3 SLM-5650A Features
The SLM-5650A incorporates the following features:
• MIL-STD-188-165A compliance (Types A, B, D, E, F);
• Intelsat IESS-308, -309, -310, and -315;
• A rugged, one-rack unit (1RU) enclosure;
• Low weight and low power dissipation;
• Selectable 70/140 MHz or L-Band (950 to 2000 MHz) IF interfaces;
• EIA-530/422 Data Interface (built-in, to 20 Mbps);
• EIA-613/HSSI Data Interface (built-in, to 51.84 Mbps);
• EIA-485/EIA-232 Interface for serial remote control;
• Ethernet Interface for remote control using Telnet, SNMP, HTTP, HTTPS, and SSH;
• Plug-in Data Interface supporting the optional Gigabit Ethernet, Network Processor (NP),
G.703, and LVDS modules;
• Asymmetrical Loop Timing;
• Data Source Bit Synchronization (Clock recovery for input data without an associated transmit clock);
• Full-featured, built-in BER test-set;
• Electrical and Ethernet Rx constellation monitor;
• Adaptive Equalizer for high order modulation types;
• 64 kbps to 155.52 Mbps (Modulation-, code rate-, and interface-dependent);
• BPSK, QPSK, OQPSK, 8PSK, 8QAM, and 16QAM;
• FEC Rates: 5/16, 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 21/44, 5/16, 17/18, .382, .456, .547, and 1/1;
• Viterbi and Reed-Solomon Codec;
• Turbo Product Codec (optional);
• Low-Density Parity Check (LDPC) coding in three block sizes: ULL, LL, and HP
(optional);
• Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) (optional with LDPC).
• Sequential FEC (optional);
• Static Bridge, Router, and BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Modes (via the optional NP
Interface);
• TRANSEC Encryption (optional);
• Firmware updating capability.
1–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650AMN-SLM5650A
1.3.1 Physical Description
The SLM-5650A is constructed as a 1RU high, rack-mount chassis that can be free-standing as needed. Handles at the front ease removal from and placement into a rack.
1.3.1.1 Dimensional Envelope
Figure 1-3. SLM-5650A Dimensional Envelope
1–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
1.3.2 Physical Features
1.3.2.1 Front Panel
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650AMN-SLM5650A
Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION
SLM-5650A Front Panel Features
Item Description
1 USB Port
2 6-button keypad
3 12-button array
4 10 Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
5
40-character, 2-line Vacuum Fluorescent Display
(VFD)
6 Backlit On/Off Power Switch
7 Rack handles
Function
Reserved for future software support
Local control via menu navigation
Manual data entry
Overall status monitoring at a glance
Display of messages, menus and prompts
Unit power
Eases installation into / removal from rack
Figure 1-4. SLM-5650A Front Panel View
Local control of the SLM-5650A is accomplished from the modem’s front panel ( Figure 1-4 ).
The function and behavior of the keypad/data entry array, LED Indicators, and VFD are described in detail in Chapter 5 .
1.3.2.2 Rear Panel
Chapter 3. R E AR P ANE L C ONNE C TOR S AND P INOUTS
Figure 1-5. SLM-5650A Rear Panel View
External cables are attached to connectors on the SLM-5650A’s rear panel ( Figure 1-5 ) . Each connector is described in detail in Chapter 3.
1–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650AMN-SLM5650A
1.3.3 Operational Features
1.3.3.1 Operating Modes
The SLM-5650A supports Closed Network , Open Network and OM-73 modes of operation.
1.3.3.1.1 Closed Networks
Closed Networks refer to private networks with modem operational parameters that do not need to interoperate with modems developed for commercial open networks (as specified under IAW
IESS-308, IESS-309, and IESS-310 requirements for open network operation).
A Comtech EF Data overhead channel is provided so that the modem is capable of operating in such closed networks over commercial satellites IAW Intelsat requirements for use during closed network operation.
1.3.3.1.2 Open Networks (Intelsat)
Open Networks refer to networks that must meet Intelsat specifications for E ffective I sotropic
R adiated P ower (EIRP), EIRP stability, spurious emissions, intermodulation products, adjacent carrier interference, frequency tolerance, equalization, and modem parameters such as modulation, FEC, and scrambling.
The SLM-5650A meets Intelsat certification requirements and is capable of operating in such open networks over commercial satellites (as specified under IAW IESS-308, IESS-309, and
IESS-310 requirements for open network operation).
The modem supports the overhead framing integral to those modems, in order to be fully compatible with commercial modems complying with IAW IESS-308, IESS-309, and IESS-310.
No access is provided to the overhead channel data or alarms.
1.3.3.1.3 OM-73 Mode
OM-73 Mode allows the SLM-5650A to be compatible with Linkabit’s original OM-73 modem.
This modem and its operational capabilities have become a de facto standard when operating over
DSCS satellites. All OM-73 modes listed in MIL-STD-188-165A are supported.
1.3.3.2 Secure Management Interfaces
The SLM-5650A supports secure management interfaces, as part of its Management Security option, when the optional Network Processor (NP) Interface Module and/or the TRANSEC
Encryption card are installed either individually or in tandem.
When Management Security is enabled, three important modes of operation affect network management functionality:
1–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650AMN-SLM5650A
• (Static) Bridge Mode – This mode is used when the NP Interface is configured to support a static point-to-point connection.
• Router Mode – This mode is used when the NP Interface is configured to support multiport Ethernet and, for Dynamic Point-to-Point Mode, to provide bridged connectivity for data traffic while supporting routed network management and Vipersat traffic.
• BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode – This mode is used when the NP Interface is configured to provide bridged connectivity for data traffic while supporting routed network management and Vipersat traffic.
Detailed information about these configurations and modes, and their functional association with the Base Modem, NP Interface and/or the TRANSEC Module Interface, is provided in the following chapters in this manual:
Chapter 6. ETHERNET MANAGEMENT
Chapter 7. BASE MODEM HTTP INTERFACE
Chapter 8. NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE
Chapter 10. TRANSEC MODULE INTERFACE
1.3.3.3 Data Interfaces
The SLM-5650A supports only one data interface at a time. The modem features two native data interfaces (TIA/EIA-530/422 and TIA/EIA-613 [HSSI]), plus an option slot for installation of a modular data interface. The optional modular interfaces available at this time are the Network
Processor, Gigabit Ethernet, G.703, and LVDS.
1.3.3.3.1 Network Processor
The optional Network Processor (NP) Interface is Comtech EF Data’s third generation IP router,
Ethernet bridge, and BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) device. The interface is designed to process more than 150,000 packets per second (pps) in Layer 2, Layer 3, or Brouter mode of operation. The NP Interface supports the following operating modes:
• Layer 2 Ethernet Bridge Mode
• Layer 2 and Layer 3 SCPC Ethernet Brouter Mode
• Layer 2 and Layer 3 Vipersat Brouter Mode
• Layer 3 SCPC IP Router Mode
• Layer 3 Vipersat STDMA Router Mode
• Extended Temperature Range -32 ° to 50 ° C
1.3.3.3.2 10/100/1000 BaseT (Gigabit Ethernet)
The optional 10/100/1000 BaseT (Gigabit Ethernet, or GbE) interface performs a simple bridge function and passes IP packets, unaltered, in each direction between the LAN (10/100/1000
BaseT interface) and WAN (SLM-5650A modulator/demodulator).
1–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650AMN-SLM5650A
IP packet traffic is framed via HDLC encapsulation by the GBEI-5650A logic, and the GBEI-
5650A is both the origination and termination point for HDLC encapsulation. HDLC CRC-16 verification is performed on all received (from WAN) HDLC frames.
1.3.3.3.3 T1/E1, T2/E2, G.703
The optional T1/E1, T2/E2, G.703 interface is designed for full duplex capability and is automatically configured for simplex transmit or simplex receive operation The interface operates at the digital hierarchy bit rates of 1.544, 2.048, 6.312, and 8.448 Mps as defined by ITU-T G.703.
1.3.3.3.4 LVDS
The optional Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) interface provides a physical and electrical interface between an SLM-5650A modulator and demodulator and signal sources operating with
LVDS electrical characteristics.
1.3.3.3.5 TIA/EIA-530
The native TIA/EIA-530 interface supports the physical layer requirements for TIA/EIA-530. It also supports the TIA/EIA-422 electrical interface specification. This interface operates in duplex from 64 kbps to 20 Mbps.
1.3.3.3.6 TIA/EIA-613 (HSSI)
The native TIA/EIA-613 interface supports the physical layer requirements for TIA/EIA-613. It also supports the TIA/EIA-612 electrical interface specification. This interface operates in duplex from 64 kbps to 51.84 Mbps.
1.3.3.4 Independent Tx and Rx Function
The Tx (modulator) and Rx (demodulator) sides of the modem are functionally independent and separately controllable. The baseband Tx and Rx sides of a communications channel passing through the modem are independently configurable, including the ability to select different parameters (to include data rate, modulation, and coding) in support of asymmetrical operation.
Data interfaces and IF interfaces are not independent.
Example : If the TIA/EIA-530 interface is selected, DO NOT USE TIA/EIA-530 to transmit and a HSSI interface to receive. The same principle applies to the IF interfaces: If 70/140 is selected, DO NOT USE 70/140 to transmit and the L-Band interface to receive.
1–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650AMN-SLM5650A
1.3.3.5 Verification
The SLM-5650A includes test modes and loopbacks for rapid verification of the correct functioning of the modem. Of particular note is the IF loopback, which permits the user to perform a quick diagnostic test without having to disturb external cabling. During the loopback, all of the receive configuration parameters are temporarily changed to match those of the Tx side, and an internal RF switch connects the modulator output to the demodulator input. When normal operation is again selected, all of the previous values are restored.
1.3.3.6 Updating Modem Firmware
The SLM-5650A stores its firmware in flash memory, which allows the modem to upload firmware downloads from an external PC once Ethernet connectivity has been established.
Firmware updates for the base modem, 10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface Module, and
Network Processor (NP) Interface Module may be obtained free from Comtech EF Data via the
CEFD Web site or via e-mail from Comtech EF Data Customer Support during normal business hours. (Note that TRANSEC Module firmware updates must be requested directly from Comtech
EF Data Customer Support.)
Chapter 4. UPDATING FIRMWARE
1.3.3.7 Fully Accessible System Topology (FAST)
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem incorporates a number of optional features. In order to permit a lower initial cost, the unit may be purchased with only the desired features enabled.
If, at a later date, the user wishes to upgrade the functionality of a unit, Comtech EF Data provides F ully A ccessible S ystem T opology ( FAST ), a technology which permits the purchase and installation of options through special authorization codes. These unique Fast Access Codes may be purchased from Comtech EF Data during normal business hours, and then loaded into the unit using the front panel keypad.
FAST System Theory
FAST allows an operator to order a unit precisely tailored for the initial application. When service requirements change, FAST allows the operator to upgrade the topology of the unit onlocation, within minutes, and without having to remove the unit from the setup. This accelerated upgrade is possible due to FAST ’s extensive use of the programmable logic devices incorporated into Comtech EF Data products.
FAST Implementation
Comtech EF Data’s FAST system is factory-implemented in the modem. All FAST options are available through the basic platform unit at the time of order. FAST allows immediate activation of available options – first, upon entry of the FAST Access Code through the front panel keypad, and then by setting the desired operational parameters via the front panel, remote control, or Web
Server interfaces.
1–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650AMN-SLM5650A
FAST Accessible Options
SLM-5650A hardware options can be ordered and installed either at the factory or in the field. In the field, the operator can select options that can be easily activated, depending on the current hardware configuration of the unit. The unique FAST Access Code that is purchased from
Comtech EF Data enables configuration of the available hardware.
The following table shows the FAST-accessible hardware and FAST options available for the
SLM-5650A.
Option How Enabled
Extended Temperature Range -32° to 50° C
Gigabit Ethernet Interface (Plug-in Card)
G.703 Interface (Plug-in Card)
Low-Density Parity Check (LDPC) FEC Option (Installed Card and FAST)
LVDS Interface (Plug-in Card)
Network Processor Interface Module (Plug-in Card)
TRANSEC Module (Installed Card and FAST)
Extended Temperature Range -32° to 50° C
HARDWARE
FAST
Modem Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
Adv FEC Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
Turbo FEC Option
Asymmetrical Rx Data Rate: 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
Demodulator Only
8-PSK modulation
8QAM modulation
16-QAM modulation
16APSK/32APSK modulation (future)
AUPC (Automatic Uplink Power Control) Overhead
ASYNC ESC
Carrier-In-Carrier
Network Processor Antenna Handover
Network Processor BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode
Network Processor Management Security
Network Processor QoS
Network Processor Vipersat
Reed-Solomon Coding
Sequential Encode/Decoder
Spectrum Spreading (DSSS)
TRANSEC Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
Vipersat Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
1–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650AMN-SLM5650A
1.3.4 Interoperability
1.3.4.1 Legacy Modems
The SLM-5650A is fully compatible and interoperable with all specified modes of operation of the following legacy modems:
• OM-73 (V);
• MD-1352 (P)/U (BEM-7650);
• MD-1340 (OM-73 interoperable mode only; orderwire not required);
• MD-1030B;
• SLM-3650;
• SLM-5650;
• SLM-8650;
• SLM-7650.
Note: The remote control protocol is not backwards compatible.
1.3.4.2 Modem Switches
To ensure operational reliability, the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem may be incorporated into a number of Comtech EF Data switching products. These switches are compatible only with
Comtech EF Data modems; this switch/modem compatibility is further defined for the
SLM-5650A as follows:
Compatible
CRS-300 1:10 Redundancy Switch
CRS-311 1:1 Redundancy Switch
CRS-311-AH Antenna Handover Switch
Non-compatible
SMS-300
SMS-450
SMS-7000 Modem Protection Switch
For detailed information on using the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem in 1:1/1:N redundancy or
Antenna Handover applications, refer to the pertinent switch Installation and Operation Manual .
1–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650AMN-SLM5650A
1.4 Summary of Specifications
General Specifications
Parameter
Operating Frequency Range
Modulation Types
Digital Data Rates
Symbol Rate Range
EXT REF Input
INT REF Stability
Scrambling
IDR/IBS Framing Compatibility
Built-in Test (BIT)
Summary Faults
Monitor and Control
Modulator Specifications
Parameter
Output Power
Specifications
52 to 88, 104 to 176, 950 to 2000 MHz ( in 100 Hz steps).
BPSK, QPSK, OQPSK, 8PSK, 8QAM, 16QAM.
• 64 kbps to 2.5 Mbps, in 1 bps steps (EIA-530, EIA-613)
• 64 kbps to 5 Mbps, in 1 bps steps (EIA-530, EIA-613)
• 64 kbps to 10 Mbps, in 1 bps steps (EIA-530, EIA-613)
• 64 kbps to 20 Mbps, in 1 bps steps (EIA-530, EIA-613)
• 64 kbps to 51.840 Mbps, in 1 bps steps (EIA-613, LVDS)
• 64 kbps to 155.52 Mbps, in 1 bps steps (GBEI, Network Processor)
32 Ks/s to 64 Ms/s
TNC Connector, 1, 5, or 10 MHz selectable.
1 x 10 -7
V.35, OM-73, and Synchronous
Support for IBS and IDR framing. Allows basic IBS/IDR Open Network capable operation.
Fault and status reporting, BER performance monitoring, IF Loop-back, programmable test modes, built-in Fireberd emulation with all comprehensive
BER measurements.
Reported via Front Panel LEDs, 9-pin D-sub Alarm connector, relay contacts for
Tx, Rx, Common equipment faults, and Tx and RX alarms. Open collector faults on the 15-pin D-sub Aux connector. Both data interfaces have open collector faults available.
EIA-485, EIA-232, 10/100 BaseT Ethernet with HTTP, Telnet, and SNMP.
Output Return Loss
Output Impedance
Spurious
Harmonics
Tx Clock Source
Output Connections
Modulation Timing Jitter
Modulation Phase Error
Modulator Spectral Inversion
Transmit Clock and Data
Inversion
Specifications
+10 to -40 dBm, adjustable in 0.1 dB steps.
In Extended Temperature Range of -32° to 0° C, TX Power accuracy is +/- 1.5 dB
-14 dB (70/140 MHz)
-9 dB (L-Band)
50 Ω
From Carrier ± T X SR TO 500 MH Z –51 dBc (measured in a 10 kHz bandwidth).
From Carrier (CW) to the greater of the 12 th harmonic or
4000 MHz –60 dBc.
Rx, INT, Tx Terrestrial, and Data Source Sync.
• TNC for 52 to 88, 104 to 176 MHz
• Type N for 950 to 2000 MHz
< 3 % of the modulation symbol period.
< 2 °
Modem can invert the modulated spectrum.
Modem can invert the Tx clock and data independently of each other. (EIA-530,
EIA-613).
1–12
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650AMN-SLM5650A
Demodulator Specifications
Parameter
Input
Power
Desired Carrier
Specifications
For 70/140 MHz: +10 to -55 dBm
For L-Band:
+10 to -55 dBm (SR>3.2 MSPS)
+10 to 10·log
10
(SR/32000) -75 dBM
(SR ≤3.2 MSPS) where SR is in symbols per second
Maximum Composite +20 dBm or +40 dBc
Input Impedance 50 Ω
Input Connectors
Carrier Acquisition Range
Input Return Loss
• TNC for 52 to 88, 104 to 176
• Type N for 950 to 2000 MHz
± 30 kHz, selectable
• -14 dB (70/140 MHz)
• -9 dB (L-Band)
INT, Tx Terrestrial, Rx Satellite
128 to 4,194,304 bits, or 2 to 60 mSec
Buffer Clock
Doppler Buffer
Coding Options
Parameter
Uncoded
Viterbi
Viterbi + Reed-Solomon
Trellis
Trellis + Reed-Solomon
Turbo
LDPC: ULL, LL, and HP
Open Network Options
Parameter
IDR
IBS
Specifications
1/1
K=7, 1/2, 3/4, and 7/8 rates
Closed Network, per IESS-308, and IESS-309
IESS-310
IESS-310
Turbo Product Coding (TPC), per IESS-315
Closed Network
Specifications
• INTELSAT IESS-308 (Framing only)
• INTELSAT IESS-310 (Framing only)
• INTELSAT IESS-310 (Framing only)
• INTELSAT IESS-309 (Framing only)
1–13
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650AMN-SLM5650A
1.4.1 Performance
1.4.1.1 Acquisition and Timing Performance Requirements
The following reference E b
/N
0
is defined as the required E with Reed-Solomon FEC not enabled. b
/N
0
corresponding to a BER of IE-3
Table 1-1. Acquisition and Timing Performance Requirements
Parameter
Initial Acquisition
Reacquisition
BCI
System Retention
Receive Timing Jitter
Doppler
Specification
The modem achieves initial acquisition within the times as specified within ± 30 kHz at the reference E b
/N
0
• For baseband data rates between 64 kbps and ≤ 128 kbps, the maximum initial acquisition time is 500 seconds.
• For Baseband data rates between 128kbps and ≤ 1544 kbps, the maximum initial acquisition time is 30 seconds.
• For baseband data rates > 1544 kbps, the maximum initial acquisition time is
1.5 seconds.
Reacquisition is achieved, as follows, after a period of up to 15 minutes of the absence of signal when the carrier returns to within 500 Hz of its original frequency.
• For baseband data rates between 64 kbps and 128 kbps, the maximum reacquisition time shall be 45 seconds.
• For baseband data rates between 128 kbps and 1544 kbps, the maximum reacquisition time shall be 20 seconds.
• For baseband data rates greater than 1544 kbps, the maximum reacquisition time shall be 1 second.
With Tx and Rx random data, the mean time to loss of BCI due to falsely adding or deleting bits is at least 3 days at the reference E b
/N
0
. In addition, the modem maintains
BCI over 50 consecutive bits of all ones or zeros, which occur no more than once in
10,000 bits, without employing data scrambling.
Synchronization and BCI are maintained for all E b
/N
0
above the reference E b
/N
0
(BPSK/QPSK/OQPSK/8PSK) for signal loss of up to 50 modulation symbol periods, with a probability of at least 90 percent.
The Rx output clock peak timing jitter cannot exceed ± 5 percent at the reference E b
/N
0 when the modulated signal meets the modulation timing jitter requirement.
The modem meets the requirements with a Doppler shift, rate of change, and acceleration for satellite inclination up to ± 7 ° as presented in Table 1-2 , and an additional 0.5 dB added to the reference E b
/N
0
.
Table 1-2. Doppler Requirements
Parameter
Doppler Shift in Hz
Doppler Rate of Change in Hz/sec
Doppler Acceleration in Hz/sec 2
C-Band
± 2475
± 226
± 243
X-Band
± 3535
± 270
± 290
Ku-Band
± 6045
± 490
± 526
Ka-Band
± 11,810
± 1046
± 1124
1–14
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650AMN-SLM5650A
1.4.1.2 Data Quality Performance
1.4.1.2.1 OM-73 Compatible Mode Performance
Operating in the OM-73-compatible mode, SLM-5650A BER vs. E through Table 1-8 . b
/N
0
performance with differential encoding and data scrambling enabled does not exceed values shown in Table 1-3
1.4.1.2.2 MIL-STD-188-165A Compatible Mode Performance
Operating with BPSK, QPSK, or OQPSK modulation in the MIL-STD-188-165A compatible mode, SLM-5650A BER vs. E b
/N
0
performance with differential encoding and data scrambling enabled will not exceed values shown in Table 1-3 (without Reed-Solomon) or Table 1-4 (with
Reed-Solomon) tested in an IF back-to-back configuration over the BER range 5 x 10 -03 to 1 x 10 -07 .
Operating with 8PSK modulation and rate 2/3 pragmatic Trellis coding (without Reed-Solomon outer coding), SLM-5650A BER vs. E b
/N
0
performance is less than or equal to the values shown in Table 1-5 when tested in an IF back-to-back configuration.
Operating with 8PSK modulation, rate 2/3 pragmatic Trellis coding, and Reed-Solomon
(219,201) outer coding, SLM-5650A BER vs. E b
/N
0
performance is better than or equal to the values shown in Table 1-6 when tested in an IF back-to-back configuration.
1.4.1.2.3 IESS-308 Compatible Mode Performance
When operating in the IESS-308 Compatible Mode, SLM-5650A BER vs. E b as specified in IESS-308.
/N
0
performance is
1.4.1.2.4 IESS-309 Compatible Mode Performance
When operating in the IESS-309 Compatible Mode, SLM-5650A BER vs. E b as specified in IESS-309.
/N
0
performance is
1.4.1.2.5 IESS-310 Compatible Mode Performance
When operating in the IESS-310 Compatible Mode, SLM-5650A BER vs. E b as specified in IESS-310.
/N
0
performance is
1.4.1.2.6 16QAM Coding Mode Performance
The SLM-5650A operating in the 16QAM mode provides back-to-back BER vs. E formats indicated. b
/N
0 performance better than or equal to the values shown in Table 1-7 when using the modulation
1–15
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650AMN-SLM5650A
1.4.1.2.7 Turbo Coding Mode Performance
The SLM-5650A operating in the Turbo Code Mode provides back-to-back BER vs. E formats indicated. b
/N
0 performance better than or equal to the values shown in Table 1-8 when using the modulation
1.4.1.2.8 Sequential Mode Performance
The SLM-5650A operating in the Sequential Mode provides back-to-back BER vs. E b
/N
0 performance better than or equal to the values shown in Table 1-9 when using the modulation formats indicated.
1.4.1.2.9 LDPC Coding Mode Performance
The SLM-5650A operating in an LDPC Mode provides back-to-back BER vs E size and modulation formats. b
/N
0 performance better than or equal to the values shown in Table 1-11 through 1-13 when using the indicated block
1–16
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650AMN-SLM5650A
1.4.1.3 BER Performance
1.4.1.3.1 BPSK/QPSK/Offset QPSK, Viterbi Decoding
Table 1-3. Viterbi Decoder BER
E b
/N o
(dB) Specifications
Viterbi Decoder
BER 1/2 3/4 7/8 Uncoded
10 -3
10 -4
10 -5
3.8
4.7
5.3
5.0
5.9
6.6
6.3
7.1
7.8 10.8
10 -6
10 -7
10 -8
5.9
6.5
7.1
7.2
7.8
8.3
8.4
9.0
9.5
11.6
12.4
13.0
1.4.1.3.2 BPSK/QPSK/Offset QPSK, Viterbi Decoding and Reed-Solomon
Table 1-4. BSPK/QPSK/OQPSK Viterbi with Reed-Solomon Decoder BER Performance
E b
/N o
(dB) Specifications
Viterbi Decoder with Reed-Solomon
BER
10 -6
1/2
4.1
3/4
5.6
7/8
6.7
10 -7
10 -8
4.4
5.0
6.0
6.3
7.1
7.5
1.4.1.3.3 8PSK, Trellis Decoder
Table 1-5. 8PSK, Trellis Decoder BER Performance
BER
E b
/N o
(dB) Specifications
Trellis Decoder
2/3 5/6
10 -3
10 -4
10 -5
6.5
7.3
8.1
8.7
9.4
10.1
10 -6
10 -7
10 -8
8.9
9.6
10.2
10.8
11.6
12.3
1–17
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650AMN-SLM5650A
1.4.1.3.4 8PSK, Trellis Decoder and Reed-Solomon
Table 1-6. 8PSK, Trellis Decoder with Reed-Solomon BER Performance
E b
/N o
(dB) Specifications
Trellis Decoder with Reed-Solomon
BER
10 -6
2/3
6.2
5/6
8.2
10 -7
10 -8
10 -9
10 -10
6.5
6.7
6.9
7.2
8.5
8.9
9.3
9.7
1.4.1.3.5 16QAM, Viterbi Decoder and Reed-Solomon
Table 1-7. 16QAM, Viterbi Decoder with Reed-Solomon BER Performance
E b
/N o
(dB) Specifications
Viterbi Decoder with Reed-Solomon
BER 3/4 7/8
10 -6 8.2 9.5
10 -7
10 -8
10 -9
10 -10
8.4
8.6
8.8
9.0
9.8
10.1
10.3
10.6
1.4.1.3.6 Turbo Product Code (TPC) Decoding
BER
10 -6
10 -7
10 -8
10 -9
10 -10
Table 1-8. TPC Decoder BER Performance
BPSK
E b
/N o
(dB) Specifications
Turbo Product Code Decoder
QPSK/OQPSK 8PSK 16QAM
21/44 5/16 21/44 3/4 7/8 17/18 3/4 7/8 17/18 3/4 7/8
3.3 2.5 3.3 3.9 4.3 6.8 6.5 7.1 10.0 7.6 8.2
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
2.8
3.1
3.4
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
4.1
4.3
4.8
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
7.1
7.4
7.7
6.9
7.2
7.5
7.8
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
10.6
11.2
11.8
8.0
8.4
8.7
9.0
8.4
8.5
8.7
8.8
1–18
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650AMN-SLM5650A
1.4.1.3.7 Sequential Decoding with / without Reed-Solomon
Table 1-9. Sequential Decoding with / without Reed-Solomon BER Performance
E b
/N o
(dB) Specifications
Sequential Decoder with / without Reed-Solomon
DESCRIPTION BER
BPSK
1/2
QPSK/OQPSK
1/2 3/4 7/8
10 -5 4.8 4.8 5.8 7.0
Sequential – 64 kbps 10 -6
10 -7
10 -5
5.2 5.2 6.4 7.5
5.6 5.6 6.9 8.0
5.2 5.2 5.9 7.2
Sequential – 1544 kbps
Sequential+RS (225,205)
10 -6
10 -7
10 -6
10 -7
10 -8
5.7 5.7 6.5 7.7
6.1 6.1 7.0 8.3
4.4 4.4 5.0 5.6
4.6 4.6 5.3 6.0
4.8 4.8 5.6 6.4
1.4.1.3.8 BER Performance with Symmetrical Adjacent Carriers
Operating in the presence of two adjacent symmetrical carriers (one lower in frequency and one higher in frequency with same modulation, data rate, and coding), the modem performance is not degraded more than as indicated in Table 1-10 Column 3 , and a) and b) in this section. This performance is measured with the adjacent carrier’s center frequencies offset X R s
Hz from the center
is the modulation symbol rate frequency of the carrier under test, where X is the spacing factor and R s in Hz of the symmetrical carriers.
The BER of the test carrier is measured at the specified carrier Ratio of Energy per Symbol to Noise
Power Density in a 1 Hz Bandwidth (E s
/N
0
) Carrier to Noise Ratio (C/N) without the adjacent carriers.
The adjacent carriers are applied at the specified center frequencies and E carrier is measured. The change in BER is equal to the change in E b
/N
0 s
/N
0
and the BER of the test
based on the characterization curve of the test carrier and the amount of A djacent C hannel I nterference (ACI) degradation. For modulation symbol rates below 38.4 ksps, this paragraph does not apply. a) For X (spacing factor) = 1.2, the symmetric degradation shall be IAW one of the values in
Table 1-10 carrier E s
/N
0
Column 3 , and corresponding test carrier E s
/N
0
in Column 1 . Select a test
that will yield timely results based on modulation and coding used in the test configuration. The adjacent carriers E s
/N
0
shall be set to corresponding value in Column 2 . b) For the case of X (spacing factor) = 1.4, the degradation is less than 0.2 dB.
1–19
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650AMN-SLM5650A
1.4.1.3.9 BER Performance with Asymmetrical Adjacent Carriers
Operating in the presence of two adjacent asymmetrical carriers, one lower in frequency and one higher in frequency, and each adjacent carrier symbol rate (R" s
) = 2.0 R' s
, the modem performance is not degraded more than indicated in Table 1-10 Column 4 , and a) and b) in this section.
Performance is measured with the adjacent carriers center frequencies offset (X/2) times (R'
Hz from the test carrier center frequency, where X is the spacing factor and R' s symbol rate in Hz of the test carrier, and R" s s
+ R" s
)
is the modulation
is the modulation symbol rate in Hz of each adjacent carrier. For modulation symbol rates below 38.4 ksps, this paragraph does not apply. a) For X (spacing factor) = 1.2, and R" one of the values in Table 1-10 s
= 2.0 R'
Column 4 s
, the asymmetric degradation shall be IAW
, and the corresponding test carrier E s
/N
0 s
/N
are set to the
0
in
that will yield timely results based on modulation b)
Column 1 . Select a test carrier E s
/N
0 and coding used in the test configuration. The adjacent carriers E corresponding value in Column 2 .
For the case of (1.4/2)(R' s
+ R" s
) Hz carrier spacing, the degradation is < 0.2 dB.
Table 1-10. Acceptable ACI Degradation with Spacing Factor of 1.2
Test Carrier
E s
/N
0
(dB)
5.5
6.0
8.0
8.4
10.0
12.0
12.7
Adjacent Carriers
E s
/N
0
(dB)
18.5
19.0
21.0
21.4
23.0
25.0
25.7
E b
/N
0
Degradation (dB)
Symmetric Case
< 0.36
< 0.38
< 0.48
< 0.51
< 0.64
< 0.88
< 0.99
E b
/N
0
Degradation (dB)
Asymmetric Case
< 0.41
< 0.43
< 0.56
< 0.60
< 0.77
< 1.10
< 1.21
1.4.1.3.10 LDPC ULL Decoding
Table 1-11. LDPC ULL Decoder BER Performance
BER
10
10
-5
-8
Eb/N0 (dB) Specification
BPSK QPSK
1/2
3.1
3.7
1/2
3.1
3.7
2/3
3.6
4.2
3/4
4.1
4.7
1–20
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650AMN-SLM5650A
1.4.1.3.11 LDPC LL Decoding
Table 1-12. LDPC LL Decoder BER Performance
BER
BPSK
Eb/N0 (dB) Specification
QPSK
.382 .456 .547 1/2 2/3 3/4 7/8 2/3
10 -5 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.4 5.0
10 -8 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7 3.3 3.9 5.0 5.4
8QAM
3/4
5.6
5.9
7/8
6.5
7.1
1.4.1.3.12 LDPC HP Decoding
BER
10 -5
10 -9
Table 1-13. LDPC HP Decoder BER Performance
BPSK
1/2
2.0
2.3
1/2
2.0
2.3
Eb/N0 (dB) Specification
(O)QPSK
2/3 3/4
2.3
2.7
3.0
3.3
2/3
4.6
5.0
8QAM
3/4
5.6
6.0
2/3
6.1
6.5
16QAM
3/4
6.8
7.1
7/8
8.0
8.4
16QAM
3/4
6.8
7.1
1–21
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650AMN-SLM5650A
BLANK PAGE
1–22
Chapter 2. INSTALLATION
2.1 Unpacking and Inspection
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem, its Installation and Operation Manual, and its power cord were packaged and shipped in a reusable cardboard carton containing protective foam spacing.
Figure 2-1. Unpacking and Inspecting the SLM-5650A
2–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Installation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The equipment contains parts and assemblies sensitive to damage by Electrostatic
Discharge (ESD). Use ESD precautionary procedures when touching, removing, or inserting PCBs.
Step Task
1 Keep all shipping materials for storage or reshipment.
2 Check the packing list to ensure the shipment is complete.
3
Inspect the equipment for any possible damage incurred during shipment.
Contact the carrier and Comtech EF Data immediately and submit a damage report if damage is evident to the shipment.
4 Read the manual.
2.2 Installation
When installing the SLM-5650A into a rack enclosure (Figure 2-2):
PROPER GROUNDING PROTECTION IS REQUIRED. The equipment must be connected to the protective earth connection at all times. It is therefore imperative that the unit is properly grounded, using the ground stud provided on the unit rear panel, during installation, configuration, and operation.
PROPER AIR VENTILATION IS REQUIRED. In a rack system where there is high heat discharge, provide forced-air cooling with top- or bottom-mounted fans or blowers.
Make sure there is adequate clearance inside the enclosure, especially at the side for air ventilation.
Air temperature inside the rack enclosure should never exceed 50 ° C (122 ° F).
For information about custom rack enclosures, contact Comtech EF Data Customer
Support, or visit Comtech EF Data’s Web site (www.comtechefdata.com/support.asp).
2–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Installation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure 2-2. SLM-5650A Rack Enclosure Installation Example
Install the SLM-5650A in its assigned position in the rack enclosure. Use, as required:
• A standard rack-mounted shelf;
• User-supplied screws to secure the front panel to the rack enclosure threaded front rails;
• Comtech EF Data’s optional
KT/6228 (4”) or KT/6228 (10”) Rear Support Brackets
Kit
.
• Comtech EF Data’s optional Bearingless Rack Slide Set.
2–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Installation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
2.2.1 Installing the Optional Rear Support Brackets Kit
Tools needed to install the KT/6228 (4”) or KT/6228 (10”) Bracket Kit:
• A medium Phillips screwdriver
• A 5/32-inch SAE Allen Wrench
• An adjustable Crescent wrench.
To install the kit:
Step Description
1
2
3
Use the #10 flat washers, #10 split washers, and #10 hex nut to secure the #10 shoulder screws to the unit chassis through the rear right and left side slots as shown.
Use the #10 rack bracket bolts to install the rear support brackets onto the rack enclosure threaded rear rails.
Install the unit into the rack enclosure. Ensure that the shoulders of the #10 shoulder screws properly engage into the rear support bracket slots.
2–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Installation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Detail Description
1 Back of modem
2 Rack Enclosure Rear Rail (typical)
Kit / Quantity
KT/6228-2 KT/6228-3
2 2
2
4
4
2
2
–
2
4
4
2
–
2
Part Number
HW/10-32SHLDR
HW/10-32FLT
HW/10-32SPLIT
HW/10-32HEXNUT
HW/10-32x1/2RK
FP/6138-2
FP/6138-3
Description
Shoulder Screw, #10
Flat Washer, #10
Lock Washer, #10
Hex Nut, #10
Bolt, #10, Rear Support Bracket
Bracket, Rear Support – 4”
Bracket, Rear Support – 10”
Figure 2-3. Optional Rear Support Bracket Installation
2–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Installation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
2.2.2 Installing the Optional Bearingless Rack Slide Set
The optional FP/SL0006 Bearingless Rack Slide Set may be installed into the equipment rack cabinet and onto the sides of the SLM-5650A as shown in Figure 2-4 and per the following procedure:
Step Task
1
2
3
4
Use the provided hardware to install one slide onto each side of the SLM-5650A chassis.
Use the provided hardware to install the slide rail components into each interior side of the equipment rack cabinet.
Install the unit into the front of the equipment rack. Ensure that the slides properly engage the cabinet-mounted slide rails.
Continue to slide the modem into the equipment rack to its final operating position. Then, use four user-provided screws to secure the modem to the equipment rack’s right and left threaded front rails (through the front panel slots).
CEFD Part Number
FP/SL0006
Description
Bearingless Rack Slide Set – 26”
Figure 2-4. Optional Bearingless Rack Slide Set Installation
2–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Installation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
2.3 Connect External Cables
Connect the cables to the proper locations on the rear panel.
See Chapter 3. REAR PANEL CONNECTORS AND PINOUTS.
2.4 Configuration
All configurations are implemented locally via the unit’s loaded firmware.
Step Task
1
2
3
Read Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION before continuing.
Connect the supplied power cable.
Set the power switch to ON.
The auto-sensing AC power supply does not require any adjustments
4
5
Do a check for the correct transmitter (Tx) and receiver (Rx) output signal levels and spectrums.
Use the front panel keypad and display to configure the unit.
If there is any problem with installation or initial operation, read Appendix A.
TROUBLESHOOTING for possible solutions.
2–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Installation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
BLANK PAGE
2–8
Chapter 3. REAR PANEL
CONNECTORS
AND
PINOUTS
3.1 Overview
The SLM-5650A rear panel connectors ( Figure 3-1) provide all necessary external connections between the modem and other equipment. Table 3-1 on the next page summarizes the connectors provided here, grouped according to service function.
Figure 3-1. SLM-5650A Rear Panel
3–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors and Pinouts
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Table 3-1. SLM-5650A Rear Panel Connectors
Connector Group
(Chapter Sect.)
IF
(Sect. 3.2)
Terrestrial Data
(Sect. 3.3)
Utility
(Sect. 3.4)
Power/Ground
(Sect 3.5)
Ref Des / Name Connector Type
J2 Tx
J11 Tx
J4 Rx
J3 Rx
J5 Ethernet
P1 Overhead Data
J6 EIA-530
Type ’N’ female (L-Band)
TNC female (70/140MHz band)
Type ’N’ female (L-Band)
TNC female (70/140MHz band)
RJ-45 female
25-pin Type ‘D’ male 2
25-pin Type ‘D’ female 2
J7 HSSI 50-pin female
(Interface Option Slot) See Sect. 3.3.5.
J1 Ext Ref
J8 Alarms
TNC female
9-pin Type ‘D’ female 2
J9 Auxiliary
J10 Remote
15-Pin Type ‘HD’ Female 2
9-pin Type ‘D’ female 2
AC
DC
Ground
See Sect. 3.5.1
N/A
#10-32 stud
Function
IF Output
IF Input
10/100 BaseT, Remote Control
See Sect. 3.3.2 for details
Data I/O to 20 Mbps
Data I/O to 51.84 Mbps
Supports optional data interfaces
Modem Reference I/O
Form C Alarms (relay closures)
See Sect. 3.4.3 for details
Serial Remote Interface (RS232/485)
Chassis power
Chassis power
Common Chassis Ground
To maintain compliance with the European EMC Directive 2004/108/EEC (EN 55022, EN-
55024), properly shielded cables are required for all data I/O.
The ‘D-Shell’ connectors (J6, J8, J9, J10, P1) provided on the SLM-5650A rear panel feature threaded nuts to ensure the mechanical integrity of the mated connections.
3–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors and Pinouts
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
3.2 IF Connectors
3.2.1 J2, J4 L-Band IF Interface Connectors
The L-Band IF Interfaces use standard 50 Ω Type ‘N’ female connectors:
Type ‘N’ Connector
Tx
Rx
Ref Des
J2
J4
Description
950-2000 MHz Transmit
950-2000 MHz Receive
Direction
Output
Input
3.2.2 J11, J3 70/140 MHz IF Interface Connectors
The 70/140 IF Interfaces use standard 50 Ω TNC female connectors:
TNC Connector
Tx
Rx
Ref Des
J11
J3
Description
52-88, 104-176 MHz Transmit
52-88, 104-176 MHz Receive
Direction
Output
Input
3.3 Terrestrial Data Connectors
3.3.1 J5 Ethernet Remote Control Connector (RJ-45)
The J5 Ethernet connection is an 8-pin type 'RJ-45' 10/100 BaseT connector. Remote control of the modem is provided using SNMP, HTTP/HTTPS or Telnet with this port.
3–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors and Pinouts
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
3.3.2 P1 Overhead Data Interface Connector (DB-25M)
This is a male Type ‘D’ 25-pin ‘D’ (DB-25M) connector that allows for connection of the EIA-422, EIA-485 and EIA-232 data interfaces used with overhead framing. It also supports signaling for tactical applications.
P1 Overhead Data Connector (DB-25M) Pinout
Pin # Signal Function Name
14
1 EIA-422 Transmit Data “A”, Input
EIA-422 Transmit Data “B”, Input
2 EIA-422 Transmit Clock “A”, Output
Tx Data A
Tx Data B
Tx Clk A
15
16
17
18
EIA-422 Transmit Clock “B”, Output
3 EIA-422 Transmit Byte Sync “A”, Output
EIA-422 Transmit Byte Sync “B”, Output
4 EIA-422 Receive Data “A”, Output
EIA-422 Receive Data “B”, Output
5 EIA-422 Receive Clock “A”, Output
EIA-422 Receive Clock “B”, Output
Tx Clk B
Tx Sync A
Tx Sync B
Rx Data A
Rx Data B
Rx Clk A
Rx Clk B
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
6 EIA-422 Receive Byte Sync “A”, Output
EIA-422 Receive Byte Sync “B”, Output
7 Shield
EIA-485 Transmit Data “-“
8 EIA-485 Transmit Data “+”
EIA-422 Transmit Handover Sync “A”, Input
9 EIA-485 Receive Data “-“
EIA-485 Receive Data “+”
10 EIA-422 Transmit Handover Sync “B”, Input
EIA-232 Clear to Send
11 EIA-232 Receive Data
EIA-232 Request to Send
12 EIA-232 Transmit Data
EIA-422 Transmit Handover Control “A”, Input
13 EIA-422 Transmit Handover Control “B”, Input
Rx Sync A
Rx Sync B
Ground
485 Tx Data -
485 Tx Data +
THS A
485 Rx Data -
485 Rx Data +
THS B
232 CTS
232 Rx Data
232 RTS
232 Tx Data
THC A
THC B
* For EIA-485 2-Wire Operation:
• Only two wires are required
• Tie pins 8 and 22 together (both +)
• Tie pins 9 and 20 together (both -)
3–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors and Pinouts
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
3.3.3 J6 EIA-530 Connector (DB-25F)
This is a female Type ‘D’ 25-pin (DB-25F) connector that conforms to the EIA-530 pinout for EIA-422 operation only.
J6 EIA-530 Connector (DB-25F) Pinout
Pin # Name
14
1 Ground
SD_B
15
16
17
2 SD_A
ST_A
3 RD_A
RD_B
4 RS_A
RT_A
18
19
20
5 CS_A
MOD FLT OC
6 DM_A
RS_B
7 Ground
Not Used
8 RR_A
21
22
DMD FLT OC
9 RT_B
DM_B
23
10 RR_B
Not Used
11 TT_B
24 TT_A
12 ST_B
25 Not Used
13 CS_B
3–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors and Pinouts
3.3.4 J7 HSSI Connector
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Notes:
1.
50-pin female connector.
2.
These are non-HSSI defined signals.
On Cisco routers there is no connection to those pins.
Fault Open
No Fault Ground
Pin # Name
1 Ground
26
27
Ground
2 RT+
RT-
3 CA+
28
29
30
31
CA-
4 RD+
RD-
5 Not Used
Not Used
6 ST+
ST-
7 Ground
32
33
Ground
8 TA+
TA-
9 TT+
34 TT-
10 Not Used
35 Not Used
11 SD+
36 SD-
12 Not Used
37 Not Used
13 Ground
38 Ground
14 Not Used
39 Not Used
15 Not Used
40 Not Used
16 Not Used
41 Not Used
17 Not Used
42 Not Used
18 Not Used
43 Not Used
19 Ground
44 Ground
20 Not Used
45 Demod Fault – see Note 2
21 Mod Fault - see Note 2
46 Not Used
22 Not Used
47 Not Used
23 Not Used
48 Not Used
24 Not Used
49 Not Used
25 Ground
50 Ground
3–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors and Pinouts
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
3.3.5 Interface Option Slot
You can install optional data interfaces into the unit’s interface option slot.
Read these chapters for more information about the optional data interfaces:
Network Processor Chapter 8
Gigabit Ethernet Chapter 12
G.703 Chapter 13
LVDS Chapter 14
3.4 Utility Connectors
3.4.1 J1 Ext Ref (External Reference) (Type ‘TNC’)
The J1 External Reference uses a standard 50 Ω TNC female connector:
Ref Des / Name Description
J1 Ext Ref External Reference 1, 5, 10 MHZ
Direction
Input
3.4.2 J8 Alarms Connector (DB-9F)
This is a female Type ‘D’ 9-pin (DB-9F) connector that provides Form C contact closures for alarm reporting. The three Form C summary fault contacts are
Modulator , Demodulator , and Common Equipment.
J8 Alarms Connector (DB-9F) Pinout
Pin # Signal Function Name
6
1 Tx Alarm common
Tx Alarm is not faulted
COM
NC
7
8
9
2 Tx Alarm is faulted
Unit Alarm common
3 Unit Alarm is not faulted
Unit Alarm is faulted
4 Rx Alarm common
Rx Alarm is not faulted
5 Rx Alarm is faulted
NO
COM
NC
NO
COM
NC
NO
3–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors and Pinouts
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
3.4.3 J9 Auxiliary Connector (HD-15F)
This is a female type ‘HD’ 15-pin (HD-15F) connector that provides TTL open collector faults for the modulator and demodulator; a TTL input for external transmit carrier mute; an Analog demodulator Q and I constellation monitor; and a programmable DC voltage monitor for the demodulators AGC.
Pin #
11
12
13
14
6
7
8
9
15
10
J9 Auxiliary Connector (HD-15F) Pinout
Signal Function
1 Demod I Channel
Demod Q Channel
Reserved for Redundancy Switch
2 Spare
AGC Monitor Test Point
Reserved for Redundancy Switch
3 Spare
Spare
Tx TTL Fault
4 Reserved for Redundancy Switch
Reserved for Redundancy Switch
Rx TTL Fault
5 Chassis Ground
Ext Carrier Off
Reserved for Redundancy Switch
Name
I
Q
AGC
TxFLT
RxFLT
GND
EXT
3.4.4 J10 Remote Connector (DB-9F)
This is a female Type ‘D’ 9-pin subminiature (DB-9F) connector that interfaces the M&C functions to a remote location; the remote location can be an M&C computer located away from the modem, but attached via cable to the remote connector. This DCE interface is user selectable for either EIA-232 or EIA-485:
J10 Remote Connector (DB-9F) Pinout
EIA-232 EIA-485
2-Wire 4-Wire
Pin # Name Pin #
Name Name
6
7
8
9
1
DSR
2 RD
RTS
3 TD
CTS
4
5 GND
6
7
8
9
1 GND
2
3
+Tx/RX
4 +Tx/Rx
-Tx/Rx
5 -Tx/Rx
GND
+Rx
+Tx
-Rx
-Tx
* For EIA-485 2-Wire Operation:
• Only two wires are required
• Tie pins 4 and 8 together (both +)
• Tie pins 5 and 9 together (both -)
3–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors and Pinouts
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
3.5 Power/Ground Connectors
3.5.1 AC Power Connector
A standard, detachable, non-locking, 3-prong power cord (IEC plug) supplies the
Alternating Current (AC) power to the modem. Note the following:
Input Power
Input Voltage
130W maximum
90 to 132 or 175 to 264 VAC
Unit switches ranges automatically
Connector Type I.E.C
Fuse Protection 1A slow-blow
Line and neutral fusing
5 mm type fuses
3.5.2 Ground Connector (GND)
A #10-32 stud on the rear panel of the modem is used for connecting a common chassis ground among all equipment.
The AC power connector provides the safety ground.
3–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors and Pinouts
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
BLANK PAGE
3–10
Chapter 4. UPDATING FIRMWARE
4.1 Updating Firmware via Internet
To ensure optimal performance, it is important to operate the SLM-5650A with its latest available firmware.
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem stores its firmware internally in flash memory, which simplifies the firmware updating process. The firmware update, once acquired, can be transferred from an external user PC once Ethernet connectivity has been established with the modem.
This chapter outlines the complete firmware updating process as follows:
• Perform the update, without opening the SLM-5650A, by connecting the unit to the
Ethernet port of the user PC.
• Download the firmware update via the Internet to the user PC.
• Transfer the firmware update, via File Transfer Protocol (FTP), from the user PC to the
SLM-5650A manually from the Windows command prompt, or automatically if using the optional Network Processor (NP) or TRANSEC modules’ Web Server Interfaces.
4.2 About Firmware Files, Naming, Versions, and Archive Formats
The SLM-5650A is factory-shipped with the latest version of operating firmware. If a firmware update is needed, it can be acquired by download from Comtech EF Data’s Web site ( Figure 4-1 ) or from Comtech EF Data Customer Support during normal business hours via e-mail or on CD by standard mail delivery.
Comtech EF Data’s Web site catalogues its firmware update files by product type (e.g., modem, converter, etc.) and specific model/optional configuration. The hyperlinks appear as per the example to the right. In this example, the
F0000030X_V### base modem firmware download hyperlink is shown, where ‘X’ denotes the revision letter and ### represents the firmware version. If applicable, one version prior to the current release is also available for download.
4–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Updating Firmware
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
In addition to the download for the base modem bulk firmware, downloads are available for the
SLM-5650A’s optional Network Processor (NP) and Gigabit Ethernet Interface (GBEI) modules. These modules require separate firmware update.
To obtain the firmware update for the TRANSEC Module, contact Network Product
Customer Support.
The firmware download files are available from Comtech EF Data in two archive file formats:
*.exe (self extracting) and *.zip (compressed). Some firewalls will not allow the downloading of
*.exe files; in this case, download the *.zip file instead. For additional help with "zipped" file types, refer to PKZIP for Windows , WinZip , or ZipCentral help files. PKZIP for DOS is not supported due to file naming conventions.
Figure 4-1. Firmware Update via Internet
4–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Updating Firmware
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
4.3 Bulk Firmware Update – Ethernet FTP Upload Procedure
Step Task
1 Identify the firmware number and version for download. The current modem M&C version can be viewed at the top-level menu of the front panel display (press the [CLR] key several times to view). The firmware information can also be found within the SELECT: Utility Firmware Info Image#1 or Image#2 menu trees.
Using serial remote control, the firmware revision levels may be obtained with the <0/SWR?
query. For more information, refer to Appendix C. REMOTE CONTROL.
Alternately, when using the HTTP Interface, the Bootrom, Bulk1 and Bulk2 firmware loads may be viewed after selecting the Unit Info hyperlink, available from the Maint (Maintenance) page. For more information, refer to
Chapter 7. BASE MODEM HTTP INTERFACE .
2 Create a temporary folder (directory) on an external PC (note that the drive letter c: is used in this example; any valid writable drive letter can be used):
• For Windows Explorer: Select File > New > Folder to create a new folder, and then rename it from “ New
Folder ” to " temp " or another convenient, unused name. Assuming " temp " works, a " c:\temp " folder should now be created.
• For Windows Command-line: Click [Start] on the Windows taskbar, and then click the “ Run...
” icon (or, depending on Windows OS versions prior to Windows 95, click the “ MS-DOS Prompt ” icon from the Main
Menu). Then, to open a Command-line window… o For Windows 95 or Windows 98 – Type “ command ”. o For any Windows OS versions later than Windows 98 – Type “ cmd ” or “ command ”.
Alternately, from [Start], select All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt .
At the Command-line prompt (c:\>), type “ mkdir temp ” or “ md temp ” (without quotes – mkdir and md stand for make directory ). This is the same as creating a new folder using Windows Explorer. There should now be a
" c:\temp " subdirectory created.
3 Download the correct firmware file to this temporary folder. As shown in Figure 4-1 : a) Go online to: www.comtechefdata.com
; b) From the Home page menu bar, click the Support tab; c) Click the Software Downloads drop-down or hyperlink from the Support page; d) Click the Download Flash and Software Update Files icon; e) Click the (Select a Product Line:) Satellite Modems hyperlink provided on the Flash and Software
Update Files page; f) Select the product hyperlink from the Comtech Brand column; g) Select the appropriate firmware hyperlink.
About Firmware Numbers, File Versions, and Formats: The flashable files on the download server are organized by product prefix (i.e., FW – Firmware); firmware number (verify that the correct firmware number is known – see Step 1 ); revision letter and, if applicable; the release version number. The base modem bulk firmware for the SLM-5650A is FW-0000030x (where the ‘x’ denotes the revision letter of the bulk modem firmware).
The current version firmware release is provided. If applicable, one version prior to the current release is also available. Be sure to identify and download the desired version.
4–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Updating Firmware
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Step Task
4 Extract the files to the temporary folder on the PC. A minimum of two files should be extracted:
1.
Fw-0000030x .
bin , where "x" denotes the revision letter for the bulk image file.
2.
SLM-5650A_ReleaseNotes_v###.pdf
, where “###” denotes the version number of the firmware release.
5 Confirm that the files have been extracted to the specified temporary folder on the PC.
Using Command-line, type cd c:\temp to change to the temporary directory created in Step 2 , then use the dir command to list the files extracted from the downloaded archive file.
6 Connect the PC to the modem 10/100 Ethernet M&C via a hub or a switch, or directly to the PC with a crossover cable.
7 Send a “ping” command to the modem to verify the connection and communication.
First, determine the IP address of the modem remotely or by using the modem front panel:
• Via Remote Control , use the <000/IPA?
query.
• Via the modem front panel:
SELECT: Configure Remote EthernetConfig IP Address/ Range .
Then, using Command-line to “ping” the modem – at the prompt, type “ ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx ” (where
‘ xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
’ is the IP address of the modem). The results should confirm whether or not the modem is connected and communicating.
8 Initiate an FTP session with the modem. Using Command-line: a) From the PC, at the prompt type " ftp xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx " where " xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
" is the IP address of the base modem. b) Enter the Admin User Name (there will be no prompt for a password) to complete login. c) Verify the FTP transfer is binary by typing " bin ". d) Type " prompt ", then type " hash " to facilitate the file transfers.
9 Transfer the files from the temporary folder on the PC. Type " put Fw-0000030x.bin bulk: ” to begin the file transfers. The destination “ bulk: ” must be all lower-case. Approximately one minute is required to transfer the file.
10 Verify the file transfer. The PC should report that the file transfer has occurred, and the display on the modem will start reporting “ PROGRAMMING FLASH SECTOR # xx – PLEASE WAIT ”.
Terminate the FTP session – type " bye " and close the Command-line window.
Confirm that the new file was loaded by using the procedure in Step 1 .
11 Change the desired image to boot . From the modem front panel: SELECT: Utility Firmware Select ( use
◄ ► arrows to change to the other image), then cycle power to reboot the modem.
12 Verify the new firmware has booted by observing the Firmware Version displayed on the modem front panel VFD
(Video Fluorescent Display):
Comtech SLM-5650A Modem State: GO
Firmware Version x.x.x Mode: TURBO
Note: To load the second image, repeat Steps 8 through 11 .
4–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Updating Firmware
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
4.4 Network Processor (NP) Interface Module Update Procedure
Step Task
1 Identify the firmware number and version for download , as was done in Chapter Sect. 4.2 Step 1 (Bulk
Firmware Update).
Note: To aid identification, when using the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface the Bootrom, Image 1, and Image 2 firmware loads may be viewed after selecting the Upgrade hyperlink available from the Admin (Administration) page. For more information, refer to the pertinent sections in Chapter 8. NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE .
2 Create a temporary folder (directory) on an external PC (note that the drive letter c: is used in this example; any valid writable drive letter can be used):
• For Windows Explorer: Select File > New > Folder to create a new folder, then rename it from “ New
Folder ” to " temp " or another convenient, unused name. Assuming " temp " works, a " c:\temp " folder should now be created.
• For Windows Command-line: Click [Start] on the Windows taskbar, and then click the “ Run...
” icon (or, depending on Windows OS versions prior to Windows 95, click the “ MS-DOS Prompt ” icon from the Main
Menu). Then, to open a Command-line window… o For Windows 95 or Windows 98 – Type “ command ”. o For any Windows OS versions later than Windows 98 – Type “ cmd ” or “ command ”.
Alternately, from [Start], select All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt .
At the Command-line prompt ( c:\> ), type “ mkdir temp ” or “ md temp ” (without quotes – mkdir and md stand for make directory ). This is the same as creating a new folder from Windows Explorer. There should now be a " c:\temp " subdirectory created.
3 As per Chapter Sect. 4.2 Step 3 , download the correct firmware file to this temporary folder. The NP Module firmware for the modem is FW-0000051x , where "x" denotes the firmware revision letter.
Refer to Chapter Sect. 4.2 About Firmware Files, Naming, Versions, and Formats for detailed information about firmware archive file formats.
4 Extract the file in the temporary folder on the PC:
Fw-0000051x.bin
, where "x" denotes the revision letter of the module bulk image file.
5 Confirm that the files have been extracted to the specified temporary folder on the PC. Using Command-line, type
“ cd c:\temp ” to change to the temporary directory created in Step 2 , then use the “ dir ” command to list the files extracted from the downloaded archive file.
6 Connect the PC to the modem Ethernet via a hub or a switch, via one of the four ports on the NP Module, or directly to a PC with a crossover cable.
7 Enable the NP Module . From the modem front panel:
SELECT: Configure Mode Interface NetworkProc.
8 Send a “ping” command – either to the NP Module’s Traffic IP address when in single mode, or to its
Management IP address when in dual mode – to verify the connection and communication:
• If in single address mode, to determine the IP address of the NP Module, from the modem front panel go to the SELECT: Configure Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Network Proc Traffic
IP menu, then select Yes .
4–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Updating Firmware
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Step Task
8
(cont)
• If in dual address mode, to determine the IP address of the NP Module, from the modem front panel go to the
SELECT: Configure Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Network Proc Mgmt IP menu, then select Yes .
Then, using Command-line to “ping” the modem: At the prompt, type “ ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx ” (where
‘ xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
’ is the NP Module’s IP address). The results should confirm whether or not the module is connected and communicating.
9 Initiate a Web session with the SLM-5650A’s NP Module using the PC and a supported Web browser.
Note the following:
1.
The browser and page examples that follow use Internet Explorer Version 7.0.
2.
NP HTTP/HTTPS pages are shown with optional FAST Features installed.
Type the NO Module’s IP address into the browser’s Address box (where “ xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
” represents the NP
Module’s IP address).
Depending on the NP Module’s security level setting:
• Type “ http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
” for non-secure access (Low Security Mode);
• Type “ https:/xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
” for SSH (Secure Shell) access (High Security Mode). When prompted, enter the User Name and Password to log in: o Factory Default User Name is comtech ; o Factory Default Password is comtech .
The Web interface is disabled in Bridge Mode.
4–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Updating Firmware
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Step Task
10 To update the Network Processor Bulk firmware: a) Open the Admin | Upgrade page: b) In the Upgrade section of the page, locate the update file downloaded to the PC during Steps 2 through 4 :
• Click [Browse] . The Choose File dialog box will open.
• Locate the folder created for the file download; double-click on the folder name to open the folder. c) Select the update file, then click [Open] . The filename should appear in the Upgrade Image File text box. d) Click [ Upload] to begin the Image Upgrade process.
11 Wait while the file transfers. After [ Upload] is clicked, the Image Upgrade page appears while the Network
Processor first transfers, and then uploads, the update file from the PC. Allow sufficient time for the file to be loaded into the NP Module – uploading will take approximately five minutes .
It is not necessary to wait five minutes before clicking [OK], but you MUST wait five minutes before rebooting the modem.
During the upload process, the page displays a transfer progress bar that provides the scrolling percentage of completion. During transfer, the message Please Wait… displays:
4–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Updating Firmware
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Step Task
11
(cont)
Upon successful completion of transfer, the progress bar reads 100% , and the Image Upgrade Complete message displays:
Click [ OK] to exit the Image Upgrade page and return to the Admin | Upgrade page.
12 Refresh the Admin | Upgrade page and verify that the newly-uploaded firmware is reported in the proper
Network Processor Firmware Info Image slot.
If not, open the Admin | Reboot page then, in the Network Processor Boot From section, use the drop-down menu to select Newest as needed to force the NP Module to boot using the firmware with the most recent build date. Click [Submit] when done.
13
Save all settings before rebooting to prevent loss of configuration settings. Go to the
Save Configuration page, then click [Save Now]:
4–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Updating Firmware
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Step Task
14 After saving, return to the Admin | Reboot page, then click [Reboot Now] to boot the NP Module with the new firmware:
15 To load the second image, repeat Steps 10 through 12 .
4–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Updating Firmware
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
4.5 TRANSEC Module Update Procedure
Firmware updates for the TRANSEC Module (also referred to in front panel menu screens as the “Option Card”) are not available from the Comtech EF Data Web site, but they may be obtained from Comtech EF Data on an as-needed basis. To obtain these updates, contact
Comtech EF Data Customer Support to request access to the modem firmware update files online FTP site. The CEFD Customer Support representative will arrange for full firmware access information and download privileges at that time.
Step Task
1 Contact Comtech EF Data Customer Support during normal business hours to request delivery of the
SLM-5650A’s TRANSEC Module firmware update files. The Customer Support representative will arrange for full firmware access information and download privileges at that time.
Note: To aid identification, when using the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface, the Bootrom, Bulk1 and Bulk2 firmware loads may be viewed after selecting the Unit Info hyperlink (available from the Maint [Maintenance] page).
For more information, refer to Chapter 10. TRANSEC MODULE HTTPS INTERFACE.
2 Create a temporary folder (directory) on an external PC (note that the drive letter c: is used in this example; any valid writable drive letter can be used):
• For Windows Explorer: Select File > New > Folder to create a new folder, then rename it from “ New
Folder ” to " temp " or another convenient, unused name. Assuming " temp " works, a " c:\temp " folder should now be created.
• For Windows Command-line: Click [Start] on the Windows taskbar, and then click the “ Run...
” icon (or, depending on Windows OS versions prior to Windows 95, click the “ MS-DOS Prompt ” icon from the Main
Menu). Then, to open a Command-line window… o For Windows 95 or Windows 98 – Type “ command ”. o For any Windows OS versions later than Windows 98 – Type “ cmd ” or “ command ”.
Alternately, from [Start], select All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt .
At the Command-line prompt ( c:\> ), type “ mkdir temp ” or “ md temp ” (without quotes – mkdir and md stand for make directory ). This is the same as creating a new folder from Windows Explorer. There should now be a " c:\temp " subdirectory created.
3 Download the correct firmware file that was obtained from Comtech EF Data Customer Support to this temporary folder. The SLM-5650A‘s TRANSEC Module firmware for the is FW-0000058x , where "x" denotes the firmware revision letter.
Refer to Chapter Sect. 4.2 About Firmware Files, Naming, Versions, and Formats for detailed information about firmware archive file formats.
4 Extract the file in the temporary folder on the PC:
Fw-0000058x.bin
, where "x" denotes the revision letter of the module bulk image file.
5 Confirm that the files have been extracted to the specified temporary folder on the PC.
Using Command-line, type “ cd c:\temp ” to change to the temporary directory created in Step 2 , then use the “ dir ” command to list the files extracted from the downloaded archive file.
6 Connect the PC to the modem’s Ethernet via a hub or a switch, or directly to the PC with a crossover cable.
4–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Updating Firmware
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Step Task
7 Send a “ping” command to the TRANSEC Module to verify the connection and communication.
First, determine the IP address of the TRANSEC Module from the front panel:
SELECT: Configure Transec Module IP Address menus.
Then, using Command-line to “ping” the modem – at the prompt, type “ ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx ” (where
‘ xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
’ is the TRANSEC Module’s IP address). The results should confirm whether or not the module is connected and communicating.
8 Initiate a secure Web session with the SLM-5650A’s TRANSEC Module via its HTTPS Interface. The example uses Internet Explorer Version 7.0.
From the PC, type https://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where “ xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
” represents the IP address of the TRANSEC
Module) into the Address area of the Web browser:
To log in to the secure interface, select Crypto Officer from the navigation list that is provided in the upper left-hand corner of each page, then click [Go!] . When prompted, enter the User Name and
Password at the Login page:
• Factory Default User Name is comtech;
• Factory Default Password is comtech.
9 Update the TRANSEC Module bulk firmware: a) Open the Admin | Update Firmware page: b) In the Bulk Firmware Upload section of the page, locate the update file downloaded to the PC during Steps
2 through 4 :
• Click [Browse] . The Choose File dialog box will open.
• Locate the folder created for the file download; double-click on the folder name to open the folder. c) Select the update file, then click [Open] . The filename should appear in the Upgrade Bulk File text box. d) Click [Upload] to begin the Firmware Application Process .
4–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Updating Firmware
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Step Task
10 Wait while the file transfers . After [ Upload] is clicked, the Firmware Application Process page appears while the TRANSEC Module transfers then uploads the update file from the PC.
Allow sufficient time for the file to be uploaded – approximately five minutes is required for the process to be completed. During the upload process, the page displays a transfer progress bar that provides the scrolling percentage of completion. During transfer, the message Please Wait… displays:
Any power failure during this process will result in failure of the TRANSEC Module.
In the event that an error occurs during the Firmware Application Process, the following message is displayed:
For troubleshooting purposes, three common reasons for disruption of the Firmware Application Process are:
• Power Failure;
• Loss of Ethernet signal (e.g., disconnection of Ethernet cable);
• Attempting to load firmware other than the TRANSEC Module bulk firmware (i.e., Fw-0000058x.bin).
4–12
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Updating Firmware
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Step Task
10
(cont)
Upon successful completion of transfer, the progress bar reads
Complete! message displays:
100% , and the Firmware Application Process
11 On the Admin | Update Firmware page, verify that the newly-uploaded firmware is reported in the proper
Security Module Bulk Info slot. If not, update the Active Boot Slot Configuration by using the drop-down menu to select Newest to force the TRANSEC Module to boot using the firmware with the most recent build date.
Click [Submit] when done.
4–13
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Updating Firmware
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Step Task
12 Click [Reboot Now!] to boot the TRANSEC Module with the new firmware:
The modem will reboot with the new firmware loaded as configured:
It will be necessary to restart the SLM-5650A’s TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface session once the modem has returned online.
13 To load the second image, repeat Steps 9 through 11 .
4–14
Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL
OPERATION
5.1 Overview
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem front panel ( Figure 5-1 ) allows the user to monitor the modem operating status (including clocking information) and to control modem configuration parameters.
Item Description Function
1 USB Port
2 6-button keypad
3 12-button array
Reserved for future software support
Local control via menu navigation
Manual data entry
4 10 Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs) Overall status monitoring at a glance
5 40-character, 2-line Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) Display of messages, menus and prompts
6 Backlit On/Off Power Switch
7 Rack handles
Unit power
Eases installation into / removal from rack
Figure 5-1. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem Front Panel
The front panel operating features (keypad/data entry array, LED Indicators, and VFD) and menus are described in detail in this chapter. For information about Web Server or Remote
Control operation, refer to Chapter Sect. 6.3 HTTP/HTTPS (Web Server) Interfaces or
Appendix C. REMOTE CONTROL , respectively.
5–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.1.1 Keypad with Data Entry Array
The front panel keypad controls the local operation of the modem. This control section consists of 18 buttons (keys). Each key provides one or more logical functions.
Key
ENT (Enter)
CLR (Clear)
and
(left and right)
and
(up and down)
Alphanumeric
Description
Use this key to select for editing an available function, or to execute a modem configuration change.
Use this key to back out of a selection, or to cancel a configuration change that has not been executed using [ENT].
Pressing [CLR] generally returns the display to the previous selection.
Use these keys to move between the menu screen options, or to move the cursor on a space-by-space basis for certain editing functions (e.g., value settings such as frequencies, text identification strings, etc.).
Use these keys primarily to scroll through and select pre-defined options, configuration data
(numbers), or characters.
Use the 12 keys comprising this section of the keypad for entry of alphanumeric parameters
(e.g., value settings such as frequencies, text identification strings, etc.).
The first three columns of keys are multi-function in purpose. Each successive push of multifunction key 1 through 9 selects the next choice.
For example: The first time the ‘2’ key is pushed, it selects a ‘2’; the second time, an ’A’; the third time, a ‘B’; the fourth time, a ‘C’. Pushing the key a fifth time would start over with a ‘2’.
Number-to-character assignment for this array are as follows:
COLUMN 1
1 – Space
4 – GHI
7 – PQRS
COLUMN 2
2 – ABC
5 – JKL
8 – TUV
The last column of keys in this array function as follows:
• Use the ‘ +/’ key to change signs (positive/negative);
• Use the ‘ .
’ key to enter a decimal point;
• Use the ‘ 0 ’ key to enter a zero.
COLUMN 3
3 - DEF
6 – MNO
9 - WXYZ
The keypad has an auto-repeat feature. By holding a key down for more than three seconds, the key action repeats, automatically, at the rate of seven keystrokes per second.
The modem responds by beeping whenever a key is pressed:
A single beep indicates that a valid entry and the appropriate action was taken;
A double beep indicates an invalid entry, or that a parameter is not available for operation.
5–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.1.2 LED Indicators
The 10 LEDs on the front panel indicate:
• General modem summary fault information;
• Status;
• Alarms.
The behavior of the individual front panel LED indicators is as follows:
LED Color Condition
Unit Status
Tx Status
Rx Status
Tx On
Stored Events
IF Lock
Data Lock
Remote
Test Mode
Encryption On
Off
Orange
Off
Green
Off
Green
Off
Green
Green
Red
Orange
Green
Orange
Red
Off
Green
Orange
Red
Off
Green
Off
Orange
Off
Green
Off
No Unit Faults or Stored Faults.
A Unit Fault exists.
A Unit Alarm exists.
No Tx Traffic Faults or Alarms exist.
A Tx Traffic Alarm exists.
A Traffic Fault exists.
Demod only.
No Rx Traffic Faults or Alarms exist.
An Rx Traffic Alarm exists.
An Rx Fault exists.
Demod Faults are masked.
Transmitter is currently on (this indicator reflects the actual condition of the transmitter, as opposed to the programmed condition).
Transmitter is currently off.
Stored Events are logged.
No Stored Events are logged.
Demod has constellation lock.
No constellation lock.
Decoder is locked.
Decoder is not locked.
The modem is in Remote Communication Mode.
The modem is in Local Mode – remote monitoring is possible, but no remote control.
A Test Mode is selected (Example: IF Loopback).
No Test Mode is selected.
Encryption is enabled.
Encryption is disabled.
5–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.1.3 Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD)
The SLM-5650A features a V acuum F luorescent
D isplay (VFD). The VFD is an active display showing two lines of 40 characters each. It produces a blue light, the brightness of which can be controlled by the
User. Compared to a L iquid C rystal D isplay (LCD), it has superior viewing characteristics and does not suffer problems of viewing angle or contrast.
On most menu screens, a flashing solid block cursor blinks at a once-per-second rate. This indicates the currently selected item, digit, or field. Where it might obscure the item being edited
(e.g., a numeric field), the solid block cursor automatically changes to an underline cursor.
5.1.3.1 Screen Saver
If the operating unit is left displaying the same screen for weeks at a time, the VFD could become burnt with this image. To prevent such burn-in, a screen saver feature activates after 15 minutes.
The screen saver messages loop from right to left across the screen. Sandwiched between the product display message “ Comtech EF Data SLM-5650A Modem ” and the user prompt
“ Press any key to continue ”, the following operating statistics are provided:
Modem Status Code Description
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Circuit Identification
Demodulator receive frequency offset from the nominal
Buffer fill status (%)
Receive signal level (dBm)
Estimated Eb/No
Estimated Corrected Bit Error Rate
Bit Error Rate reported by the internal Bit Error Rate Test set
5–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.1.3.2 Opening Screen
The front panel menu screens provide the visual means to fully control and monitor operation of the SLM-5650A. The first screen to display, after the modem power switch is turned on, is the read-only opening screen:
Comtech SLM-5650A Modem State: GO
Firmware Version x.x.x Mode: TURBO
The top line identifies the product and its operational state. The bottom line displays the currently running firmware version, and the selected mode of operation. Press any key to continue to the
SELECT: (Main) menu screen.
The user must first go to CONFIG: MODE to set the MODEM type, the
FREQBAND, and the INTERFACE type before proceeding with the rest of the modem configuration.
5.2 SELECT: (Main) Menu
SELECT: Configure Monitor Test
Save/Load Utility (
E)
The menu matrix on the next page identifies the content section in this chapter for each menu branch, and the functional description and available settings for each branch submenu.
Use the arrow keys to select any menu branch, and then press [ENT] .
SELECT: Branch Description
Configure
Monitor
Test
Save/Load
Utility
Select to fully configure the modem.
Select to monitor the alarm status of the modem, to view the log of stored events, and to display the Receive Parameters screen and clear all stored faults.
Select to configure the modem into one of several Test modes.
Select to save and retrieve up to 10 different modem configurations.
Select to perform miscellaneous functions, such as setting the Real-Time Clock, adjusting the display brightness, etc.
5–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.2.1 SELECT (Main) Menu Matrix
Menu Branch
Configure
Para
5.2.2
Nested Menu
Tx
Rx
Sect
0
5.2.3.2
Selectable Submenus
Mod, DataRate, Overhead, Frequency,
Power, Clocking, Misc, Spreading
Demod, DataRate, Overhead, Frequency,
Acquisition, Buffer, Misc, CnC, Spreading
Mode 5.2.3.3 Mode, FreqBand, Interface
AUPC 5.2.3.4 Local, Remote, Async, Logging
TRANSEC 5.2.3.5 State, Module IP Address, Gateway
AntHndOvr
Ref
Mask
Reset
Remote
5.2.3.6
5.2.3.7
5.2.3.8
5.2.3.9
0
Mode, State, PwrOffset, Delay
Internal, Ext-1 MHz, Ext-5 MHz, Ext-10 Mhz
TxData, RxData, Eb/No Threshold, DemodFaults
Mode, SerialConfig, EthernetConfig (w/Option
Cards)
Monitor 0 Alarms 5.2.4.1 Transmit, Receive, Unit
Event-Log 5.2.4.2 View, Clear-All, ModemParameters
Rx-Params
CnC
Stats
0
5.2.4.4
5.2.4.5 View, Clear-All, Config
Gigabit IF Statistics
Test 5.2.5 Carrier
Loopback
Bert
0
5.2.5.1
5.2.5.2
5.2.5.3
Normal, Tx-CW, Tx-1,0
Normal, IF, I/O1
Tx, Pattern, ErrIns, Reset, Rx
LampTest
Save/Load 5.2.6 Save/Load
Utility 5.2.7 RT-CLK
RefAdjust
ID
Display
Temp
AGC
Alarm
PwrCal
Firmware
FAST
5.2.5.4
5.2.7.1
5.2.7.2
5.2.7.3
5.2.7.4
5.2.7.5
5.2.7.6
0
5.2.7.8
5.2.7.9
0
Loc, Action
Information, Select
Configuration, View Options
5–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.2.2 Navigating the Menu Screens
Both single-function and multi-function menu screens are used throughout the front panel
SELECT: menu interface. Both screen types display all available options and prompt the user to carry out a required action.
For the top-tiered menu screens, such as the SELECT: Configure menu branch screen and its nested SELECT: CONFIG Tx menu screen, use the
arrow keys to first select a menu item, and then press [ENT] to open the nested submenu screen.
Nested submenu screens, such as the SELECT: CONFIG Tx Mod submenu, provide multiple functional selections on a single screen, and therefore require additional navigation steps:
• First, the user must first use the
arrow keys to navigate to an available option on the active screen, and then press [ENT] to enable selection of that option’s available settings.
Note that the cursor jumps from the select option name to its editable/selectable setting.
• Then, unless otherwise noted, the user must use the
arrow keys to scroll through the available settings. Once the desired setting is selected, the user must then press [ENT] to save that option setting. Note that the cursor jumps from the setting back to its select option name.
Repeat these steps as needed for each available option. Once all option settings are configured via the
arrow keys and the [ENT] key, press [CLR] to exit the active menu screen and return to the previously selected menu.
5–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.2.3 SELECT: Configure
CONFIG: Tx Rx Mode AUPC Transec
AntHndOvr Ref Mask Reset Remote (
E)
Use the
arrow keys to select a configuration submenu, and then press [ENT] .
Submenu Description
Tx (Transmit)
Rx (Receive)
Select to configure the Tx parameters. This menu is not accessible if the modem has been set to Demod Only.
Select to configure the Rx parameters.
Mode
AUPC
Transec
AntHndOvr
Ref
Mask
Reset
Remote
Select to configure the modem operating modes.
Select to configure the AUPC parameters. This menu is selectable only if the modem type has been set to AUPC.
Select to configure the TRANSEC Module operation.
Select to configure the Antenna Handover parameters (when the SLM-5650A is used with the
CRS-311-AH Antenna Handover Switch). This menu is selectable only if the Antenna
Handover FAST option is installed.
Select to configure the modem reference.
Select to mask selected alarms.
Select to reset the modem to a default status.
Select to define whether the modem is being controlled locally or remotely as well as the communication parameters (see IMPORTANT note).
The modem may be monitored over the remote control interface at any time.
When in Local mode, however, configuration parameters may only be changed through the front panel.
5–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.2.3.1 CONFIG: Tx
Submenu
Mod
DataRate
Overhead
Frequency
Power
Clocking
Misc
Spreading
Tx: Mod DataRate Overhead Frequency
Power Clocking Misc Spreading (
E)
Use the
arrow keys to select a Tx configuration submenu, and then press [ENT] :
Option
Select: FEC , Type , Rate , RS , Diff , and Scrambler .
Enter a selected data rate and view the symbol rate (see Appendix B. OPERATIONS GUIDE ).
Select the overhead type, view the overhead rate, select the Reed-Solomon Code Word, and depth.
Select the desired frequency and spectral inversion.
Select desired output power level and state of the output.
Select the transmit clock source and SCT reference.
Select CLK/DataPhase and BPSK Bit Ordering.
Select the Tx spreading factor and equation. View the Tx Chip Rate. This menu is selectable only if the modem type has been set to LDPC.
CONFIG: Tx Mod
Mod: FEC:VIT Type:QPSK Rate:1/2
RS:Off Diff:On Scram:OM-73 (
E)
First, use the
arrow keys to select FEC , Type , Rate , RS , Diff , or Scram , and then press
[ENT] . Then, for any option, use the
arrow keys to scroll through the available settings.
Press [ENT] once again when done.
Option
FEC
Type
(Modulation)
Setting
VIT or NONE are standard; the remainder are optional. Note the following:
• VIT (Viterbi) – K=7 convolutional encoder.
• NONE – Uncoded.
• TURBO – Turbo Product Code, which is a block code.
• SEQ – Sequential Encoder/Decoder.
• ULL – Ultra Low Latency LDPC
• LL – Low Latency LDPC
• HP – High Performance LDPC
BPSK , QPSK , or OQPSK are standard; 8PSK, 8QAM, or 16QAM are optional. Note the following:
• BPSK – Bi Phase Shift Keying.
• QPSK – Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.
• OQPSK – Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.
• 8PSK – 8 Phase Shift Keying.
• 8QAM – 8 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
• 16QAM – 16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation.
5–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Option
Rate
RS
Diff
Scram
Setting
• Viterbi – 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8
• Uncoded – 1/1
• Turbo – 5/16, 3/4, 7/8, 17/18, or 21/44
• Sequential – 1/2, 3/4, 7/8
Reed-Solomon Encoder: On or Off
•
•
•
ULL
LL
HP
– 1/2, 2/3, 3/4
– 1/2, 2/3, 3/4
– .382, .456, .547, 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 7/8
Differential Encoder: On or Off
Scrambling (for energy dispersal): V.35
, MOD-V.35
, IBS , TURBO , OM73 , Synch , or Off.
Note the following:
• V.35
– ITU standard.
• MOD-V.35
( Modified V.35
) – Comtech EF Data Closed Network with Reed- Solomon compatible .
• IBS – Used for IESS-309 operation.
• Turbo – Synchronous scrambler synchronized to the Turbo block.
• OM73 – Linkabit OM-73 modem compatibility mode.
• Synch – Synchronous scrambler synchronized to the Reed-Solomon.
When changing modulation type, the data rate must be set to a rate supported by the modulation type or the change to the modulation type will not be allowed. Some choices will only be visible if the modem is set to a compatible mode, or if an option is installed or enabled.
CONFIG: Tx DataRate
Tx Data Rate: 020000.000 kbps
Sym Rate: 0266666.666 ksps(
E)
Use Method 1 or Method 2 to enter the desired Tx Data Rate (in kilobits per second):
Method Procedure
1
2
Use the number keypad and enter the desired data rate.
(See Appendix B. OPERATIONS GUIDE .)
Use the
arrow keys to scroll through and select the desired data rate or symbol rate. When scrolling through the data rates the symbol rate is automatically recalculated and displayed.
When entering the data rate, the following interactions need to be taken into account:
If the modulation type selected is 8PSK, 8QAM, or 16QAM the minimum data rate allowed is 256 kbps.
When changing certain parameters like modem type, the data rate will default to
64 kbps or 256 kbps.
The calculated symbol rate is displayed for the user. This is helpful for determining the occupied bandwidth required for the selected modulation type, code rate and overhead.
5–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG: Tx Overhead
Tx: Overhead:None Rate: N/A
RS-CW:N/A Depth:N/A (
E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Overhead , Rate , RS-CW , and Depth , and then press
[ENT] . Then, use the arrow keys to scroll through the available settings. Press [ENT] once again when done.
Option Setting
Overhead IESS-308 , IESS-309 are standard; AUPC is optional.
Rate 96 kbps (IESS-308); 1/15 (IESS-309 or AUPC); N/A (None).
RS-CW Reed-Solomon Code Word, N/K: 126/112, 194/178, 208/192, 219/201, 220/200, 225/205.
Depth Interleaving depth: 4, 8 or 16.
Some selections will only be visible if the modem is set to a compatible mode, or if an option is installed or enabled.
CONFIG: Tx Frequency
Tx Frequency: 1955.0000 MHz
Spectrum: Normal (
E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Tx Frequency or Spectrum , and then press [ENT] .
Use Method 1 or Method 2 to enter the desired Tx Frequency :
Method Procedure
1
2
Use the number keypad and enter the desired frequency. Press [ENT] when done.
Select the digit to be edited using the
arrow keys, and then change the value of that digit by using the
arrow keys. Press [ENT] when done. Note the following:
For 70/140 MHz: Valid range is 52 – 88, 104 – 176 MHz (in 100 Hz steps).
For L-Band: Valid range is 950 – 2000 MHz (in 100 Hz steps).
When entering an IF frequency, the M&C will check the occupied bandwidth calculated from the data rate, modulation type, code rate and overhead and will not allow an IF frequency to be entered if the occupied bandwidth falls outside of the minimum or maximum IF frequencies.
Select Spectrum to counteract frequency converters that invert the spectrum. Use the
arrow keys to select Normal or Invert , and then press [ENT] when done.
5–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG: Tx Power
Tx Power: State:On Level:-20.0
Control: Normal (
E)
First, use the arrow keys to select State , Level , or Control , and then press [ENT] . Then:
Option Setting
State
Level
Control
Use the
arrow keys to select On or Off . Press [ENT] when done.
To edit the Power Level from –40 dBm to +10 dBm in 0.1 dB steps:
1.
Key in the desired number using the keypad –or–
2.
Select the digit to be edited using the arrow keys, and then change the value of that digit by using the
arrow keys.
3.
Press [ENT] when done.
Use the
arrow keys to select Normal , RTS , or VSAT . Press [ENT] when done. Note the following:
• RTS (Request to Send) is an interface signaling control. If enabled, RTS can be used to control the output state of the modulator. Only available when using either the EIA-530 or
HSSI interface.
• When VSAT is selected, the output state of the modulator is controlled by the demodulator carrier detect status. Modulator output will be enabled when the demodulator is detected, and disabled otherwise.
CONFIG: Tx Clocking
Tx Clocking: CLK Source: SCT (
E)
SCT Ref: Reference
First, use the arrow keys to select Clk Source or SCT Ref , and then press [ENT] . Then:
Option Setting
Clk Source Use the
arrow keys to select SCT or Tx-Terr . Press [ENT] when done. Note the following:
• SCT (Send Clock Timing) – Selected as an output to provide a clock reference for the user.
• Tx-Terr – Provides transmit clock input on the selected data interface.
SCT Ref Use the arrow keys to select Reference , DataSrcSync , or LoopTiming . Press [ENT] when done. Note the following:
• Reference – SCT will be generated from the modem’s 10 MHz reference (this could be derived from and external reference if selected).
• DataSRCSync (Data Source Synchronization) – No clock is provided on the interface and a clock is generated such that it is phase locked to the incoming data stream.
• LoopTiming – The clock generated from the received carrier is used as a reference for generating SCT.
5–12
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG: Tx Misc
Tx Misc: Clk/DataPhase BitOrdering
(
E)
Use the arrow keys to select Clk/DataPhase or BitOrdering , and then press [ENT] .
CONFIG: Tx Misc Clk/DataPhase
Tx Clock Phase: Normal
Data Phase: Normal (
E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Tx Clock Phase or Data Phase , and then press
[ENT] . Then, for either, use the arrow keys to select Normal or Invert . Press
[ENT] when done.
CONFIG: Tx Misc BitOrdering
BPSK Bit Ordering: Standard
Non-Standard (
E)
Use the arrow keys to select BPSK Bit Ordering (for BSPK compatibility) as
Standard or Non-Standard , and then press [ENT] .
CONFIG: Tx Spreading
Tx Spreading: Factor:001 Equation:1
Chip Rate: 000128.000 kcps (
E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Factor or Equation , and then press [ENT] . Then, use
Method 1 or Method 2 to configure these options:
Method Procedure
1 Key in the desired value using the numbered keypad. Press [ENT] when done
2 Select the digit to be edited using the
arrow keys, and then change the value of that digit by using the
arrow keys. Press [ENT] when done.
Note the Following:
Option Setting
Factor Tx Spreading Factor (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, or 128), where 1 is Spreading Off.
Equation Use one of the four built-in Pseudo PN patterns, designated 1 through 4.
5–13
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.2.3.2 CONFIG: Rx
Rx: Demod DataRate Overhead Frequency
Acq Buffer Misc CnC Spreading (
E)
Use the
arrow keys to select Demod , DataRate , Overhead , Frequency , Acquisition ,
Buffer , Misc , CnC , or Spreading and then press [ENT] :
Submenu Option
Demod
DataRate
Overhead
Frequency
Acquisition
Buffer
Select FEC , Type , Rate , RS , Diff , or Descrambler .
Enter a selected data rate (see Appendix B. OPERATIONS GUIDE ).
Select the overhead type, view the overhead rate, select the Reed-Solomon Code Word, and depth.
Select desired frequency and spectral inversion.
Select acquisition range and reacquisition time period.
Select buffer reference clock source, recenter, the buffer size, Bit mode or millisecond mode and external Framing for Plesiochronous operation.
Select Clk and Data Phase, BPSK Bit Ordering, and Eb/No Threshold. Misc
CnC Select Mode, Acquisition, or SearchDelay.
Spreading
Select the Rx spreading factor and equation. View the Rx Chip Rate. This menu is selectable only if the modem type has been set to LDPC.
Note: Framing is applicable only when using externally framed data, with the following formats:
T1 or E1 G.704
; T2 G.743
, G.704
, G.707
; and E2 G.742
, G.704
, G.745
.
CONFIG: Rx Demod
Demod: FEC:VIT Type:BPSK Rate:3/4
RS:N/A Diff:On Descram:OM-73 (
E)
First, use the arrow keys to select FEC, Type, Rate, RS, Diff, or Descram , and then press
[ENT] . Then, for any option, use the arrow keys to scroll through the available settings.
Press [ENT] once again when done.
Option Settings
FEC VIT or NONE are standard; the remainder are optional.
Note the following:
• VIT (Viterbi) – K=7 convolutional encoder .
• NONE – Uncoded.
• TURBO – Turbo Product Code, which is a block code.
• SEQ – Sequential Encoder/Decoder.
• ULL – Ultra Low Latency LDPC
• LL – Low Latency LDPC
• HP – High Performance LDPC
5–14
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Option
Type
(Modulation)
Rate
RS
Diff
Descram
Settings
BPSK , QPSK , or OQPSK are standard; 8PSK, 8QAM, or 16QAM are optional. Note the following:
• BPSK – Bi Phase Shift Keying.
• QPSK – Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.
• OQPSK – Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.
• 8PSK – 8 Phase Shift Keying.
• 8QAM – 8 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
• 16QAM – 16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation.
• Viterbi – 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8
• Uncoded – 1/1
• Turbo – 5/16, 3/4, 7/8, 17/18, or 21/44
• Sequential – 1/2, 3/4, 7/8
• ULL – 1/2, 2/3, 3/4
• LL - .382, .456, .547, 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 7/8
• HP – 1/2, 2/3, 3/4
Reed-Solomon Decoder: On or Off.
Differential Decoder: On or Off.
Descrambling: V.35
, MOD-V.35
, IBS , TURBO , OM73 , Synch , or Off . Note the following:
• V.35
– ITU standard;
• MOD-V.35
( modified V.35
) – Comtech EF Data Closed Network with Reed-Solomon compatible;
• IBS – Used for IESS-309 operation;
• Turbo – Synchronous descrambler synchronized to the Turbo block;
• OM-73 – OM-73 Linkabit modem compatibility mode;
• Synch – Synchronous descrambler synchronized to the Reed-Solomon frame.
When changing Modulation type, the data rate must be set to a rate supported by the modulation type, or the change to the modulation type will not be allowed. Some choices will only be visible if the modem is set to a compatible mode, or if an option is installed or enabled.
CONFIG: Rx DataRate
Rx Data Rate: 020000.000 kbps
Sym Rate: 0266666.666 ksps(
E)
Use Method 1 or Method 2 to enter the desired Rx Data Rate ( in kilobits per second):
Method Procedure
1
2
Use the number keypad and enter the desired data rate (see Appendix B. OPERATIONS GUIDE ).
Use the arrow keys to scroll through and select the desired data rate or symbol rate. When scrolling through the data rates, the symbol rate is automatically recalculated and displayed.
5–15
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
When entering the data rate, the following interactions need to be taken into account:
If the modulation type selected is 8PSK, 8QAM, or 16QAM the minimum data rate allowed is 256 kbps.
When changing certain parameters like modem type, the data rate will default to 64 kbps or 256 kbps.
The calculated symbol rate is displayed for the user. This is helpful for determining the occupied bandwidth required for the selected modulation type, code rate and overhead.
CONFIG: Rx Overhead
Rx: Overhead:None Rate: N/A
RS-CW:N/A Depth:N/A (
E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Overhead , Rate , RS-CW , and Depth , and then press
[ENT] . Then, use the arrow keys to scroll through the available settings. Press [ENT] once again when done.
Option Settings
Overhead
Rate
RS-CW
Depth
( IESS-308 , IESS-309 are standard; AUPC is optional).
96 kbps (IESS-308), 1/15 (IESS-309 or AUPC), N/A (none).
Reed-Solomon Code Rate, N/K: 126/112, 194/178, 208/192, 219/201, 220/200, 225/205.
De-interleaving depth: 4, 8 or 16
Some selections will only be visible if the modem is set to a compatible mode, or if an option is installed or enabled.
CONFIG: Rx Frequency
Rx Frequency: 1955.0000 MHz
Spectrum: Normal (
E)
First, use the
arrow keys to select Rx Frequency or Spectrum , and then press [ENT] .
Use Method 1 or Method 2 to enter the desired Rx Frequency :
Method Procedure
1 Use the number keypad and enter the desired frequency. Press [ENT] when done.
5–16
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
2
Select the digit to be edited using the
arrow keys, and then change the value of that digit by using the
arrow keys. Press [ENT] when done.
For 70/140 MHz: Valid range is 52 – 88, 104 – 176 MHz (in 100 Hz steps).
For L-Band: Valid range is 950 – 2000 MHz (in 100 Hz steps).
When entering an IF frequency, the M&C will check the occupied bandwidth calculated from the data rate, modulation type, code rate and overhead, and will not allow an IF frequency to be entered if the occupied bandwidth falls outside of the minimum or maximum IF frequencies.
Select Spectrum to counteract frequency converters that invert the spectrum. Use the
arrow keys to select Normal or Invert , and then press [ENT] when done.
CONFIG: Rx Acquisition
Acquisition: Range: 0001.000 KHz
Reacq: 000 Seconds(
E)
First, use the
arrow keys to select Range or Reacq , and then press [ENT] . Then, use Method
1 or Method 2 to configure these options:
Method Procedure
1
2
Key in the desired frequency using the numbered keypad. Press [ENT] when done
Select the digit to be edited using the
arrow keys, and then change the value of that digit by using the
arrow keys. Press [ENT] when done.
Note the following:
Option
Range
Reacq
Settings
Demodulator Acquisition range: 0 – 60 kHz (in 1 Hz steps).
Holdoff time before the demodulator reverts to normal acquisition: 0 to 999 seconds. During the holdoff, the demodulator will stay centered on the last known frequency position of the carrier for faster reacquisition.
5–17
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG: Rx Buffer
Buffer: Src:RX-Sat Center: Y/N ExtClk
Size:00001024 Mode:Bits Framing (
E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Src , Center , ExtClk , Size , Mode , or Framing , and then press [ENT] . Then, use the arrow keys to scroll through the available settings. Press [ENT] once again when done.
Option
Src
Center
ExtClk
Size
Mode
Framing
Settings
Rx-Sat , Int , Tx-Terr , or ExtClk . Note the following:
• Rx-Sat is the recovered clock from the received carrier.
• Int is a clock synthesized from the modems reference (internal or external).
• Tx-Terr is the transmit clock supplied by the user.
• ExtClk is the external clock supplied by the user when using the optional G.703 interface.
Select Yes or No. By selecting Center, the buffer can be manually centered – the buffer is automatically centered when the demodulator locks.
Sets the frequency of the external G.703 clock : .
Select RxDataRate , 5MHz , 10 MHz , or 20 MHz .
If Mode is set to Bits – valid range is 128–4194304 (in 16 bit steps).
If Mode is set to mSec (milliseconds) – valid range is 2–60 (in 1 mSec steps).
Buffer size format: Set to Bits or mSec .
If selected, permits buffer to operate in a plesiochronous mode when running externally framed data. Select T1 , E1 , T2 , or E2 . Note the following:
• T1 – G704 or None.
• E1 – G704 or None.
• T2 – G704, G743, G747, or None.
• E2 – G704, G742, G745, or None.
If Mode is set to mSec and Rx data rate is 1544 kbps ( T1 ), 2048 ( E1 ), 6312 kbps ( T2 ), or 8448 kbps ( E2 ), and then the selected framing card will be used to calculate the required buffer size so that the buffer will slip properly.
While the framing selections show up in the menus regardless of which interface is plugged in, they will only have effect if the Buffer Mode is set to mSec.
CONFIG: Rx Misc
Rx Misc: Clk/DataPhase BitOrdering
Eb/No Threshold (
E)
Use the
arrow keys to select Clk/DataPhase , BitOrdering , or Eb/No Threshold , and then press [ENT] .
5–18
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG: Rx Misc Clk/DataPhase
Rx Clock Phase: Normal
Data Phase: Normal (
E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Rx Clock Phase or Data Phase , and then press
[ENT] . Then, for either, use the arrow keys to select Normal or Invert . Press
[ENT] when done.
CONFIG: Rx Misc BitOrdering
BPSK Bit Ordering: Standard
Non-Standard (
E)
Use the arrow keys to select BPSK Bit Ordering (for BSPK compatibility) as
Standard or Non-Standard , and then press [ENT] .
CONFIG: Tx Misc Eb/No Threshold
Eb/No Threshold: 00.1 dB
(
E)
Use the arrow keys to select a digit to edit, and then use the arrow keys to edit the value of that digit. This sets an Eb/No threshold such that, when the received carrier
Eb/No is less than the set value, the Rx threshold alarm is set. The valid range is 0.1–20 dB
(in 0.1 dB steps). Press [ENT] when done.
CONFIG: Rx CnC
Carrier-in-Carrier(CnC): Mode:Off
Acquisition SearchDelay (
E)
Use the arrow keys to select Mode , Acquisition , or SearchDelay , and then press [ENT] . If
Mode is selected, use the arrow keys to select either On or Off . Press [ENT] when done.
5–19
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG: Rx CnC Acquisition
CnC Acquisition: Range: 60.000 KHz
Reacq: 120 Sec (
E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Range or Reacq , and then press [ENT] . Then, use Method
1 or Method 2 to configure these options:
Method Procedure
1
2
Key in the desired value using the numbered keypad. Press [ENT] when done
Select the digit to be edited using the
arrow keys, and then change the value of that digit by using the arrow keys. Press [ENT] when done.
Note the following:
Option Settings
Range CnC Interfering Carrier Frequency Offset Search Range: 0 – 60 kHz (in 1 Hz steps).
Reacq Holdoff time before the demodulator starts a new search .
CONFIG: Rx CnC SearchDelay
CnC Search Delay: Min: 000 mSec
Max: 290 mSec (
E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Min or Max , and then press [ENT] . Then, use Method 1 or
Method 2 to configure these options:
Method Procedure
1
2
Key in the desired value using the numbered keypad. Press [ENT] when done
Select the digit to be edited using the
arrow keys, and then change the value of that digit by using the
arrow keys. Press [ENT] when done.
Note the following:
Option Settings
Min Minimum Delay value to use when searching for the Interfering Carrier .
Max Maximum Delay value to use when searching for the Interfering Carrier .
5–20
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG: Rx Spreading
Rx Spreading: Factor:001 Equation:1
Chip Rate: 000128.000 kcps (
E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Factor or Equation , and then press [ENT] . Then, use
Method 1 or Method 2 to configure these options:
Method Procedure
1
2
Key in the desired value using the numbered keypad. Press [ENT] when done
Select the digit to be edited using the
arrow keys, and then change the value of that digit by using the arrow keys. Press [ENT] when done.
Note the following:
Option Settings
Factor Rx Spreading Factor (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, or 128), where 1 is Spreading Off.
Equation Use one of the four built-in Pseudo PN patterns, designated 1 through 4.
5–21
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.2.3.3 CONFIG Mode
Mode: Modem:TURBO FreqBand:L-Band
Interface:EIA-530 Mode:N/A (
E)
First, use the
arrow keys to select Modem Type, FreqBand , Interface , or (when applicable) the Network Processor Working Mode ,, and then press [ENT] . Then, use the
arrow keys to scroll through the available settings. Press [ENT] once again when done.
Option Settings
Modem:
FreqBand
Interface
Mode
• OM-73 – Select Linkabit OM-73 modem compatibility mode.
• MIL-165A – Select functionality defined by MIL-STD-188-165A.
• IESS-308 – Select functionality defined by IESS-308, the Intelsat Intermediate Data Rate standard.
• IESS-309 – Select functionality defined by IESS-309, the Intelsat Business Services standard.
• IESS-310 – Select functionality defined by IESS-310, the Intelsat 8-PSK Intermediate Data Rate standard.
• TURBO – Select functionality defined by IESS-315 plus Comtech EF Data Turbo mode interoperability.
• 16QAM – Select 16-QAM as a modulation type.
• AUPC – Select Automatic Uplink Power Control.
• RXBURST – Select when unit is a Vipersat STDMA Hub Modem with its Acquisition Mode set to
“Standard.”
• TXBURST – Select when unit is a Vipersat Remote Modem.
• TURBO-FA – Select when unit is in Vipersat SCPC operation.
• RXBRSTFA – Select when unit is a Vipersat STDMA Hub Modem with its Acquisition Mode set to
“Long”.
• LDPC – Select Low Density Parity Check and Spreading.
• 70/140 MHz (52–88 MHz, 104–176 MHz);
• L-Band (950–2000 MHz).
• EIA-530 – Native interface (standard equipment);
• HSSI – Native interface (standard equipment);
• Network Processor – Optional data interface;
• GigaBit Ethernet – Optional data interface;
• G.703 (BAL) – Optional data interface;
• G.703 (UNBAL) – Optional data interface;
• LVDS – Optional data interface.
Select N/A if the optional Network Processor is not plugged in; otherwise , select the Network
Processor Working Mode:
• RtrVSHub
• RtrVSHEx
• RtrVSRem
• RtrVSREx
• RtrMPHub
• RtrMPRem
• RtrPtoP
• Bridge
5–22
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Vipersat mode should not be selected from the front panel under most circumstances. Refer to the supplementary Vipersat User Guide (CEFD P/N MN-
0000035) for detailed information on configuring the Vipersat features.
When selecting an IF frequency band, both transmit and receive operate in the selected band. Operation of transmit in one IF frequency band and the receive in the other IF frequency band is not permitted.
When selecting a data interface type, a native interface can be selected even if an optional interface is installed, but an optional interface can only be selected if it is installed. Both transmit and receive must use the selected interface type.
Transmitting using one interface type and receiving using another interface type is not permitted.
5.2.3.4 CONFIG: AUPC
The user must first go to CONFIG: MODE to set the modem type as AUPC in order to select this menu.
AUPC: Local Remote ASYNC
Logging (
E)
Use the arrow keys to select Local , Remote , ASYNC , or Logging , and then press [ENT] .
CONFIG: AUPC Local
Local AUPC: Enable: Off Power Settings
Target Setting Carrier Loss Action (
E)
First, use the
arrow keys to select Enable , Power Settings , Target Setting , or Carrier
Loss Action , and then press [ENT] .
CONFIG: AUPC Local Enable
Use the arrow keys to select to enable AUPC on the local modem as On or Off , and then press [ENT] when done.
CONFIG: AUPC Local Power Settings
Local AUPC Power: Nominal: -10.0 dBm
Min: -30.0 dBm Max: -05.0 dBm (
E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Nominal:, Min: , or Max: , and then press [ENT] .
Then, for all selections, use the arrow keys to first select the digit to edit, and then use the
arrow keys to edit the value of that digit. Press [ENT] once again when done.
5–23
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Setting
Nominal:
Min:
Max:
Valid Operational Range
Nominal Output Power: : -40 to +10 dB.
Minimum Output Power: -40 to +10 dB.
Maximum Output Power: -40 to +10 dB.
CONFIG: AUPC Local Target Settings
Target Settings: Eb/No: 0.60 dB
RateOfChange: 1.0 dB/Minute (
E)
First, use the
arrow keys to select Eb/No or RateOfChange , and then press [ENT] .
Then, for either selection, use the
arrow keys to first select the digit to edit, and then use the
arrow keys to edit the value of that digit. Press [ENT] once again when done.
Setting Valid Operational Range
Eb/No To set the Target Eb/No for AUPC: 3.2–16.0 dB.
RateOfChange To set the maximum tracking rate: 0.5–6.0 dB per minute (in 0.5 dB increments)
CONFIG: AUPC Local Carrier Loss Action
Carrier Loss: Local: HOLD
Remote: HOLD (
E)
First, use the
arrow keys to select Local or Remote , and then press [ENT] . Then, for either selection, use the
arrow keys to select HOLD , NOMINAL , or MAXIMUM .
Option
Local
Remote
Function
Sets the action of the local modem when it loses carrier detect.
Sets the action of the local modem when the remote modem loses carrier detect.
CONFIG: AUPC Remote
Remote AUPC: Enable: Off BasebandL: Off
Tx Pattern: Off BER: Loss (
E)
First, use the arrow keys to select Enable , BasebandL , Tx Pattern , or BER , and then press
[ENT] . Then, typical for all selections, use the arrow keys to select operation as On or Off .
Option Function
Enable View or modify the status of the remote modem’s AUPC Enable.
5–24
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Option
BasebandL
Tx Pattern
BER
Function
View or modify the status of the remote modem’s I/O Loopback #1 setting.
View or modify the status of the remote modem’s Tx pattern substitution.
Note: In order to maintain compatibility with older Comtech EF Data modems, only 2047 pattern substitution is supported.
Monitor BER of the remote modem. The remote modem shall have Tx Pattern set to On and the local modem shall be transmitting a 2047 pattern.
CONFIG: AUPC ASYNC
ASYNC: TxBaud:1200 TxFormat:7E2 (
E)
Type:232 RxBaud:1200 RxFormat:7E2
First, use the
arrow keys to select TxBaud , TxFormat , Type , RxBaud , or RxFormat , and then press [ENT] . Then, use the
arrow keys to scroll through the available settings. Press
[ENT] once again when done.
Option Settings
TxBaud
TxFormat
Type
RxBaud
RxFormat
Select the Async Channel Tx Baud Rate: 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400.
Select the Async Channel Tx Character Format: 7N1, 7E1, 7O1, 7N2, 7E2, 7O2, 8N1, 8E1,
8O1, 8N2, 8E2 or 8O2.
Select the Async Channel communications protocol: 232, 485-2W or 485-4W.
Select the Async Channel Rx Baud Rate: 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400.
Select the Async Channel Rx Character Format : 7N1, 7E1, 7O1, 7N2, 7E2, 7O2, 8N1, 8E1,
8O1, 8N2, 8E2 or 8O2.
Max Tx or Rx baud rate is limited to 1.875% of the primary data rate.
CONFIG: AUPC Logging
AUPC Statistics: View Clear-All
Config (
E)
Use the arrow keys to select View , Clear-All , or Config, and then press [ENT] .
Option Settings
View
Use the arrow keys to view/scroll through the stored AUPC statistics. Press [CLR] or
[ENT] to return to the previous menu.
5–25
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Option
Clear-All
Config
Settings
Use the
arrow keys to select No or Yes t o clear all stored AUPC statistics, and then press [ENT].
Use the
arrow keys to set the interval that the statistics are stored, and then press
[ENT]. Valid selections are 10 minutes through 90 minutes (in 10-minute increments), or
Disabled .
5.2.3.5 CONFIG: Transec
TRANSEC: State: Encrypted
Module IP Address Gateway (
E)
Use the arrow keys to select State , Module IP Address , or Gateway , and then press [ENT] .
Option
State
Module IP
Address
Gateway
Settings
Select Encrypted or Bypass .
Set the TRANSEC Module’s Management IP Address and subnet mask length.
Set the TRANSEC Module’s IP Gateway.
5.2.3.6 CONFIG: AntHndOvr
AntHndOvr: Mode: Off State: ONLINE
PwrOffset: +01.2 Delay: 040ms (
E)
Use the arrow keys to select Mode , State, PwrOffset , or Delay , and then press [ENT] .
Setting
Mode
State
PwrOffset
Delay
Function
Select the Antenna Handover Mode as Off, Man , or Auto .
Select the current modem state as ONLINE or OFFLINE .
Select the offset that is added to the Tx power level to compensate for system loss.
Select the size of the buffer used during Handover events.
5.2.3.7 CONFIG: Ref
Reference: Internal Ext-1Mhz
Ext-5Mhz Ext-10Mhz (
E)
Use the
arrow keys to select Internal , Ext-1Mhz , Ext-5Mhz or Ext-1Mhz , and then press
[ENT] .
5–26
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Setting
Internal
Ext-1Mhz
Ext-5Mhz
Ext-10Mhz
Function
Select the Internal high stability ovenized 10 MHz oscillator.
Select an external 1 MHz reference (accepts sine wave or square wave and locks the internal reference to the 1 MHz).
Select an external 5 MHz reference (accepts sine wave or square wave and locks the internal reference to the 5 MHz).
Select an external 10 MHz reference (accepts sine wave or square wave and locks the internal reference to the 10 MHz).
5.2.3.8 CONFIG: Mask
Mask: TxData RxData Eb/No Threshold
DemodFaults (
E)
Use the
arrow keys to select TxData , RxData , Eb/No Threshold , or DemodFaults, and then press [ENT] .
Option Settings
TxData
RxData
Eb/No
Threshold
This alarm monitors data activity on the transmit data interface : Select Masked , Activity , or
AIS .
This alarm monitors the received data activity: Select Masked , Activity , or AIS.
This alarm monitors the receive Eb/No of the demodulator and compares it to the Eb/No threshold value: Select Masked or Active .
Demod Faults This alarm will mask all demod faults and alarms: Select Masked or Active .
When selecting masked for a given alarm, if the condition occurs the alarm will not be set. Activity or active means the alarm is enabled. AIS (Alarm Indication
Signaling) will put out all ones, allowing the connected equipment to recognize that there is an alarm condition.
5.2.3.9 CONFIG: Reset
Are you sure that you want to default
the modem configuration? No Yes (
E)
Use the
arrow keys to select No to retain all current configuration settings and return to the
CONFIG: menu, and then press [ENT] . Otherwise, select Yes to immediately reboot the modem with is factory-shipped settings.
5–27
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.2.3.10 CONFIG: Remote
Remote Control: Mode:Serial
SerialConfig EthernetConfig (
E)
Use the
arrow keys to select Mode , SerialConfig , or EthernetConfig , and then press [ENT] .
CONFIG: Remote Mode
Use the arrow keys to select Local , Serial , or Serial+Ethernet , and then press [ENT] .
Note: Local mode will limit the remote control to only be able to monitor the status of the modem.
CONFIG: Remote SerialConfig
Remote Control: Interface Format
Baudrate (
E)
For serial communications , use the arrow keys to select Interface , Format , or Baudrate , and then press [ENT] .
CONFIG: Remote SerialConfig Interface
M&C Bus Interface: RS232 RS485-2W
RS485-4W TTL(Switch) CRS-500 (
E)
Use the arrow keys to select RS232 , RS485-2W (2-wire), RS485-4W (4-wire), TTL
(Switch) , or CRS-500 , and then press [ENT] .
The TTL (Switch) selection enables interoperation with the CRS-311 (1:1) or CRS-300
(1:N) redundancy switches.
Local M&C Bus Address:
0000
When selecting RS-232 the local M&C Bus Address displays 0000.
Addressing is not supported by RS-232 or TTL (Switch) because they are not multi-drop communication standards. If RS-485 is selected, the display will show address 0001 to 9999. This address can be changed using the front panel. The most significant digit is for Comtech EF Data redundancy switches.
5–28
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG: Remote SerialConfig Format
Local M&C Bus Format: 8N1
(
E)
Use the arrow keys to select the character format 7N1 , 7E1 , 7O1 , 7N2 , 7E2 , 7O2 , 8N1
(default), 8E1 , 8O1 , 8N2 , 8E2, or 8O2 , and then press [ENT] .
CONFIG: Remote SerialConfig Baudrate
Local M&C Bus Baud Rate:
38400 Baud (
E)
Use the arrow keys to select a Baud Rate of 2400 , 4800 , 9600 , 19200 , 38400 (default),
57600, or 115200 , and then press [ENT] .
CONFIG: Remote EthernetConfig
Ethernet Config: IP Address/Range MAC
Gateway SNMP Option Card Addr (
E)
Use the arrow keys to select IP Address/Range , MAC , Gateway , SNMP , or Option Card
Addr , and then press [ENT] .
Option Function
IP Address/Range Select the IP Address.
MAC
Displays the modem’s MAC Address: This is programmed at the factory and is not user changeable . If installed, the Gigabit Ethernet Interface’s MAC Address will also be displayed.
Gateway
SNMP
The IP Gateway Address is the default address that the modem will send all IP responses when the message originated from a source outside the modems local attached network.
Select and control Communities or Traps . Detailed information follows.
Option Card Addr
Select to set the optional Gigabit Ethernet or Network Proc essor Module’s Ethernet interface IP Address and subnet mask (range). When Network Proc is selected, module configuration options are also available. (Detailed information for configuring either option card follows.)
CONFIG: Remote EthernetConfig SNMP
SNMP: Communities Traps
(
E)
Use the arrow keys to select Communities or Traps , and then press [ENT] .
5–29
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG: IP EthernetConfig SNMP Communities
SNMP Communities: Read Write
(
E)
Use the arrow keys to select Read or Write , and then press [ENT] .
CONFIG: IP EthernetConfig SNMP Communities Read
SNMP Read Community: public (
E)
To edit the SNMP Read Community string, first use the
arrow keys to select the character to edit, and then use the arrow keys to edit that character.
Note: Only the first 20 characters on the bottom line are available.
All printable ASCII characters are available with the exception of the backslash ‘/’ (ASCII code 92) and tilde ‘~’ (ASCII code 126).
Once the string has been composed, press [ENT] . All trailing spaces are removed from the
Read Community string upon entry.
CONFIG: IP EthernetConfig SNMP Communities Write
SNMP Write Community: private (
E)
To edit the SNMP Write Community string, first use the
arrow keys to select the character to edit, and then use the
arrow keys to edit that character.
Note: Only the first 20 characters on the bottom line are available.
All printable ASCII characters are available with the exception of the backslash ‘/’ (ASCII code 92) and tilde ‘~’ (ASCII code 126).
Once the string has been composed, press [ENT] . All trailing spaces are removed from the
Write Community string upon entry.
CONFIG: IP EthernetConfig SNMP Traps
SNMP Traps: Address #1 Address#2
Community Version (
E)
Use the arrow keys to select Address #1 , Address #2 , Community , or Version , and then press [ENT] .
5–30
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG: IP EthernetConfig SNMP Traps Address #1/#2
SNMP Traps IP Address #X:
000.000.000.000 (
E)
Where X indicates IP Address #1 or IP Address #2 : To edit the SNMP Trap Destination IP
Address, first use the
arrow keys to select the digit to edit, and then use the
arrow keys to edit the value of that digit. Press [ENT] when done.
Note: If both Trap IP Addresses are 000.000.000.000
, it means that Trap is disabled.
CONFIG: IP EthernetConfig SNMP Traps Community
SNMP Trap Community: comtech (
E)
To edit the SNMP Trap Community string, first use the
arrow keys to select the character to edit, and then use the
arrow keys to edit that character.
Note: Only the first 20 characters on the bottom line are available.
All printable ASCII characters are available with the exception of the backslash ‘/’ (ASCII code 92) and tilde ‘~’ (ASCII code 126).
Once the string has been composed, press [ENT] . All trailing spaces are removed from the
Trap Community string upon entry.
CONFIG: IP EthernetConfig SNMP Traps Version
SNMP Version: SNMPv1 SNMPv2
(
E)
Select SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 using the
arrow keys, and then press [ENT] .
CONFIG: Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr
Option Card Addr: Gigabit Ethernet
Network Proc
Select Gigabit Ethernet or Network Proc using the
arrow keys, and then press [ENT] .
CONFIG: Remote
Ethernet
EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Gigabit
Option Card Ethernet IP Address/Range:
192.168.001.002/24 (
E)
5–31
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
To edit the Gigabit Ethernet Interface’s Management IP Address and Range, first use the
arrow keys to select the digit to edit, and then use the
arrow keys to edit the value of that digit. Press [ENT] when done.
CONFIG: Remote
Proc
EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Network
NP Card: AddrMode:Dual Security: Low
BPM:Off Traffic IP Mgmt IP (
E)
Use the
arrow keys to select AddrMode , Security , BPM , Traffic IP , or Mgmt IP , and then press [ENT] .
CONFIG: Remote
Proc
EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Network
AddrMode
Use the
arrow keys to select the Address Mode as Local or Dual , and then press [ENT] .
When in Single Address Mode, select Traffic IP to edit the NP Module’s
Ethernet IP Address and Range.
When in Dual Address Mode, select Mgmt IP to edit the NP Module’s Ethernet
IP Address and Range.
CONFIG: Remote
Proc Security
EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Network
Use the
arrow keys to select the FAST-enabled Management Security level as Low or
High , and then press [ENT] .
CONFIG: Remote
Proc BPM
EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Network
Use the arrow keys to select the FAST-enabled BPM mode as On or Off , and then press [ENT] .
5–32
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CONFIG: Remote
Network Proc
EthernetConfig Option Card Addr
Traffic IP
Ethernet IP Address/Range:
192.168.001.054/24 (
E)
To edit the Network Processor Module’s Traffic IP Address and Range (when the module is in Single Address Mode), first use the
arrow keys to select the digit to edit, and then use the
arrow keys to edit the value of that digit. Press [ENT] when done.
CONFIG: Remote
Network Proc
EthernetConfig Option Card Addr
Mgmt IP
Ethernet IP Address/Range:
192.168.002.072/16 (
E)
To edit the Network Processor Module’s Management IP Address and Range (when the module is in Dual Address Mode), first use the
arrow keys to select the digit to edit, and then use the
arrow keys to edit the value of that digit. Press [ENT] when done.
5–33
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.2.4 SELECT: Monitor
Monitor: Alarms Event-Log Rx-Params
CnC Stats GigaBit I/F Stats
Use the
arrow keys to select Alarms , Event-Log , Rx-Params , CnC , Stats , Gigabit I/F , or
Stats , and then press [ENT] .
Submenu Function
Alarms Select and view Transmit, Receive, or Unit alarms.
Event-Log Select to View or Clear-All stored events and view modem parameters.
Rx-Params
CnC
Stats
GigaBit I/F Stats
Select to view FC, RSL, BERT, Buffer, Eb/No, or BER .
Select to view CnC Delay , FreqOffset , Eb/No , or Ratio
Select to View, Clear-All or Config statistics.
Select to View or Clear-All Gigabit Interface link statistics.
5.2.4.1 Monitor: Alarms
Live Alarms: Transmit Receive Unit
(
E)
Use the
arrow keys to select Transmit , Receive , or Unit , and then press [ENT] .
Monitor: Alarms Transmit
Mod: ----
Intf: ----
Press <ENT> for
detailed status
Press [ENT] to enable access to the available read-only Modulator and Intf (Interface)Tx alarm status screens. Use the
arrow keys to then page through the available Modulator and
Interface character positions (Mod#1 through #4, and Tx Intf#1 through #4). The status message to the right changes based on the current position, as per the following table:
Transmit (Tx) Alarm Position Description
Top row Mod #1
Mod #2
Mod #3
Mod #4
Modulator symbol clock Phase Lock Loop status.
Modulator RF Synthesizer Phase Lock Loop status.
Modulator IQ activity status.
Modulator Nyquist filter Over range.
Bottom row Tx Intf #1
Tx Intf #2
Tx Intf #3
Tx Intf #4
Transmit data interface clock Phase Lock Loop status.
Transmit data interface terrestrial clock activity status.
Transmit data interface SCT (send clock timing) Phase Lock Loop status.
Transmit data interface AIS (alarm indication signal) status.
5–34
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The examples that follow depict alarm status screens displayed for the Mod 1 st character positions. If the Mod 1 st character position is selected:
and Intf Tx 1 st
Mod: +---
Intf: ----
Mod symbol clk
not locked.
If the Intf Tx 1 st character position is selected:
Mod: ----
Intf: +---
TXIntf data
not locked.
Monitor: Alarms Receive
Demod: --------- Press <ENT> for
Intf: ---------- detailed status
Press [ENT] to access the available read-only Demodulator and Intf (Interface) Rx alarm screens.
Then, use the arrow keys to navigate through the displayed Demodulator and Interface character positions (Demod#1 through #6, and Rx Intf#1 through #10). The status message to the right changes based on the current cursor position, as per the following table:
Receive (Rx) Alarm Position Description
Top row Demod #1
Demod #2
Demod #3
Demod #4
Demod #5
Demod #6
Demodulator carrier Phase Lock Loop status.
Demodulator FEC (forward error correction) lock status.
Demodulator RF Synthesizer Phase Lock Loop status.
Demodulator IQ activity status.
Composite Power exceeds 40 dBc.
Composite Power exceeds 20 dBm.
Bottom row Rx Intf #1
Rx Intf #2
Rx Intf #3
Rx Intf #4
Rx Intf #5
Rx Intf #6
Rx Intf #7
Rx Intf #8
Rx Intf #9
Rx Intf #10
Demultiplexer lock status.
Doppler buffer status.
Doppler buffer fill status.
Doppler buffer overflow status.
Doppler buffer underflow status.
Doppler buffer Phase Lock Loop status.
Doppler buffer reference clock activity status.
Receive data interface AIS (alarm indication signal) status.
Receive Eb/No lower than Eb/No threshold status.
Internal BERT sync status.
The examples that follow depict the alarm status screens displayed for the Demod 1
1 st character positions. If the Demod 1 st character position is selected: st and Intf Rx
Demod: +---
Intf: ---------
Demod IF not
locked.
If the Intf 1 st character position is selected:
5–35
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Demod: ----
Intf: +--------
Demux not
locked
Monitor: Alarms Unit
Unit: ---------------- Press <ENT> for
------- detailed status
Press [ENT] to access the available read-only SLM-5650A Unit alarm screens. Then, use the
arrow keys to navigate through the displayed character positions (Unit#1 through #23). The status message to the right changes based on the current cursor position, as per the following table:
Unit Alarm Position Description
Top row
Unit #9
Unit #10
Unit #11
Unit #12
Unit #13
Unit #14
Unit #15
Unit #16
Unit #1
Unit #2
Unit #3
Unit #4
Unit #5
Unit #6
Unit #7
Unit #8
+ 5 volt power supply is out of range.
+ 3.3 volt power supply is out of range.
+ 2.5 volt power supply is out of range.
+ 1.5 volt power supply is out of range.
+ 12 volt power supply is out of range.
- 12 volt power supply is out of range.
+ 18 volt power supply is out of range.
Cooling fan fault.
External reference activity status.
192 MHz clock Phase Lock Loop status.
10 MHz reference Phase Lock Loop status.
M&C FPGA configuration fault.
Modulator FPGA configuration fault.
Demodulator FPGA configuration fault.
Decoder FPGA configuration fault.
Transmit interface FPGA configuration fault.
Bottom row Unit #17
Unit #18
Unit #19
Unit #20
Unit #21
Unit #22
Unit #23
Receive interface FPGA configuration fault.
FEC #1 FPGA configuration fault.
FEC #2 FPGA configuration fault.
Optional data interface card (module) FPGA configuration fault.
FPGA DCM Phase Lock Loop fault.
Network Processor mailbox communications error.
TRANSEC mailbox communications error.
The example that follows depicts the alarm status screen displayed if the Unit 1 st character position is selected:
Unit: +--------------- +5.0V Power is
----- out of range.
5–36
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.2.4.2 Monitor: Event-Log
Stored Events: View Clear-All
ModemParameters(
E)
Use the
arrow keys to select View , Clear-All , or ModemParameters , and then press [ENT] .
Monitor: Event-Log View
Event 001:003 1:43:02 27/09/05
Mod: ---- ++ -- (
E)
To view the details of a stored fault, first use the arrow keys to scroll through the event numbers, and then press [ENT] to select. Then, use the arrow keys to navigate the listed fault character positions, displayed on the bottom line, to view the fault description If the faulted listed is Power On or
Power Off, nothing will be displayed if that event is selected.
Monitor: Event-Log Clear-All
Clear All Stored Events? No Yes
(
E)
Use the
arrow keys to select No ( to retain) or Yes ( to clear all) stored faults, and then press [ENT].
Monitor: Event-Log ModemParameters
Current Temp: +41 Max Temp: +56
Comp Power< -70.0 Max Power> +25.0 (E)
This read-only screen displays the unit’s Current Temperature, Max Temp, Comp Power and
Max Power. Press [ENT] or [CLR] to return to the previous menu.
5–37
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.2.4.3 Monitor: Rx-Params
Fc=+05917 RSL<-60.0 dBm BERT=N/A
Buf=000% Eb/No=Loss BER <1.0E-12 (
E)
This read-only screen displays the following Rx operating parameters:
Item Description
Fc
RSL
BERT
Buf
Displays the received carrier frequency offset in Hz. The range is the same as the acquisition range of the modem – 60 kHz.
Displays the signal level of the received carrier in dBm. The range supported is (+)15–(-60) dBm.
Displays the measured BER. This requires that the modem be set to Test mode for Rx. If a
Fireberd is supplying a data pattern, only the Test mode for the Rx needs to be turned on. The
Fireberd data pattern and the modems data pattern must match to work properly.
Displays the buffer fill status in a percentage format.
Eb/No
BER
Displays the estimated Eb/No of the received carrier. The range is threshold to 20 dB Eb/No.
Displays the estimated BER based on the demodulator’s measurement of the carrier to noise.
The difference between BER and BERT is that BER is estimated in the demodulator, while BERT is measured when the Test mode is turned ON.
Press [ENT] or [CLR] to return to the previous menu.
5.2.4.4 MONITOR: CnC (DoubleTalk ® Carrier-in-Carrier ® )
CnC: Delay=000,005uS FreqOff=008.7kHz
Eb/No=Loss Ratio<-10dB (E)
If enabled and locked, the display will show the CnC performance data. This read-only screen updates once every second.
Item Description
Delay
FreqOff
Eb/No
Displays the current search delay value.
Displays the current frequency offset between the outbound interferer and the desired inbound.
Displays the estimated Eb/No of the received carrier. The range is threshold to 20 dB Eb/No.
Ratio Displays the ratio of outbound interferer power to desired inbound power. The range is ±10 dB.
Press [ENT] or [CLR] to return to the previous menu.
5–38
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.2.4.5 Monitor: Stats (Statistics)
Link Statistics: View Clear-All
Config (
E)
Use the
arrow keys to select View , Clear-All , or Config , and then press [ENT] .
Monitor: Stats View
Event 001:003 1:43:02 27/09/11
Min: Loss Avg: Loss (
E)
Use the
arrow keys to scroll through the stored statistics. The statistics are limited to
Minimum , Average , and Maximum Eb/No . Press [ENT] or [CLR] to return to the previous menu.
Monitor: Stats Clear-All
Clear All Stored Statistics? No Yes
(
E)
Use the arrow keys to select No ( to retain) or Yes ( to clear all) stored statistics, and then press [ENT].
Monitor: Stats Config
Statistics Logging Interval:
10 minutes (
E)
Use the arrow keys to set the Statistics Logging Interval to 10 minutes through 90 minutes
(in 10-minute increments), or Disabled , and then press [ENT] .
5–39
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
5.2.4.6 Monitor: GigaBit I/F Statistics
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
This menu is visible only when a GigaBit Ethernet Interface is installed in the modem.
GigaBit Ethernet Card Statistics:
View Clear-All
Use the arrow keys to select View or Clear-All , and then press [ENT] .
Option Description
View
Clear-All
Select to view the link statistical counters.
Select to clear or reset the FPGA link error counter.
5.2.5 SELECT: Test
TEST: Carrier Loopback BERT
LampTest (
E)
Select Carrier , Loopback , BERT , or LampTest , and then press [ENT] .
Carrier Test Modes, Loopback, and Tx BERT are not allowed when the modem is set to Demod Only.
5.2.5.1 TEST: Carrier
Carrier Test Modes: Normal Tx-CW
Tx-1,0 (
E)
Use the arrow keys to select Normal, Tx-CW , or Tx-1,0 then press [ENT] .
Carrier Test Mode Description
Normal
TX-CW
TX 1,0
Not a test mode: Select for standard modem operation.
The modulator produces a pure carrier that can be used for frequency and power measurements.
The modulator produces an offset (single upper side band suppressed) test carrier. Use this test mode to check for quadrature error in the modulator.
5–40
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.2.5.2 TEST: Loopback
Loopback Test Modes: Normal IFℓ I/O1ℓ
(
E)
Use the
arrow keys to select Normal, IF ℓ , or I/O1 ℓ , and then press [ENT] .
Loopback Test Mode Description
Normal
IF ℓ
I/01 ℓ
Not a test mode: Select for standard modem operation.
IF Loopback – Loops the output of the modulator back to the demodulator (inside the modem) to verify transmit and receive configurations match as well as the data inputs and outputs.
Baseband Loopback – Loops the transmit data (after the interface) back to the receive data path interface. This mode is useful for checking interface cabling and clocking.
5.2.5.3 TEST: BERT
BERT: Tx:Off Pattern:2047 ErrIns
Reset Rx:Off Errs:=0000000 BER:NoSync
Use the
arrow keys to select Tx , Pattern , ErrIns , Reset , Rx , Errs , or BER , and then press
[ENT] . Then, use the
arrow keys to select the desired setting. Press [ENT] to execute the test.
BERT Mode Description
Tx
Pattern
Select to turn the transmit test pattern generator On or Off .
Select from the available patterns:
• Mark – All ones.
• Space – All zeros.
• 1:1 – A one followed by a zero and then repeats.
• 1:2 – A one followed by two zero’s and then repeats.
• 2E15-1 – A pseudo-random data pattern of 2^15 –1, compatible with standard BERTs.
• 2E20-1 – A pseudo-random data pattern of 2^20 –1, compatible with standard BERTs.
• 2E23-1 – A pseudo-random data pattern of 2^23 –1, compatible with standard BERTs.
• MIL188 – A modified pseudo-random data pattern of 2^11 –1, compatible with the MIL-188-
165 test data pattern requirement of a continuous stream of 50 zero’s every 10,000 bits.
This pattern has 5 normal 2047 patterns, with the fifth patterns longest string of zero’s (11) stretched an additional 39 bits to create a lack of transitions for 50 bits approximately every
10,000 bits.
• 2047 – A pseudo-random data pattern of 2^11 –1, compatible with standard BERTs.
ErrIns
Reset
Select to insert a single error into the data stream by pressing [ENT] .
Select to restart the BER test and clear the error and BER displays.
5–41
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
BERT Mode Description
Rx Select to turn on the receive bit error test set.
Errs
BER
Select to view the absolute number of errors counted.
Select to view the bit error rate as measured by the modem.
The BER function can work with a Fireberd supplying the transmit data test pattern, while only turning on the Rx Bit Error Rate tester. The transmit test pattern generator can be turned on at the far end of the link as long as the test patterns match the Rx
BERT. An external bit error test set can be used even when the internal bit error test set is enabled. If AIS is enabled the data will be overwritten with all ones.
5.2.5.4 TEST: LampTest
Select LampTest to perform a diagnostic run on the front panel LEDs and VFD.
5.2.6 SELECT: Save/Load
Save/Load: Loc:0 Action: View
Empty (
E)
Use the arrow keys to select Loc or Action , and then press [ENT] .
Option
Loc
Action
Settings
There are 10 locations available [0 – 9]. Use the
arrow keys to select the location to either save or load a stored configuration, and then press [ENT ].
View is the default setting to select and view the location before loading or saving. Otherwise, select Save or Load at the selected location:
• To save a configuration, go through the modem’s menus and configure all the necessary parameters. Then, select a location, select Save , and then press [ENT] .
• To load a saved configuration, select the desired configuration, select Load , and then press
[ENT] .
Resetting the modem will cause all configurations to be cleared!
Note the following:
• If a location has no saved configuration present, the bottom line will display “Empty” as per the example shown above.
• If a location has a configuration saved to it, the bottom line will display the date stamp for that saved configuration in “HH:MM:SS DD/MM/YY” format:
5–42
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Save/Load: Loc:0 Action: View
16:18:00 08/07/10 (
E)
• If a location has a configuration saved, and the user attempts to save a new configuration to that location, the screen will display the following message:
This configuration contains data. Would you like to overwrite it?
N
o (
E)
The default to this question is No . To overwrite, use the
arrow keys to change the answer to Yes , and then press [ENT] .
A programming sequence message will briefly display, and then the screen will display the following message before returning back to the Save/Load menu screen:
The current configuration has been saved
to the selected location.
5.2.7 SELECT: Utility
UTILITY: RT-Clk RefAdjust ID Display Temp
Agc Alarm PwrCal Firmware FAST (
E)
Use the
arrow keys to select RT-Clk , RefAdjust , ID , Display , Temp , Agc , Alarm , Alarm ,
PwrCal , Firmware , or FAST , and then press [ENT] .
5.2.7.1 Utility: RT-Clk
Edit Real-Time Clock:
15:34:25 27/09/05 (
E)
Use the arrow keys to select and set the Real-Time Clock. Hours are in 24 hour time
(HH:MM:SS) format. The date is shown in DAY/MONTH/YEAR format in accordance with
European format.
5.2.7.2 Utility: RefAdjust
Internal 10 MHz Ref Freq
Fine Adjust: 3F3 (
E)
Use the arrow keys to select and adjust the internal high stability 10 MHz oscillator to counteract aging. The control value is in hex – not decimal – and has a range of 000 to FFF. The typical calibration point for a modem is nominally around 400.
5–43
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.2.7.3 Utility: ID
Edit Circuit ID: (
E)
------------------------
Use the
arrow keys to name the communications link. This name can be any combination of alphanumeric characters up to 24 characters in length.
Additional characters supported are: ( ) * + / .
(period) , (comma) and space .
5.2.7.4 Utility: Display
Edit Display Brightness
100% (
E)
Use the arrow keys to adjust the front panel display brightness. Valid settings are 25%,
50%, 75% or 100%.
5.2.7.5 Utility: Temp
Modem Temp (Deg C): RF=+61 PS=+40
M&C=+35 Mod=+43 Demod=+51 (E)
This read-only screen allows the user to view the modem internal temperatures (RF, PS, M&C,
Mod and Demod).
5.2.7.6 Utility: AGC
AgcMan: Min Value: 00.0 Volts
Max Value: 10.0 Volts (
E)
Use the
arrow keys to select, and then set the Minimum and Maximum voltage levels for the external AGC monitor voltage that is available on the AUX connector.
Option Setting
Min Value
Max Value
Specifies the voltage to output on the External AGC voltage signal when the demodulator RSL is at its minimum level.
Specifies the voltage to output when the demodulator RSL is at its maximum level.
5–44
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.2.7.7 Utility: Alarm
Audible Alarm: Disable Enable
(
E)
Use the
arrow keys to either Disable or Enable the alarm, and then press [ENT] .
5.2.7.8 Utility: PwrCal
Burst L-Band Pwer Cal: The modem will
Be (re)calibrated. Continue? No Yes
To execute calibration of the L-Band board for burst operation, use the arrow keys to select
Yes , and then press [ ENT] .
5.2.7.9 Utility: Firmware
Firmware Images: Information
Select (
E)
Use the arrow keys to select Information or Select, and then press [ENT] .
Item Description
Information View information on the firmware residing in the Bootrom, Image#1, or Image#2 slots.
Select Select which image (Active Image) will be loaded into the modem: #1 or #2.
Utility: Firmware Information
Firmware Info: Bootrom Image#1
Image#2 (
E)
Use the
arrow keys to select Bootrom , Image#1 , or Image#2 to view information on the firmware and software used by the modem.
Utility: Firmware Information Bootrom
Bootrom: 10/18/07
FW-0000029- 1.1.1
This screen displays the Bootrom release date, the Firmware number and the revision number.
Press [ENT] or [CLR] to return to the previous menu.
5–45
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Utility: Firmware Information Image#X
Image#X: Bulk App M&C Mod Demod Decoder
Filters TxIntfc RxIntfc Turbo (
E)
Where Image #X denotes selection of Image#1 or Image#2 , both images display similar information – the Firmware number with revision letter (shown as ‘x’), its release date
(shown as MM/DD/YY), and version (shown as #.#.#) may differ for each firmware load.
Information is displayed as follows:
Image#X Item Example
Bulk
App
M&C
Mod
Demod
Decoder
Filters
TxIntfc
(The bulk is the sum of all the individual pieces) FW-0000030x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
FW-0000031 x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
FW-0000032 x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
FW-0000033 x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
FW-0000034 x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
FW-0000038 x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
FW-0000034 x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
FW-0000040 x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
RxIntfc
Turbo
Opt
FW-0000041 x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
FW-0000042 x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
FW-####### x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.# (Varies depending on the installed optional interface)
Utility: Firmware Select
Current Active Image#2
Next Reboot Image#1 #2 (
E)
Select Image #1 or #2 , and then press [ENT] .
To reboot the modem, cycle the power.
5–46
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
5.2.7.10 Utility: FAST
FAST: Configuration S/N 000000012
View Options (
E)
Select Configuration or View Options , and then press [ENT] .
Utility: FAST Configuration
FAST Configuration: Enter New FAST Codes
Demo Mode (
E)
Select New FAST Codes or Demo Mode , and then press [ENT] .
Option Description
New FAST Codes
Demo Mode
This is a 20-digit code, purchased from Comtech EF Data, which permits upgrading the modem functionality.
Legal characters are hexadecimal, 0-F.
This Comtech EF Data feature allows the user to try out any capability of the installed hardware for up to 168 hours (seven 24-hour days).
Utility: FAST View Options
View Options: 01 Installed
Full Range Data Rate
Use the
arrow keys to list the options that the modem supports, and identify whether or not they are installed/enabled. There are 27 options, listed as 01 – 27:
FAST Option Description
05
06
07
08
01
02
03
04
09
10
11
12
Modem Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
8PSK/8QAM modulation
16QAM modulation
16APSK/32APSK Modulation
AUPC (Automatic Uplink Power Control) Overhead
ASYNC ESC
Reed-Solomon Coding
Turbo FEC Option
Adv FEC Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
Network Processor I/F Card (Module)
Sequential Encode/Decoder
TRANSEC Module
5–47
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
FAST Option
13
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
22
23
24
25
26
27
Description
Carrier-In-Carrier Date Rate: Not Installed, 512 kbps, 1Mbps, 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10
Mbps, 15 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 25 Mbps, 30 Mbps, 40 Mbps, 51.84 Mbps, <70 Mbps
NP QOS
NP Management Security
NP Vipersat
Demodulator Only
Asymmetrical Rx Data Rate: 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
TRANSEC Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
Vipersat Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
NP OW Serial Commands
NP BPM Mode
Customer Options
NP Antenna Handover
LDPC FEC Option
Extended Temperature Range ( FUTURE )
Spectrum Spreading
5–48
Chapter 6. ETHERNET-BASED
MANAGEMENT
6.1 Introduction
The base SLM-5650A Satellite Modem features an RJ-45 10/100 BaseT Ethernet management interface for the purpose of non-secure monitor and control (M&C) of the modem.
Installation of the optional Network Processor (NP) Interface and/or TRANSEC Module Interface adds security layers to network management that serve to expand or restrict the available modem
M&C parameters.
This chapter provides an overview of the functionality provided by this interface under all configurations, and references other chapters for further details.
6.2 Ethernet Management Interface Protocols
A Windows-based user PC facilitates Ethernet-based remote monitor and control (M&C) of the
SLM-5650A through four separately-operated management protocols:
• SSH (Secure Shell) Interface. This interface is used for secure remote product M&C
(for optional NP Interface and optional TRANSEC Module Interface operations only ).
• Web Server (HTTP or HTTPS) Interface.
The non-secure (HTTP) or secure (HTTPS) interface requires a compatible user-supplied web browser such as Internet Explorer.
• Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) with Public and Private MIB. This interface requires a user-supplied Network Management System (NMS) and a usersupplied Management Information Base (MIB) File Browser.
• Telnet Interface. This non-secure interface requires use of the user PC’s Command-line interface, or a user-supplied terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal.
6–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Ethernet-Based Management
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
6.2.1 Ethernet-Based Management via Secure Management Interfaces
The varying degrees of Ethernet Management are dependent on the modem configuration The
SLM-5650A’s Management Security option requires the Network Processor (NP) Interface and/or the TRANSEC Module to be installed in the SLM-5650A Base Modem.
1.
Base Modem – The Management Security option is not available for the Base Modem-only configuration:
• Non-secure serial-based network management is allowed via Telnet, using the Base
Modem’s J10 Remote EIA-232/485 Type ‘DB-9F’ serial port and the menu-driven
Command Line Interface (CLI).
• Non-secure Ethernet-based network management is allowable via the HTTP (nonsecure) Web browser and SNMPv2 interfaces, using the Base Modem’s J5 Ethernet
RJ-45 port.
2.
Base Modem + optional NP Interface – When the optional NP Interface is installed in the
SLM-5650A without the optional TRANSEC Module Interface, Management Security is optional and the following secure network management operating alternatives apply:
• When Management Security is disabled (i.e., Low Level Security is selected ): o Non-secure serial-based network management is allowed for the Base Modem via
Telnet, using the J10 Remote EIA-232/485 Type ‘DB-9F’ serial port and the menudriven Command Line Interface (CLI). o Non-secure Ethernet-based network management is supported over the NP Interface using the HTTP (non-secure) Web browser and SNMPv2.
When the modem is operating in Router Mode, a number of Base Modem M&C parameters are available via the NP HTTP Interface. Similarly, a limited number of status-only NP parameters are viewable over the Base Modem HTTP Interface.
When the modem is operating in BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode or
Dynamic Point-to-Point (DPP) Mode, NP Interface Ethernet ports P1 through P4 transparently bridge data traffic, and network management is only possible using the
Base Modem’s J5 Ethernet port.
• When Management Security is enabled (i.e., High Level Security is selected ): o Secure network management is supported by the NP Interface, but not by the Base
Modem. The Base Modem’s J5 Ethernet port (external Ethernet connectivity to the
Base Modem) is disabled . o Secure Ethernet-based network management is supported over HTTPS via Secure
Socket Layer (SSL); Secure Shell (SSH) menu-driven Command Line Interface
(CLI); and SNMPv3.
6–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Ethernet-Based Management
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
When the modem is operating in Router Mode, a number of Base Modem parameters are available via the NP HTTPS Interface. Similarly, a limited number of status-only
NP parameters are viewable over the Base Modem HTTP Interface.
When the modem is operating in BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode or
Dynamic Point-to-Point (DPP) Mode, NP Interface Ethernet ports P1 through P4 transparently bridge data traffic, and network management is only possible using the
J5 Ethernet port on the Base Modem.
When the modem is operating in (Static) Bridge Mode, Ethernet communication between the Base Modem and the NP Interface is disabled, as the Base Modem does not support secure network management interfaces.
3.
Base Modem + optional NP Interface + optional TRANSEC Module – When the optional
NP Interface is installed in the SLM-5650A in tandem with the optional TRANSEC Module
Interface, and Management Security is enabled , the network management operating restrictions as previously described (i.e., when High Level Security is selected) therefore always apply. Additionally, the NP HTTPS Interface provides a status parameter associated with the TRANSEC Module – a second TRANSEC Key.
The TRANSEC Module Interface provides a proxy function of HTTPS connections to the Base
Modem and the NP Interface; a secure HTTPS connection to the TRANSEC Module therefore enables user access to all Base Modem and/or all NP M&C parameters securely through this indirect proxy connection. The Secure Management interfaces supported by this configuration are summarized as follows:
Base Modem Network Processor TRANSEC Module
HTTPS Proxy via TRANSEC Module HTTPS
SSH
SNMPv3
HTTPS (Proxy via TRANSEC Module)
HTTPS
SSH
6–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Ethernet-Based Management
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
6.3 HTTP/HTTPS (Web Server) Interfaces
The SLM-5650A’s embedded Web Server application provides the user with an easy to use interface to configure and monitor all aspects of the modem. At present, three independent Web
Server Interfaces are available for the SLM-5650A, each designed for optimal performance when using the supported browsers:
• SLM-5650A Base Modem HTTP Interface (standard) – Requires Microsoft’s Internet
Explorer 5.5 (or higher) via HTTP.
Chapter 7. BASE MODEM HTTP INTERFACE
• Network Processor (NP) HTTP/HTTPS Interface (optional) – Available when the optional Network Processor (NP) Interface is installed. This interface requires
Microsoft’s Internet Explorer 7.0 (or higher) and Mozilla Firefox 2.0 (or higher), via
HTTP or HTTPS (depending on the interface’s security level setting).
Chapter 8.5 NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) HTTP/HTTPS INTERFACE
• TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface (optional) – Available when the optional
TRANSEC Module is installed. This interface requires Microsoft’s Internet Explorer 7.0
(or higher) and Mozilla Firefox 2.0 (or higher), via HTTPS.
Chapter 10. TRANSEC MODULE HTTPS INTERFACE
All Web Server Interfaces are accessible by typing (depending on the interface and/or management mode) “ http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
” or “ https://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
” into the browser’s
Address box (where “ xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
” is the IP address of the modem or optional installed interface):
For all interfaces, the user is prompted to type in a valid User name and Password , whether via an integrated Web page or a dialog box similar to the one shown to the right. For all interfaces, the default for both is comtech .
6–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Ethernet-Based Management
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
6.4 SNMP Interface
The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an Internet-standard protocol for managing devices on IP networks. An SNMP-managed network consists of three key components:
• The managed device.
This includes the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem.
•
•
The SNMP Agent.
The software that runs on the SLM-5650A. The SLM-5650A SNMP
Agent supports SNMPv1 , SNMPv2c , and SNMPv3 .
The user-supplied Network Management System (NMS). The software that runs on the manager.
6.4.1 Management Information Base (MIB) Files
MIB files are used for SNMP remote management of a unique device. A MIB file consists of a tree of nodes called Object Identifiers (OIDs). Each OID provides remote management of a particular function. These MIB files should be compiled in a user-supplied MIB Browser or
SNMP Network Monitoring System server.
The following MIB files are associated with the SLM-5650A:
MIB File/Name
( ‘x’ indicates revision letter)
Description fw10874-2x.mib
ComtechEFData MIB file
ComtechEFData MIB file gives the root tree for ALL Comtech EF Data products and consists of only the following OID:
Name: comtechEFData
Type: MODULE-IDENTITY
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247
Full path: iso(1).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).private(4).enterprises(1).comtechEFData(6247)
Module: ComtechEFData
FW-0000049x.mib
SLM-5650A OID MIB File
FW-0000050x.mib
SLM-5650A Traps MIB file
MIB file consists of all of the OID’s for management of the modem functions.
Trap MIB file is provided for SNMPv1 traps common for base modems.
6.4.2 SNMP Community Strings
In SNMP v1/v2c, the SNMP Community String is sent unencrypted in the SNMP packets. Caution must be taken by the network administrator to ensure that
SNMP packets travel only over a secure and private network if security is a concern.
The SLM-5650A uses Community Strings as a password scheme that provides authentication before gaining access to the modem agent’s MIBs. They are used to authenticate users and determine access privileges to the SNMP agent.
6–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Ethernet-Based Management
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Type the SNMP Community String into the user-supplied MIB Browser or Network Node
Management software.
The user defines three Community Strings for SNMP access:
• Read Community default = public
• Write Community default = private
• Trap Community default = comtech
Note: Maximum number of characters for community strings shall not exceed 20. All printable
ASCII characters, except ’\’ and ‘~’ are allowed. No trailing spaces for community strings.
For proper SNMP operation, the SLM-5650A MIB files must be used with the associated version of the SLM-5650A base modem M&C. Please refer to the
SLM-5650A SW Release Notes for information on the required FW/SW compatibility.
6.4.3 SNMP Traps
These include unit faults, TX faults, and RX faults. A trap is sent both when a fault occurs and is cleared.
The “ Traps” file only needs to be compiled if SNMPv1 traps are to be used. SNMPv3 does not currently support traps.
Which style of traps the modem sends can be configured by the user using the slm5650SNMPTrapVersion OID.
The modem supports the following MIB2 SNMPv1traps / SNMPv2 notifications:
MIB2 SNMPv1 trap: Authentication Failure 5
MIB2 SNMPv2 notifications: Authentication Failure 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5
The modem supports the following Alarms and Faults SNMPv1 traps / SNMPv2 notifications:
Alarms and Faults SNMPv1 traps slm5650TxTrafficAlarmV1 6247472 slm5650UnitAlarmV1 slm5650RedundancyStateV1 slm5650RedundancyStateV1
6247471
6247473
6247474 slm5650UnitAlarmV2
Alarms and Faults SNMPv2 notification
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.47.2.1.1 slm5650TxTrafficAlarmV2 slm5650RxTrafficAlarmV2 slm5650RedundancyStateV2
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.47.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.47.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.47.2.1.4
6–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Ethernet-Based Management
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
6.4.4 SNMPv3 (NP Interface Only)
When the optional Network Processor (NP)
Interface is installed, the user may activate the
SNMPv3 option by changing the interface’s IP
Interface Security Mode security level setting to
"High". While in this mode, SNMPv1 and
SNMPv2c will not function . Instead of using the public and private community strings identified in Chapter Sect. 6.4.2
, a username and password are defined and used to authenticate and encrypt SNMP communication to and from the modem.
Four parameters are available to configure SNMPv3 on the NP Interface’s Admin | SNMP Web page:
• Engine ID – a 5– to 32–character length hex number that is used to encrypt/decrypt the
SNMP data. The default Engine ID is 0000000c000000007f000001.
• User Name – A user-defined string used to authenticate SNMP communications (the default is comtech ).
• Password – A user-defined string used to authenticate SNMP communications ( the default is comtech ).
• Security Model – Using the drop-down menu, the user has a choice between two security models to authenticate communications: md5 and sha (the default is md5 ).
Note the following:
1.
Although the customer can choose the security model used, there is no choice on the encryption method – data is always encrypted using DESC as a scheme.
2.
The User Name and Password defined here are the ones used in an SNMP client, and are separate from the user name/password used to access the SLM-5650A HTTP/HTTPS/Telnet interfaces.
3.
It is not necessary to change the Engine ID to have an acceptable level of encryption.
However, it should be noted that changing the Engine ID does affect the generation of authentication keys.
6–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Ethernet-Based Management
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
6.5 Telnet Interface
See Chapter 9. NP INTERFACE TELNET/SSH CLI OPERATION for further details on operations via this non-secure interface.
A Telnet interface is provided for the purpose of Equipment M&C via the standard Remote
Control protocol. The Telnet interface requires login at the Administrator and Read/Write User
Access Levels.
An example of the login process is shown in this example to the right:
Once logged into the Telnet interface, the standard remote control interface (as defined in
Appendix C. REMOTE
CONTROL ) is accessible as shown in this next example:
6–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Ethernet-Based Management
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
6.5.1 Telnet Operation via HyperTerminal
There is a disadvantage when using Windows Command-line as a Telnet client. Since Commandline cannot translate a ‘\r’ (i.e., carriage return or “CR”) to a ‘\r\n’ (i.e., CR+line feed “LF”) for the messages coming from Telnet Server, any multi-line Target-to-Controller response (e.g., the response to the FRW? query) will be displayed as one line, with the latter lines overwriting the previous lines.
In order to view the full response messages, CEFD recommends using HyperTerminal configured as Telnet Client. To do so, configure HyperTerminal as follows:
1.
Ensure that connection is made using TCP/IP (Winsock) instead of COM1 or COM2, as shown in the example to the near right.
2.
ASCII Setup (File Properties
Settings ASCII Setup):
Check the " Send line ends with line feeds " option in the ASCII
Sending section and the
“ Append line feeds to incoming line ends " option in the ASCII
Receiving section, as shown in the example to the far right.
Examples of login and remote command/query execution, when using HyperTerminal as the interface, appear as follows:
5650A00000000000000
The Telnet interface is also available for use with the menu-driven Command Line Interface
(CLI) provided with the optional Network Processor (NP) Interface – but only when the security level setting for the NP Interface has been set as “Low”.
6–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Ethernet-Based Management
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
6.6 SSH (Secure Shell) Interface
See Chapter 9. NP INTERFACE TELNET/SSH CLI OPERATION or Chapter 11.
TRANSEC MODULE SSH CLI OPERATION for further details on operations via this secure interface.
When the modem is equipped with the optional NP or TRANSEC Module Interfaces, the security and encryption features for either require that administrative maintenance and control operations are accomplished using a Secure Shell (SSH) Command Line Interface (CLI).
For demonstration purposes, this manual uses PuTTY, a free and open source terminal emulator application used as a serial console client for SSH, Telnet, rlogin and raw TCP computing protocols. While the TRANSEC Module CLI main and nested screens will be identical across terminal emulator applications, setup may differ slightly
– the chapter assumes users’ familiarity with their preferred SSH interface.
To initiate a SSH CLI session:
1.
From the SSH terminal emulation program’s folder, double-click the program filename (e.g., putty.exe), shortcut, icon, etc. to open the SSH application and its configuration window.
2.
(Using PuTTY as the example program) Type in the IP address of the NP Module or TRANSEC
Module interface (in the example to the right, the
Host Name (or IP Address) window) and select
SSH as the Connection Type .
3.
Click Open to open the session. The session login window will appear as per the first example shown below (the default for both user name and password is comtech ).
4.
Once the login is accepted, the user is granted access to the CLI as per the second example shown below.
6–10
Chapter 7. BASE MODEM HTTP
INTERFACE
7.1 Overview
This chapter describes the functionality of the SLM-5650A’s Base Modem HTTP Interface. The operational parameters available from this non-secure interface’s HTTP pages complement operation of the SLM-5650A’s front panel menus.
7.2 Base Modem HTTP Interface Introduction
A user-supplied web browser allows the full monitor and control (M&C) of the SLM-5650A from its Base Modem HTTP Interface. The SLM-5650A’s embedded web applications are designed for, and work best with, Microsoft’s Internet Explorer Version 5.5 or higher (the examples shown use Internet Explorer Version 7.0).
See Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION and the Remote Commands Specifications tables found in Appendix D. REMOTE CONTROL for detailed descriptions of the configuration parameters featured on the individual HTTP pages shown in this chapter.
7.2.1 HTTP Interface Availability via Secure Management Interfaces
Chapter 8.6 NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) HTTP/HTTPS INTERFACE
Chapter 10. TRANSEC MODULE HTTPS INTERFACE
The Management Security option is not available for the SLM-5650A’s base modem operations.
Non-secure network management operations therefore apply as follows:
• Non-secure Serial-based network management is allowed via Telnet, using the Base
Modem’s J10 Remote EIA-232/485 Type ‘DB-9F’ serial port.
• Non-secure Ethernet-based network management is allowable via the HTTP Interface browser and SNMPv2 interfaces, using the Base Modem’s J5 Ethernet RJ-45 port.
For modems with installed upgrades (i.e., the Network Processor (NP) Interface and/or the
TRANSEC Module Interface), enhanced Web interface functionality is afforded through the dedicated HTTP/HTTPS interfaces provided with those upgrades. The NP HTTP/HTTPS
Interface, specifically, is designed to be used as an enhanced version of the Base Modem HTTP
Interface featured in this chapter.
7–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
7.2.2 User Login
To initiate a standard HTTP session over the Base Modem HTTP Interface: From the PC type http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
(where “ xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
” represents the IP address of the SLM-5650A
Satellite Modem) into the Address area of the Web browser:
You are then prompted to type in a valid User name and Password , similar to the dialog box shown to the right. For all interfaces, the default for both is comtech .
Type the User name and Password , and then click [OK].
Once the valid User name and Password is accepted, the browser window displays the
SLM-5650A Base Modem HTTP Interface “splash” (Home) page:
7–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
7.2.3 HTTP Interface – Operational Features
7.2.3.1 Navigation
This manual uses a naming format for all HTTP pages to indicate the depth of navigation needed to view the referenced page: “ Top Level Tab | HTTP Page Hyperlink .”
For example: “ Home | Support ” is interpreted to mean “ first click the top-level ‘ Home ’ navigation tab; then , click the ‘ Support ’ page hyperlink.
Roll the cursor over the navigation tabs located at the top of each page, and then select from the available hyperlinks.
7.2.3.2 HTTP Page Sections
Each page is divided into operational content sections.
Whether there is one section to a page, or there are multiple sections, the title at the upper-left corner of each page and its sections provide a reference to its operational features.
This manual explains the purpose and operation for each HTTP page on a per-page, per-section basis. For detailed information, see Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION or Appendix
C. REMOTE CONTROL.
7.2.3.3 Execution Buttons
Configuration changes generally do not take effect until a selection has been saved to Flash memory. There may be anywhere from one execution button per page up to multiple execution buttons within a page section. The label for each of these buttons is generally self-explanatory, e.g., [Submit] ,
[Clear] , [Refresh ], etc.
All execution buttons serve the same purpose – to save the configuration changes to Flash memory, or to execute an update of the active page display.
Always make sure to click the execution button before selecting another HTTP page. Any changes made on that previous page will not be saved if the execution button for those functions is not clicked.
7–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
7.2.3.4 Feature Selection
Drop-down menus provide access to multiple setting selections, where available, for a specific function. Move the cursor to the drop-down tab, and then left-click the tab.
The drop-down will open and list the available selections.
Move the cursor to the desired choice and then left-click once again to select that choice.
7.2.3.5 Text or Data Entry
Text boxes are provided any time an alphanumeric entry is required for access or configuration.
Move the cursor to the text box, and then left-click anywhere inside the box. Then, use the keyboard to type in the desired alphanumeric string. Press Enter when done.
7.2.4 HTTP Interface Menu Tree
The following menu tree illustrates the options available via the Base Modem HTTP Interface:
Home Admin Config Mdm Stats Maint
Home
Contact
Support
Access
Remote
Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
Modem Status
Event Log
Statistics
Unit Info
Spreading
AUPC
Config Log
Router Stats
Ether Stats
This interface provides access to five navigation tabs (shown in blue):
• Home • Admin (Administration • Config Mdm (Modem Configuration)
• Stats • Maint (Maintenance)
Beyond this top-level row of navigation tabs, the diagram illustrates the available nested hyperlinks (shown in grey) that afford more specific user functionality.
Click any tab or hyperlink to continue.
7–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
7.3 SLM-5650A Base Modem HTTP Interface Page Descriptions
7.3.1 Home pages
Select the Home , Contact , or Support hyperlink to continue.
7.3.1.1 Home | Home
From any location within the SLM-5650A Base Modem HTTP Interface, click the Home top navigation tab and/or the nested hyperlink to return back to this top-level page. Use this page to identify the product and its current operating firmware version.
Figure 7-1. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem Home page
7–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
7.3.1.2 Home | Contact
Use this page to reference the basic contact information needed to reach Comtech EF Data Sales and Customer Support via phone, fax, or Web/e-mail hyperlinks.
Figure 7-2. Home | Contact page
7–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
7.3.1.3 Home | Support
For this page to operate correctly, the modem’s administrator is required to specify the SMTP server, domain name, and destination on the Admin | Access page (see
Chapter Sect. 7.3.2.1).
This page uses SMTP (Simple Mail Transport Protocol) to compose and send an e-mail message to Comtech EF Data Modem Support ( [email protected]
). Use this communications portal for questions about or problems with the modem.
Figure 7-3. Home | Support page
Contact Information
Use this section to provide your contact information to Comtech EF Data.
Problem Report
Use this section to compose the required message – up to 256 characters maximum are permitted.
Once the desired message is created (and the pertinent Contact Information has been filled in), click [Submit Email] to send the message.
7–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
7.3.2 Admin pages
The Administrator may use these pages to: Set up user names, passwords, the e-mail server, and the host IP Addresses as required to facilitate communication with the SLM-5650A Base Modem
HTTP Interface.
The Admin pages are available only to users who have logged in using the
Administrator Name and Password.
Click the Access or Remote hyperlink to continue.
7.3.2.1 Admin | Access
Figure 7-4. Admin | Access page
Click [Submit Admin] once the desired configuration settings have been made on this page.
7–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
7.3.2.2 Admin | Remote
Chapter 6.4 SNMP INTERFACE
Use this page to set and return administration information for the SLM-5650A Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) feature.
Figure 7-5. Admin | Remote page
Click [Submit Admin] to save any changes made on this page.
7–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
7.3.3 Config Mdm (Modem Configuration) pages
The ‘ Config Mdm ’ pages are used to configure the Modulator, Demodulator, and installed interfaces (e.g., EIA-530, HSSI, Balanced and Unbalanced G.703, Gigabit Ethernet, Network
Processor, and LVDS).
Select the Page 1 , Page 2 , Page 3 , Spreading , or AUPC hyperlink to continue.
7.3.3.1 Config Mdm | Page 1
Use this page to configure modem configuration parameters including Modem Operating Mode;
Transmit/Receive; Tx Power Level; and DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier (CnC).
Figure 7-6. Config Mdm | Modem Config (Page 1)
Click [Submit] as needed in each section to save any changes.
7–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
7.3.3.2 Config Mdm | Page 2
Use this page to configure modem operating parameters, including Date and Time; Redundancy;
Test Mode; Miscellaneous Tx and Rx Parameters; Circuit ID; and Configurations.
Figure 7-7. Config Mdm | Modem Utilities (Page 2)
Click [Submit] as needed in each section to save any changes.
7–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
7.3.3.3 Config Mdm | Page 3 (FAST Feature required)
Use this page to allow configuration – when this FAST feature is enabled – of the optional
Antenna Handover feature.
Figure 7-8. Config Mdm | Modem Utilities (Page 3)
Click [Submit] to save any changes made on this page.
7–12
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
7.3.3.4 Config Mdm | Spreading (FAST Feature required)
Section D.9 Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) in Appendix D. MODEM
OPTIONS
Use this page to allow configuration – when this FAST feature is enabled – of the optional Direct
Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) spectrum spreading and anti-jamming applications.
Figure 7-9. Config Mdm | Spreading page
7–13
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface
7.3.3.5 Config Mdm | AUPC (Automatic Uplink Power Control)
Use this page to enable the A utomatic U plink P ower C ontrol (AUPC) feature.
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure 7-10. Config Mdm | Automatic Uplink Power Control page
AUPC enables the modem to automatically adjust its output power to maintain as constant the
Eb/No of the remote end of the satellite link. This provides protection against rain fading, a particularly severe problem with Ku-Band links.
You must use the AUPC mode of operation to accomplish this protective adjustment. With
AUPC mode enabled, the distant end modem constantly sends back information about the demodulator Eb/No, using reserved bytes in the overhead structure. The local modem uses Eb/No to adjust its output power, and a closed-loop feedback system is created over the satellite link.
7–14
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
7.3.4 Stats (Statistics) pages
The Stats (Statistics) pages provide read-only status windows: General operating and configuration information about the modem; Installed Options (FAST, assorted Interface modules, etc.); Alarms; Tx and Rx Parameters; and Ethernet information.
Select the Modem Status , Event Log , Statistics , Config Log , Router Stats , or Ether Stats hyperlink to continue.
7.3.4.1 Stats | Modem Status
Use this read-only page to view the modem’s current configuration and operation parameters:
• General Information
• Installed Options
• Live Faults
• Rx Parameters
• Modem Symbol Rates
• Assigned Ethernet MAC and IP Addresses.
Figure 7-11. Stats | Modem Status page
7–15
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface
7.3.4.2 Stats | Event Log
Use this read-only page to view a scrollable display of recorded modem events.
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure 7-12. Stats | Modem Event Log page
Modem Event Log
• (Event #) Date / Time: The first three columns display the event by the order in which it was logged, along with the date and time the event was recorded.
• Type: The event is identified by its type in this column. Four event types are classified: o Info o Unit .
o Tx Traffic o Rx Traffic .
• Code: Click on a hyperlinked fault code to display a page that describes the error code bit positions.
Click [Refresh] to update the display with the most recently logged events.
Click [ Clear Log] to clear the log. Once the log is cleared, the next time [Refresh] is clicked any new events are logged and numbered beginning with ‘1’.
7–16
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface
7.3.4.3 Stats | Statistics
Use this read-only page view a scrollable display of recorded modem statistics.
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure 7-13. Stats | Modem Statistics Log page
Modem Statistics Log
• (Statistic #) Date / Time: The first three columns display the statistics by the order in which it was logged, along with the date and time the event was recorded.
• Min Eb/No
• Avg Eb/No
Click [Refresh] to update the display with the most recently logged statistics.
Click [ Clear Log] to clear the log of all visible statistics. Once the log is cleared, the next time
[Refresh] is clicked any new statistics will be logged beginning with the number ‘1’.
7–17
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
7.3.4.4 Stats | Config Log
Use this read-only page to view a scrollable display of a number of configuration change logs.
Figure 7-14. Stats | Configuration Change Log page
Configuration Change Log
Select a feature to query from the drop-down menu, and then click [ Refresh] to display the attribute statistics for that feature. The available change log pages are as follows:
• Logging Off • SNMP .
• Front Panel • Telnet .
• Serial Remote • NP Mailbox
• Web • TRANSEC Mailbox
The visible display provides the selected configuration change log information:
• Date / Time / Command
• Date / Time / Response
• Intf
Click [ Clear Log] to clear the visible display.
7–18
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
7.3.4.5 Stats | Router Stats
Use this read-only page to view statistics for the modem FPGA, and the Ethernet operating statistics for the modem WAN ports, M&C ports, and when the optional Network Processor (NP)
Interface is installed, the NP Interface’s LAN ports 1 through 4.
Figure 7-15. Stats | Router Statistics page
Router Statistics
Select a feature to query from the drop-down menu, and then click [ Refresh] to display the attribute statistics for that feature.
In the example shown at right, LAN Port 2 (on the optional
NP Interface) queries, and then displays the most recent statistics for NP Interface LAN Port 2:
Click [ Clear Stats] to reset the statistics counts for the visible display.
On the next page, Table 7-1 defines the seven selectable pages of statistics available via the dropdown menu.
7–19
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Table 7-1. Summary of Attributes for Router Stats Pages
Stats Selection / Feature Page
FPGA
(Ethernet)
LAN Port 1
(NP Interface Traffic
Port marked as 1)
LAN Port 2
(NP Interface Traffic
Port marked as 2)
LAN Port 3
(NP Interface Traffic
Port marked as 3)
LAN Port 4
(NP Interface Traffic
Port marked as 4)
WAN
(Traffic port connected to satellite interface)
Management
(Management port for accessing M&C)
Attribute
FPGA Link Errors
FPGA Overrun Errors
Description
The count of received frames that did not match the proprietary HDLC address, bad HDLC CRC, bad alignment, and under run.
Count of received frames that exceeded max frame length of 2K bytes in length.
FPGA Rx Packet count
Total number of received frames.
FPGA Overflow Errors
Count of received frames that overflowed the HDLC buffer.
FPGA TX Packet counts
Total Number of transmitted frames.
Good Octets (in)
Bad Octets (in)
Unicast (in)
Broadcast (in)
Multicast (in)
Pause (in)
Undersize (In)
Fragments (in)
Oversized (in)
Jabber (in)
Rx Err (in)
FCS (in)
Octets (Out)
Unicast (Out)
Broadcast (out)
Multicast (Out)
Total good Ethernet frames received, that is frames that are not bad frames.
Total bad Ethernet frames received.
The number of good frames received that have a
Unicast destination GMAC address
The number of good frames received that have a broadcast destination GMAC address.
The number of good frames that have multicast destination GMAC address.
Note: this address not included 802.3 Flow Control messages counted in Pause (In) or does it included
Broadcast frames counted in Broadcast (in).
The number of good Flow Control frames received.
Total frames received with length of less than 64 octets but with valid FCS.
Total frames received with length of less than 64 octets but with invalid FCS.
Total frames received with length of more than
Maxsize (1643 in bridge mode and 1522 in all other modes) but with valid FCS.
Total frames received with length of more than
Maxsize (1643 in bridge mode and 1522 in all other modes) but with invalid FCS.
Total frames received with RxErr signal from PHY.
Total Frames received with a CRC error not counted in Fragments (In), Jabber (In) or RxErr (In).
Total Ethernet frames sent from this GMAC
The number of frames sent that have a Unicast destination GMAC address.
The number of frames sent that have a Broadcast destination GMAC address.
The number of frames sent that have a Multicast destination GMAC address.
7–20
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
7.3.4.6 Stats | Ether Stats
Use this read-only page to view the base modem’s Ethernet statistics. The most commonly used statistics are provided on pages accessed via the drop-down menu.
Figure 7-16. Stats | Modem Ethernet Statistics page
Modem Ethernet Statistics
Select a page to query from the drop-down menu, and then click [ Refresh] to display the attribute statistics for that feature. The available statistics pages are as follows:
• Arp Table • TCP Stats
• IP Stats
• ICMP Stats
•
•
IP IF Stats
ARP Stats
• UDP Stats • ENET Stats
For example, if UDP Stats are queried, the resultant statistics appear as follows:
7–21
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
7.3.5 Maint (Maintenance) | Unit Info
Use this read-only page to view a scrollable status window that contains the modem’s firmware information for Boot, Active and Inactive Bulks.
Figure 7-17. Maint | Unit Information page
7–22
Chapter 8. NETWORK
PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE
8.1 Introduction
Figure 8-1. Network Processor (NP) Interface Module
The optional SLM-5650A Network Processor (NP) Interface Module (also referred to as the “NP
Interface” or the “card”), shown in Figure 8-1 , is Comtech EF Data’s third generation IP router and Ethernet bridge device. The NP Interface supports a number of primary operating modes:
• Layer 2 Ethernet Bridge Mode
• Layer 2 and Layer 3 SCPC Ethernet BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode
• Layer 2 and Layer 3 Vipersat BPM Mode
• Layer 3 SCPC IP Router Mode
• Layer 3 Vipersat STDMA Router Mode
The NP Interface is designed to process more than 150,000 packets per second (pps) in Layer 2,
Layer 3, or BPM mode of operation. It provides four RJ-45 connectors for user data, wired as described in Table 8-1 . The NP Interface also has a single RJ-11 console interface that is intended only for factory-use initial interface configuration.
The Maximum Ethernet Frame size for the SLM-5650A is 1636 bytes for Bridge Mode or 1514 bytes for Router Mode.
To prevent network failure, there should be no more than one Ethernet connection to a single external switch at any time.
8–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
User access to management and control of the NP Interface via the built-in HTTP/HTTPS
Interface or Telnet server (port 23) is possible using the available RJ-45 connectors (see Figure
8-2) as follows:
• When in Router Mode , access is possible using any of the NP Interface RJ-45 Ports 1 through 4.
• When in BPM Mode (see Chapter Sect. 8.5
), only the base modem’s J5 Ethernet RJ-
45 port can be used for management and control.
8.2 Functional Hardware Description
The NP Interface employs the very high performance Intel IXP2350 network processor/32-bit microcontroller with four embedded MicroEngines to perform the high-speed Layer 3 routing functions.
A functional block diagram is provided in Figure 8-2 . The front-end of the NP Interface design incorporates a Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) switch device that provides all Layer 2 management. The back-end of the NP Interface design incorporates an FPGA to provide the WAN framing and deframing, plus the interface into the main SLM-5650A modem design.
Figure 8-2. NP Interface Block Diagram
8–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
8.2.1 Connector Pinout
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The LAN interface is comprised of four IEEE 802.3ab 10/100/1000 BaseT copper interfaces via four female RJ-45 connectors wired as shown in Table 8-1 .
Table 8-1. LAN Interface Connector Pinout (Typical)
Pin #
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
8
Description
BI_DA+
BI_DA-
BI_DB+
BI_DC+
BI_DC-
BI_DB-
BI_DD+
BI_DD-
Direction
Bidirectional
8.3 Interface Specifications
8.3.1 Physical Description
Dimensions
Connectors
Indicators
4.5 W x 6.8 D x .85 H inches (11.43 W x 17.27 D x 2.16H cm)
SLM-5650A connection: (1) 96-pin DIN receptacle
Console interface for board bring-up and factory use only:
(1) RJ-11 connector
LAN interface: (4) RJ-45 female connectors, 100 Ω
Link Status and Activity Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
8.3.2 General Specifications
Data Framing
Data Framing Format (WAN)
Electrical Properties
Max Ethernet Frame
Packet Types
Signal Types
Voltage Level
Packet Latency
Cable Length, Maximum
Hot Pluggable
10/100/1000 BaseT Interface: RFC-894 “Ethernet”
CEFD proprietary
Per IEEE 802.3ab
1636 Bytes (Bridge mode)
1541 Bytes (Router mode)
Burst, distributed, or IPV4
Serial data
Per IEEE- 802.3ab
50 ms maximum
100 meters CAT 5 cable, patch cords and connecting hardware, per ISO/IEC
11801:1995 and ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-A (1995)
Card – No
Cable – Yes
8–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
8.4 NP Interface Module Removal and Installation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Ensure that the unit is POWERED OFF. Serious injury or damage to the equipment could result if the unit is powered during module removal or installation.
Care must be taken not to damage the module’s components during removal or installation.
8.4.1 NP Interface Module Removal Procedure
Step
1
2
3
4
Task
Turn off the power to the modem.
Disconnect the RJ-45 cable(s) from the NP Interface Module.
Loosen the (two) captive thumb screws securing the module to the chassis.
Remove the module by pulling it straight out until it is clear of the chassis slot.
8.4.2 NP Interface Module Installation Procedure
Step
1
2
3
4
Task
Install the NP Interface Module by inserting it straight into the chassis slot, using the chassis’ internal card guides, until it plugs securely into the internal card receptacle.
Secure the module to the chassis using the (two) captive thumb screws.
Connect the RJ-45 cable(s) to the module.
Turn on the power to the modem.
8–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
8.5 BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode
Networks where modems traditionally act as routers – e.g., Vipersat-based satellite communications systems – and include encryption devices are sometimes incompatible or require difficult and unwieldy configurations. Additionally, the NP Interface limits the number of allowable route tables.
This, in turn, can limit the overall size of the network, particularly when OSPF (O pen S hortest P ath
F irst) dynamic routing protocol is used in the NP Interface.
In order to increase the flexibility and scalability of the satellite network with SLM-5650A modems, the optional BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode is a feature available with NP
Interface operation whereby Layer 2 and Layer 3 networks can operate simultaneously. When
BPM Mode is selected, users can operate two independent Layer2 networks and one Layer3 network simultaneously without interfering with each other.
See Appendix E. APPLICATION EXAMPLES for in-depth information about using this optional FAST Feature.
8.6 Network Processor (NP) HTTP/HTTPS Interface
The remainder of this chapter describes the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface functionality that not only integrates a good portion of the SLM-5650A Base Modem HTTP Interface non-secure operations (outlined in detail in the previous chapter), but also provide operations unique to the NP
HTTP/HTTPS Interface.
8.6.1 HTTP/HTTPS Interface Introduction
The pages for the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface have been designed to work using either
Microsoft’s Internet Explorer Version 7.0 or higher, or Mozilla Firefox Version 2.0 or higher.
(The examples shown in this chapter use Internet Explorer Version 7.0 – most, but not all, pages will display properly with Internet Explorer Version 6.0.)
Operation of the Network Processor may be fully monitored and controlled from the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface. By rolling the cursor over the tabs located at the top of each page, the user can select from the available nested hyperlinks (as shown to the right).
In order to make any Network Processor modifications permanent, all changes made on any of the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface pages must be saved before rebooting the unit.
8.6.2 HTTP/HTTPS Interface Availability via Secure Management Interfaces
Non-secure and secure network management operations are controlled by the Interface Security
Mode setting provided on the Admin | Security page (see Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.3
for more information). Its use is dependent on the options installed in the SLM-5650A Base Modem.
8–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
When the SLM-5650A is equipped with the Network Processor (NP) Interface only , Management
Security is an optional feature.
8.6.2.1 Secure Management – NP Interface Only
When the optional NP Interface is installed in the SLM-5650A without the optional TRANSEC
Module Interface, Management Security is optional and the following secure network management operating alternatives apply:
• When Management Security is disabled (i.e., Low Level Security is selected ): o Non-secure serial-based network management is allowed for the Base Modem via
Telnet, using the J10 Remote EIA-232/485 Type ‘DB-9F’ serial port and the menudriven Command Line Interface (CLI). o Non-secure Ethernet-based network management is supported over the NP Interface using the HTTP (non-secure) Web browser and SNMPv2.
When the modem is operating in Router Mode, a number of Base Modem M&C parameters are available via the NP HTTP Interface. Similarly, a limited number of status-only NP parameters are viewable over the Base Modem HTTP Interface.
When the modem is operating in BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) or Dynamic
Point-to-Point (DPP) Mode, NP Interface Ethernet ports P1 through P4 transparently bridge data traffic, and network management is only possible using the Base
Modem’s J5 Ethernet port.
• When Management Security is enabled (i.e., High Level Security is selected ): o Secure network management is supported by the NP Interface, but not by the Base
Modem. The Base Modem’s J5 Ethernet port (external Ethernet connectivity to the
Base Modem) is disabled . o Secure Ethernet-based network management is supported over HTTPS via Secure
Socket Layer (SSL); Secure Shell (SSH) menu-driven Command Line Interface
(CLI); and SNMPv3.
When the modem is operating in Router Mode, a number of Base Modem parameters are available via the NP HTTPS Interface.
When the modem is operating in BPM or DPP Mode, NP Interface Ethernet ports P1 through P4 transparently bridge data traffic, and network management is only possible using the J5 Ethernet port on the Base Modem.
When the modem is operating in (Static) Bridge Mode, Ethernet communication between the Base Modem and the NP Interface is disabled, as the Base Modem does not support secure network management interfaces.
8–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
8.6.2.2 Secure Management – NP Interface PLUS TRANSEC Module
Interface
When the optional NP Interface is installed in the SLM-5650A in tandem with the optional
TRANSEC Module Interface and with Management Security enabled . The network management operating restrictions as previously described (i.e., when High Level Security is selected) therefore always apply. Additionally, the NP HTTPS Interface provides a status parameter associated with the TRANSEC Module – a second TRANSEC Key.
The TRANSEC Module Interface provides a proxy function of HTTPS connections to the Base
Modem and the NP Interface; a secure HTTPS connection to the TRANSEC Module therefore enables user access to all Base Modem and/or all NP M&C parameters securely through this indirect proxy connection. The Secure Management interfaces supported by this configuration are summarized as follows:
Base Modem Network Processor Interface TRANSEC Module
HTTPS Proxy via TRANSEC Module HTTPS
SSH
SNMPv3
HTTPS (Proxy via TRANSEC Module)
HTTPS
SSH
8.6.3 User Login
Access to the SLM-5650A’s NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface depends on the IP Interface Security
Mode setting selected for the interface (via the Admin | Security page – see Chapter Sect.
8.6.6.2.3
for more information).
From any compatible Web browser, enter the NP Interface IP Address into the browser’s
Address area as follows (where “ xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
” represents the IP Address of the NP Interface):
• For non-secure HTTP session (Low Level Security selected) – http:// xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx;
• For secure HTTPS session (High Level Security selected) – https:// xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.
When prompted, type in a valid User Name and Password, similar to the dialog box shown to the right. The default for both is comtech . Click [OK] to continue.
Note: The NP Interface User Name and Password are each restricted to a minimum of 7 characters and a maximum of 25 characters, excluding < (ASCII Code 60), > (ASCII Code 62), “
(ASCII Code 34), and ~ (ASCII Code 126).
8–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Once the valid User Name and
Password is accepted, the NP
HTTP/HTTPS Interface displays its
“splash” page similar to the example shown at right:
8.6.4 HTTP/HTTPS Interface – Operational Features
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
See Sect. 7.2.3 HTTP Interface – Operational Features for an overview of the navigational and operational features common with using this interface.
8.6.5 HTTP/HTTPS Menu Tree
The following menu tree illustrates the options available via the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface:
Info Admin Modem LAN WAN Routing Stats Vipersat* Redundancy Save
Home
Contact
Logoff
Vipersat
Mode*
FAST
Features
Security
SNMP
Config
Monitor
Events
Stats
Interface
Ethernet
Ports
ARP
QoS*
QoS
Stats*
Loopback
Test
Routes
OSPF
IGMP
Ethernet
Tx
Ethernet
Rx
IP
WAN
Vipersat
STDMA
Stats
Switching
1:1
Redundancy
Save
Upgrade Utility Clear All
Defaults
Time
DPC
Home
State
Event Log
Reboot
This interface provides access to up to 10 navigation tabs (shown in blue). The diagram further illustrates each tab’s available nested hyperlinks (shown in grey), which afford more specific functionality.
• Info • Admin • Modem • LAN • WAN
• Routing • Stats • Vipersat* • Redundancy • Save
8–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Note: * indicates a FAST Feature that is available on the interface only after that option has been purchased. Refer to Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.2 Admin | FAST Features for more information.
Click any tab or hyperlink to continue.
8.6.6 HTTP/HTTPS Page Descriptions
8.6.6.1 Info (Information) pages
Select the Home , Contact , or Logoff hyperlink to continue.
8.6.6.1.1 Info | Home
Use this page to identify pertinent information about the SLM-5650A NP Interface, including the installed firmware for the Bootrom, Image 1, and Image 2.
Figure 8-3. Info | Home Page
8–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
8.6.6.1.2 Info | Contact
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Use this page to reference basic contact information needed to reach Comtech EF Data Sales and
Customer Support via phone, fax, or Web/e-mail hyperlinks
Figure 8-4. Info | Contact page
8.6.6.1.3 Info | Log Off
Use this page to formally disconnect from the interface.
Figure 8-5. Info | Logoff page
At the prompt, click [YES, Logoff Now] to execute the logoff process.
Upon disconnection, you will be required to close the Web browser in order to delete the Network Processor’s security cookie.
8–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
8.6.6.2 Admin (Administration) pages
Depending on the enabled features and options, select the Vipersat Mode , FAST Features ,
Security , SNMP , Upgrade , Defaults , Time , Event Log , or Reboot hyperlink to continue.
8.6.6.2.1 Admin | Vipersat Mode (FAST Feature required)
Use this page to specify how the modem/NP Interface is to behave in Vipersat or non-Vipersat working modes. Once the role of a particular modem in the network is determined, this single point of configuration is intended to simplify deployment.
Figure 8-6. Admin | Vipersat Mode page
Vipersat Modes
Consult adjunct Comtech EF Data publication MN-0000035 Vipersat SLM-5650A
Satellite Network Modem Router User Guide for configuration and use of these optional features.
This FAST Feature-enabled page allows the user to select the following Vipersat modes:
• Vipersat Hub Router
• Vipersat Hub Expansion Router
• Vipersat Remote Router
• Vipersat Remote Expansion Router
8–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Non-Vipersat Multipoint Modes
Item
Multipoint Hub Router
Multipoint Remote Router
Description
When in static SCPC (non-Vipersat mode), the option exists for configuring the modems into a hub and spoke network with a shared outbound at the hub. All of the modems at the hub should be put in “Multipoint Hub Router” mode.
Note: If a modem at the remote is configured to be a Hub router there will be significant degradation to network performance due to the potential for routing loops.
Select Multipoint Remote Router for all remote modems in a non-Vipersat multipoint network. A Remote router would be classified as a modem which receives the shared outbound and transmits back to the hub on a dedicated SCPC channel
Non-Vipersat Point-to-Point Mode
Item
Point-to-Point Router
Description
Select for use in a Point-to-Point SCPC link where there are different IP subnets on either side of the link.
Routing Mode
Item Description
Gigabit Ethernet Bridge
Router
BPM
Select for use in a Point-to-Point SCPC link when you wish to bridge traffic (no IP network routing).
Note: This mode is currently only compatible with the Gigabit Ethernet bridge card for the
SLM-5650A. Ethernet communication between the Base Modem and the NP Interface is disabled, as the Base Modem does not support secure network management interfaces
When the modem is operating in Router Mode, a number of Base Modem M&C parameters are available via the NP HTTP Interface. Similarly, a limited number of status-only NP parameters are viewable over the Base Modem HTTP Interface.
When BPM Mode is selected, the NP Interface Ethernet ports P1 through P4 transparently bridge data traffic, and network management is only possible using the
Base Modem’s J5 Ethernet port.
Note: In BPM Mode, the Gigabit Ethernet Bridge option becomes inaccessible and the appearance of the Routing Mode section changes as follows:
Click [Submit] once the appropriate Vipersat or non-Vipersat operating mode is selected on this page.
8–12
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
8.6.6.2.2 Admin | FAST Features
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
This section describes the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface with Vipersat, Quality of Service (QoS), and Management Security installed on the SLM-5650A.
If the SLM-5650A does not have these QoS or Vipersat FAST options installed, the
QoS and QoS Stats hyperlinks located under the WAN navigation tab, and the hyperlinks located under the Vipersat navigation tab will not be visible/available to the user.
If the SLM-5650A does not have the Management Security FAST option installed, the
“IP Interface Security Mode” and “SSH” sections on the Admin | Security page and the
“SNMP v3” section on the Admin | SNMP page will not be visible.
This read-only page displays available FAST Features as Installed or Not Installed .
Figure 8-7. Admin | FAST Features page
Network Processor and Modem FAST Features
Comtech EF Data offers Vipersat , Management Security , NP BPM , Quality of Service (QoS) ,
NP OW Serial Commands , and NP Antenna Handover functionality as optional FAST
Features for the NP Interface. The modem’s Demodulator Only FAST feature status is also provided. To install these options, a modem FAST code must be purchased by contacting
Comtech EF Data Customer Support.
Once the 20-digit modem FAST code is obtained, the purchased FAST Feature(s) is installed via the SLM-5650A front panel ( Utility: FAST Configuration Enter modem code ).
See Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION for detailed information on installing FAST
Features.
Upgrading the FAST features requires a modem reboot in order for FAST features to be activated, and may require reconfiguration of all modem parameters.
8–13
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
8.6.6.2.3 Admin | Security (Account Information)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The Admin user may use this page to control access to all base modem HTTP and NP Interface
HTTP/HTTPS pages. However, the Admin user does not have access to the optional TRANSEC
Module parameters; this functionality is only available via the Crypto Officer login provided separately on the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface. See Chapter 10. TRANSEC MODULE
HTTPS INTERFACE for further information.
Figure 8-8. Admin | Security (Management Security) page
Admin Account Info
The login process requires a name and password as defined by the systems administrator of the controlling equipment. This name and password is associated to the name and password of an administrator account. Set the desired Admin User Name and Admin Password for the administrator account, and then click [Submit] to apply these settings.
Note: The Admin User Name and Password settings are maintained separately from the IP
Interface Security Mode and SSH sections on this page.
IP Interface Security Mode
The desired IP Interface Security Mode can be set to either Low Level Security for HTTP/FTP/
SNMP/Telnet access, or High Level Security for HTTPS/SSH (Secure Shell) access only. Click
[Submit] to apply this setting. More specifically:
• When Management Security is set to Low Level Security , the NP Interface can be managed by non-secure protocols such as HTTP and Telnet.
• When Management Security is set to High Level Security , the following restrictions apply:
8–14
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A o The NP Interface can ONLY be managed via the secure HTTPS protocol – the the https:// address prefix must be specified in order to connect to the secure NP
HTTPS Interface. o Access via Telnet is not permitted – however, while access to the CLI is not permitted via the Telnet interface, the CLI is accessible via the SSH interface; o Access to the SLM-5650A HTTP and FTP server is disabled since non-secure protocols are used.
Management Security can also be changed via the SLM-5650A front panel:
SELECT: Configuration Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Network Proc Security
See Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION for detailed information on using this modem control interface.
SSH (Secure Shell)
SSH Host Key: This key signature, or fingerprint, helps to identify the NP when connecting through SSH. SSH clients typically show the host key signature when they connect to a system for the first time. The host key the SSH client shows can then be compared with the host key the
NP displays to verify that they are the same.
Click [Generate New Host Key] to generate a new host key that uniquely identifies the NP.
After doing this, SSH clients that have connected to the NP before will usually note or warn that the host key has changed when they connect again.
8–15
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
8.6.6.2.4 Admin | SNMP
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The Admin user may use this page to change the parameters associated with Simple Network
Management Protocol , an application-layer protocol designed to facilitate the exchange of management information between network devices. The SLM-5650A SNMP agent supports
SNMPv1, SNMP v2c, and SNMP v3. See Chapter 6.4 SNMP Interface for complete details on
SNMP and using this page.
Figure 8-9. Admin | SNMP page
SNMP
SNMP Read Community and SNMP Write Community cannot be changed; the default for Read
Community default is public ; the Write Community default is private .
Click [Submit] to enable the SNMP configuration changes made to Trap Community, Trap ,
System Contact , and System Location .
SNMP v3
This section is used to create user accounts under SNMPv3 protocol. SNMPv3 is available only when the IP Interface Security Mode security level setting is set to “High”.
Using the provided text boxes, create an Engine ID (the default is 0000000c000000007f000001 ),
User Name and Password as needed (the default for both is comtech ) then, using the available drop-down menu, select the Security Model algorithm as md5 or sha . Note that this setting must match the setting in the SNMP client, or the SLM-5650A will not allow communications.
Click [Submit] to enable the SNMP v3 configuration changes made in this section.
8–16
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
8.6.6.2.5 Admin | Upgrade
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Use this page to review information about and accessibility to the loaded NP Interface and modem firmware (i.e., the Bootrom and image files), and to upgrade the operational firmware for the interface.
Figure 8-10. Admin | Upgrade page
Network Processor Firmware Info
These fields display the installed NP Interface Firmware (all information is read only ):
Item Description
Network Processor Bootrom
A single Bootrom that initializes the hardware and loads the full bulk image as selected by the user.
Network Processor Image 1 A full copy of software image stored in slot 1.
Network Processor Image 2 A full copy of software image stored in slot 2.
Modem Firmware Info
These fields display installed SLM-5650A base modem firmware for the Bootrom, Image 1, and
Image 2
(all information is read only )
.
Upgrade
See Chapter 4. FLASH UPGRADING for complete details on using the NP HTTP/HTTPS
Interface for upgrading the base modem, NP Interface and TRANSEC Module firmware.
8–17
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Item
Current Running
Upgrade To
Upgrade Image File
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Description
( read only ) – displays current NP Interface Firmware Image as defined on the
Admin | Reboot page (e.g., Image1 or Image2).
( read only ) – displays the NP Interface Firmware Image that will be overwritten with the new image as defined on the Admin | Reboot page (e.g., Image1 or
Image2).
Click [Browse] to locate the bulk image on the local computer’s file system, and then click [Upload] to upload the image.
8.6.6.2.6 Admin | Defaults
Use this page to restore all previously-configured modem parameters – with the exception of the
Admin User Name and the Admin Password (see Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.3) – to their Factory
Default Configuration settings.
Figure 8-11. Admin | Defaults (Factory Default Configurations) page
Click [Restore Now] to begin the restoration process.
At the user prompt (shown at right), click OK to execute the process, or Cancel to abort the command.
8–18
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
8.6.6.2.7 Admin | Time (Date and Time)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure 8-12. Admin | Time (Date & Time) page
Time Zone
Use the drop-down menu to select the modem’s time zone, and then click [Submit] to save the setting.
Internet Time
Use the drop-down menu to select automatic time synchronization (using network time protocol) as Enabled or Disabled , and then click [Submit] to save the setting.
Internet Time Servers
These fields are editable only when the Internet Time synchronization has been Enabled .
Item Description
Primary Internet Time Server IP Address of primary network time server.
Secondary Internet Time Server IP Address of secondary network time server.
Edit each address as needed, and then click [Submit] to save these settings.
8–19
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Current Date & Time
Item
Current Date / Current Time
Internet Time Status
Update Date & Time
Description
These fields display the date and time as of the moment this page was accessed .
The current date and time of the modem is set from the modem’s front panel and kept current using a battery back-up clock. This means that the date and time will be correct even if the modem loses power.
This displays the status of network time server (if NTP is enabled).
Click [Update Now] to refresh the Current Date and Current Time displays.
8.6.6.2.8 Admin | Event Log
Use this page to view logged events specific to the NP Interface, and to monitor or troubleshoot the health of the interface and any issues found in the field.
Figure 8-13. Admin | Event Log page
Clear Event Log
Click [Clear Log] to delete all existing log entries. The event log is reset to one (1) entry:
“ Eventlog Cleared ”.
Event Logging
• Logging On/Off – Enables/disables logging of event messages.
• Logging Level – Allows the filtering of the highest displayed message level. Choices are
Errors Only , Errors and Warnings , and All Information .
Click [Submit] to execute these settings.
8–20
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Event Log Table
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Column
Index
Type
Date
Time
Category
Description
Event log entries are numbered in the order they are received.
Describes the severity of the event.
Displays the date that the event was logged. In accordance with European convention, the date is shown in DAY/MONTH/YEAR format .
Displays the time of day that the event was logged.
For use by Customer Support.
Description Provides a brief description of the action logged.
8.6.6.2.9 Admin | Reboot
Use this page to display the currently available boot images for both the NP Interface and Modem, or to select from which images the NP Interface and modem will boot.
Figure 8-14. Admin | Reboot page
Once the NP and/or Modem image boot selections are made, [Submit] MUST be clicked for the boot parameter updates to take effect upon the next reboot.
Network Processor Boot From
Use the drop-down menu to select the Network Processor image to boot from Image 1 , Image 2 , or Newest , and then click [Submit] to save the selection.
8–21
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Modem Boot From
Use the drop-down menu to select the Modem image to boot from Image 1 or Image 2 , and then click [Submit] to save the selection.
Reboot
Take care to allow time for the Network Processor Boot From or Modem Boot choices to submit/save to flash memory, and for the ‘Admin | Reboot’ page to refresh, prior to executing a modem reboot.
Click [Reboot Now] to cause the entire modem to reboot; this includes the base modem, Network
Processor and TRANSEC Module.
8–22
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
8.6.6.3 Modem pages
Use the Modem pages to configure or view the primary Transmit parameters and primary
Receive parameters of the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem.
Select the Config , Monitor , Events , Stats , or Utility hyperlink to continue.
8.6.6.3.1 Modem | Config (Modem Configuration)
Figure 8-15. Modem | Config (Modem Configuration) page
Modem Operating Mode
Modem Type
OM-73
MIL-165A
IESS-308
IESS-309
IESS-310
TURBO
16-QAM
AUPC
TX-BURST
RX-BURST
RX-BURST-FA
TURBO-FA
Modem Type (read-only)
Description
Linkabit OM-73 modem compatibility mode.
Functionality defined by MIL-STD-188-165A.
Functionality defined by IESS-308, the Intelsat Intermediate Data Rate standard.
Functionality defined by IESS-309, the Intelsat Business Services standard.
Functionality defined by IESS-310, the Intelsat 8-PSK Intermediate Data Rate standard.
Functionality defined by IESS-315 plus Comtech EF Data Turbo mode interoperability.
16-QAM is selected as a modulation type.
Automatic Uplink Power Control is used.
The unit is a Vipersat Remote Modem.
The unit is a Vipersat STDMA Hub Modem with its Acquisition Mode set to “Standard.”
The unit is a Vipersat STDMA Hub Modem with its Acquisition Mode set to “Long”.
The unit is a Vipersat Hub Expansion Modem.
8–23
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Reference
Selection Description
Internal
Ext-1MHz
Ext-5MHz
Ext-10MHz
…Internal high stability ovenized 10 MHz oscillator
…an external 1 MHz reference, (accepts sine wave or square wave and locks the internal reference to the 1 MHz)
…an external 5 MHz reference, (accepts sine wave or square wave and locks the internal reference to the 5 MHz)
…an external 10 MHz reference, (accepts sine wave or square wave and locks the internal reference to the 10 MHz)
Click [Submit] to save the desired Reference setting type.
Unit Interface Type (read-only)
Unit Interface Type Description
Network Processor Identifies current data interface
Frequency Band
Selection Description
70/140 MHz
L-Band
52 – 88 MHz, 104 – 176 MHz
950 – 2000 MHz
Click [Submit] to save the desired Frequency Band selection.
Transmit
None (standard)
Turbo (optional)
FEC Type
Selection Description
Viterbi (standard) K = 7 convolutional encoder.
Uncoded.
Turbo Product Code , which is a block code.
Selection
BPSK
QPSK
OQPSK
Description
Bi Phase Shift Keying
Modulation Type
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.
Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.
8PSK 8 Phase Shift Keying
16QAM (optional) 16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation.
FEC Code Rate
Selection Description
Viterbi
Uncoded
Turbo
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8
1/1
5/16, 21/44, 3/4, 7/8, or 17/18
Data Rate (kbps)
Enter a Transmit Data Rate (in kbps).
8–24
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Frequency (MHz)
Enter the Frequency: (70/140 MHz) 52-88, 104-176 MHz (in 100 Hz steps) or (L-Band) 950-2000 MHz (in 100 Hz steps)
Spectrum
Selection
Normal
Invert
Description
Used to counteract frequency converters that invert the spectrum
Scrambler (for energy dispersal)
Selection
V.35
Description
ITU standard
Modified-V.35
IBS
Turbo
OM73
Comtech EF Data Closed Network with Reed Solomon compatible (modified V.35)
Used for IESS-309 and AUPC operation
Synchronous scrambler synchronized to the Turbo block
Linkabit OM-73 modem compatibility mode
Synch
Off
Synchronous scrambler synchronized to the Reed-Solomon.
Tx Power Level (dBm)
Enter a Power Level from –40 dBm to +10 dBm (in 0.1 dB steps).
Selection
On
RTS
VSAT
Off
Carrier
Description
Request to Send. RTS is an interface signaling control. If enabled, RTS can be used to control the output state of the modulator. Only available when using either the EIA-530 or
HSSI interface.
VSAT mode ties control of the Transmit Signal to the status of the Receiver. If the receiver is Locked the Transmitter is Enabled. If the receiver is Unlocked the Transmitter will be disabled.
When changing Modulation Type the data rate must be set to a rate supported by the modulation type or the change to the modulation type will not be allowed. Some choices will only be visible if the modem is set to a compatible mode, or if an option is installed or enabled
When entering the data rate, the following interactions need to be taken into account.
If the modulation type selected is 8-PSK or 16-QAM the minimum data rate allowed is 256 kbps. When changing certain parameters like modem type, the data rate will default to 64 kbps or 256 kbps. The calculated symbol rate is displayed for the user.
This is helpful for determining the occupied bandwidth required for the selected modulation type, code rate and overhead.
8–25
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
When entering an IF frequency, the M&C will check the occupied bandwidth calculated from the data rate, modulation type, code rate and overhead and will not allow an IF frequency to be entered if the occupied bandwidth falls outside of the minimum or maximum IF frequencies.
Click [Transmit Submit] to save the desired configuration settings.
Receive
Selection
Viterbi (standard)
None (standard)
Turbo (optional)
Description
K=7 convolutional encoder.
Uncoded.
FEC Type
Turbo means Turbo Product Code, which is a block code.
Selection
BPSK
QPSK
OQPSK
8PSK
16QAM (optional)
Description
Bi Phase Shift Keying
8 Phase Shift Keying
Demodulation Type
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.
Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.
16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation.
Selection
Viterbi
Uncoded
Turbo
Description
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8
1/1
FEC Code Rate
5/16, 21/44, 3/4, 7/8, or 17/18
Enter the Receive Data Rate (in kbps).
Frequency (MHz)
Enter a Frequency (70/140 MHz) 52-88, 104-176 MHz (in 100 Hz steps) or (L-Band) 950-2000 MHz (in 100 Hz steps).
Spectrum
Select
Normal
Invert
Description
Data Rate (kbps)
Used to counteract frequency converters that invert the spectrum
Descrambler (for energy dispersal)
Select
V.35
Modified-V.35
Description
ITU standard
Comtech EF Data Closed Network with Reed Solomon compatible (modified V.35)
8–26
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
IBS
Turbo
Select
OM73
Synch
Off
Used for IESS-309 and AUPC operation
Synchronous scrambler synchronized to the Turbo block
Descrambler (for energy dispersal) (continued)
Description
Linkabit OM-73 modem compatibility mode
Synchronous scrambler synchronized to the Reed-Solomon.
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
When changing Demodulation type the data rate must be set to a rate supported by the demodulation type or the change to the demodulation type will not be allowed.
Some choices will only be visible if the modem is set to a compatible mode, or if an option is installed or enabled.
When entering the data rate, the following interactions need to be taken into account. If the modulation type selected is 8-PSK or 16-QAM the minimum data rate allowed is 256 kbps. When changing certain parameters like modem type, the data rate will default to 64 kbps or 256 kbps. The calculated symbol rate is displayed for the user. This is helpful for determining the occupied bandwidth required for the selected modulation type, code rate and overhead.
When entering an IF frequency, the M&C will check the occupied bandwidth calculated from the data rate, modulation type, code rate and overhead and will not allow an IF frequency to be entered if the occupied bandwidth falls outside of the minimum or maximum IF frequencies.
Click [Receive Submit] to save the desired configuration settings.
8–27
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
8.6.6.3.2 Modem | Monitor (Modem Status)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Use this read-only page to view the currently available modem receive parameters and operating temperature.
Figure 8-16. Modem | Monitor (Modem Status) page
Receive Parameters
Displays the modem’s currently reported link values as follows:
Item Description
BER
Eb/No
Frequency Offset
Signal Level
Displays the estimated BER based on the demodulator’s measurement of the carrier to noise.
Displays the estimated Eb/No of the received carrier.
The range is threshold to 20 dB Eb/No.
Displays the received carrier frequency offset in Hz.
The range is the same as the acquisition range of the modem, 60 kHz.
Displays the signal level of the received carrier in dBm.
The range supported is +15 to –60 dBm.
Temperature
Reports the temperature of the modem in degrees Celsius.
8–28
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
8.6.6.3.3 Modem | Events (Modem Events Log)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Use this read-only page to view operating events. When a fault condition occurs, it is timestamped and put into the log. Similarly, when the fault condition clears, this is also recorded.
Figure 8-17. Modem |Events (Modem Events Log) page
Clear/Refresh Modem Events
Click [Clear] to delete all log entries.
Click [Refresh] to refresh the Event Log to display the most recently recorded events.
Event Log
Column
Index
Fault Detail
Date
Time
Description
Displays the internal table index.
Provides a description of the fault or event.
Date of the log entry (in YY/MM/DD format).
Time of the log entry (in HH:MM:SS format).
8–29
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
8.6.6.3.4 Modem | Stats (Modem Statistics Log)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure 8-18. Modem | Stats (Modem Statistics Log) page
Clear/Refresh Modem Statistics
Click [Clear] to delete all log entries.
Click [Refresh] to refresh the Link Statistics Log to display the most recent entries.
Logging Interval
Use the drop-down menu to set the statistics recording interval. Valid settings are from every 10 minutes to every 90 minutes in 10-minute increments, or Disabled .
Click [Submit] to save all changes made to this page.
Link Statistics Log
Displays the following modem statistics (all information is read only ):
Column Description
Index
Min Eb/No
Displays the internal table index.
Minimum measured E b
/N
0
during the configured time interval.
Avg Eb/No
Date
Time
Average measured E b
/N
0
during the configured time interval.
Date of the log entry (in YY/MM/DD format).
Time of the log entry (in HH:MM:SS format).
8–30
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
8.6.6.3.5 Modem | Utility (Modem Utilities)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure 8-19. Modem | Utility (Modem Utilities) page
Date and Time
To set the Date and Time of the modem:
• Time (HH: MM: SS) – Set the hours in 24-hour time format
• Date (DD/MM/YY) – Set the date in accordance with European convention
(DAY/MONTH/YEAR) format.
Click [Submit] to save any changes made to this section.
Circuit ID
CID – Enter a name for the communication link in this text field. This name can be any combination of alphanumeric characters up to 24 characters in length.
Additional characters supported are: ( ) * + / period (.) comma (,) and [space].
Click [Submit] to save any changes made to this section.
8–31
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
8.6.6.4 LAN pages
Select the Interface , Ethernet Ports , or ARP hyperlink to continue.
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
8.6.6.4.1 LAN | Interface
Use this page to set LAN operating parameters, to view the MAC Address of the NP Interface, and to set the IP Address and Mask of the NP Interface.
Figure 8-20. LAN | Interface page
LAN Interface
Item
MAC Address
IP Addressing Mode
Traffic IP Address
Description / Settings
(Read-only) The MAC is set at the factory to a guaranteed unique address that cannot be modified by the user.
Select Single or Dual . Note the following:
• Single: In this mode, Traffic IP Address should used as M&C as well as NextHop
IP Address for adjacent routers.
• Dual: In this mode, Management IP Address is used as M&C access to the NP
Interface, and Traffic IP Address is used as the NextHop IP Address for adjacent
Routers.
This is the IP Address of the NP Interface only. Once set to a valid value, it is the address that should be used for management and control connectivity as well as the Next Hop
Address.
8–32
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Item
Traffic Subnet Mask
Description / Settings
This is the IP Address of the NP Interface only. Once set to a valid value, it is the address that should be used for management and control connectivity as well as the Next Hop
Address for other routers in the user’s network based on IP Addressing mode.
Traffic Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask is used in conjunction with the Traffic IP Address to determine the
Management IP
Address
This is the IP Address of the NP Interface only. Once set to a valid value, it is the address that should be used for management and control connectivity when IP Addressing Mode
Management
Subnet Mask was set to Dual.
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the Management IP Address to determine the subnet locally attached to by the LAN interfaces.
Click [Submit] to save changes made to any of the above items.
VLAN Port Configuration
Item / Selection
Single Port VLAN
VLAN Port Select
VLAN ID
Description / Settings
Using the drop-down menu, select Single Port as Enabled or Disabled . When Single
Port VLAN is Enabled , the SLM-5650A’s Ethernet port accepts the VLAN-tagged packets from the NP Interface port specified in the " VLAN Port Select " drop-down.
Using the drop-down menu, select Port 1 through Port 4 to designate the Ethernet port on which VLAN-tagged packet are ingress and egress.
Enter an ID value from 2 to 4095. Packets containing specified VLAN only will ingress and egress from the NP Interface port specified in the " VLAN Port Select " drop-down.
Click [Submit] to save the desired Single Port VLAN setting.
When BPM Mode is enabled and any Vipersat operating mode other than Vipersat Hub or
Vipersat Hub Expansion is selected (see Chapter
Sect. 8.6.6.2.1), the VLAN Port Configuration portion of the ‘LAN | Interface’ page becomes disabled and is not visible, as shown to the right:
However, when BPM Mode is enabled and either
Vipersat Hub or Vipersat Hub Expansion is selected (see Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.1), the VLAN
Port Configuration portion of the ‘LAN | Interface’ page is replaced with the Multi-TDM Tunneling
Mode controls, as shown to the right:
8–33
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Multi-TDM Tunneling Mode (ViperSat Hub or ViperSat Hub Expansion Mode only)
Multi-TDM Tunneling is a technique where a VLAN “tunnel” is set up between the Hub unit and any expansion units that are being used to create an SCPC link with a Remote that is Home Stated to the specified Hub Time-Division Multiplexing (TDM) Modem.
When an Expansion unit is configured by VMS for an SCPC link, it queries its assigned hub for the correct VLAN ID. If the feature is turned off, the Hub unit responds with a zero (0). If the feature is enabled, the Hub will respond with a VLAN tag that is unique on the current LAN segment.
Select Off , Automatic , or Manual. Note the following:
Selection Description
Off In this mode, the feature is not used and there is no VLAN tag used.
Automatic
Manual
In this mode, the Hub generates the VLAN tag from the last 12 bits of its IP Address. In most cases, this will guarantee a unique value.
This mode SHOULD ONLY BE USED if the network is configured in such a way that two or more hub units on the LAN segment may have the same value in the low order 12 bits of their IP Address. Once this mode is selected, a text box will appear to allow entry of a unique ID in the range from 2 to 4095.
In Manual mode, it is the user’s responsibility to ensure that each Hub box on the segment is given a unique value in that range.
Click [Submit] to save the desired Multi-TDM Tunneling Mode setting.
Flow Control Enable
Ethernet Flow Control is a technique by which the receiver sends a message to the sender to back-off traffic once congestion is encountered.
With Flow Control enabled , the NP Interface monitors the QOS queue depths to identify the congestion, if any, of the QOS queue sizes. If the queue reaches 90% of the configurable QOS queue depth, then the interface sends Ethernet Pause Frames (IEEE 802.3) with pass time 0xFFFF to the LAN ports. Upon dropping all of the QOS depths to 50%, the interface again sends Pause frames with pass time 0x0000 to resume the traffic back.
Using the drop-down menu, set Flow Control Enable as Enabled or Disabled . Click [Submit] once this selection has been made.
Click [Submit] to save the desired Flow Control Enable setting.
Proxy ARP Enable
Proxy ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) is a technique by which an NP Interface in Router
Mode on a given network answers the ARP queries for a network address that is not on this network, but is reachable via the NP Interface.
8–34
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
With Proxy ARP enabled , the NP Interface (in Router Mode) 'snoops' all ARP_REQs; it will send an ARP_REPLY (one if the ARP_REQ host address is an NP host address that is reachable via one of the routes in the Route Table).
Using the drop-down menu, set Proxy ARP Enable as Enabled or Disabled . Then, click
Submit] to save the desired Proxy ARP Enable setting.
8.6.6.4.2 LAN | Ethernet Ports
Use this page to view the current status of the Ethernet ports and to set each port to manual or auto-negotiate configuration. Only the NP Interface Ethernet ports are shown in this screen. The base modem Ethernet port statistics and port information are set from the modem’s front panel.
Figure 8-21. LAN | Ethernet Ports page
Ethernet Link Status
This read-only section displays the status for each NP Interface Ethernet port.
Ethernet Speed/Duplex
Use the drop-down menus to configure each port to one of the following states:
Auto 1000 Full 100 Full 10 Full 100 Half
Click [Submit] once the Ethernet ports have been configured to suit on this page.
10 Half
8–35
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
8.6.6.4.3 LAN | ARP (ARP Table)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure 8-22. LAN | ARP page
ARP Table (Edit Static ARPs)
This table displays all current ARP entries (both Static and Dynamic). The current Static ARPs may be directly edited here:
Column Description
Index
IP
Displays the internal table index ( read-only , cannot be edited).
Entry IP Address, format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
MAC Entry MAC Address, format YY:YY:YY:YY:YY:YY
Type Displays the Entry Type as Static or Dynamic ( read-only , cannot be edited)
Click [Submit Changes] to save all changes made in this section.
Add Static ARP
Use this section to directly add a Static ARP entry, and then click [Add Entry] to add the entry.
Note that the index will automatically increment to the next available number.
Delete Static ARP
Enter Entry Index to Delete : Type in the Index number, and then click [Delete Entry] to execute removal of the entry.
8–36
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Flush Dynamic ARPs
Click [Flush ARP Table] to execute the command as needed.
8.6.6.5 WAN pages
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
This section depicts the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface with Quality of Service (QoS) and
Vipersat installed on the SLM-5650A. QoS and Vipersat are FAST Feature options which must be purchased from Comtech EF Data. Refer to Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.2
Admin | FAST Features for more information.
Note that, if the SLM-5650A does not have the QoS option installed, the QoS hyperlinks outlined in this section will not be visible/available to the user. When QoS is disabled, a separate QoS status page is shown.
Select the QoS , QoS Stats , or Loopback Test hyperlink to continue.
8.6.6.5.1 WAN | QoS (Quality of Service)
Figure 8-23. WAN | Quality of Service page
Quality of Service Feature
Select On or Off , and then click [Submit] to enable/disable the Quality of Service feature.
8–37
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Differential Services (DiffServ)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The option is available here for configuring each queue to one of the following attributes (the minimum / maximum value range is shown in brackets):
• Service Rate (kbps) [ 0.000 / (Tx Data Rate)]
• Med. Drop Precedence (% full) [20 / 90 ]
• High Drop Precedence (% full) [10 / 80]
• Max Queue Depth (bytes) [1500 / 64000]
Click [Submit] after all values have been adjusted to enable settings.
8.6.6.5.2 WAN | QoS Stats (Quality of Service Statistics)
Figure 8-24. WAN | Quality of Service Statistics page
Clear / Refresh Differentiated Services (DiffServ) Stats
Click [Clear] to clear queue statistics.
Click [Refresh] to update queue statistics.
Differential Services (DiffServ)
This status table displays the following attributes (all information is read only ):
8–38
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Column
Priority
Description
Per-Hop Behavior (PHB) Traffic class that determines how packets will be forwarded.
Codepoint (DSCP) Codepoint value in Type of Service (ToS) byte in IP header.
Sent Packets
Dropped Packets
Queued Packets
Queued Bytes
Queue Depth (% Full)
Bandwidth (kbps)
Number of packets sent from queue associated with PHB class.
Number of packets dropped in queue associated with PHB class.
Number of packets in queue associated with PHB class.
Number of bytes in queue associated with PHB class.
Percentage (%) full for queue associated with PHB class
Current data rate for queue associated with PHB class.
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
8.6.6.5.3 WAN | Loopback Test
Use this page for testing the operational integrity of the NP Interface M&C, WAN Interface, and IF
Interface.
Figure 8-25. WAN | Loopback Test page
Packet Loopback Test Results
This message window displays the results of the completed Loopback Test.
Packet Loopback Test
By clicking [Start Test] , the NP Interface sends 50 multicast packets towards the WAN interface, and enables the IF Loopback. All packets returned from the IP Loopback will count by the NP
Interface, and are displayed in the Packet Loopback Test Results window.
8–39
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
8.6.6.6 Routing pages
Select the Routes or OSPF hyperlink to continue.
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
8.6.6.6.1 Routing | Routes
Use this page to enter static routes into the NP Interface. This facilitates the routing of IP traffic over the satellite or to another device on the local LAN. Route entries can be in any combination of
Unicast and Multicast routes.
Figure 8-26. Routing | Routes page
Route Table (Display)
This read-only table provides information on a per-route basis:
Column Description
Index
Route Description
Identifies the route entry [1 to 256].
Label that helps users to maintain their network.
Destination IP/Mask
Interface
Next Hop IP
Identifies the route to the destination network.
There are two valid selections for routing to a destination network:
• toWAN is selected when the route to the destination network is over the satellite link. The toWAN routes do not need a Next Hop IP Address.
• toLAN is used when the route to the destination network is attached to the LAN interface.
When the route is of type toLAN , the Next Hop IP Address defines the locally attached router’s IP Address. which can be used to route to the destination network. This is the case when there is another subnet addressed to the modem on the LAN side.
8–40
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Add New Route
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Take care to accurately create and add new route entries. Existing routes can’t be modified. If a mistake is made when adding a new route entry, the incorrect entry must be deleted, and then recreated and re-added.
Use this section to add a route entry to the route table. Enter the information, and click [Add
Entry] to add the route. The route is immediately added to the route table for processing.
Delete Route
Use this section to specify which route table entry to delete when a route is no longer needed, and then click [Delete Entry] to delete that route table entry.
8.6.6.6.2 Routing | OSPF
Use this page to define the operating parameters for O pen S hortest P ath F irst routing.
Figure 8-27. Routing | OSPF page
OSPF Parameters
Item
OSPF
Area Network Address
Description / Setting
To control OSPF routing, set the interface as Disabled or Enabled.
Network address of an area. An area is a set of networks and hosts within an
Autonomous System (AS) that has been administratively grouped together.
8–41
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Item
Area Subnet Mask
OSPF Area
Cost
Retransmit Interval
Transmit Delay
Priority
Hello Interval
Dead Interval
Authentication Key
Message Digest Key
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Description / Setting
Subnet mask of the Area Network.
The SLM-5650A NP Interface supports only one OSPF Area at a time.
A group of
(adjacent) routers which cooperate by exchanging their routing data base for the specified network range; i.e. an OSPF router will only send its database to other routers that advertise that they are in the same area.
Valid range is from 0 to 4294967295.
Specify the explicit cost of sending a packet via this interface.
Valid range is from 1 to 65535.
Specify the number of seconds between link state advertisement retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to an OSPF interface.
Parameters used to define the route to the destination network.
Valid range is from 1 to 65535 seconds.
Set priority to help determine the OSPF.
Valid range is 0 (default, or not designated ) to 255.
Specify the length of time, in seconds, between the hello packets that are sent on an
OSPF interface.
Valid range is from 1 to 65535 seconds.
Set the number of seconds that a device’s ‘Hello’ packets must not have been seen before its neighbors declare the OSPF router down.
Valid range is from 1 to 65535 seconds.
Assign a specific password to be used by neighboring OSPF routers on a network segment that is using OSPF’s simple password authentication.
Enable OSPG MD5 authentication.
8–42
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
8.6.6.6.3 Routing | IGMP
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Use this page to facilitate use of Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) with configured multicast routes.
Figure 8-28. Routing | IGMP page
IGMP, when enabled, responds to IGMP queries for the configured multicast routes on the transmit side and generates IGMP queries on the receive side. If there are no active IGMP receivers on the LAN, it will stop forwarding the multicast traffic (received from the satellite) to the LAN.
Selection Description / Setting
IGMP
Query Interval
Response Interval
Last Member Query
Interval
Select IGMP as Enabled or Disabled .
This is the interval between general queries sent by the modem. By varying the query interval, a modem administrator may tune the number of IGMP messages on the subnet; note that larger numbers cause the IGMP queries to be sent less often.
Enter a value, in seconds, from 1 to 60 (default = 1 second).
This is the maximum response time inserted into the periodic general queries. By varying the Response Interval, a modem administrator may tune the “burstiness” of
IGMP messages on the subnet; note that larger values make the traffic less “bursty” as host responses are spread out over a large interval.
Enter a value, in seconds, from 1 to 25 (default = 10 seconds).
Note: The number of seconds assigned to the Response Interval must be less than what is assigned to the Query Interval .
This is the maximum response time inserted into group-specific queries that are set in response to Leave Group messages, and is also amount of time between groupspecific query messages. This value may be tuned to modify the "leave latency" of the network; a reduced value results in reduced time to detect the loss of the last member of a group.
Enter a value, in seconds, from 1 to 25 (default = 1 second).
8–43
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Selection
Robustness
Description / Setting
The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet. If a subnet is expected to be lossy, the Robustness Variable may be increased. IGMP is robust to (Robustness Variable-1) packet losses.
Enter a value from 2 to 10 (the default value is 2 ). Note that the Robustness Variable
MUST NOT be 0 , and SHOULD NOT be 1 .
Version Version – Enter 1 for IGMPv1 or 2 for IGMPv2 .
Click [ Submit] to save the desired IGMP configuration changes on this page.
8.6.6.7 Stats (Statistics) pages
Select the Ethernet Tx , Ethernet Rx , IP , WAN , or Clear All hyperlink to continue.
8.6.6.7.1 Stats | Ethernet Tx
Figure 8-29. Stats | Ethernet Tx Statistics page
Clear/Refresh Ethernet Tx Stats
Click [Clear] to delete all Ethernet Tx statistics (this will also clear all Ethernet Rx statistics).
Click [Refresh] to update the page with the most recent statistics.
8–44
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Tx Valid Frames
Column
Port
Unicast
Broadcast
Multicast
Pause
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Description
The corresponding Ethernet port on the NP Interface and, when in BPM Mode, the base modem’s J5 Ethernet port.
Number of valid unicast frames transmitted.
Number of valid broadcast frames transmitted.
Number of valid multicast frames transmitted.
Number of PAUSE frames transmitted.
Tx Collision Frames
The counters provided in this table are applicable in half-duplex only.
Column
Port
Collision
Late Collision
Single Collision
Multiple Collision
Maximum Collision
Description
The corresponding Ethernet port on the NP Interface and, when in BPM Mode, the base modem’s J5 Ethernet port.
The number of Collision events seen by the GMAC, not including those controls in a single, Multiple, Excessive or Late.
The number of times a collision is detected later than 512 bits-times into the transmission of the frame.
The total number of successfully transmitted frames that experienced exactly one collision.
The total number of successfully transmitted frames that experienced more than one collision.
The number of frames dropped in the transmit GMAC because the frame experienced
16 consecutive collisions.
Tx Discarded/Filtered
Column
Port
Discarded
Filtered
Description
The corresponding Ethernet port on the NP Interface and, when in BPM Mode, the base modem’s J5 Ethernet port.
The total number of frames received with either FCS errors or Tx Maximum Collision frames.
Number of Tx frames filtered. Currently not implemented.
8–45
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
8.6.6.7.2 Stats | Ethernet Rx
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure 8-30. Stats | Ethernet Rx Statistics page
Clear/Refresh Ethernet Rx Stats
Click [Clear] to delete all Ethernet Rx statistics (this will also clear all Ethernet Tx statistics).
Click [Refresh] to update the page with the most recent statistics.
Rx Valid Frames
Column
Port
Unicast
Broadcast
Multicast
Pause
Description
The corresponding Ethernet port on the NP Interface and, when in BPM Mode, the base modem’s J5 Ethernet port.
Number of valid unicast frames transmitted.
Number of valid broadcast frames transmitted.
Number of valid multicast frames transmitted.
Number of PAUSE frames transmitted.
8–46
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Rx Error Frames
Column
Port
Invalid FCS
Alignment
Undersized
Oversized
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Description
The corresponding Ethernet port on the NP Interface and, when in BPM Mode, the base modem’s J5 Ethernet port.
Total frames received with CRC error.
Total frames received with either Fragments Error or Jabber Error.
Total frames received with a length of less than 64 bytes but with a valid FCS.
Total frame received with a length of more than 1536 bytes but with a valid FCS.
Rx Discarded/Filtered
Column
Port
Discarded
Filtered
Description
The corresponding Ethernet port on the NP Interface and, when in BPM Mode, the base modem’s J5 Ethernet port.
Total frames received with Undersized, Fragments, Oversized, Jabber, or invalid FCS errors.
Number of Rx frames filtered. Currently not implemented.
8–47
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
8.6.6.7.3 Stats | IP
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure 8-31. Stats | IP Statistics page
Clear/Refresh IP Statistics
Click [Clear] to delete all statistics.
Click [Refresh] to update the page with the most recent statistics.
Router Statistics
Item
Received Packets
Forwarded Packets
Dropped Packets
End Station Packets
Description
Total packets received by router.
Total packets forwarded by router.
Total packets dropped by router.
Total packets directed to the NP Interface.
8–48
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Router Errors
Item
Bad Header Packets
Bad Total Length Packets
TTL Expired Packets
No Route Packets
Length Too Small Packets
Bad Header Protocol Packets
Bad Header Checksum
Packets
Bad Header Destination
Address Packets
Internal Procesing Error
Packets
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Description
Counts the packets received with IP header length are less than 20 bytes OR
IPV4 version is NOT 4. This only applicable in non-switch mode.
This Counter will be updated if the ingress packet total length (PACKET_SIZE) less than the Ethernet header size (if present, only from LAN and END station) and total length in IPV4 total length filed. This is only applicable in non-switch mode.
If the IPV4 packet received with TTL zero and need to be forwarded. This is only applicable in non-switch mode.
Counts the packets received with IPV4_DEST_ADDR has no match in Route
Table. This is only applicable in non-switch mode.
Counter will be updated if, total length filed in IPV4 header is less than 20 bytes
OR PACKET_SIZE is less than 20. This is only applicable in non-switch mode.
If incoming packet has Ethernet type was not IPV4, IPv6, ARP, PPP_SESSION, or PPP_DISCOVERY and non-switch mode. In switch mode it accepts all the
Ethernet types.
Counts the packets received with bad IPV4 header checksum. This is only applicable in non-switch mode.
The counter will be updated, if the IPV4 destination address is either
255.255.255.255, or 0.X.X.X, or 127.X.X.X, or (224-255).X.X.X. This is only applicable in non-switch mode.
Non Switch mode: This counter will updated if, the Ingress packet cannot traverse with in the ME components due to resources scarcity.
Switch mode: This counter will be update if either the ingresses packet destination MAC address is NP’s MAC, but the IP address is NOT the NP’s IP, or ingress packet cannot traverse within the MEs components due to internal resources scarcity.
End Station Statistics
Item
Received Packets
Forwarded Packets
Local Delivery Packets
Created Fragment Packets
Description
Total packets destined to the NP Interface.
Total packets forwarded by router.
Number of packets delivered to management applications running on the NP
Interface.
Number of IP fragments created by the NP Interface because the packet being sent exceeds the maximum transmit unit (MTU).
End Station Errors
Item
Invalid Header Packets
Invalid Address Packets
No Route Packets
Description
Total End Station packets dropped due to incorrect length or IP Header
Checksum.
Number of IP packets dropped by the NP Interface because of an invalid destination address.
Number of IP Packets dropped by the NP Interface because no “route destinatioon” matched in the rout table.
8–49
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
Item
Invalid Fragment Packets
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Description
Number of IP packets dropped by the NP Interface because IP fragments could not be reassembled.
ICMP Statistics
Where ICMP is Internet Control Message Protocol:
Item Description
Created ICMP Message
Packets
Created ICMP Destination
Unreachable Packets
Created ICMP Time Exceeded
Packets
Created ICMP Parameter
Problem Packets
Created ICMP Redirect
Packets
Total ICMP message packets.
Total ICMP Destination Unreachable message packets.
Total ICMP Time Exceeded message packets.
Total ICMP Parameter Problem message packets.
Total ICMP Redirect message packets
ICMP Errors
ICMP Send Errors Packets – Number of ICMP packets dropped by the NP Interface because of an unknown ICMP error.
8–50
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
8.6.6.7.4 Stats | WAN
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure 8-32. Stats | WAN Statistics page
Clear/Refresh WAN Statistics
Click [Clear] to delete all statistics.
Click [Refresh] to update the page with the most recent statistics.
WAN Tx Frames
Column
Network Layer
Data Link Layer
Satellite Layer
Description
Total packets sent to data link layer.
Total frames sent to satellite layer.
Total frames sent over satellite.
WAN Tx Errors
Column
Network Layer
Data Link Layer
Satellite Layer
Description
Counter increments if the packets cannot traverse from WAN_DLL_OUT component to ETH_TX-3 component to due to internal resource scarcity.
Total data link layer Tx errors.
Total satellite layer Tx errors.
8–51
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
WAN Rx Frames
Column
Network Layer
Data Link Layer
Satellite Layer
Description
Total packets received from data link layer.
Total frames received from satellite layer.
Total frames received over the satellite.
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
WAN Rx Errors
Column
Network Layer
Data Link Layer
Satellite Layer
Description
Counter updates for every WAN ingress packets with size more than 1700 bytes.
These are the total WAN_FPGA Errors
These are the total WAN_FPGA Errors.
Detailed Satellite Rx Errors
Item Description
WAN Rx Bad Address Errors
WAN Rx Undersized Errors
WAN Rx HDLC Frame Errors
WAN Rx Overrun Errors
HDLC Address of the received frame does not match one of the eight configured HDLC addresses.
For a given CEFD WAN Control byte setting, received frame is too short to be valid.
Any one of the following HDLC error conditions: Abort, Octet Alignment, or
Frame Length shorter than 32-bits.
HDLC receive FIFO has overflowed.
WAN Rx Packet CRC Errors The Packet CRC checksum failed.
WAN Rx HDLC CRC Errors The received HDLC frame has failed the HDLC CRC checksum.
8–52
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
8.6.6.7.5 Stats | Clear All
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Use this page to simultaneously clear the statistics for the Ethernet Tx, Ethernet Rx, IP, and WAN
Stats pages.
Figure 8-33. Stats | Clear All Statistics page
Clear All Statistics (Ethernet / IP / WAN)
Click [Clear All Statistics] to execute.
8–53
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
8.6.6.8 Vipersat pages
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure 8-34 depicts the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface pages with Vipersat installed on the
SLM-5650A. Vipersat is a FAST Feature option which must be purchased from Comtech
EF Data. Refer to Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.2 Admin | FAST Features for more information.
Note that, if the SLM-5650A does not have this option installed, the hyperlinks associated with the Vipersat navigation tab will not be visible or otherwise available to the user.
Consult adjunct Comtech EF Data publication MN-0000035 Vipersat SLM-5650A
Satellite Network Modem Router User Guide for configuration and use of these optional pages.
Figure 8-34. Vipersat pages
8–54
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
8.6.6.9 Redundancy page
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Appendix F. 1:1 REDUNDANCY
This page provides read-only status information on the configured redundant configuration.
Figure 8-35. Redundancy page
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem, when connected to a Comtech EF Data CRS-311 1:1
Redundancy Switch, provides fully-automatic protection of IP packet traffic in the case of equipment failure.
If the the Redundancy tab is selected without a 1:1 Redundant Configuration, per Figure 8-35 the
1:1 Redundancy status is displayed as Unavailable .
8–55
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Network Processor (NP) Interface
8.6.6.10 Save page
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
In order to make any Network Processor modifications permanent, the Unit
Configuration must be saved before rebooting the unit.
Figure 8-36. Save page
Use this page to save the current unit configurations to Flash memory. This makes all configuration changes made under the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface permanent until either a new round of setting updates is initiated and saved, or all settings are restored to the original factory defaults via the Admin | Defaults page (see Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.6
for full details).
Click [Save Now] to begin the save process. At the user prompt
(shown at right), click OK to complete the process, or Cancel to abort the command.
8–56
Chapter 9. NP INTERFACE
TELNET/SSH CLI OPERATION
9.1 Overview
This chapter defines the Command Line Interface (CLI) user menu system provided with the
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem’s optional NP (Network Processor) Module Interface.
Access to the CLI depends on the IP Interface Security Mode setting that has been selected for the NP Interface:
• The CLI is accessible via Telnet when the IP Interface Security Mode has been set to
“ Low Level Security ”.
SSH (Secure Shell) will not be available for CLI operations at this security level.
• The CLI is accessible only via SSH when the IP Interface Security Mode has been set to
“ High Level Security ”.
Telnet will not be available for CLI operations at this security level.
See Chapter Sect. 8.6.4.2.3 Administration | Security (Account Information) for detailed information about the IP Interface Security Mode features for the NP Interface. For an overview on using Telnet and SSH interfaces with the SLM-5650A, see Chapter 6. ETHERNET
MANAGEMENT .
9–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
9.1.1 Telnet User Access
Telnet operation is permissible only when the IP Interface Security Mode has been set to “ Low
Level Security ”. See Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.3 Administration | Security (Account
Information) for instructions on setting the security level to allow for Telnet (non-secure) operation of the CLI.
When connecting via Telnet, the user must have network connectivity to the NP Interface. This connectivity can be via a local LAN, a remote LAN, or via a satellite link from another modem.
Telnet access is available on TCP Port 23. The default user name and password are both comtech .
The user name and password are required to gain access to system through the
HTTP/HTTPS and CLI interfaces. For security reasons, the “Restore Factory
Defaults” command (see Chapter Sect. 9.2.4.5) does NOT reset the user name and password.
9.1.1.1 Telnet Operational Guidelines
The CLI allows, at most, seven (7) concurrent logins to the Telnet menu via multiple
Telnet sessions.
Note that the CLI user name and password are the same as the NP HTTP/HTTPS
Interface user name and password.
9.1.2 SSH (Secure Shell) User Access
SSH access and operation is permissible only when the IP Interface Security Mode has been set to
“ High Level Security ”. See Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.3 Administration | Security (Account
Information) for instructions on setting the security level to allow for SSH (secure) operation of the CLI.
At login, note that the CLI user name and password when starting an SSH CLI session are the same as the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface user name and password.
See Chapter Sect. 6.6 SSH (Secure Shell) Interface for initial setup and operational examples for using an SSH terminal emulator application for CLI operations.
9–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
9.2 Command Line Interface Pages
9.2.1 CLI Menu System – Parallel Functionality
The CLI, accessible via Telnet and SSH, allows the user to change operating parameters in a manner similar to the functionality, as provided, for the monitoring, configuration, and control via the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem’s front panel menus (see Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL
OPERATION ) and NP Module HTTP/HTTPS Interfaces (see Chapter Sect. 8.6 Network
Processor (NP) HTTP/HTTPS Interface ).
9.2.2 CLI Menu – Common Information, Navigation, Operation Features
Note the following:
1.
Certain operational menu selections (e.g., Vipersat Configuration) are visible/selectable only when that FAST feature has been purchased and enabled for operation. The menu pages that follow show all available options as installed – the configuration in use may or may not provide the level of functionality depicted in this chapter.
2.
With some exceptions, the menu pages depicted in this chapter feature the following common informational or navigational aids:
Menu Options/Fields
[Text field example]
Save Parameters to Flash
Logout of CLI Session
Exit Menu
Entry Description
[RO]
S
L
X
Typically found in the body of the page. This designates the field as a read-only status/informational message. There is no user action required for this item.
Allows user to save the current configuration of the NP Interface to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
Allows user to log out of the CLI session.
Allows user to exit the current menu and return to the parent menu.
Alternately, the user may press the Esc key to perform the same action.
3.
Typically, once any mnemonic is entered, the user is prompted to type in a functional selection, an alphanumeric configuration string, or an operational value. This prompt is provided at the bottom of the active page and takes the form of a selection choice and/or a blank prompt (a solid bar), as shown in the example to the right:
4.
If a parameter is rejected for any reason, an error will appear at the top of the page, along with an explanation that serves to assist the user in the re-entry of information, as per the following example:
5.
Any changes made via the CLI should be saved to permanent storage prior to terminating the CLI session. Although changes are retained after a CLI session ends (as long as the SLM-5650A
9–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A remains running), take note also that changes will be lost if, for example, the modem is rebooted or the NP Interface is reset or loses power.
Modified parameters can be saved by issuing the Save command “S” from any menu. The user is prompted to confirm that all changes should be made permanent:
6.
The user is prompted, when attempting to terminate a CLI session via Logout command “L”, to verify that the CLI session should be ended:
9–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
9.2.3 Main Menu
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The Main Menu serves as the CLI’s primary navigation page. All selections made on this page take the user to submenus listed in this table (operation features nested under each of these submenus, in turn, are described in the chapter sections listed):
Submenu Entry Function/Description See…
Administration
Satellite Modem
Configuration
LAN
WAN
Route Table
OSPF
IGMP
Vipersat Configuration
Redundancy
Configuration
Operations and
Maintenance
A
M
N
W
R
F
I
V
E
O
The Administration Menu provides a basic set of standard admin functions to the NP Interface.
The Satellite Modem Configuration option displays nested menus that allow the user to configure and monitor the satellite base modem.
The LAN menu allows the user to change the IP address and view the ARP (Address Resolution
Protocol) table.
The WAN menu allows the user to configure QoS
(Quality of Service) and DiffServ (Differentiated
Services).
The Route Table menu allows the user to configure the
Unicast/Multicast routing tables.
The OSPF Menu allows the user to configure Open
Shortest Path First routing parameters.
The IGMP Menu allows the user to configure Internet
Group Management Protocol parameters
The FAST-Feature-enabled Vipersat Configuration menu allows the user to configure Vipersat functionality. This menu selection is visible/available only after the Vipersat option has been purchased.
The Redundancy Configuration Menu allows the user to view the 1:1 IP redundancy status.
The Operations & Maintenance menu allows the user to configure various options used to control and maintain the system. This menu also provides diagnostic tools for troubleshooting and statistics.
Sect. 9.2.4 (9.2.4.1 through 9.2.4.8)
Sect. 9.2.5 (9.2.5.1 through 9.2.5.6)
Sect. 9.2.6 (9.2.6.1 through 9.2.6.3)
Sect. 9.2.7
Sect. 9.2.8
Sect. 9.2.9
Sect. 9.2.10
Sect. 9.2.11
Sect. 9.2.12
Sect. 9.2.13,
9.2.13.1
9–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
9.2.4 Administration Menu page (A)
The Administration Menu page, opened from the Main Menu , contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Information I
Displays information for NP and Modem Bootrom running status, load images, and current configuration status.
Prompts user to select:
System Working Mode W
Vipersat modes: 0 – Vipersat Hub
1 – Vipersat Hub Expansion
2 – Vipersat Remote
3 – Vipersat Remote Expansion
Non-Vipersat modes: 4 – Multipoint Hub Router
5 – Multipoint Remote Router
6 – Point to Point Router
Bridge mode: 7 – Gigabit Ethernet Bridge
BPM Mode
FAST Feature Code
Security
SNMP
Restore Factory Defaults
B
Prompts user to select BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) mode of operation:
0 – Disabled 1 – Enabled
F Displays currently installed FAST options.
A
Allows user to set admin user name and password, and set IP Interface
Security Mode.
P Displays SNMP configuration parameters.
D Allows user to restore factory default configuration settings.
9–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Menu Options/Fields
Set Time
Event Log
Boot Network Processor From
[#]
Boot Base Modem From [#]
Reboot Now
Entry Description
T
Allows user to configure automatic time synchronization through Network
Time Protocol (NTP).
E Displays summary of faults and events.
N
Prompts user to enter NP boot image:
1 – Image 1
2 – Image 2
3 – Newest
Prompts user to enter modem boot image:
M
1 – Image 1 2 – Image 2
R Prompts user to enter Y to reboot, N to exit command without rebooting.
9.2.4.1 Administration Menu | Information page (I)
The read-only SLM 5650 Network Processor – System Images page, opened from the
Administration Menu, displays the information for NP and Modem bulk images, and current NP running bulk image:
Press any character to return to the Administration Menu page.
9–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
9.2.4.2 Administration Menu | FAST Feature Code page (F)
The read-only FAST Features page, opened from the Administration Menu, displays the status
(i.e., Installed or Not Installed ) of all available FAST options:
Press any character to return to the Administration Menu page.
9–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
9.2.4.3 Administration Menu | Security page (A)
The HighLevel Security setting will disable the Telnet menu interface – do not enable High Level Security if using Telnet or connectivity will be lost! When the
High Level Security setting is selected, SSH can be used to interface with the
CLI menu system.
The Security Menu page, opened from the Administration Menu, contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Admin User Name
Admin Password
IP Interface Security Mode
SSH Host Key Signature
Generate New Host Key
Entry Description
A
P
Allows user to set the Admin User Name (excluding < > ” ~, a minimum of 7 / maximum of 25 characters is permitted).
Allows user to set the Admin Password (excluding < > ” ~, a minimum of 7 / maximum of 25 characters is permitted).
Prompts user to select the IP Interface Security Level:
M
[RO]
G
Press For
0 Low Level Security
User Accessibility
HTTP and Telnet allowed
1 High Level Security Only HTTPS/SSH allowed
This key signature, or fingerprint, helps to identify the NP when connecting through SSH. SSH clients typically show the host key signature when they connect to a system for the first time. The user can then compare the host key the SSH client shows with the host key the NP displays to verify that they are the same
Generates a new host key that uniquely identifies the NP.
NOTE: After doing this, SSH clients that have connected to the NP before will usually note or warn that the host key has changed when they connect again.
9–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
9.2.4.4 Administration Menu | SNMP page (P)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The SNMP page, opened from the Administration Menu, allows the user to change the parameters associated with Simple Network Management Protocol , an application-layer protocol designed to facilitate the exchange of management information between network devices.
The SLM-5650A SNMP agent supports SNMPv1, v2c and, when the IP Interface Security Level has been set to High , SNMPv3. The page contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Read Community
Write Community
Trap Community
Trap
System Contact
[RO]
[RO]
T
I
C
For complete details on SNMP and using this menu, refer to Chapter
6.4 SNMP Interface .
System Location N
Once all changes have been made using this menu, in order for the configuration to take effect, the user must press ‘ S ’ to save these SNMP configuration changes, then reboot the modem using the Reboot Now prompt (press ‘ R ’ using the Administration Menu ) as outlined in this chapter in
Chapter Sect. 9.2.4.8.
9–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
9.2.4.5 Administration Menu | Restore Factory Defaults prompt (D)
Select ‘ D ’ from the Administration Menu to restore all previously-configured modem parameters to their Factory Default Configuration settings. The user is prompted:
Are you sure you wish to continue? (Y or N)
Press ‘ Y’ to begin the restoration process, or ‘ N ’ to abort the command and return to the previous menu.
Using ‘Restore Factory Defaults’ does not change the user name and password settings.
9.2.4.6 Administration Menu | Set Time page (T)
The Time Control (Set Time) page, opened from the Administration Menu, contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Time Zone
Automatic Synchronize
Primary Internet Time Server
Secondary Internet Time
Server
Current Date
Current Time
Internet Time Status
Update Date & Time
[RO]
[RO]
[RO]
D
Z
T
P
Q See Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.7 Admin | Time (Date and Time) for full details on this page’s functionality.
9–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
9.2.4.7 Administration Menu | Event Log page (E)
Once the System Event Log page is opened from the Administration Menu , the system is polled for summary events and faults, the following message appears:
Please wait for the event log to appear
This may take up to a minute
When ready, the page displays a scrollable list as per the following example:
From here, the page contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Previous Page
Next Page
Top
Bottom
Logging On/Off
Logging Level
Clear Event Log
B
O
L
C
Entry Description
P
N
T
Allows user to navigate, on a per-page basis, between the start and end of the Event Log.
See Chapter 8.7.4.2.8 Admin | Event Log page’s functionality. for full details on this
9–12
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
9.2.4.8 Administration Menu | Reboot Now prompt (R)
Before rebooting, the user must remember to SAVE PARAMETERS TO FLASH
(Select ‘S’ from the Administration Menu); otherwise, all changes made prior to reboot will be lost.
Select ‘ R ’ from the Administration Menu to reboot the system. The user is prompted:
Are you sure you wish to continue? (Y or N)
Press ‘ Y’ to begin the reboot process, or ‘ N’ to abort the command and return to the previous menu.
Note: Pressing ‘Y’ causes the entire modem to reboot; this includes the base modem, NP
Interface, and TRANSEC Module.
9–13
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
9.2.5 Satellite Modem Configuration (Modem Menu) page (M)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The Modem Menu (Satellite Modem Configuration) page, opened from the Main Menu , contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Modem Type
Interface
Reference
Frequency Band
Modulator Settings
Demodulator Settings
Receive Monitor
Events
Stats
Utility
[RO] Displays modem type
[RO] Displays installed interface
[RO] Displays active reference (internal / external)
Prompts user to select:
B
0 – 70/140 MHz 1 – L-Band
M Allows user to configure modulator operating parameters
D Allows user to configure demodulator operating parameters
R Read-only – displays active Rx operating parameters
E
T
U
Displays the Modem Event Log and allows user to set or adjust display parameters for logging
Displays the System Event Log and allows user to set or adjust display parameters for logging
Allows user to select/set:
T - Time (in HH:MM:SS format)
D - Date (in DD/MM/YY format), or
C - Circuit ID (exactly 24 characters).
9–14
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
9.2.5.1 Satellite Modem Configuration | Modulator Menu page (M)
The Modulator Menu page, opened from the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem Configuration) page, contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
FEC Type
Modulation
FEC Code Rate
Data Rate
Frequency
T
M
Prompts the user to select:
0 – None
1 – Viterbi
Prompts the user to select:
2 – Turbo
3 – Sequential
0 – BPSK
1 – QPSK
Prompts the user to select:
2 – OQPSK
3 – 8-PSK
4 – 16-QAM
C 0 – 1/1
1 – 1/2
2 – 3/4
3 – 7/8
4 – 2/3
5 – 5/6
6 – 21/44
7 – 5/16
8 – 17/18
D Allows user to edit Data Rate using arrow keys.
F Allows user to edit Frequency using arrow keys.
Spectrum
Scrambler
Power Level
Carrier
I
A
Prompts user to select:
0 – Normal 1 – Inverted
R
Prompts the user to select:
0 – Off
1 – OM73
2 – V.35
3 – Modified V.35
4 – SYNC
5 – IBS
6 – TURBO
P Allows user to edit Power Level using arrow keys.
Prompts the user to select
0 – OFF
1 – ON
2 – RTS
3 – VSAT
9–15
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
9.2.5.2 Satellite Modem Configuration | Demodulator Menu page (D)
The Demodulator Menu page, opened from the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem Configuration) page, contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
FEC Type
Demodulation
FEC Code Rate
Data Rate
Frequency
Spectrum
Descrambler
T
M
Prompts the user to select:
0 – None
1 – Viterbi
2 – Turbo
3 – Sequential
Prompts the user to select:
0 – BPSK
1 – QPSK
2 – OQPSK
3 – 8-PSK
4 – 16-QAM
C
Prompts the user to select:
0 – 1/1
1 – 1/2
2 – 3/4
3 – 7/8
4 – 2/3
5 – 5/6
6 – 21/44
7 – 5/16
8 – 17/18
D Allows user to edit Data Rate using arrow keys.
F Allows user to edit Frequency using arrow keys.
I
Prompts user to select:
0 – Normal 1 – Inverted
R
Prompts the user to select:
0 – Off
1 – OM73
2 – V.35
3 – Modified V.35
4 – SYNC
5 – IBS
6 – TURBO
9–16
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
9.2.5.3 Satellite Modem Configuration | Receive Monitor page (R)
The read-only Receive Parameters (i.e., Receive Monitor) page, opened from the Modem Menu
(Satellite Modem Configuration) page, displays the Rx parameters:
Press ‘X’ to return to the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem Configuration) page.
9–17
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
9.2.5.4 Satellite Modem Configuration | Events page (E)
The Modem Event Log page, opened from the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem Configuration) page, displays a scrollable list as per the following example:
When ready, the page contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Previous Page
Next Page
Top
Bottom
Clear Event Log
Entry Description
P
N
T
B
Allows user to navigate, on a per-page basis, between the start and end of the Event Log.
C
See Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.3.3 Modem | Events for full details on this page’s functionality.
9–18
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
9.2.5.5 Satellite Modem Configuration | Stats page (T)
Once the Modem Statistics (Stats) page is opened from the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem
Configuration) page, as the system is polled for summary events and faults, the following message appears:
Please wait for the event log to be read
This may take up to a minute
When ready, the page displays a scrollable list of as per the following example:
The page contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Previous Page
Next Page
P
N
Allows user to navigate, on a per-page basis, between the start and end of the Stats Log.
Add Entry
Modify Entry
Delete Entry
Logging Level
Clear Event Log
D
L
C
A
M
See Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.3.4 Modem | Stats for full details on this page’s functionality.
9–19
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
9.2.5.6 Satellite Modem Configuration | Utility page (U)
The Modem Utility Menu page, opened from the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem Configuration) page, contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Time T Allows user to set the time in HH:MM:SS format.
Date D Allows user to set the date in International format (DD/MM/YY).
Allows the user to define a name for the Circuit ID.
Circuit ID C Note: This ID must consist of exactly 24 characters in UPPER CASE
ONLY. No spaces are permitted in this ID; use a dash [-] instead.
9–20
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
9.2.6 LAN Menu page (N)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The LAN Menu page, opened from the Main Menu , contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Interface
Ethernet Ports
ARP Menu
Flow Control
I
E
A
F
The LAN Interface menu allows the user to view the MAC address of the Network Processor and set the IP address and mask of the
Network Processor:
The Ethernet Ports menu allows the user to view the current status of the Ethernet ports and set each port to auto-negotiate or for manual configuration.
The ARP Menu allows the user to view and edit the ARP (Address
Resolution Protocol) table.
Prompts user to select
0 – Disabled 1 – Enabled
Proxy ARP
Port VLAN Enable
Port VLAN Select
Port VLAN Id
P
M
N
O
Prompts user to select
0 – Disabled 1 – Enabled
Prompts user to select
0 – Disabled 1 – Enabled
Prompts user to select
0 – Port 1
1 – Port 2
2 – Port 3
3 – Port 4
Enter an ID value from 2 to 4095. Packets containing specified
VLAN only will ingress and egress from the NP Interface port specified via " VLAN Port Select " (Entry “ N ”).
9–21
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
9.2.6.1 LAN Menu | Interface page (I)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The Interface page, opened from the LAN Menu page, contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
MAC Address [RO]
The MAC is set at the factory to a guaranteed unique address that cannot be modified by the user.
Prompts user to select
IP Addressing Mode A
Traffic IP Address
Management IP Address
Submit Changes
T
M
C
0 – Single (Traffic IP Address only)
1 – Dual (Traffic and Management IP Addresses)
Allows user to edit the Traffic IP Address using the arrow keys.
Allows user to edit the Management IP Address using the arrow keys.
Saves any changes made to the Traffic and Management IP
Addresses.
9–22
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
9.2.6.2 LAN Menu | Ethernet Ports Menu page (E)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The Ethernet Ports Menu page, opened from the LAN Menu page, provides read-only NP
Interface Ports 1 through 4 Link Status information, and allows the user to manually change the
Ethernet Port Speed/Duplex Configurations for each port by pressing ‘ 1’ through ‘4’ as needed.
9.2.6.2.1 LAN Menu | Ethernet Ports Menu | Ports 1-4 Speed/Duplex
Configuration
When ‘ 1’ , ‘2’ , ‘3’ or ‘4’ is pressed on the Ethernet Ports Menu page, the user is then prompted to configure NP Interface Ports 1 through 4, on a per-port basis, with one of the following selections:
0 – Auto
1 – 10 Mbps Half Duplex
2 – 10 Mbps Full Duplex
3 – 100 Mbps Half Duplex
4 – 100 Mbps Full Duplex
5 – 1000 Mbps Full Duplex
Refer to Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.4.2 LAN | Ethernet Ports for an overview of this functionality.
9–23
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
9.2.6.3 LAN Menu | ARP Menu (A)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The ARP Table page, opened from the LAN Menu page, contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Add entry
Modify Entry
A
M
Refer to Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.4.3 LAN | ARP (ARP Table) for an overview of command functionality.
Delete Entry
Previous Page
Next Page
D
P
N
Allows user to navigate, on a per-page basis, between the start and end of the ARP Table.
9–24
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
9.2.7 WAN Menu page (W)
The WAN Menu page, opened from the Main Menu , contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
QoS Feature Q
Prompts user to select:
0 – Disabled 1 – Enabled
Global Config & Statistics
Global Con Display
Global Statistics
Class Selector 6
Expedited Forwarding
Assured Forwarding Class 1
Assured Forwarding Class 2
Assured Forwarding Class 3
Assured Forwarding Class 4
Default
2
3
E
1
B
C
G
A
See Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.5 WAN Pages for an overview of command functionality and/or information presented for these functions.
4
D Provides user with read-only display of the DiffServ default queue.
Clear (reset) Statistics R Allows user to reset all DiffServ statistics.
9–25
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
9.2.8 Routing Table page (R)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
With the Routing Table page (opened from the Main Menu ), static routes can be entered into the
IP Module to route IP traffic over the satellite or to another device on the local LAN. Route entries can be in any combination of Unicast and Multicast routes. The Routing Table page contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Add entry
Modify Entry
Delete Entry
Previous Page
Next Page
D
P
A
M
N
Refer to Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.6.1 Routing | Routes for an overview of command functionality.
Allows user to navigate, on a per-page basis, between the start and end of the Routing Table.
9–26
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
9.2.9 OSPF Configuration page (F)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The OSPF Menu page, opened from the Main Menu , contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
OSPF E
Enables or Disables the Open Shortest Path First operation. Typing
‘E’ prompts user to select:
0 – Disabled 1 – Enabled
Area Network Address
Area Subnet Mask
OSPF Area
Cost
Retransmit Interval
Transmit Delay
Priority
R
T
P
A
C
N
M
See Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.6.2 Routing | OSPF for an overview of command functionality and/or information presented for these functions.
Hello Interval
Dead Interval
Authentication Key
Message Digest Key
K
J
H
D
Submit Changes Z
Saves any changes made on this page to the OSPF operating parameters.
9–27
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
9.2.10 IGMP Configuration page (I)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The IGMP Menu page, activated from the Main Menu , contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
IGMP E
Enables or Disables the Internet Group Management Protocol operation. Typing ‘E’ prompts user to select:
0 – Disabled 1 – Enabled
Query Interval Q
Response Interval
Last Member Query Interval
Robustness
IGMP Version
O
V
R
M
See Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.6.3 Routing | IGMP for an overview of command functionality and/or information presented for these functions.
Submit Changes Z
Saves any changes made on this page to the IGMP operating parameters.
9–28
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
9.2.11 Vipersat Configuration page (V)
Vipersat is an optional FAST Feature that must be purchased from Comtech EF Data. Refer to
Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.2 Admin | FAST Features for more information about FAST options.
If the SLM-5650A does not have this option installed, the functionality associated with this FAST
Feature option will not be visible/available to the CLI user.
The appearance of this page changes depending on the selected Vipersat Mode of operation (see
See Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.2.1 Admin | Vipersat Mode (FAST Feature required) ). The example shown here depicts the menu when the Vipersat Remote mode is selected.
Otherwise, see adjunct Comtech EF Data publication MN-0000035 – Vipersat SLM-5650A
Satellite Network Modem Router User Guide for details on configuration and use of these optional menu pages.
9–29
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
9.2.12 Redundancy Configuration page (E)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The 1:1 Redundancy Menu page, opened from the Main Menu , provides the user with read-only status information on the redundant operations configuration.
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem, when connected to a Comtech EF Data CRS-311 1:1
Redundancy Switch, provides fully-automatic protection of IP packet traffic in the case of equipment failure. Refer to the pertinent redundancy switch Installation and Operation Manual for detailed information on the use of the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem in redundant operations.
If the user selects the Redundancy tab without a 1:1 Redundant Configuration, the 1:1
Redundancy status is displayed as Unavailable .
9–30
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
9.2.13 Operations & Maintenance page (O)
The Operations & Maintenance page, opened from the Main Menu , contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Statistics
Ping/TraceRoute Target IP
Ping Above Address
Max Trace Route Hops
Trace Route Above Address
Base Management Port
WAN to WAN Internal Mcast Addr
T
I
B
W
Provides user with read-only access to Ethernet Tx/Rx, LAN, WAN operating statistics; allows user to clear existing statistics.
Allows user to edit target IP address for ping and trace route using the arrow keys.
P Allows user to ping on IP Address.
M
Allows user to set the maximum number of trace route hops using the arrow keys.
R Allows user to trace route on IP address.
Allows user to edit the Vipersat base management UDP/TCP port using the arrow keys.
Allows user to edit the WAN-WAN Internal Multicast Address using the arrow keys.
Debug Menu D Password-restricted for factory use only .
Note: Ping and Trace Route are only available through the CLI Operations & Maintenance page.
For ping and trace route to work, the user must enter a target IP address. The user can then choose to issue a Ping or Trace Route to the Target IP Address. When doing a Trace Route, the maximum trace route hops can also be specified.
9–31
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
NP Interface Telnet/SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
9.2.13.1 Operations & Maintenance | Statistics page (T)
The Statistics page, opened from the Operations & Maintenance page, provides read-only statistics pages for varied operating parameters and commands used to clear those statistics.
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Ethernet TX
Ethernet RX
IP
WAN
Clear Ethernet Statistics (Tx & Rx)
Clear IP Statistics
Clear WAN Statistics
1
2
3
T
R
I
W
Refer to Chapter Sect. 8.6.6.7 Stats (Statistics) pages for an overview of the information provided on these read-only pages.
Allows user to clear all statistics.
9–32
Chapter 10. TRANSEC MODULE
HTTPS INTERFACE
10.1 TRANSEC Module Overview
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem is optionally equipped with the TRANSEC Module Interface, either in standalone operation with the SLM-5650A Base Modem, or in tandem with the optional
Network Processor (NP) Interface module.
The SLM-5650A is fully compatible and interoperable in all specified modes of operation with
KIV-19 Provisional and KG-95-1 Provisional Transmission Security (TRANSEC) equipment currently used by the Government.
EIA-422 data rates higher than 20 Mbps (for complete interoperability with the KG-
95-1) are provisional.
For either configuration, the TRANSEC Module Interface provides a proxy function of HTTPS connections to the Base Modem and the NP Interface; a secure HTTPS connection to the
TRANSEC Module therefore enables user access to all Base Modem and/or all NP M&C parameters securely through this indirect proxy connection. The Secure Management interfaces supported by the TRANSEC Module Interface are summarized as follows:
Base Modem Network Processor (when installed) TRANSEC Module
HTTPS Proxy via TRANSEC Module HTTPS
SSH
SNMPv3
HTTPS (Proxy via TRANSEC Module)
HTTPS
SSH
When the TRANSEC Module Interface is installed, Management Security is mandatory and therefore security is always enabled : Network management M&C limitations that are enacted when High Level Security is in effect therefore always apply.
For more information on these available Web interfaces, see Chapter 7. BASE MODEM HTTP
INTERFACE or Chapter Sect. 8.6 NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) HTTP/HTTPS
INTERFACE .
10–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
10.2 TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface
The user can fully control and monitor operation of the
SLM-5650A TRANSEC Module from its HTTPS (Secure HTTP)
Interface. By rolling the cursor over the tabs located at the top of each page (shown at right), the user can select from the available nested hyperlinks.
The pages in the SLM-5650A TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface have been designed for optimal performance when using Microsoft’s Internet Explorer Ver. 7.0 or higher or Mozilla
Firefox Ver. 2.0 or higher (the examples shown use Internet Explorer Ver. 7.0).
10.3 Accessing the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface
From the PC, type https://www.xxx.yyy.zzz (where “www.xxx.yyy.zzz” represents the IP address of the SLM-5650A TRANSEC Module) into the Address area of the Web browser:
The user may be prompted with a Security
Alert. Should the advisory appear, click
[ Continue to this website] to proceed.
From any page in the TRANSEC Module
HTTPS interface, the user may select one of three modes of operation using the Interface
Navigator drop-down menu, located at the top left-hand corner of all TRANSEC
Module HTTPS Interface pages:
• Crypto Officer: Connects the user to the secure TRANSEC Module
HTTPS Interface (User Name and
Password required).
• Modem Operator: Connects the user to the Base Modem HTTP
Interface. See Chapter 7. BASE
MODEM HTTP INTERFACE for further information.
• Network Operator: Connects the user to the secure Network
Processor (NP) HTTP/HTTPS
Interface (User Name and Password required). See Chapter Sect. 8.6 NP
HTTP/ HTTPS Interface for further information.
To continue to the TRANSEC Module
10–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
HTTPS Interface pages, select Crypto Officer from the drop-down, then click [Go!].
Once the Login page appears, type in a valid Crypto Officer User Name and Crypto Officer
Password – the default for both is comtech – then click [Log On ].
The TRANSEC Module User Name and Password are each restricted to a minimum of 7 and a maximum of 25 characters, excluding: (ASCII Code 58), < (ASCII Code
60), > (ASCII Code 62), “ (ASCII Code 34), and ~ (ASCII Code 126).
Once the User Name and Password are accepted, the SLM-5650A TRANSEC Module “home” page ( Figure 10-1 ) appears. Click any tab or hyperlink to continue.
While legacy IE browser versions ( e.g., Internet
Explorer 6.0), may be used, Comtech EF Data
Technical Support does not provide support services for these older browsers. Should the user encounter problems connecting to the secure web interface using an older browser, follow this troubleshooting tip:
From the browser tool bar, go to the Tools | Internet
Options | Advanced tab, then under the Security heading, use the available check boxes to disable the
Secure Sockets Layers (SSL 2.0 and SSL 3.0), then enable the Transport Layer Security (TLS 1.0).
Remember to re-enable SSL once finished with troubleshooting.
10.3.1 HTTPS Interface – Operational Features
See Sect. 7.2.3 HTTP Interface – Operational Features for an overview of the navigational and operational features common with using this interface.
10.3.2 HTTPS Interface Menu Tree
The following menu tree illustrates the options available via the TRANSEC Module HTTPS
Interface:
Page Navigation Tabs
Interface Navigator
Drop-down Menu
Home Admin Stats Maint
Crypto Officer
Modem Operator
Home
Contact
Config
Update
Module Status Unit Info
Network Operator Event
To the left, as described in previously, the Interface Navigator Drop-down menu and its selections
(shown in green) allow secure access to one of the SLM-5650A’s three distinct Web interfaces.
Once Crypto Officer (i.e., the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface) is selected, the interface’s four available navigation tabs (shown in blue) may be accessed:
10–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
• Home • Admin (Administration) • Stats • Maint (Maintenance)
Beyond this top-level row of navigation tabs, the diagram illustrates the available nested hyperlinks (shown in grey) that afford specific interface functionality.
Click any tab or hyperlink to continue.
10.4 TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface Page Descriptions
The page figures provided throughout the remainder of this chapter omit the Interface
Navigator section that is typically located above the Comtech banner on each page; the purpose and function of this common segment is defined in Sect. 10.3 Accessing the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface.
10.4.1 Home pages
Select the Home or Contact hyperlink to continue.
10.4.1.1 Home | Home
Use this page to identify the SLM-5650A TRANSEC Module’s operational (Firmware) Version.
The user may return to this page from anywhere within the HTTPS Interface by clicking the
Home tab or hyperlink.
Figure 10-1. Home | Home page
10–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
10.4.1.2 Home | Contact
Use this page to reference basic contact information needed to reach Comtech EF Data Sales and
Customer Support via phone, fax, or Web/e-mail hyperlinks.
Figure 10-2. Home | Contact page
10–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
10.4.2 Admin (Administrative) pages
The Admin pages provide configuration, firmware upgrade, and events log management functions.
Select the Config , Update , or Event hyperlink to continue.
10.4.2.1 Admin | Config
Figure 10-3. Admin | Config page
10–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Active Key
Item
Key Signature
(read-only)
Current TEK
(read-only)
Seed Key
(write-only)
Confirm Seed Key
(write-only)
Enter Passphrase
(write-only)
Description
This is a signature, or fingerprint, of the T ransmission E ncryption K ey s (TEKs) generated by the Seed Key and Passphrase . The user can compare signatures on different modems to ensure that each has the same Seed Key and Passphrase .
NOTE: The TEKs are updated only when a Passphrase is submitted.
The user may generate 26 TEKs from the Seed Key and Passphrase (described below). The active TEK (1 through 26) is displayed here.
When it is desired to change the encryption key being used to encrypt traffic, click [Next TEK] to select the next key in the set of 26 TEKs.
Note the following:
• The [Next TEK] button is disabled when the module is in secondary mode, and the current TEK mirrors the TEK the connected primary modem uses.
• The TEK only increments and never decrements; the user cannot re-use a previous key. The only way to reset the TEK to 1 is by clicking [Activate Future
Key] (described below).
Enter a 32-character Seed Key in this text box to generate TEKs when the TRANSEC
Module is given a Passphrase (described below).
Re-enter the newly created Seed Key in this text box to ensure its accuracy.
Once the Seed Key is entered and confirmed , click [Update Seed Key] to finalize this change.
Accepts a 10- to 32-character Passphrase that is combined with the previously entered Seed Key to generate TEKs.
Once the Passphrase is entered , click [Update Passphrase] to finalize this change.
Future Key
Item
[Activate Future Key]
Future Seed Key
(write-only)
Confirm Future Seed Key
(write-only)
Description
The user can program a second seed key and passphrase to generate a second set of TEKs. These keys will lie dormant until the user activates them by clicking
[Activate Future Key] . At that time, the following happens:
1.
The active TEKs are replaced by the ones generated with the Future Seed
Key and Future Passphrase .
2.
The Current TEK gets reset to 1 .
3.
Secondary modems connected to this one will also activate their Future Keys .
NOTE: The [Activate Future Key] button is active only when the following conditions are met:
1.
The modem is in Primary mode (see Encryption Mode , explained below).
2.
The Current TEK is greater than 1 .
Enter a 32-character Future Seed Key in this text box to generate a TEK when the
TRANSEC Module is given a Future Passphrase (described below).
Re-enter the newly created Future Seed Key in this text box to ensure its accuracy.
Once the Future Seed Key is entered and confirmed , click [Update Seed Key] to finalize this change.
10–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Item
Future Passphrase
(write-only)
Description
Accepts a 10- to 32-character Passphrase that is combined with the previously entered Seed Key to generate TEKs.
Once the Passphrase is entered , click [Update Passphrase] to finalize this change.
Encryption Parameters
Item
Encryption Mode
Encryption
Encryption Frame
Length
Reset all keys
Run self tests
Description
Set encryption in the TRANSEC Module as Primary or Secondary .
Note the following:
• If Primary is selected, the TRANSEC Module will allow the user to advance the
TEK and activate the future key independently of any other modems.
• If Secondary is selected, the TRANSEC Module's TEK automatically mirrors the
TEK of the primary modem and the module will activate the future key when the primary modem activates its future key.
Click [Update Mode] when done.
Click [Change Encryption State] to display the On and Off radio buttons. The
“layered” appearance of this control is intended to prevent the user from accidentally toggling the Encryption State.
By selecting the Encryption State as ‘ On ’, this causes the data traffic to be encrypted by the TRANSEC Module using the current TEK. This encrypted data is then delivered to the base modem for transmission, regardless of the state of the receiving modem.
Three user-defined parameters must match in order for encrypted communication to commence between two TRANSEC Module-equipped modems:
1.
Seed Key.
2.
Passphrase.
3.
Encryption Frame Length.
Select the desired operational state, then click [Update Encryption] to save the selected state and then return this selection to its “protected” mode; the On/Off radio buttons will be hidden once again and the operational state message will update accordingly (i.e., “ Encryption is On ” or “ Encryption is Off ”).
Use this text box to specify the length of the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES)
256 encryption frame. Acceptable range is from 1 (fast acquisition, high overhead ) to
255 (slower acquisition, low overhead).
Once the desired Encryption Frame Length has been entered, click [ Update Frame
Length] to implement this change.
Click [Zeroize] to reset all encryption keys in the module’s memory and flash to default values.
Click [Test] to run the module’s cryptographic self tests.
Note the following:
• If the tests succeed, the module will resume operation.
• If the tests fail, the module will report an error to the event log.
• If encryption is enabled and the tests fail, the module will stop transmitting data to protect its integrity.
10–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Network Parameters
Item Description
Secure Management IP Allows users to change the IP address of the TRANSEC Module to suit their own operational environment.
NOTE: If this text box changes, it will be necessary to repeat the process in Section
Subnet Bits
10.3
, using the newly-designated IP address, to regain access to the TRANSEC Web
Interface.
Allows users to modify the IP subnet mask of the TRANSEC Module to suit their own operational environment.
Gateway IP Allows users to modify the default gateway of the TRANSEC Module to suit their own operational environment.
NOTE: The IP address entered in the text box must match the subnet of the Secure
Management IP. If it does not then the Gateway IP text box will default to 0.0.0.0.
Click [Update Settings] to apply changes made to any of these parameters.
Crypto Officer Credentials
This section is used to create a TRANSEC Module Crypto Officer Username and Crypto
Officer Password. Note that are each restricted to a minimum of 7 and a maximum of 25 characters, excluding : (ASCII Code 58), < (ASCII Code 60), > (ASCII Code 62), “ (ASCII Code
34), and ~ (ASCII Code 126).
The default for both the Crypto Officer Username and Password is comtech .
Item Description
Crypto Officer Username Use this text box to create the desired username.
Password Use this text box to create the desired password for the username being created.
Confirm Password Use this text box to re-enter the previously entered password.
Once the Username is entered and the Password is confirmed , click [Update Credentials] to finalize this update.
SSH (Secure Shell) Console
Item
Host Key Signature
Description
This key signature, or fingerprint, helps to identify the TRANSEC Module when connecting through SSH. SSH clients typically show the host key signature when they connect to a system for the first time. The user can then compare the host key the
SSH client shows with the host key the TRANSEC Module displays to verify that they are the same.
Click [Generate New Host Key] to generate a new host key that uniquely identifies the
TRANSEC Module. After doing this, SSH clients that have connected to the TRANSEC
Module before will usually note or warn that the host key has changed when they connect again.
10–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Item
SSH Console
Description
Click On or Off to set administrative access to the console, then click [Update SSH] to implement this setting .
10.4.2.2 Admin | Update
Figure 10-4. Admin | Update page
See Chapter 4. UPDATING FIRMWARE for instructions regarding the use of the ‘Admin |
Update’ page ( Figure 10-4 ) and for detailed information on the procedures associated with the
TRANSEC Module firmware update process.
10–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
10.4.2.3 Admin | Event
Use this page to display the events log specific to the TRANSEC Module, and to monitor and troubleshoot the health of the TRANSEC Module.
Figure 10-5. Admin | Event page
Event Log Control
Item Description
Logging On/Off Enables/disables logging of event messages.
Logging Level
This drop-down menu controls the maximum filtering level of displayed messages.
Choices are Errors Only , Errors and Warnings , and All Information .
Click [Submit] to execute these settings.
Event Log
Column
Index
Type
Date
Time
Category
Description
The event messages are numbered in the order they are received.
Describes the severity of the event. See Table 10-1 at the end of this section for an overview of the event types and their recommended user responses.
Displays the date that the event was logged in using MONTH/DAY/YEAR format.
Displays the time of day that the event was logged in 24-hour format.
All messages in this log are categorized as EventLog .
10–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Table 10-1. Event Log Message Types
Event Type (By order of severity – from least to worst case)
Event Type Event Description Level of Severity / User Action
Informational
Warning
Normal operational status change; e.g., successful password or configuration setting change.
Status change that the system might not accept or expect; e.g., setting the future passphrase without first setting the future seed key, entering an invalid remote command, etc.
Minimum. Event logged is for user reference only.
Moderate. User should consult the pertinent sections of this manual to troubleshoot, then repeat command or procedure as needed.
Minor
Error condition that the system should be able to recover from without affecting the operation of the system; e.g., encountering software ‘bug’, etc.
Such events are not recorded into the
Events Log.
Moderate. User should report issues when convenient to Comtech EF Data Customer Support
(i.e., via the means available through the SLM-
5650A TRANSEC Module Web Interface Home |
Contact page, or by using the SLM-5650 Web
Server Interface Home | Support e-mail interface, etc.).
Major
A more severe error that may indicate a degradation of the stability of the system; e.g., out-of-range temperature readings for the TRANSEC Module, etc.
Maximum. User should contact Comtech EF
Data Customer Support as soon as possible to address issue.
Critical
The most severe error level indicating that system failure has occurred or is imminent; e.g., memory allocation failure, OS failure, etc.
Maximum. User should contact Comtech EF
Data Customer Support immediately to arrange for RMA / in-factory service.
Click [Clear Log] to clear the event log of all messages. The event log is reset to zero entries.
10–12
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface
10.4.3 Stats (Statistics) | Module Status
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure 10-6. Stats | Module Status page
Encryption Parameters
Item Description
AES256 Firmware Version Identifies the version of the AES 256 core.
Encryption Frame Length Displays the currently configured AES 256 frame length.
Board Temp Displays the temperature of the TRANSEC Module
TRANSEC Clock Status Displays the DCM locked status for the AES 256 core.
Transmit Status
Item
TX Frame Count
TX Status
DCM Lock
Bypass Traffic
Crypto Traffic
BIST Done
Description
Displays the number of transmitted AES 256 frames.
Describes the value of the Tx Status register.
Displays the state of the Tx DCM lock.
Displays the encryption status ( Bypass on means Encryption off ).
When Detected , the module has sampled outgoing traffic and verifies it has been encrypted. When Not Detected , encryption is off, or the module cannot verify encrypted traffic.
Indicates if the AES 256 core is analyzing the results of its Built-in Self Test (BIST) for the TRANSEC Tx.
Receive Status
10–13
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Item
RX CRC Errors
RX Frame Count
RX Status
DCM Lock
Unique Word Lock
Out of Sync
BIST Done
Description
Displays the count of received CRC errors.
Displays the number of received AES 256 frames.
Displays the value of the Rx Status register.
Displays the state of the Rx DCM lock.
Indicates that the decryption engine has successfully found the unique word and has been able to lock to it.
Indicates that an out-of-sync condition has been detected by the encryption engine.
Indicates whether the AES 256 core is analyzing the results of its Built-in Self Test
(BIST) for the TRANSEC Rx.
Automatic Refresh Status Timer
The page updates itself automatically for the duration of the countdown timer. When the timer reaches 0:00 , the page will stop updating to help conserve system resources.
To manually override the timer, click [Stop] to interrupt or [Reset] to restart the timer.
10.4.4 Maint (Maintenance) | Unit Info
Use this scrollable read-only page to view the Firmware Information window. The information provided here serves to verify that the correct firmware is loaded into the unit.
Figure 10-7. Maint | Unit Info page
10–14
Chapter 11. TRANSEC MODULE
SSH CLI OPERATION
11.1 Overview
This chapter defines the Command Line Interface (CLI) user menu system provided with the
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem’s optional TRANSEC Module via a SSH (Secure Shell) interface.
The SSH interface allows the user to change operating parameters similar to those found on the
TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface, and with the monitoring, configuration, and control operations available via the modem front panel. Refer back to Chapter 10. TRANSEC
MODULE HTTPS INTERFACE or Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION , respectively, for detailed information about the command functionality outlined in this chapter.
11–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
11.1.1 SSH (Secure Shell) User Access
When connecting via SSH, the user must have network connectivity to the TRANSEC Module.
This connectivity can be via a local LAN, a remote LAN, or via a satellite link from another modem.
As explained in Chapter Sect. 6.6 SSH (Secure Shell) Interface, this chapter uses
PuTTY, a free and open source terminal emulator application used as a serial console client for SSH, Telnet, rlogin and raw TCP computing protocols. While the TRANSEC
Module CLI main and nested screens will be identical across terminal emulator applications, setup may differ slightly – this chapter assumes users’ familiarity with their preferred SSH interface.
Once connected to the TRANSEC Module via the SSH interface, the user will need to provide a login name and password (the defaults for both are comtech ). When the valid login and password are provided, the user is taken directly to the CLI Main Menu, as shown in the following examples:
11–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
11.2 Command Line Interface (CLI) Pages
11.2.1 CLI Menu System – Parallel Functionality
The CLI, accessible via SSH, allows the user to change operating parameters in a manner similar to the functionality, as provided, for the monitoring, configuration, and control via the
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem’s front panel menus (see Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL
OPERATION ) and the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface (see Chapter 10. TRANSEC
MODULE HTTPS INTERFACE ).
11.2.2 CLI Menu – Common Information, Navigation, Operation Features
Note the following:
1.
With some exceptions, the menu pages depicted in this chapter feature the following information or navigational aids:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
[Text field example] [RO]
Logout of Administration
Session
Exit Menu
L
X
Typically found in the body of the page. This designates the field as a read-only status/informational message. There is no user action required for this item.
Found at the bottom of the page. Allows user to log out of the
SSH session.
Found at the bottom of the page. Allows user to exit the current menu and return to the parent menu. Alternately, the user may press the Esc key to perform the same action.
2.
Typically, once any mnemonic is entered, the user is prompted to type in a functional selection, an alphanumeric configuration string, or an operational value. This prompt is provided at the bottom of the active page and takes the form of a selection choice and/or a blank prompt (a solid bar), as shown in the example to the right:
3.
If a parameter is rejected for any reason, an error will appear at the top of the page, along with an explanation that serves to assist the user in the re-entry of information, as per the following examples:
11–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Any changes made via the CLI should be saved to permanent storage prior to terminating the
CLI session. While changes will remain active so long as the modem remains in operation, take note also that changes will be lost if, for example, the SLM-5650A loses power.
Modified parameters can be saved by issuing the Save command “S” from any menu. The user is prompted to confirm that all changes should be made permanent:
4.
The user is prompted, when attempting to terminate a CLI session via Logout command “L”, to verify that the session should be ended:
11–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module SSH CLI Operation
11.2.3 Main Menu
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The Main Menu serves as the CLI’s primary navigation page. All selections made on this page take the user to submenus listed in this table (operational features nested under each of these submenus, in turn, are outlined in the chapter sections listed):
Submenu Entry Function/Description See…
Configuration C
The Configuration Menu page provides configuration access to the TRANSEC Module encryption features.
Sect. 11.2.4
(11.2.4.1 through
11.2.4.6)
Module Status
Event Log
Unit Info
Comtech EF Data
Information
M
E
I
Z
The Module Status page (no nested menus). This read-only page compiles the TRANSEC Module’s current operating parameters.
Opens the Event Log page. The user monitors and controls operational faults and alarms here.
Opens the Unit Info page. The firmware bootup settings and system reboot controls are provided on this page.
Opens the Comtech EF Data Information page (no nested menus). This read-only page provides customer support contact information.
Sect. 11.2.5
Sect. 11.2.6
Sect. 11.2.7
Sect. 11.2.8
11–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
11.2.4 Configuration page [C]
The Configuration Menu page, opened from the Main Menu , contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description See…
[Operating mode:]
Active Encryption Key
[RO]
Identifies the modem’s active Encryption Mode as Primary or Secondary (see Sect. 11.3.1.1.3 for details).
A Opens the nested Active Encryption Key Menu page.
N/A
Sect. 11.2.4.1
Future Encryption Key
Encryption Settings
Network Configuration
Crypto Officer
Credentials
SSH Console
F Opens the nested Future Encryption Key Menu page.
E Opens the nested Encryption Menu page.
N Opens the nested Network Menu page.
C Opens the nested Credentials Menu page.
S Opens the nested SSH Console Menu page.
Sect. 11.2.4.2
Sect. 11.2.4.3
Sect. 11.2.4.4
Sect. 11.2.4.5
Sect. 11.2.4.6
See Chapter Sect. 10.4.2.1 Admin | Config for detailed information about the configuration parameters and operations addressed by these nested menus.
11–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
11.2.4.1 Configuration | Active Encryption Key Menu page [A]
The Active Encryption Key Menu page, opened from the Configuration Menu , contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description/User Prompt
[Key Signature]
Seed Key
Confirm Seed Key
[Seed Key fields]
Passphrase
[Current TEK]
Next TEK
[RO] Current Active Key Signature is identified here.
K
User is prompted to enter a 32-character Active Seed Key to generate a TEK when the TRANSEC Module is given a Passphrase (described below).
C User is prompted confirm to the Active Seed Key just entered.
[RO] Displays the status of the Active Seed Key in real time.
P
User is prompted to enter a 10- to 32-character Passphrase that is combined with the previously entered Active Seed Key to generate TEKs.
[RO] Identifies the Current TEK (1 through 26).
N
Generates the next available TEK. The [Current TEK] field will update accordingly.
Note: This command is disabled when the module is in secondary mode and the current TEK mirrors the TEK the connected primary modem uses.
11–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
11.2.4.2 Configuration | Future Encryption Key Menu page [F]
The Future Encryption Key Menu page, opened from the Configuration Menu , contains options or fields that are identical to those provided from the Active Encryption Key Menu, except that all commands are applicable to management of Future Encryption Keys:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description/User Prompt
[Key Signature]
Seed Key
Confirm Seed Key
[Seed Key fields]
Passphrase
Activate Future Key
[RO] Future Key Signature is identified here.
K
User is prompted to enter a 32-character Future Seed Key to generate a TEK when the TRANSEC Module is given a Passphrase (described below).
C User is prompted confirm to the Future Seed Key just entered.
[RO] Displays the status of the Future Seed Key in real time.
P
I
(Not shown)
User is prompted to enter a 10- to 32-character Passphrase that is combined with the previously entered Future Seed Key to generate TEKs.
Activates the future key and resets the TEK index to 1.
Note: This option appears only when the module is in primary mode, the user has entered a Future Seed Key and Passphrase, and the user has advanced the current TEK so it is anywhere from 2 to 26.
See Chapter Sect. 10.4.2.1 Admin | Config for further information about Active vs.
Future Encryption Keys.
11–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
11.2.4.3 Configuration | Encryption Menu page [E]
The Encryption Menu page, opened from the Configuration Menu , contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Encryption
Operating Mode
Frame Length
Zeroize All Keys
Run Self Tests
E
Prompts user to sets the Encryption Mode operation:
0 – Disabled 1 – Enabled
O
Prompts user to sets the Operating Mode operation:
0 – Primary 1 – Secondary
F Specifies the length of the AES 256 encryption frame from 1 to 255.
Z Resets all encryption keys in the module’s memory and flash to default values.
R
Runs the module’s cryptographic self tests.
Note the following: o If the tests succeed, the module will resume operation. o If the tests fail, the module will report an error to the event log. o If encryption is enabled and the tests fail, the module will stop transmitting data to protect its integrity
11–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
11.2.4.4 Configuration | Network Menu page [N]
The Network Menu page, opened from the Configuration Menu , contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Secure Management IP
Subnet Bits
Gateway IP
M
User changes the TRANSEC Module IP address as needed.
Note: If this address is changed, it will be necessary to repeat the login process for the SSH interface, as described in Section 6.6
, using the newlydesignated IP address, to regain access to the TRANSEC Module SSH CLI.
B User changes the IP subnet mask of the TRANSEC Module as needed.
User changes the TRANSEC Module IP gateway address as needed.
G
Note: If this address is changed, it must match the subnet of the Secure
Management IP. If it does not then the Gateway IP text box will default to
0.0.0.0.
11–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
11.2.4.5 Configuration | Credentials Menu page [C]
The Credentials Menu page, opened from the Configuration Menu , contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Crypto Officer User Name U User is prompted to create the desired User Name.
Crypto Officer Password P User is prompted to create the desired Password.
Confirm Password
[Password Fields]
C
[RO]
User is prompted to confirm the Password just entered.
Provides the status of the password field in real time.
The Crypto Officer User Name and Password are each restricted to a minimum of 7 and a maximum of 25 characters, excluding: (ASCII Code 58), < (ASCII Code 60), >
(ASCII Code 62), “(ASCII Code 34), and ~ (ASCII Code 126).
11–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
11.2.4.6 Configuration | SSH Console Menu page [S]
The SSH Console Menu page, opened from the Configuration Menu , contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
[Host Key Signature]
Generate new host Key
SSH
[RO]
G
S
Displays the key signature, or fingerprint, which helps to identify the
TRANSEC Module when connecting through SSH.
User is prompted to generate a new host key that uniquely identifies the
TRANSEC Module.
User is prompted to toggle Secure Shell Console operation:
0 – Off 1 – On
11–12
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
11.2.5 Module Status page [M]
The read-only Module Status page, opened from the Main Menu , provides the user with the
TRANSEC Module Interface’s current operational parameters:
• AES 256 Version;
• Encryption Frame Length;
• Operating Mode;
• Board Temperature;
• TRANSEC Clock Status;
• Transmit Status;
• Receive Status.
Pressing any key will return the user to the Main Menu page.
11–13
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module SSH CLI Operation
11.2.6 Event Log [E]
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The Event Log Menu page, opened from the Main Menu , contains the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Logging
Logging Level
View Event Log
Clear Event Log
M
Sets recording of events and alarms:
0 – Off 1 – On
E
Sets the level of information collected for the Events Log:
0 – Errors Only 1 – Errors and Warnings
2 - All Information
V Displays the tally of events logged since the last time the Log was cleared.
Clears the event log of all messages. Once selected, the user is prompted with the following message:
This action will clear the event log.
Are you sure? (Y/N)
C Enter ‘ Y ’ or ‘ N ’. If ‘ Y ’ is entered, the event log is reset to zero entries, and the following message is displayed:
Event log cleared.
Press Any Character to Continue.
Pressing any key returns the user to the Event Log Menu page.
See Chapter Sect. 10.4.2.3 Admin | Event for detailed information about the operating parameters addressed by this menu.
11–14
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module SSH CLI Operation
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
11.2.7 Unit Info [ I ]
See Chapter 4. FLASH UPGRADING for detailed information on the procedures associated with the TRANSEC Module firmware update process.
The Unit Information page, opened from the Main Menu , provides information needed to verify that the correct firmware is loaded for operation of the unit. Note the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
[Bootrom Info]
[Bulk 1 Info]
[Bulk 2 Info]
Boot From
Reboot
[RO] Displays the bootrom firmware.
[RO] Displays the firmware version loaded into the Slot 1 location.
[RO] Displays the firmware version loaded into the Slot 2 location.
B
R
Selects the firmware boot source for modem operations as follows:
0 – Newest (automatically selects the most current version firmware residing in either Slot 1 or Slot 2);
1 – Slot 1 (selects the firmware residing in the Slot 1 location;
2 – Slot 2 (selects the firmware residing in the Slot 2 location.
Note: If the ‘Boot From’ selection is changed, the user must reboot the modem in order for that firmware selection to be loaded for operation.
Reboots the modem. When selected, the following message displays:
This action will reboot the TRANSEC module.
Are you sure? (Y/N)
Enter ‘ Y ’ or ‘ N ’. If ‘ Y ’ is entered, the reboot process begins by closing the
SSH CLI. On the SLM-5650A front panel VFD, three messages will display at minimum (depending on the modem’s installed options):
THIS MODEM WILL REBOOT
IN FIVE SECONDS!
BOOTING MODEM…
…PLEASE WAIT
INITIALIZING MODEM…
Once the modem reboots, the user must initialize a new SSH CLI session to resume use of this interface.
11–15
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
TRANSEC Module SSH CLI Operation
11.2.8 Comtech EF Data Information page [Z]
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The read-only Comtech EF Data Information page, opened from the Main Menu , provides the user with basic contact information to reach Comtech EF Data Sales and Customer Support via phone or e-mail.
Press any key to return to the Main Menu page.
11–16
Chapter 12. 10/100/1000 BaseT
(GbE) INTERFACE
12.1 Introduction
Figure 12-1. 10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface Module (AS/11985)
The 10/100/1000 BaseT Ethernet – or Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) – Interface Module, shown in
Figure 12-1 , acts as an Ethernet bridge for data traffic. M onitor and C ontrol (M&C) information is not supported on the GbE Interface but is available through the 10/100 BaseT remote port of the modem. A functional block diagram is shown in Figure 12-2 .
The GbE Interface supports data rates from 64 kbps to 155.52 Mbps. IP traffic entering the GbE
Interface is encapsulated in HDLC protocol for transmission over the satellite link. HDLC
CRS-16 verification is performed on all received (from WAN) HDLC frames. The GbE module user interface is a single IEEE 802.3ab 1000 BaseT copper compliant female RJ-45 connector, wired as described in Table 12-1 .
12.2 Physical Description
The GbE Interface is implemented on a 4.5 W x 6.8 D x .85 H inches (11.43 W x 17.27 D x
2.16H cm) PCB. Connectivity to the SLM-5650A is accomplished with a 96-pin DIN receptacle.
The LAN interface consists of an RJ-45 connector with link status and link activity Light-
Emitting Diode (LED) indicators.
12–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
10/100/1000 Base-T (GbE) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure 12-2. GbE Interface Functional Block Diagram
12.2.1 Connector Pinout
The GbE Interface is comprised of one IEEE 802.3ab 1000BaseT copper interface via a single
‘RJ-45’ type female connector (J1). The LAN interface supports 10/100/1000 BaseT operation.
Table 12-1. Connector Pinout
Pin # Description
1 BI_DA+
2
3
BI_DA-
BI_DB+
4
5
6
7
8
BI_DC+
BI_DC-
BI_DB-
BI_DD+
BI_DD-
Direction bidirectional bidirectional bidirectional bidirectional bidirectional bidirectional bidirectional bidirectional
12–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
10/100/1000 Base-T (GbE) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
12.3 General Specifications
Data Framing
Data Framing Format (WAN)
Connector
Electrical Properties
Packet Types
Signal Types
Voltage Level
Packet Latency
Flow Control
General Specifications
10/100/1000 BaseT Interface: RFC-894 “Ethernet”
HDLC (Standard Single Channel)
RJ-45 female, 100 Ω
Per IEEE 802.3ab
Burst, distributed, or IPV4
Serial data
Per IEEE- 802.3ab
50 ms maximum
Cable Length, Maximum
Hot Pluggable
None
100 meters CAT 5 cable, patch cords and connecting hardware, per
ISO/IEC 11801:1995 and ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-A (1995)
Cable Yes
Module NO
LEDs
Ingress Packet Filtration Parameters
Egress Packet Parameters
Link Status, link activity
MAC, IP address match value configuration for media and management packets, UDP port for media packets
Destination IP address and UDP port for media packets
Packet Filtration Parameters (generic) IP address match value configuration for management packets
1000 BaseT Link Statistics Ingress good octets
Ingress bad octets
Ingress unicast packets
Ingress broadcast packets
Ingress multicast packets
Ingress pause packets
Ingress undersize packets
Ingress fragments
Ingress oversize packets
Ingress jabber
Ingress Rx errors
Ingress Frame Check Sequence Errors
Egress oclets
Egress unicast packets
Egress broadcast packets
Egress multicast packets
12–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
10/100/1000 Base-T (GbE) Interface
WAN Port Statistics
Management Port Statistics
Controlled Functions
Monitor & Control
Ingress good oclets
Ingress bad oclets
Ingress unicast packets
Ingress broadcast packets
Ingress multicast packets
Ingress pause packets
Ingress undersize packets
Ingress fragments
Ingress oversize packets
Ingress jabber
Ingress Rx errors
Ingress Frame Check Sequence Errors
Egress oclets
Egress unicast packets
Egress broadcast packets
Egress multicast packets
HDLC link errors
Rx packet count
Tx packet count
Ingress good oclets
Ingress bad oclets
Ingress unicast packets
Ingress broadcast packets
Ingress multicast packets
Ingress pause packets
Ingress undersize packets
Ingress fragments
Ingress oversize packets
Ingress jabber
Ingress Rx errors
Ingress Frame Check Sequence Errors
Egress oclets
Egress unicast packets
Egress broadcast packets
Egress multicast packets
TX data rate
Rx data rate
Tx enable/disable
Rx enable/disable
Management IP Address and Mask
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
12–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
10/100/1000 Base-T (GbE) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
12.4 10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface Module Removal and Installation
Ensure that the unit is POWERED OFF. Serious injury or damage to the equipment could result if the unit is powered during module removal or installation.
Care must be taken not to damage the module’s components during removal or installation.
12.4.1 GbE Interface Module Removal Procedure
Step Task
1 Turn off the power to the modem.
2
3
4
Disconnect
Loosen
Pull
the RJ-45 cable from the Interface Module.
the (two) captive screws securing the module to the chassis.
the module straight out until it is clear of the chassis slot.
12.4.2 GbE Interface Module Installation Procedure
Step Task
1 Insert the Interface Module straight into the slot, using the chassis’ internal card guides, until it plugs securely into the internal card receptacle.
2
3
4
Secure
Turn on
the module to the chassis using the (two) captive screws.
Connect the RJ-45 cable to the Interface Module.
the power to the modem.
12–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
10/100/1000 Base-T (GbE) Interface
BLANK PAGE
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
12–6
Chapter 13. G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2
INTERFACE
13.1 Introduction
Figure 13-1. G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module (AS/11579 shown)
The G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module ( Figure 13-1 ) provides physical and electrical connection between the external terrestrial device and the internal circuitry of the SLM-5650A’s modulator and demodulator. By convention, a modem is D ata C ommunications E quipment
(DCE), where Tx data enters the data interface and Rx data exits it.
The G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module supports balanced or unbalanced, and differential/ single-ended operation. The plug-in interface has full duplex capability.
13–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
13.2 Physical Description
Figure 13-2 shows the functional block diagram for this interface. (Refer back to Figure 13-1 for the rear panel view of the Interface Module.)
Figure 13-2. G.703T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Functional Block Diagram
The G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module provides:
• Two (2) G.703 Interfaces: o Balanced T1/E1 and T2 (J1); o Unbalanced T1/E1, T2/E2 (J2 Tx / J3 Rx).
• An External Clock Input (J4).
13–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
13.2.1 Connector Pinouts
13.2.1.1 “J1 | BAL DATA” Connector – DB-15F (G.703 Balanced)
Table 13-1. “ J1 | BAL DATA” Connector Pinout
Connector | REF DES
J1
Pin # G.703 (Non-D&I)
1 SD_A G.703
9
2
SD_B G.703
Ground
10
11
3 RD_A G.703
RD_B G.703
12
4 Ground
5
13
6
14
15
7
8
Direction
In
In
–
Out
Out
–
13.2.1.2 “J2” through “J4” Connectors – BNC (G.703 Unbalanced)
Table 13-2. 75 Ω BNC Connectors (G.703 Unbalanced)
Connector | REF DES Description Characteristics
J2 Tx Data G.703 (Input) BNC 75 Ω Female
J3
Rx Data G.703
(Output)
J4 Ext Clock Ref (Input)
BNC 75 Ω Female
BNC 75 Ω Female
13–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
13.3 Summary of Specifications
GENERAL
INTERFACES
PHYSICAL and
ENVIRONMENTAL
Item
Rx Buffer
Requirements
Interface Balanced and Unbalanced G.703 ports, T1/E1, T2/E2
Note: Selection of a data rate requires TX and RX having the same data rate.
External Clock Input One input
G.703 Frame
Types
Type
Note: Programmable in 0.5 ms increments..
Bits Bytes
T1
E1
T2
E2
G.704
G.704
G.704
G.743
G.747
G.704
G.745
G.742
Minimum Buffer Size for any rate 0.5 ms
Maximum Buffer Size:
G.751
G.752
G.753
61 ms
44 ms
61 ms
Clock Options
Tx Clock = Tx, Rx (satellite), or External
Rx Clock = Tx, Rx, External, or Internal
9264
512
12624
2352
1680
2112
2112
1696
192
64
1578
294
210
264
264
212
Acquisition Range Programmed Tx data rate ± 100 ppm
G.703 Unbalanced
Test
Baseband Loopback (at interface)
Interface Loopback (through interface card)
2047 test pattern generator
1 channel supporting T1/E1, T2/E2, and G.703
Connector Type
Signals Supported
Data Rate
Tx and Rx Data Rates
Line Coding
Pulse Mask
Impedance
External Clock Input
Connector
Impedance
Return Loss per G.703
Input Amplitude
Input Frequency
Signal Characteristics
BNC, female
ITU
ITU
75
-T-
1544, 2048, 6312, and 8448 kbps
Tx and Rx data rates are programmed the same
HDB3, B8ZS, B6ZS, HDB3, AMI (Common)
-T-G.703
Ω
G.703 SD, RD
Unbalanced, 150 Ω Balanced Per ITU -T-G.703
BNC, female
75 Ω ± 5%
Synchronization XXXXX Interface
0.5 to 5.0 V peak to peak
1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 1.544, 2.048, 6.312, and 8.448 MHz
Sine wave or square with duty cycle of 50 ± 10%
Environmental
Alarms Loss of Signal
All 1’s
Physical 4.5 W x 6.8 D x .85 H inches (11.43 W x 17.27 D x 2.16H cm)
Temperature 0 to 50 ° C (32 to 122 ° F)
Humidity 0 to 95% noncondensing
13–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
13.4 G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module Removal and Installation
Ensure that the unit is POWERED OFF. Serious injury or damage to the equipment could result if the unit is powered during module removal or installation.
Care must be taken not to damage the module’s components during removal or installation.
13.4.1 G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module Removal Procedure
Step Task
3
4
1
2
Turn off
Loosen
Pull the power to the modem.
Disconnect all cables (DB the module
straight out
15 and BNC) from the Interface Module.
until it is clear of the chassis slot. the (two) captive screws securing the module to the chassis.
13.4.2 G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module Installation Procedure
Step Task
1 Insert the Interface Module straight into the slot, using the chassis’ internal card guides, until it plugs securely into the internal card receptacle.
2
3
4
Secure the module to the chassis using the (two) captive screws.
Connect all cables (DB
Turn on the power to the modem.
15 and BNC) to the Interface Module.
13–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface
BLANK PAGE
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
13–6
Chapter 14. LOW VOLTAGE
DIFFERENTIAL (LVDS) INTERFACE
14.1 Introduction
Figure 14-1. Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface Module (PL/12272-1)
The Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface Module ( Figure 14-1 ) provides a physical and electrical interface between the SLM-5650A’s modulator or demodulator signal sources operating with LVDS electrical characteristics. By convention, a modem is D ata C ommunications E quipment
(DCE), where Tx data enters the data interface and Rx data exits it.
14–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
14.2 Physical Description
Figure 14-2 shows the functional block diagram for this interface. It provides a single Type ‘D’
25-pin female (DB-25F) connector wired as described in Table 14-1 . (Refer back to Figure 14-1 for the LVDS Interface Module as viewed from the rear panel.)
Figure 14-2. LVDS Interface Functional Block Diagram
14–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
14.2.1 “J1” Connector Pinout
The “J1” LVDS module user data interface is a single Type ‘D’ 25-pin female (DB-25F) connector.
Table 14-1. “J1” Connector Pinout
PIN # DESCRIPTION
14
15
16
17
18
19
1 GND
SD_P
2 SD_N
SCT_N
3 RX_DATA_N
RX_DATA_P
4 RTS_N
LVDS_RX_CLK_N
5 SPARE
RESERVED
6 SPARE
RTS_P
7 GND
20
21
22
23
24
25
SPARE
8 RR_N
SPARE
9 LVDS_RX_CLK_P
SPARE
10 RR_P
SPARE
11 TT_P
TT_N
12 SCT_P
RESERVED
13 SPARE
DIRECTION
–
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
–
–
–
IN
–
–
OUT
–
OUT
–
OUT
–
IN
IN
OUT
–
–
14–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
14.3 General Specifications
Specification Type
General
Physical
Characteristic
Digital Data Rate
Tx Clock Source
Transmit Clock and Data
Inversion
Buffer Clock Source
Buffer Size
Physical Size
Environmental
Temperature
Humidity
Description
64 kbps to 42 Mbps, in 1 bps steps
Rx, INT, Tx Terrestrial, and Data Source Sync
Interface can invert the Tx clock and data independently of each other.
INT, Tx Terrestrial, Rx Satellite
128 to 4,194,304 bits, or 2 to 60 mSec
4.5 W x 6.8 D x .85 H inches
(11.43 W x 17.27D x 2.16H cm)
0 to 50°C
(32 to 122°F)
0 to 95% non-condensing
14–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
14.4 LVDS Interface Module Removal and Installation
Ensure that the unit is POWERED OFF. Serious injury or damage to the equipment could result if the unit is powered during module removal or installation.
Care must be taken not to damage the module’s components during removal or installation.
14.4.1 LVDS Interface Module Removal Procedure
Step
1
2
3
4
Task
Turn off the power to the modem.
Disconnect the DB-25M cable from the Interface Module.
Loosen the (two) captive screws securing the module to the chassis.
Pull the module straight out until it is clear of the chassis slot.
14.4.2 LVDS Interface Module Installation Procedure
Step
1
2
3
4
Task
Insert the Interface Module straight into the slot, using the chassis’ internal card guides, until it plugs securely into the internal card receptacle.
Secure the module to the chassis using the (two) captive screws.
Connect the DB-25M cable to the Interface Module.
Turn on the power to the modem.
14–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface
BLANK PAGE
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
14–6
Chapter 15. DoubleTalk
Carrier-in-Carrier OPTION
Before attempting to commission a satellite link using Carrier-in-Carrier, the user must ensure that the link is robust enough for normal operation. Only when this has been done – and all system issues (e.g., antenna-pointing, cabling, terrestrial interference, satellite interference, etc.) have been resolved – should the user attempt the use of Carrier-in-Carrier.
15.1 Introduction
Space segment costs are typically the most significant operating expense for any satellite-based service. Such costs have a direct impact on the viability and profitability of the service. For a satellite transponder that has finite resources in terms of bandwidth and power, the leasing costs are determined by bandwidth and power used. A satellite circuit should therefore be designed for optimal utilization to use a similar share of transponder bandwidth and power.
The traditional approach towards balancing a satellite circuit – once the satellite and earth station parameters are fixed – involves trade-off between modulation and coding. A lower order modulation requires less transponder power, while using more bandwidth. Conversely, higher order modulation reduces required bandwidth, albeit at a significant increase in power.
Comtech EF Data’s DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier serves to resolve this issue.
15.2 What is DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier?
The SLM-5650A’s DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier (CnC) option uses a patented signal processing algorithm developed by Raytheon Applied Signal Technology that allows both the forward and reverse carriers of a full duplex link to share the same segment of transponder bandwidth, using patented “Adaptive Cancellation.” Raytheon Applied Signal Technology uses the term
DoubleTalk, and Comtech EF Data refers to it as DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier (CnC) 1 .
1 DoubleTalk is licensed from and is a registered trademark of Raytheon Applied Signal
Technology. Carrier-in-Carrier is a registered trademark of Comtech EF Data.
15–1
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
CnC was first introduced in Comtech EF Data’s CDM-Qx Satellite Modem and, more recently, in the CLO-10 Link Optimizer. The implementation of CnC in the SLM-5650A has been further refined to address some of the limitations that existed in the CDM-Qx implementation.
This technology improves bandwidth and power utilization beyond what is possible with FEC and modulation alone. This allows unprecedented user savings and, when combined with advanced modulation and FEC, it allows for multi-dimensional optimization:
• Reduced operating expense (OPEX) – e.g., Occupied Bandwidth & Transponder Power;
• Reduced capital expenditure (CAPEX) – e.g., Block Up Converter/High-Power Amplifier
(BUC/HPA) size and/or antenna size;
• Increased throughput without using additional transponder resources;
• Increased link availability (margin) without using additional transponder resources;
• A combination of any of the above to meet different objectives.
Summary : When carriers share common bandwidth, up to 50% savings in transponder utilization is possible.
15.3 Application Requirements
The following conditions are necessary in order to operate DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier:
• Link must be full duplex.
• An SLM-5650A must be used at the end of the link where the cancellation needs to take place.
• The transponder is operated as Loopback. That is, each end of the link must be able to see a copy of its own signal in the return (downlink) path from the satellite. The looped back signal is then subtracted, which leaves the signal from the distant end of the link. CnC cannot be used in spot beam systems.
• The transponder needs to be “bent-pipe” – meaning no on-board processing, demodulation, regeneration can be employed. Demodulation/remodulation does not preserve the linear combination of the forward and return signals, and the resulting reconstituted waveform prevents recovery of the original constituent signals.
Figure 155-1 shows a simplified conceptual block diagram of CnC processing. The two ends of the link are denoted ‘ A’ and ‘ B’ and the uplink and downlink are shown.
This performance is achieved through advanced signal processing algorithms that provide optimal cancellation while tracking and compensating for the following common link impairments:
1) Time varying delay: In addition to the static delays of the electronics and the round-trip delay associated with propagation to the satellite and back, there is a time-varying
15–2
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A component due to movement of the satellite. The CnC module tracks and compensates for this variation.
2) Frequency offset and drift: Common sources are satellite Doppler shift, up and down converter frequency uncertainties, and other drift associated with the electronics in the
SLM-5650A itself. The CnC module tracks and compensates for this frequency offset and drift.
3) Atmospheric effects: Fading and scintillation can affect amplitude, phase, and spectral composition of the signal and the degree to which it correlates with the original signal.
The CnC module tracks and compensates for these atmospheric related impairments.
4) Link Asymmetries: Various asymmetries in the forward and return link can produce differences in the relative power of the two received signal components. These can be both deterministic (static) or random (and time varying). An example of the former would be the differences resulting from antenna size/gain variations between the two ends of the link. An example of the latter would be transient power differences due to different levels of atmospheric fading in the uplinks. CnC compensates for the asymmetries, up to a certain extent.
Figure 155-1. Conceptual Block Diagram
15–3
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
In a number of ways, CnC carriers behave similar to conventional carriers in satellite links. They are both exposed to adjacent carriers, cross-polarization and rain fade, and exhibit impairments when any of these become too great. In addition, CnC operates in an environment where:
• Carriers intentionally occupy the same spectral slot;
• Performance depends upon desired and co-located interfering carrier.
15.3.1 Operational Recommendations
The rules for CnC operation are summarized as follows:
• Both earth stations share the same footprint so each sees both carriers.
• CnC carriers are operated in pairs.
• One outbound with multiple return carriers is not allowed.
• Asymmetric data rates are allowed (no restrictions).
• The ratio of power spectral density is normally less than 11 dB.
• CnC operates with modems – not modulators only or demodulators only.
In addition, to minimize ‘false’ acquisition, observe the following:
• Use of IESS-315 V.35 Scrambler is highly recommended.
• Keep the search delay range as narrow as possible – once the modem has reported the search delay, narrow the search delay range to the nominal reported value ±5 ms – for example, if the modem reported delay is 245 ms, narrow the search range to say 240-250 ms.
• Use external data source (e.g. Fireberd) or internal BER tester when testing CnC performance.
• To prevent self-locking in case the desired carrier is lost, it is recommended that the two carriers have some configuration difference – for example, use different settings for
Spectrum Inversion.
15–4
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
15.4 System Functionality and Operational Considerations
Figure 15-2 illustrates a conventional, full duplex satellite link where two carriers are placed in non-overlapping channels. Figure 15-3 shows the same link using the SLM-5650A equipped with the DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier option. Note that only 50% of the bandwidth is being used, as both carriers are now occupying the same bandwidth.
The transponder downlinks the composite signal containing both carriers on the same band to the
SLM-5650A, which then translates the signal to near-baseband where it can be filtered
(decimated) and then processed as a complex envelope signal. The SLM-5650A then suppresses the version of the near-end carrier on the downlink side, and then passes the desired carrier to the demodulator for normal processing.
To further illustrate, as shown in Figure 15-4 , without CnC, the two carriers in a typical full duplex satellite link are adjacent to each other. With CnC, only the composite signal is visible when observed on a spectrum analyzer. Carrier 1 and Carrier 2, shown here for reference only, are overlapping, thus sharing the same spectrum.
Figure 15-2. Conventional FDMA Link
15–5
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure 15-3. Same Link Using SLM-5650A and DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier
Figure 15-4. Duplex Link Optimization
The SLM-5650A CnC module operates on the near-zero signal before the demodulator, and is waveform-agnostic. This means that no prior knowledge of the underlying modulation, FEC, or any other waveform specific parameter is required in order to perform the signal suppression operation. The only caveat to this is that the waveform must be sufficiently random .
Because acquiring the delay and frequency offset of the interfering carrier is fundamentally a correlation operation, anything deterministic in the interfering carrier (within the correlation window of the algorithm) will potentially produce false correlation peaks and result in incorrect delays and/or frequency. Normally, this is not a problem, since energy dispersal techniques are used in the vast majority of commercial and military modems. However, it is something that must
15–6
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A be kept in mind when troubleshooting a system that uses the CnC technique for signal suppression.
One possible way to mitigate false peaks is to narrow the correlation window. For example, if the delay is known to be around 240ms, set the minimum search delay to 230ms and the maximum search delay to 250ms.
As all advances in modem technologies – including advanced modulation and FEC techniques – approach their theoretical limits of power and bandwidth efficiencies, CnC allows satellite users to achieve spectral efficiencies (bps/Hz) that cannot be achieved with modulation and FEC alone.
Table 15-1 illustrates how CnC, when used with 16-QAM, approaches the bandwidth efficiency of 256-QAM (8bps/Hz).
Table 15-1. Spectral Efficiency using DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier
Modulation and Code Rate
BPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 2/3
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
8-QAM 2/3
8-QAM 3/4
Spectral Efficiency (bps/Hz)
Traditional SCPC Carrier-in-Carrier
0.50
1.00
1.00
2.00
1.33
1.50
1.75
2.00
2.25
2.67
3.00
3.50
4.00
4.50
8-QAM 7/8
16-QAM 3/4
2.63
3.00
5.25
6.00
16-QAM 7/8 3.50 7.00
As shown here, CnC allows equivalent spectral efficiency using a lower order modulation and/or
FEC Code Rate; CAPEX is therefore reduced by allowing the use of a smaller BUC/HPA and/or antenna. And, as CnC can be used to save transponder bandwidth and/or transponder power, it can be successfully deployed in bandwidth-limited as well as power-limited scenarios.
15.4.1 DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Cancellation Process
The signal processing technology employed via CnC continually estimates and tracks all parametric differences between the local uplink signal and its image within the downlink.
Through advanced adaptive filtering and phase locked loop implementations, it dynamically compensates for these differences by appropriately adjusting the delay, frequency, phase and amplitude of the sampled uplink signal, resulting in optimal cancellation performance.
When a full duplex satellite connection is established between two sites, separate satellite channels are allocated for each direction. If both directions transmitted on the same channel, each side would normally find it impossible to extract the desired signal from the aggregate due to interference originating from its local modulator. However, since this interference is produced locally, it is possible to estimate and remove its influence prior to demodulation of the data transmitted from the remote location.
15–7
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
For the CnC cancellation, it is necessary to provide each demodulator with a copy of its local modulator’s output.
As shown in Figure 15-5: Modem 1 and Modem 2 transmit signals S1 and S2 respectively. The satellite receives, translates, and retransmits the composite signal. The downlink signals S1* and
S2* received at Modem 1 and Modem 2 differ from the transmit signals primarily in terms of phase, frequency, and delay offsets.
Figure 15-5. DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Signals
Referring to Figure 15-6: For round trip delay estimation, a search algorithm is used that correlates the received satellite signal to a stored copy of the local modulator’s transmitted signal.
The interference cancellation algorithm uses the composite signal and the local copy of S1 to estimate the necessary parameters of scaling (complex gain/phase), delay offset and frequency offset. The algorithm continuously tracks changes in these parameters as they are generally timevarying in a satellite link.
Figure 15-6. Carrier-in-Carrier Signal Processing Block Diagram
The resulting estimate of the unwanted interfering signal is then subtracted from the composite signal. In practical applications, the estimate of the unwanted signal can be extremely accurate.
15–8
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Unwanted interfering signal suppression of 30 dB or more has been achieved in commercial products with minimal degradation of the demodulator performance.
15.4.2 Margin Requirements
Typical interfering signal cancellation is 28 to 35 dB (depending on the product). The residual interfering signal appears as noise causing a slight degradation of the Eb/No. To compensate for the residual noise, a small amount of additional link margin is required to maintain the BER.
Margin requirements depend on the product, modulation and power ratios:
For the SLM-5650A, the additional margin requirements are as follows:
Modulation Nominal Margin*
BPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
8-PSK
8-QAM
16-QAM
0.3 dB
0.3 dB
0.5 dB
0.4 dB
0.6 dB
* Equal power and equal symbol rate for the interfering carrier and the desired carrier, i.e., 0 dB
PSD ratio. Measured at IF with AWGN, +10 dBc
Adjacent Carriers, 1.3 spacing.
15.4.3 Carrier-in-Carrier Latency
Carrier-in-Carrier has no measurable impact on circuit latency.
15.4.4 Carrier-in-Carrier and Adaptive Coding and Modulation
Carrier-in-Carrier is fully compatible with the VersaFEC Adaptive Coding and Modulation
(ACM) mode of operation in the SLM-5650A.
Carrier-in-Carrier combined with VersaFEC ACM can provide 100-200% increase in average throughput.
15.4.5 Carrier-in-Carrier Link Design
Carrier-in-Carrier link design involves finding the FEC and modulation combination that provides optimal bandwidth utilization. Just like conventional link design, it is an iterative process that involves trying different FEC and modulation combinations with Carrier-in-Carrier until an optimal combination is found.
For optimal Carrier-in-Carrier performance, it is recommended that the two carriers have similar symbol rate and power. This can be achieved by selecting appropriate MODCODs as shown in following sections.
15–9
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
15.4.5.1 Symmetric Data Rate Link
Consider the following example:
Satellite & Transponder
Earth Station 1
Galaxy 18 @ 123º W, 13K/13K
Phoenix, AZ – 4.6 m
Earth Station 2 Phoenix, AZ – 2.4 m
Data Rate 512 kbps / 512 kbps
The traditional link was based on QPSK TPC 3/4 and required 0.96 MHz of leased BW. The
LST 2 summary for the traditional link is as follows:
Carrier-in-Carrier link design involved trying different Modulation & FEC Code Rates to find the optimal combination:
• 8-QAM, LDPC 2/3 with Carrier-in-Carrier
• QPSK, LDPC 3/4 with Carrier-in-Carrier
• QPSK, LDPC 2/3 with Carrier-in-Carrier
• QPSK, LDPC 1/2 with Carrier-in-Carrier
2 LST is Intelsat’s Lease Transmission Plan Program.
15–10
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Link parameters and LST summary for QPSK, LDPC 2/3 with Carrier-in-Carrier is as follows:
15–11
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The link budget summary for the different MODCOD combinations is as follows:
Signal
No.
1
2
3
Modulation & FEC
8-QAM, LDPC 2/3
QPSK, LDPC 3/4
QPSK, LDPC 2/3
Allocated
BW (MHz)
0.3584
0.47785
0.53735
1.1468
0.6734
0.5777
1.1468
0.6734
0.5777
Savings Compared to Original
-20%
30%
40%
PSD
Ratio
(dB)
2.1
2.1
2.1
4 QPSK, LDPC 1/2 0.7168 0.5184 0.7168 25% 2.1
Based on this analysis, QPSK, LDPC 2/3 with Carrier-in-Carrier provides the maximum savings of 40%.
In addition to 40% reduction in Leased Bandwidth, using Carrier-in-Carrier also reduced the required HPA Power by almost 40%:
HPA Power
Traditional Link
(QPSK, TPC 3/4)
CnC Link
(QPSK, LDPC 2/3)
HPA Power Reduction
HPA @ 4.6 m
HPA @ 2.4 m
0.7 W
1.5 W
0.5 W
1.1 W
40%
36%
15.4.5.2 Asymmetric Data Rate Link
As occupied (or allocated) bandwidth of a Carrier-in-Carrier circuit is dictated by the larger of the two carriers, it is strongly recommended that the smaller carrier be spread as much as possible using a lower order modulation and/or FEC, while meeting the PSD ratio spec. Spreading the smaller carrier using a lower order modulation has multiple benefits:
• Lower order modulation is always more robust
• Lower order modulation uses less transponder power – this reduces total transponder, and increases available link margin
• Lower order modulation uses less transmit power on the ground – this can significantly reduce the BUC/SSPA size by not only reducing the transmit EIRP, but also reducing the
BUC/SSPA backoff
Consider the following example:
Satellite & Transponder IS-901 @ 342º W, 22/22 (EH/EH)
Earth Station 1 Africa – 4.5 m
Earth Station 2 Africa – 3.0 m
Data Rate 3000 Mbps / 1000 Mbps
While the traditional link was based on QPSK, TPC 3/4 and required 3.9 MHz of leased bandwidth, the Carrier-in-Carrier link was based on QPSK, LDPC 3/4 and QPSK, LDPC 1/2 and required 2.8 MHz of leased bandwidth.
15–12
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The savings summary is as follows:
Original Link
Item
Data Rate (kbps)
Modulation
Hub to
Remote
3000
QPSK
Remote to
Hub
1000
QPSK
Total
With Carrier-in-Carrier and LDPC
Hub to
Remote
Remote to
Hub
Total
3000
QPSK
1000
QPSK
LDPC 3/4 LDPC 1/2
Savings
FEC
Occupied BW
(MHZ)
Power Eq. BW
(MHz)
Leased BW (MHz)
Hub HPA (W)
TPC 3/4 TPC 3/4
2.8
3.3
0.9
0.6
26.0
3.7
3.9
3.9
2.8
2.5
1.4
0.3
20.3
2.8
2.8
2.8 27.5%
22%
Remote HPA (W) 10.6 6.4 40%
If this link was designed using QPSK, LDPC 3/4 in both directions, it would have required:
Occupied BW 2.8 MHz
Power Eq. BW
Leased BW
Hub HPA
Remote HPA
3.0 MHz 7.2% increase in Power Eq. BW
3.0 MHz 7.2% increase i n Leased BW
20.3 W
8.3 W 30% increase in Remote power
15.4.5.3 Power Limited Links
Carrier-in-Carrier can provide substantial savings even when the original link is power limited.
Spreading the carrier by using a lower modulation and/or FEC along with latest FEC such as
VersaFEC can substantially reduce the total power which can then be traded with bandwidth using Carrier-in-Carrier. The concept is illustrated with the following examples:
The conventional link is using 8-PSK, TPC 3/4:
Switching to VersaFEC and using a lower order modulation – e.g.,
QPSK, VersaFEC 0.803 increases the total occupied bandwidth, while reducing the total power equivalent bandwidth:
Now using CnC, the second QPSK, VersaFEC 0.803 carrier can be moved over the first carrier – thereby significantly reducing the total occupied bandwidth and total power equivalent bandwidth when compared to the original side-by-side 8PSK, TPC 3/4 carriers:
15–13
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
To continue, consider this example:
Satellite & Transponder
Earth Station 1
Earth Station 2
IS-901 @ 342º W, 22/22 (EH/EH)
Africa – 9.2 m
Africa – 4.5 m
Data Rate 2.048 Mbps / 2.048 Mbps
Whereas the original link used 8-PSK TPC 3/4, the Carrier-in-Carrier link used QPSK VersaFEC
0.803. The savings summary is as follows:
Original Link
Item Hub to
Remote
Remote to
Hub
Total
With Carrier-in-Carrier and VersaFEC
Hub to
Remote
Remote to
Hub
Total
Savings
Data Rate (kbps)
Modulation
FEC
Occupied BW
(MHZ)
Power Eq. BW
(MHz)
Leased BW (MHz)
Hub HPA (W)
Remote HPA (W)
2048
8-PSK
2048
8-PSK
TPC 3/4 TPC 3/4
1.3
2.2
1.3
1.0
5.0
11.6
2.6
3.2
3.2
2048
QPSK
0.803
1.8
1.1
2048
QPSK
0.803
1.8
0.5
2.0
4.7
1.8
1.6
1.8 44%
60%
60%
Note: 1 dB HPA BO for QPSK, 2 dB HPA BO for 8-PSK, 1 dB Feed Loss.
Using Carrier-in-Carrier and VersaFEC reduced the leased bandwidth by almost 44% and HPA power by 60%.
15–14
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
15.4.6 Carrier-in-Carrier Commissioning and Deployment
Prior to commissioning a Carrier-in-Carrier link, it is critical that the link is fully tested in non
Carrier-in-Carrier mode and all system issues including external interference, antenna pointing, cabling, SSPA backoff are resolved. Only after the link is robust, should the user attempt turning on Carrier-in-Carrier.
The following procedure is recommended for Carrier-in-Carrier commissioning and deployment:
Step Task
1 Turn ON the carrier at Site ‘A’. Carrier from Site ‘B’ is OFF. CnC function is OFF at both sites.
Using a spectrum analyzer, measure Co+No/No at the input to the modem at
Site ‘A’.
Using a spectrum analyzer, measure Co+No/No at the input to the modem at
Site ‘B’.
Measure/record Eb/No at Site ‘B’. Make sure there is sufficient margin to account for CnC.
Measure/record Receive Signal Level (RSL) at Site ‘B’.
2
3
4
5
Turn OFF the carrier at Site ‘A’. Turn ON the carrier at Site ‘B’. CnC function is OFF at both sites.
Using a spectrum analyzer, measure Co+No/No at the input to the modem at
Site ‘A’.
Using a spectrum analyzer, measure Co+No/No at the input to the modem at
Site ‘B’.
Measure/record Eb/No at Site ‘A’. Make sure there is sufficient margin to account for CnC.
Measure/record RSL at Site ‘B’.
Using Co+No/No readings calculate PSD ratio at Site ‘A’ and Site ‘B’. If it is not within specification, make necessary adjustments to bring it within specification and repeat measurements in Steps 1 and 2.
Also verify that the RSL is within spec.
Now without changing the transmit power levels, turn ON both the carriers (on the same frequency) and turn CnC ON.
Measure/record Eb/No at Site ‘A’ and ‘B’.
Measure/record RSL at Site ‘A’ and ‘B’.
Now compare Eb/No in presence of two over lapping carriers with CnC with
Eb/No when only one carrier was ON. Eb/No variation should be within spec for that modulation, FEC and PSD ratio.
The test can be repeated for different PSD ratio and Eb/No.
15–15
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
15.4.7 Validating Carrier-in-Carrier Performance
Carrier-in-Carrier performance can be easily validated by verifying that Eb/No degradation due to
Carrier-in-Carrier is within published specification for the observed Power Spectral Density
Ratio.
The following procedure is recommended for validating Carrier-in-Carrier performance:
Step Task
1 Setup a conventional side-by-side link of the desired Eb/No:
Carrier-in-Carrier should be OFF.
Record the Eb/No as displayed by the Modems.
Observe the 2 carriers on a spectrum analyzer and record the PSD ratio.
Example Link:
• Full duplex 512 kbps, QPSK, LDPC 2/3 circuit between 4.6 m and 2.4 m antennas
• Recorded Eb/No = 2.6 dB (at both modems)
• PSD Ratio = 1.2 dB (measured at larger Antenna)
2
3
Now relocate one of the carriers on top of the other carrier:
Enable Carrier-in-Carrier.
Record the Eb/No as displayed by the Modems.
Calculate change in Eb/No and verify against specification.
Example Link:
• Recorded Eb/No = 2.4 dB
• Change in Eb/No = 0.2 dB
• Eb/No Degradation (Spec.) at 1.2 dB PSD = 0.3 dB
• Modem performance is within spec
15–16
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
15.5 Operational References
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
15.5.1 Carrier-in-Carrier Link Budget Calculation
The following procedure is required for calculating the link budget for a Carrier-in-Carrier Link:
Step Task
1 Calculate the link budget for both carriers in the duplex link, with required CnC margin:
4
5
2
3
Verify that the PDS ration is within spec for the SLM-5650A.
Calculate the Allocated Bandwidth (BW) and Power Equivalent Bandwidth (PEB) for the duplex link:
• BW
Duplex Link
= Greater of (BW
Carrier 1
, BW
Carrier 2
)
• PEB
Duplex Link
= PEB
Carrier 1
+ PEB
Carrier 2
•
Leased BW
Duplex Link
= Greater of (BW
Duplex Link
, PEB
Duplex Link
)
For an optimal link, the Leased Bandwidth and the Power Equivalent Bandwidth should be equal / nearly equal.
Repeat the link budget process by selecting different Modulation and FEC, until the
BW and PEB is nearly balanced.
15–17
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
15.5.2 Estimating PSD Ratio
PSD can be estimated from a link budget using Downlink EIRP and Symbol Rate:
PSD = Downlink EIRP – 10 * Log (Symbol Rate)
PSD Ratio Example:
Carrier Downlink EIRP Symbol Rate Power Spectral Density
A to B 27 dBW 500 ksps
B to A 24 dBW 375 ksps
PSD Ratio (@ A) = -29.99 – (-31.74) = 1.75 dB
PSD Ratio (@ B) = -31.74 – (-29.99) = -1.75 dB
-29.99 dBW/Hz
-31.74 dBW/Hz
15.5.2.1 Estimating PSD Ratio from LST
15–18
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
15.5.2.2 Estimating PSD Ratio from Satmaster
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
15.5.2.3 Estimating PSD Ratio Using Spectrum Analyzer
PSD Ratio or CnC Ratio can also be estimated using a Spectrum Analyzer capable of integrating the signal power in a given bandwidth.
CnC Ratio (in dB) = Power
C1
(in dBm) – Power
C2
PSD Ratio (in dB) = (Power
C1
– 10 log BW
(in dBm)
C1
(in Hz)) – (Power
)
C2
– 10 log BW
C2
(in Hz))
= CnC Ratio – 10 log (BW
C1
/ BW
C2
If the two carriers have same Symbol Rate / Bandwidth, then the CnC Ratio is same as the PSD
Ratio.
15–19
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
15.6 DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Specifications
Operating Mode
Power Spectral Density Ratio and CnC Ratio
Requires the two links to share a common carrier frequency (Outbound and Inbound symbol rates do not have to be equal)
BSPK/QPSK/8-PSK/8-QAM: –7 dB to +11 dB (ratio of power spectral density, outbound interferer to desired inbound)
16-QAM: –7 dB to +7 dB (ratio of power spectral density, outbound interferer to desired inbound)
Note: With asymmetric carriers the absolute power ratio (or CnC ratio) would be different, depending on the ratio of the symbol rates.
Example:
Outbound interferer = 1 Msymbols/sec
Desired Inbound = 500 ksymbols/sec
Ratio of power spectral density = +7 dB
Absolute power ratio (CnC Ratio) = +7dB + (10 log Outbound/desired symbol rate) = +10 dB
Maximum Symbol Rate Ratio 3:1 (TX:RX or RX:TX)
Inbound/Outbound frequency uncertainty
Delay range
Within the normal acquisition range of the demod, as follows:
Below 64 ksymbols/sec: ±1 to ±(Rs/2) kHz, where Rs = symbol rate in ksymbols/sec
Between 64 and 389 ksymbols/sec: ± 1up to a maximum of ± 32kHz
Above 389 ksymbols/sec: ±1 to ± (0.1Rs) kHz, up to a maximum of ± 200 kHz
0-330 ms
Eb/No Degradation
(equal Inbound/Outbound power spectral density)
Monitor Functions
CnC Monitor Accuracy
BPSK = 0.3dB QPSK = 0.3dB OQPSK = 0.3dB
8-PSK = 0.5dB 8-QAM = 0.4dB 16-QAM = 0.6dB
For +10 dB power spectral density ratio (outbound interferer 10 dB higher than desired inbound) add an additional 0.3 dB
Delay, in milliseconds
Frequency offset (between outbound interferer and desired inbound). 100 Hz resolution
CnC ratio, in dB (ratio of absolute power, outbound interferer to desired inbound)
±1.0 dB for symmetric symbol rate
15.7 Carrier-in-Carrier Summary
Comtech EF Data’s DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier can provide significant savings in operational expenses. The following should be considered when evaluating CnC:
• CnC can only be used for full duplex links where the transmitting earth station is able to receive itself.
• CnC can be used in both bandwidth limited and power limited situations.
• The maximum savings is generally achieved when the original link is symmetric in data rate.
15–20
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
15.8 Glossary
Bandwidth, Allocated or Occupied
Bandwidth or Allocated Bandwidth or Occupied Bandwidth is the frequency space required by a carrier on a transponder.
For example: A Duplex 10 Mbps Circuit with 8PSK Modulation, FEC Rate 3/4 and 1.4 Spacing requires:
• Allocated BW = (DR / SE) * CSF [( Data Rate / Spectral Efficiency) * Carrier Spacing
Factor ]
• Allocated BW = 6.222 MHz = (10 / 2.25) * 1.4
For a 36 MHz transponder, 6.222 MHz corresponds to 17.3% Bandwidth Utilization.
Bandwidth, Leased (LBW)
Almost all satellite operators charge for the Leased Bandwidth (LBW). Leased Bandwidth or
Leased Resource is the greater of the Allocated Bandwidth and Power Equivalent Bandwidth.
For example: If a carrier requires 3 MHz of Allocated BW and 4.5 MHz of PEB, the Leased
Bandwidth is 4.5 MHz
Bandwidth, Power Equivalent (PEB)
Power Equivalent Bandwidth (PEB) is the transponder power used by a carrier, represented as bandwidth equivalent.
PEB Calculation Example:
• Transponder EIRP = 37 dBW
• Output Backoff (OBO) = 4 dB
• Available EIRP = 37 – 4 = 33 dBW = 10 3.3
= 1995.26 Watts
• Transponder Bandwidth = 36 MHz
• Power Available / MHz = 1995.26 / 36 = 55.424 W
• If a carrier uses 24 dBW, its PEB = 10 2.4
/ 55.424 = 4.532 MHz
This corresponds to 12.59% of available transponder power.
CnC Ratio
Ratio of Interfering Carrier Power to Desired Carrier Power (unit in dB).
The Interfering Carrier is the Tx Carrier from local modulator; the Desired Carrier is the carrier from the distant end received by the local demodulator.
At the station transmitting C1: CnC Ratio (in dB) = PowerC1 (in dBm) – PowerC2 (in dBm)
15–21
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Eb/No
Ratio of Energy per bit (Eb) to Noise density (No) (unit in dB):
• Eb/No = C/No – 10log(DR) [ where DR is the Data Rate ]
• Eb/No = Es/No – 10log(SE) [ where SE is Spectral Efficiency ]
Es/No
Ratio of Energy per symbol (Es) to Noise density (No) (unit in dB):
• Es/No = C/No – 10log(SR) [ where SR is the Symbol Rate ]
• Es/No = Eb/No + 10log(SE) [ where SE is Spectral Efficiency ]
C/N
Ratio of Carrier Power (C) to Noise (N) (unit in dB):
Equivalent to Es/No when calculated in the Symbol Rate bandwidth.
C/No
Ratio of Carrier Power (C) to Noise Density (N o
) (unit in dBHz)
Co+No/No
E
Ratio of Carrier Density (C
C/N = C/N o
E b
/N o
= C/N
– 10log(B) [ where B is bandwidth in Hz ] o
– 10log(DR) [ o
) + Noise (N o
) to Noise Density (N where DR is data rate in bits/sec ] o
) (unit in dB): b
/N o
= C/N + 10log(B) – 10log(DR)
= C/N – 10log(SE) [ where SE is Spectral Efficiency ]
= 10log (10 ((Co+No/No)/10) – 1) – 10log(SE) [
[ Note: Spectral Efficiency is in bps / Hz ] where SE is Spectral Efficiency ]
Power Spectral Density (PSD)
Power Spectral Density (PSD) is the signal power per unit bandwidth: dBW / Hz or dBm /
Hz
For example: Signal power = 20 dBm
Signal bandwidth = 5 MHz
PSD = 20 – 10 *log (5,000,000) = -46.99 dBm / Hz
15–22
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
PSD Ratio
Ratio of Power Spectral Density (PSD) of the interfering carrier to the desired carrier.
If looking at the two carriers side-by-side on a spectrum analyzer:
Quasi Error Free (QEF)
Quasi Error Free (QEF) corresponds to PER ~10 -7
[ Note: PER (packet error rate) is based upon a 188-byte MPEG frame size ]
Spectral Efficiency (SE)
Ratio of the Data Rate to the Symbol Rate.
Symbol Rate & Data Rate
Symbol Rate and Data Rate are related:
• DR = SR * SE [ Data Rate = Symbol Rate * Spectral Efficiency ]
• SR = DR / SE [ Symbol Rate = Data Rate / Spectral Efficiency ]
15–23
SLM5650A_CDM625 Satellite Modem
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Option
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
BLANK PAGE
15–24
Appendix A. TROUBLESHOOTING
A.1 Overview
This appendix provides information pertaining to the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem’s system checkout and fault isolation and identification.
A.2 System Checkout
System checkout entails following the test instructions provided for the interface PCB, modem
PCB, TURBO PCB, and L-Band IF PCB. The instructions include tables and test points for ensuring that the E appendix. b
/N
0
, typical output spectrums, typical eye patterns, and constellations are correct. If a test failure occurs, refer to the fault isolation checkout procedures provided in this
This section provides instructions for checking the modem setup within the earth station. Due to the complexity of the modem circuitry, the checkout procedure should be used only as a basic guideline. More complicated maintenance tests are beyond the scope of this manual.
This equipment contains parts and assemblies sensitive to damage by ESD.
Use ESD precautionary procedures when touching, removing, or inserting
PCBs.
A–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
A.2.1 Interface Checkout
Use the test setup in Figure A-1 and the procedure that follows to verify the data interface.
NOISE
GENERATOR
TX IF
MODEM UNDER TEST
VAR ATTEN
RX IF
BERT
DATA
CONNECTORS
VAR ATTEN
BER
TEST SET
Figure A-1. Fault Isolation Test Setup
1. Ensure the correct data and IF interface is selected and configured for the proper mode of operation.
2. Connect a BER test set to the appropriate modem data connector as shown in Figure A-1.
3. Set up the modem for baseband loopback operation by selecting I/O1 (TEST: Loopback I/O1) from the front panel menu. The modem will run error-free.
A–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
A.2.2 Modulator Checkout
Use the following procedure for modulator checkout:
Step Task
1
2
Set up the equipment as shown in Figure A-1 using 70/140 MHz IF interface. Refer to Chapter 1.
INTRODUCTION for the modulator specifications.
Set up the modem for IF loopback operation by using TEST: Loopback IF from the front panel menu, or use an external IF loop.
3 Clear all TX faults, Stored Faults, and Alarms using MONITOR: Event-Log Clear-All from the front panel menu.
4
5
Measure the Eb/N0 with a receiver that is known to be properly operating: a.
Refer to Table A-1 and Figure A-2 to check for proper Eb/N0 level. The (S+N)/N is measured by taking the average level of the noise and the average level of the modem spectrum top. b.
Use this measurement for the first column on Table A-1 . c.
Read across the page to find the S/N and Eb/N0 for the specific code rate.
Once the demodulator has locked to the incoming signal, using MONITOR: Rx-Params from the front panel menu displays frequency offset, signal level, BERT data (if enabled), buffer status, Eb/N0, and corrected BER.
Connect a spectrum analyzer to the modem as shown in Figure A-1 . Ensure the IF output meets the appropriate mask and spurious specifications. Measure the power output at different levels and frequencies.
6
7
A typical output spectrum is shown in Figure A-3 .
Check the frequency and phase modulation accuracy as follows: a.
Set the modem to the continuous wave mode by using TEST: Carrier Tx-CW from the front panel menu. This sets the Carrier modulation in the OFF condition. A pure carrier should now be present at the IF output. This should only be used for frequency measurements. Spurious and power measurements should be taken with the modulation on. b.
Set the modem to the continuous wave Offset mode by using TEST: Carrier Tx-1,0 from the front panel menu. This generates a single upper side band and suppressed carrier signal.
Ensure the carrier and side-band suppression are < -30 dBc.
Repeat steps 2-6 using the L-Band IF interface.
A–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
(dB)
(S+N)/N
13.0
13.5
14.0
14.5
15.0
15.5
16.0
16.5
17.0
17.5
18.0
18.5
19.0
19.5
20.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
10.0
10.5
11.0
11.5
12.0
12.5
Code
S/N
12.8
13.3
13.8
14.3
14.9
15.4
15.9
16.4
16.9
17.4
17.9
18.4
18.9
19.5
20.0
5.4
6.0
6.6
7.3
7.8
8.4
9.0
1.8
2.6
3.3
4.1
4.7
9.5
10.1
10.6
11.2
11.7
12.2
Table A-1. Conversion to S/N and E b
/N
0
Chart
Rate 1/2
Eb/N0
12.8
13.3
13.8
14.3
14.9
15.4
15.9
16.4
16.9
17.4
17.9
18.4
18.9
19.5
20.0
5.4
6.0
6.6
7.3
7.8
8.4
9.0
1.8
2.6
3.3
4.1
4.7
9.5
10.1
10.6
11.2
11.7
12.2
Rate 3/4
Eb/N0
11.0
11.5
12.1
12.6
13.1
13.6
14.1
14.6
15.2
15.7
16.2
16.7
17.2
17.7
18.2
3.6
4.3
4.9
5.5
6.1
6.7
7.2
0.0
0.8
1.6
2.3
3.0
7.8
8.3
8.9
9.4
10.0
10.5
Code
S/N
12.8
13.3
13.8
14.3
14.9
15.4
15.9
16.4
16.9
17.4
17.9
18.4
18.9
19.5
20.0
5.4
6.0
6.6
7.3
7.8
8.4
9.0
1.8
2.6
3.3
4.1
4.7
9.5
10.1
10.6
11.2
11.7
12.2
Code
S/N
12.8
13.3
13.8
14.3
14.9
15.4
15.9
16.4
16.9
17.4
17.9
18.4
18.9
19.5
20.0
5.4
6.0
6.6
7.3
7.8
8.4
9.0
1.8
2.6
3.3
4.1
4.7
9.5
10.1
10.6
11.2
11.7
12.2
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Rate 7/8
Eb/N0
10.3
10.9
11.4
11.9
12.4
12.9
13.5
14.0
14.5
15.0
15.5
16.0
16.5
17.0
17.5
3.0
3.6
4.2
4.8
5.4
6.0
6.6
-0.6
0.2
0.9
1.6
2.3
7.1
7.7
8.2
8.8
9.3
9.8
A–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
RL -49.00 dBm
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Modem Rate = 2144 kbit/s, 3/4 Rate Coding with 7.7 dB Eb/No (S + N)/N = 10 dB
*VB 10.0 Hz
Figure A-2. Typical Output Spectrum – With Noise
RL -20.29 dBm
PASS
*VB 3.00 Hz
Figure A-3. Typical Output Spectrum – Without Noise
A–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
A.2.3 Demodulator Checkout
Use the following procedure for demodulator checkout:
Step Task
1
2
Set up the equipment as shown in Figure A-1 using the 70/140 MHz IF interface.
Set up the modem with an external IF loop and level. Use a properly operating modulator, and ensure that power levels, data rates, code rates, etc. are compatible.
3
4
Allow the modem to lock up. a.
Depending on the data rate and overhead type, lock-up may take several seconds. b.
When the GREEN IF and Data Lock LED are ON and any fault has been cleared (where applicable), the modem will run at the specified error rate. c.
Run the Rx power level (input amplitude) over the full range and offset the Tx frequency from the nominal Rx frequency by up to ±30 kHz. d.
Ensure the modem still runs within the specified error rate.
Set up the modem to check the constellation by hooking an oscilloscope that is set in the X-Y mode to
J9 pins 3 and 8. An alternative method is to use a computer and the IQ Mon program with an Ethernet connection to the modem. Typical constellation patterns are shown with noise ( Figure A-4 ) and without noise ( Figure A-5 ).
A–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
PC version IQ monitor with noise
Oscilloscope WITH NOISE
Figure A-4. Typical Constellation Patterns – With Noise
A–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
PC version IQ monitor WITHOUT NOISE
Oscilloscope WITHOUT NOISE
Figure A-5. Typical Constellation Patterns – Without Noise
A–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
A.3 Fault Isolation
The design of the modem allows for removal and replacement of some faulty components in the field. The optional interface PCB’s can be removed from the modem through the rear panel, without requiring special tools. The TURBO PCB and power supply can be replaced if the top cover is removed.
This equipment contains parts and assemblies sensitive to damage by ESD.
Use ESD precautionary procedures when touching, removing, or inserting
PCBs.
The fault monitoring capability of the modem assists the operator in determining which PCB has failed. If possible, replace the faulty PCB and return the damaged board to the Comtech EF Data
Customer Support Department for repair. If not, return the complete modem.
The fault isolation procedure lists the following categories of faults or alarms:
• Modulator
• Demodulator
• Transmit Interface
• Receive Interface
• Unit (Common Equipment)
1. Each fault or alarm category includes possible problems and the appropriate action required to repair the modem.
2. If any of the troubleshooting procedures mentioned earlier in this appendix do not isolate the problem and Comtech EF Data Customer Support assistance is necessary, have the following information available for the representative:
• Modem configuration. Modem configuration includes the modulator, demodulator, interface, or local AUPC sections.
• Faults (active or stored).
A–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
A.4 System Faults/Alarms
System faults are reported in MONITOR: Alarms from the front panel menu, and stored faults are reported in the MONITOR: Event-Log menu. To determine the appropriate action for repairing the modem, refer to Table A-2 and the list of possible problems.
Table A-2. SLM-5650A Fault Tree
FAULT TYPE
MODULATOR
FAULTS
DEMODULATOR
FAULTS
NONE
MOD SYMBOL
CLOCK PLL
MOD
SYNTHESIZER
PLL
MOD I/Q
ACTIVITY
MOD FILTER
CLIPPING
TX INTERFACE
CLOCK PLL
TX INTF CLOCK
ACTIVITY
TX INTERFACE
SCT PLL
TX INTERFACE
DATA AIS
NONE
DEMOD CARRIER
LOCK
DEMOD
DECODER LOCK
DEMOD
SYNTHESIZER
PLL
DEMOD I/Q
ACTIVITY
DEMUX LOCK
BUFFER
BUFFER FILL
BUFFER
OVERFLOW
BUFFER
UNDERFLOW
BUFFER PLL
BUFFER CLK REF
ACTIVITY
RX INTERFACE
DATA AIS
Eb/No
THRESHOLD
BERT SYNC
LOSS
TX IF
OUTPUT
OFF
X
X
X
X
TX
STATUS
LED
GREEN
RED
RED
RED
RED
RED
ORANGE
RED
ORANGE
TX FAULT
RELAY (1)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
RX
STATUS
LED
GREEN
RED
RED
RED
RED
RED
RED
ORANGE
ORANGE
ORANGE
RED
ORANGE
ORANGE
ORANGE
ORANGE
RX FAULT
RELAY (2)
UNIT
STATUS
LED
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
UNIT FAULT
RELAY (3)
AUDIBLE
ALARM
TX
AIS
RX
AIS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
FAULT TYPE
UNIT FAULTS NONE
+5.0V POWER
+3.3V POWER
+2.5V POWER
+1.5V POWER
+12V POWER
-12V POWER
+18V POWER
COOLING FAN
EXTERNAL REF
ACTIVITY
192 MHZ CLOCK
PLL
10 MHZ REF PLL
M&C FPGA
CONFIG
MOD FPGA
CONFIG
DEMOD FPGA
CONFIG
DECODER FPGA
CONFIG
TX INTF FPGA
CONFIG
RX INTF FPGA
CONFIG
FEC #1 FPGA
CONFIG
FEC #2 FPGA
CONFIG
OPTION CARD
FPGA CONFIG
FPGA DCM phase
Lock Loop Fault
NP MAILBOX
COMM ERROR
TRANSEC
MAILBOX COMM
ERROR
TX IF
OUTPUT
OFF
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X**
X**
TX
STATUS
LED
Test Note
1
2
3
**
****
TX FAULT
RELAY (1)
RX
STATUS
LED
RX FAULT
RELAY (2)
UNIT
STATUS
LED
RED
RED
RED
RED
RED
GREEN
RED
RED
RED
ORANGE
UNIT FAULT
RELAY (3)
RED
RED
RED
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
RED X
RED X
RED X
RED
RED
X
X
RED
RED
X
X
RED
RED
RED
X
X
X
RED X
Fault/Alarm Relay
TX FAULT
Legend
Test Points Connector/Pins
J8/Pin 2 (NO), 1 (COM), 6 (NC) ****
RX FAULT
UNIT FAULT
J8/Pin 5 (NO), 4 (COM), 9 (NC) ****
J8/Pin 8 (NO), 7 (COM), 3 (NC) ****
The IF output is only affected if that particular FEC card is currently passing traffic.
A connection between the common and N.O. contacts indicate no fault/alarm.
AUDIBLE
ALARM
TX
AIS
RX
AIS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
A.5 LED Display and Description
The ten LEDs located on the modem’s front panel indicate status, fault, and alarm information.
COLOR LED STATUS
GREEN GREEN indicates no faults or alarms currently exist.
ORANGE ORANGE indicates an alarm currently exists. It is stored in the Event Log memory.
RED RED indicates a fault currently exists. It is stored in the Event Log memory.
A total of 255 occurrences of any fault can be stored. Each fault or stored fault indicated by a front panel LED could be one of many faults. Use the Fault or Stored Fault front panel menu to determine which fault has occurred.
Alarms are considered minor faults. Alarms are shown in the Fault or Stored Fault front panel menu by a reversed-contrast “+” that appears at the display panel (white on black).
LED Description
Tx On Modulator output status. If illuminated, output is turned on.
IF LOCK
DATA LOCK
REMOTE
TEST MODE
Demodulator Carrier Detect. If illuminated, the carrier is locked
Decoder Data lock. If illuminated, the decoder is locked.
Modem remote control status. If the LED is green , the modem is in remote control; if off , the modem is in local control.
Modem test mode indicator. If illuminated, a test mode is enabled.
A–12
Appendix B. OPERATIONS
REFERENCE
B.1 Overview
This appendix provides the end user with reference guides for the following operational parameters:
• Section B.2 Modes provides tables showing the various operating modes’ available data rates and ranges.
• Section B.3 Clocking Options provides information about common clocking options and recommended configurations.
• Section B.4 Buffering.
B.2 Modes
The Data Rates and Symbol Rates shown in the following tables all assume that Transmission
Security (TRANSEC) is turned off . In order to calculate the max data rate with TRANSEC on , the max data rate shown in the table becomes a max aggregate data rate. The real data rate can be calculated by dividing the TRANSEC overhead rate from the aggregate data rate. The TRANSEC overhead rate can be calculated for any TRANSEC Frame Length (N) as follows:
TRANSEC Overhead Rate = (3 + 16 * N) / (16 * N)
B.2.1 OM-73 Mode
Modulation Type
BPSK 1/1
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 3/4
BPSK 7/8
QPSK 1/1
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 1/1
OQPSK 1/2
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
Min
64
64
64
Data Rate (kbps)
Max
8472
15000
22500
26250
20000
30000
45000
51840
20000
30000
Min
64
128
85.333
73.142
32
64
42.666
36.571
32
64
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Max
10000
30000
29999.999
30000
10000
30000
30000
29622.857
10000
30000
B–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
Modulation Type
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
Min
64
64
Data Rate (kbps)
Max
45000
51840
B.2.2 MIL-STD-188-165A Mode
Modulation Type
BPSK 1/1
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 3/4
BPSK 7/8
QPSK 1/1
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 1/1
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
8-PSK 2/3
8-PSK 5/6
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 3/4
BPSK 7/8
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 3/4
R-S Code Word
219,201
225,205
220,200
126,112
219,201
225,205
220,200
126,112
Off
Off
126,112
219,201
225,205
220,200
126,112
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
219,201
225,205
220,200
126,112
219,201
225,205
220,200
126,112
219,201
225,205
219,201
225,205
220,200
126,112
219,201
225,205
220,200
126,112
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
R-S Depth
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
4, 8
Revision 8
Min
42.666
36.571
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Max
30000
29622.857
64
64
64
64
64
256
256
64
64
64
64
Min
Data Rate (kbps)
Max
64
64
64
8472
15000
22500
26250
20000
30000
45000
51840
20000
30000
45000
51840
64
51840
51840
13333.333
13767.123
13666.666
13636.363
20000
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
20650.684
20500
20454.545
23333.333
24092.465
23916.666
23863.636
26666.666
27534.246
27333.333
27272.727
40000
41301.369
41000
40909.090
46666.666
48184.931
47833.333
47727.272
26666.666
27534.246
27333.333
27272.727
40000
41301.369
41000
39.846
40.139
40.229
72
69.371
70.243
70.4
48
46.487
46.829
69.371
70.243
70.4
48
46.487
46.829
46.933
41.143
92.975
93.658
93.867
82.826
79.692
80.278
80.457
72
128
102.4
144
139.462
140.487
140.8
96
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min Max
64
128
85.333
10000
30000
29999.999
73.142
32
64
42.666
30000
10000
30000
30000
36.571
32
64
42.666
36.571
29622.857
10000
30000
30000
29622.857
25920
20736
29999.999
29999.998
29999.999
30000
29999.998
29999.999
30000
29999.999
29999.999
30000
29999.999
30000
30000
29999.999
30000
30000
29999.999
30000
29999.999
30000
30000
29999.999
30000
B–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
Modulation Type
OQPSK 7/8
8-PSK 2/3
8-PSK 5/6
R-S Code Word
220,200
126,112
219,201
225,205
220,200
126,112
219,201
225,205
220,200
126,112
219,201
225,205
220,200
R-S Depth
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
Min
Data Rate (kbps)
Max
40909.090
46666.666
64
48184.931
47833.333
47727.272
256
256
51840
51840
B.2.3 MIL-STD-188-165A Mode – Sequential
Modulation Type
BPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
R-S Code Word
220,200
OFF
126/112
219,201
225,205
220,200
OFF
126/112
219,201
225,205
OFF
126/112
219,201
225,205
220,200
OFF
126/112
219,201
225,205
220,200
OFF
126/112
219,201
225,205
220,200
OFF
126/112
219,201
225,205
220,200
OFF
126/112
219,201
R-S Depth
N/A
4/8
N/A
4/8
N/A
4/8
N/A
4/8
N/A
4/8
N/A
4/8
N/A
4/8
Min
Data Rate (kbps)
Max
1067
1171
64 1171
1171
64
64
1171
2500
2222.222
2294.520
2277.777
2272.727
3750
3333.333
3441.780
3416.666
64
64
64
64
3409.090
4375
3888.888
4015.410
3986.111
3977.272
2500
2222.222
2294.520
2277.777
2272.727
3750
3333.333
3441.780
3416.666
3409.090
4375
3888.888
4015.410
B–3
Revision 8
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
46.933
Max
30000 41.143
39.846
40.139
40.229
29999.999
144
139.462
140.487
30000
29160
28241.194
28448.78
140.8
115.2
111.57
112.39
112.64
28512
23328
22592.955
22759.024
22809.6
46.933
36.571
41.142
39.846
40.139
40.228
64
72
69.731
70.243
70.400
42.667
48
46.487
46.829
46.933
36.571
41.142
39.846
140.800
64
72
69.731
70.243
70.400
42.667
48
46.487
46.829
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min Max
128
144
2134
2634.750
139.463
140.488
2551.731
2570.488
2576.200
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
Modulation Type R-S Code Word
225,205
220,200
R-S Depth
Min
Data Rate (kbps)
Max
3986.111
3977.272
B.2.4 IESS-308 Mode – Standard Higher Rates
Modulation Type Overhead R-S Code Word R-S Depth
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4 (CONT)
QPSK 3/4 (CONT)
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
Off
194,178
219,201
225,205
126,112
208,192
Off
194,178
219,201
225,205
126,112
N/A
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 1
Data Rate (kbps)
6312
8448
1544
2048
6312
8448
1544
2048
6312
8448
1544
2048
6312
8448
1544
2048
6312
1544
2048
6312
8448
1544
2048
8448
6312
8448
32064
34368
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
1544
2048
6312
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
44736
1544
2048
8448
32064
34368
1544
2048
6312
Revision 8
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min Max
40.139
40.228
Symbol Rate (ksps)
1640
2144
6408
8544
1778.787
2328.09
6975.371
9303.371
1778.269
2327.403
6973.254
9300.537
1790.634
2343.805
7023.805
9368.195
1833
2400
7197
9600
1776.708
2325.333
6966.875
9292
1029.333
1365.333
4208
5632
21376
22912
29824
1217.858
1584.06
4682.247
6324.247
23393.438
25067.506
1217.512
1583.602
4680.836
6232.358
23386.269
25059.821
1225.756
1594.537
4714.537
6277.463
23557.463
25243.317
1254
1632
4830
B–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
Modulation Type Overhead R-S Code Word R-S Depth
QPSK 7/8 IESS-308
208,192
Off
194,178
219,201
225,205
126,112
208,192
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
Data Rate (kbps)
6312
8448
32064
34368
44736
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
44736
6312
8448
32064
34368
44736
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
44736
1544
2048
32064
34368
44736
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
44736
1544
2048
8448
32064
34368
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
1544
2048
6312
8448
Revision 8
Symbol Rate (ksps)
4153.714
5526.857
20708.571
22189.714
28854.857
1056.405
1369.905
4022.214
5350.857
20040.571
21473.714
27922.857
4025.859
5355.736
20059.087
21493.561
27948.691
1064.362
1380.46
4054.743
5394.397
20205.826
26150.843
28153.422
1088.571
1412.571
20040.571
21473.714
27922.857
1057.592
1371.48
4027.069
5357.355
20065.233
21500.148
27957.265
1057.296
1371.087
6432
24144
25872
1216.472
1582.222
4676.583
626.667
23364.667
25036.667
882.286
1170.286
3606.857
4827.428
B–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
B.2.5 IESS-308 Mode – Extended
Modulation Type
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
Overhead
None
IESS-309
None
IESS-309
None
IESS-309
None
IESS-309
None
IESS-309
None
R-S Code Word
208,192
Off
126,112
219,201
194,178
225,205
208,192
Off
126,112
219,201
194,178
225,205
208,192
Off
126,112
219,201
194,178
225,205
208,192
Off
126,112
219,201
194,178
225,205
208,192
Off
126,112
219,201
Off
126,112
219,201
194,178
225,205
208,192
Off
126,112
194,178
225,205
208,192
Off
126,112
219,201
194,178
225,205
194,178
225,205
208,192
Off
126,112
219,201
194,178
225,205
208,192
Off
126,112
219,201
194,178
225,205
208,192
Off
126,112
R-S Depth
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
Min
64
Data Rate (kbps)
Max
30000
26666.666
27534.246
27525.773
27333.333
27559.809
64
8448
45000
40000
41301.369
41288.65
41000
41339.713
8448
64
51840
46666.666
48184.931
48170.103
47833.333
48229.665
8448
30000
26666.666
27534.246
27525.773
27333.333
27559.809
64
8448
64
64
20000
40000
41301.369
41288.65
41000
41339.713
8448
8448
8448
8448
8448
8448
20000
46666.666
B–6
Revision 8
74.311
42.666
48
46.487
46.502
46.829
46.444
45.511
51.2
49.587
49.602
49.951
Symbol Rate (ksps)
36.571
41.143
39.846
38.859
40.139
39.81
39.01
43.886
46.829
46.444
45.511
51.2
49.587
49.602
49.951
49.541
76.8
74.403
74.927
74.311
42.666
48
46.487
46.502
Min
64
72
69.371
69.573
70.243
69.667
68.267
42.503
42.516
42.818
42.463
64
72
69.371
69.573
70.243
69.667
68.267
76.8
74.38
74.403
74.927
30000
30000
6007.467
6758.4
6545.449
6547.464
6593.561
6539.378
29622.857
30000
29999.999
30000
29999.999
29999.999
4827.428
5792.914
Max
30000
29999.999
29999.999
30000
29999.999
30000
9011.2
10137.6
9821.196
9890.341
9809.067
30000
30000
29999.999
30000
5610.385
5612.112
5561.624
5604.181
30000
29999.999
29999.999
30000
29999.999
30000
901.2
10137.6
9818.173
9821.196
9890.341
49.541
36.571
41.143
6539.378
29622.857
30000
9809.067
30000
30000
29999.999
30000
30000
30000
6007.467
6758.4
6545.449
6547.464
6593.561
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
Modulation Type Overhead
IESS-309
R-S Code Word
219,201
194,178
225,205
208,192
Off
126,112
219,201
194,178
225,205
208,192
R-S Depth
N/A
4, 8, 16
Min
Data Rate (kbps)
Max
48184.931
48170.103
47833.333
48229.665
8448
B.2.6 IESS-309 Mode – Extended (Closed Network)
Modulation Type
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 3/4
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 3/4
Overhead
None
IESS-309
None
IESS-309
None
IESS-309
None
IESS-309
None
IESS-309
None
IESS-309
R-S Code Word
Off
219,201
Off
219,201
Off
219,201
Off
219,201
Off
219,201
Off
219,201
Off
219,201
Off
219,201
Off
219,201
Off
219,201
Off
219,201
Off
219,201
R-S Depth
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4,8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
N/A
4, 8, 16
Min
64
64
64
64
64
64
Data Rate (kbps)
Max
15000
13767.123
8448
8448
22500
20650.684
8448
8448
30000
27534.246
8448
8448
20000
41301.369
8448
8448
30000
27534.246
8448
8448
20000
41301.369
8448
8448
B.2.7 IESS-310 Mode – Extended Rates
Modulation Type Overhead
None
R-S Code Word
219,201
R-S Depth
4, 8, 16
8-PSK 2/3
IESS-309 219,201 4, 8, 16
Data Rate (kbps)
256
51840
256
8448
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
44736
B.2.8 Turbo Code Mode
Revision 8
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
39.846
38.859
40.139
39.81
39.01
43.886
42.503
42.516
42.818
42.463
Max
29999.999
30000
29999.999
29999.999
4827.428
5792.914
5610.385
5612.112
5561.624
5604.181
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
64
69.371
68.267
74.38
42.666
46.487
45.511
49.587
64
69.371
68.267
74.38
42.666
46.487
45.511
49.587
128
139.462
136.533
148.76
85.333
92.975
91.022
99.173
Max
30000
29999.999
18022.4
19636.346
29999.999
29999.999
12014.933
13090.898
30000
29999.999
9011.2
9818.173
30000
29999.999
6007.467
6545.449
30000
29999.999
9011.2
9818.173
30000
29999.999
6007.467
6545.449
Symbol Rate (ksps)
139.463
28241.194
148.76
4909.087
937.134
1211.701
3534.627
4698.269
17563.701
18818.866
24467.104
B–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
Revision 8
Modulation Type
BPSK 21/44
BPSK 5/16
QPSK 17/18
QPSK 21/44
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 17/18
OQPSK 21/44
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
8-PSK 17/18
8-PSK 3/4
8-PSK 7/8
16-QAM 3/4
16-QAM 7/8
64
64
64
64
Min
64
64
64
64
64
64
256
256
256
256
256
Data Rate (kbps)
Max
30545.454
20000
120888.888
61090.909
96000
112000
120888.888
61090.909
96000
112000
155520
144000
155520
155520
155520
Min
134.095
204.8
33.882
67.047
42.666
36.571
33.882
67.047
42.666
36.571
90.352
113.777
97.523
85.333
73.143
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Max
63999.999
64000
63999.999
63999.999
64000
64000
63999.999
63999.999
64000
64000
54889.411
64000
59245.714
51840
44434.285
B.2.9 16-QAM Mode
Modulation Type
16-QAM 3/4
16-QAM 7/8
R-S Code Word
None
219,201
208,192
None
219,201
208,192
R-S Depth
None
4, 8, 16
None
4, 8, 16
Min
Data Rate ( kbps)
Max
256 51840
256 51840
Min
85.333
Symbol Rate ( ksps)
Max
17280
92.975
92.889
18827.462
18810
73.143
79.692
14811.428
16137.825
79.619 16122.857
16-QAM 3/4 requires Reed-Solomon to be ON in order to automatically resolve data ambiguities.
B–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
B.2.10 AUPC Mode
Modulation Type
16QAM 3/4
16QAM 7/8
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 3/4
BPSK 7/8
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
8PSK 2/3
8PSK 5/6
16QAM 3/4
16QAM 7/8
BPSK 1/1
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 3/4
BPSK 7/8
QPSK 1/1
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 1/1
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
8PSK 2/3
8PSK 5/6
R-S Code Word
OFF
OFF
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
B.2.11 AUPC Mode – Sequential
Modulation Type
BPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
BPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
R-S Code Word
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
R-S Depth
8
8
8
N/A
N/A
8
8
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
8
8
R-S Depth
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
N/A
N/A
8
8
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
Min
Data Rate ( kbps)
Max
64
64
1171
2048
64
64
64
2048
2048
2048
64
64
2048
2048
2048
2048
1067
2048
2048
2048
2048
Revision 8
64
64
256
256
256
256
256
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
Min
64
64
64
64
64
64
Data Rate ( kbps)
Max
7942.500
14062.500
21093.750
24609.375
18750
28125
44843.750
25625
38437.500
44843.750
51250
51840
51840
51840
42187.500
49218.750
18750
28125
42187.500
49218.750
51840
51840
51840
51840
12812.500
19218.750
22421.875
25625
38437.500
45.511
39.009
34.133
68.266
45.511
39.009
136.533
109.226
91.022
78.019
149.853
99.902
85.630
74.926
49.951
42.815
74.926
49.951
42.815
149.853
119.882
99.902
85.630
Symbol Rate ( ksps)
Min
68.266
136.533
91.022
78.019
34.133
68.266
Max
8472
30000
30000
30000
10000
30000
30000
30000
10000
30000
30000
30000
27648
22118.400
18432
15798.857
30000
30000
30000
30000
30000
30000
30000
30000
30000
30000
24276.292
20230.243
17340.209
Min
Symbol Rate ( ksps)
Max
136.533
68.266
2498.133
2184.533
45.511
39.009
68.266
1456.355
1248.304
2184.533
45.511
39.009
149.853
74.926
49.951
42.815
74.926
49.951
42.815
1456.355
1248.304
2498.341
2397.658
1598.439
1370.09
2397.658
1598.439
1370.09
B–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
B.2.12 AUPC Mode – Turbo
Modulation Type
BPSK 21/44
BPSK 5/16
QPSK 17/18
QPSK 21/44
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 17/18
OQPSK 21/44
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
8PSK 17/18
8PSK 3/4
8PSK 7/8
16QAM 3/4
256
256
256
256
64
64
64
64
Min
64
64
64
64
64
64
Data Rate (kbps)
Max
13423.295
8789.062
51840
26846.590
42187.500
49218.750
51840
26846.590
42187.500
49218.750
51840
51840
51840
51840
16QAM 7/8 256 51840
B.2.13 LDPC Mode – Ultra Low Latency (ULL)
Modulation Type
BPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 2/3
QPSK 3/4
Min
32*
32
41.851
46.991
Data Rate (kbps)
Max
2000
2000
2000
2000
*Minimum Data Rate is 8 kbps with Spreading Enabled
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
64.868
32.434
32
32
Max
4054.263
2027.131
1529.239
1361.979
Revision 8
Min
143.034
218.453
36.141
71.517
45.511
39.009
36.141
71.517
45.511
39.009
96.376
121.362
104.025
91.022
78.019
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Max
29999.998
29999.998
29274.352
29999.998
30000
30000
29274.352
29999.998
30000
30000
19516.235
24576
21065.142
18432
15798.857
DR to SR Multiplier
2092/1032
2092/2064
2092/5448
2092/3072
B.2.14 LDPC Mode – Low Latency (LL)
Modulation Type
BPSK .382
BPSK .456
BPSK .547
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 2/3
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
8QAM 2/3
8QAM 3/4
8QAM 7/8
16QAM 2/3
16QAM 3/4
16QAM 7/8
Min
32*
32*
32*
32
42.480
47.720
55.767
256
256
256
256
256
256
Data Rate (kbps)
Max
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
*Minimum Data Rate is 8 kbps with Spreading Enabled
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
84.676
71.019
59.182
32.188
32
32
32
128.313
114.223
97.741
96.140
85.584
73.234
Max
13230.769
11096.774
9247.311
5029.411
3766.519
3352.941
2869.127
2506.118
2230.936
1909.023
1877.753
1671.568
1430.369
DR to SR Multiplier
4128/1560
4128/1860
4128/2232
4104/4080
4104/5448
4104/6120
4104/7152
4096/8172
4096/9180
4096/10728
4092/10944
4092/12240
4092/14304
B–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
B.2.15 LDPC Mode – High Performance (HP)
Data Rate (kbps)
Modulation Type
BPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 2/3
QPSK 3/4
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 2/3
OQPSK 3/4
8QAM 2/3
8QAM 3/4
16QAM 3/4
Min
32*
32
42.667
48
32
42.667
48
256
256
256
Max
15000
30000
40000
45000
30000
40000
45000
41000
46000
46000
*Minimum Data Rate is 8 kbps with Spreading Enabled
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
64
32
32
32
32
32
32
128
113.777
85.333
Max
30000
30000
30000
30000
30000
30000
30000
20500
20444.444
15333.333
Revision 8
DR to SR Multiplier
16416/8208
8208/8208
8208/10944
8208/12384
8208/8208
8208/10944
8208/12384
5472/10944
5504/12384
4128/12384
B.3 Clocking Options
Clocking of the data from the terrestrial equipment to the satellite (and vice versa) will depend on the application. This section describes the most common options and recommended configurations.
SCT (INTERNAL) clock no longer applies when the modem has loop timing on. The TX clock source is now recovered from the RX satellite data. This recovered clock is put out on the ST line and is used to clock the terrestrial equipment. The TX terrestrial clock is now essentially the same as the RX satellite clock, except that it has been buffered by the terrestrial equipment.
Select TX TERRESTRIAL for the TX clock source when in loop timing, if the user equipment is being slaved off the modem.
B.3.1 IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Master
Use this application when both earth stations have high stability clocks and the received data is to be clocked to the local network. Refer to Figure B-1 for:
• Clocking block diagram
• TX clock options
• Buffer clock options
The disadvantage of the master/master application is that the RX data will slip, as the clocks will not be synchronized. If the buffer is properly set up, the slips will be an exact frame length, causing minimum loss of data. By using very high stability clocks, the expected time between slips can be several days.
Loss of the buffer clock will mean the buffer will not be emptied and data will not be available.
The buffer clock will normally revert to the low stability internal reference automatically.
B–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
Revision 8
Figure B-1. IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Master Clocking Diagram
B–12
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
Revision 8
B.3.2 IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Slave
Use this application when the far end earth station does not have local access to a high stability reference clock, or when it is not required to synchronize with a local clock. Refer to Figure B-2 for:
• Clocking block diagram
• TX clock options
• Buffer clock options for using external loop timing
Modem loop timing does not apply for G.703 operation. The terrestrial equipment must select loop timing to recover the clock off the RX data and use that recovered clock for the TX data.
B–13
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
Revision 8
Figure B-2. IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Slave Clocking Diagram
The disadvantage of the master/slave application is that the signal received at the slave station is subject to Doppler shift. The length of the buffer at the master end will need to be twice the length that is normally required, compensating for the Doppler shift on the outward and return paths
B–14
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
Revision 8
B.4 Buffering
There are two reasons for a receive buffer:
1.
Plesiochronous buffering of two dissimilar clock frequencies (normally the far end TX clock verses the local network clock). The clocks may be very close in frequency to each other and will normally slip at a constant rate. Figure B-3 shows plesiochronous operation for dissimilar clocks. If incoming traffic is too fast, an occasional bit will be lost. If incoming traffic is too slow, an occasional bit will be repeated.
Figure B-3. Clock Slip
2.
Doppler buffer of the signal of the satellite. The Doppler shift results from the “Figure 8” station-keeping movement performed by the satellite in space over a period of one day
( Figure B-4 ). Doppler shift should not result in a clock slip, as the buffer will constantly fill and empty.
B–15
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
Revision 8
Figure B-4. Doppler Shift
If the two earth stations are configured as master/slave, then the buffer need only be configured for Doppler operation. The buffer will then have sufficient capacity for the Doppler shift on the outward and return paths.
A buffer set up for Doppler operation only will typically require less depth than one intended for both Doppler and plesiochronous operation.
B.4.1 Buffer Size
The depth of the receive buffer will depend on four parameters:
1.
Doppler shift caused by satellite.
2.
Stability of each clock (plesiochronous/Doppler operation).
3.
Frame/Multiframe length of multiplexed data format.
4.
Allowable time between clock slips.
B.4.1.1 Doppler
A geostationary satellite should be positioned directly over the equator and orbit with duration of
24 hours. In practice, the exact inclination of the satellite (relative to the equator) is influenced by the earth, moon, and sun’s gravity, as well as solar wind. Station-keeping motors are required to maintain the orbital position.
B–16
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
Revision 8
When viewed from the earth, the satellite appears to prescribe an ellipse in space, degrading to a
“Figure 8” as the angle of inclination increases. The orbit of the satellite can result in a peak-topeak altitude variation of ± 2% (85 km), while the station keeping of a newly launched satellite will typically be ± 0.1
° (150 km). The total effect will be 172 km relative to the nominal
42,164 km radius.
Depending upon the location of the earth station relative to the satellite, the variation in propagation delay will typically be 1.15 ms (up to satellite and back down); therefore a buffer depth of 2 ms is sufficient to cope with most commercial satellites.
Since station-keeping involves using fuel in the motors, the “lifetime” of the satellite can be extended by allowing the satellite to drift into a wider “Figure 8” and using the motor less often.
The older satellites will be found in a more inclined orbit with the station keeping varying in latitude by as much as ± 4 ° . The total effect of the inclined orbit may result in a typical variation in path delay of 35 ms.
B.4.1.2 Plesiochronous
The stability of station reference clocks is normally 1 x 10 -12 (derived from a cesium standard).
While the stability is exceptionally high, the two clocks are not in synchronization with each other and will eventually pass by each other.
The clock used for the TX signal is passed over the satellite, but will not be used at the RX earth station where a national network derives its time locally. A buffer will fill up with data using the clock from the satellite and will empty using the local clock. The object of the buffer is to ensure that the buffer overflows or underflows at regular, determinable intervals (typically every 40 days). The buffer depth required (from center to end) would be:
Minimum slip period (seconds) * [stability of far end (transmit) clock + stability of local clock]
For example:
Far end (transmit) clock stability 1 x 10-9
Local (buffer) clock 1 x 10-11
Minimum clock slip 40 days
Buffer Depth = (40 x 24 x 60 x 60) x (1 x 10 -9 + 1 x 10 -11 ) = 3.49 ms
Because the buffer will either fill or empty (depending on the frequency relationship of the two clocks), the total buffer depth will be 2 x 3.49 ms = 6.98 ms.
B–17
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
Revision 8
B.4.1.3 Frame / Multiframe Length
The depth of the receive buffer required is applicable to all unframed data.
When the data is framed (such as 2048 kbps G732 or 1544 kbps G733), it is desirable to provide slips in predefined locations. The advantage of organized slip locations (in relation to the frame) is that multiplexing equipment does not lose sync and outages on any channel are kept to a minimum.
A 2048 kbps frame structure commonly used is G732. This has a frame length of 256 bits with 16 frames per multiframe (4096 bits total, or 2 ms).
B.4.1.3.1 Multiples of the Frame Length
If this setting is set to NONE , the user can choose any buffer depth.
B.4.1.4 Total Buffer Length
T1 and E1 framing structure under G.704 are available. When this is selected, the buffer length is restricted to the size of the buffer. Using the examples from the three previous sections, the total buffer depth (end to end) will be:
Doppler + Plesiochronous (rounded up to the nearest multiframe)
1.15 ms + 6.98 ms = 8.13 ms
If the frame length is 2 ms, then the nearest multiframe will be 10 ms, or 20,480 bits.
B.4.1.4.1 Converting Between Bits and Seconds
Bits to Seconds
Seconds to Bits
1/Data Rate x Bits = Seconds
Data Rate x Seconds = Bit
B–18
Appendix C. REMOTE CONTROL
C.1 Overview
This appendix describes the protocol and message command set for remote monitor and control of the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem.
The electrical interface is either an EIA-485 multi-drop bus (for the control of many devices) or an EIA-232 connection (for the control of a single device), and data is transmitted in asynchronous serial form using ASCII characters. Control and status information is transmitted in packets of variable length in accordance with the structure and protocol defined in later sections.
C.2 EIA-485
For applications where multiple devices are to be monitored and controlled, a full-duplex (or 4-wire) EIA-485 is preferred. Half-duplex
(2-wire) EIA-485 is possible, but is not preferred.
In full-duplex EIA-485 communication there are two separate, isolated, independent differential-mode twisted pairs, each handling serial data in different directions. It is assumed that there is a ‘Controller’ device (a PC or dumb terminal), which transmits data in a broadcast mode via one of the pairs. Many ‘Target’ devices are connected to this pair, which all simultaneously receive data from the Controller.
The Controller is the only device with a line-driver connected to this pair – the Target devices only have line-receivers connected.
In the other direction, on the other pair each Target has a Tri-Stateable line driver connected, and the Controller has a line-receiver connected. All the line drivers are held in high-impedance mode until one – and only one – Target transmits back to the Controller.
Each Target has a unique address, and each time the Controller transmits in a framed ‘packet’ of data, the address of the intended recipient
Target is included. All of the Targets receive the packet, but only one – the intended – will reply. The Target enables its output line driver and transmits its return data packet back to the Controller in the other direction, on the physically separate pair.
C–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
EIA-485 (full duplex) summary:
• Two differential pairs: one pair for Controller-to-Target, one pair for Target -to-Controller.
• Controller-to-Target pair has one line driver (Controller), and all Target s have line-receivers.
• Target-to-Controller pair has one line receiver (Controller), and all Targets have Tri-State drivers.
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
C.3 EIA-232
This is a much simpler configuration in which the Controller device is connected directly to the Target via a two-wire-plus-ground connection. Controller-to-Target data is carried via EIA-232 electrical levels on one conductor, and Target -to-Controller data is carried in the other direction on the other conductor.
C.4 Basic Protocol
Whether in EIA-232 or EIA-485 mode, all data is transmitted as asynchronous serial characters suitable for transmission and reception by a UART. In this case, the asynchronous character format supported is 8N1. The baud rate may vary between 2400 and 57,600 baud.
All data is transmitted in framed packets. The Controller is assumed to be a PC or ASCII dumb terminal, which is in charge of the process of monitor and control. The Controller is the only device which is permitted to initiate, at will, the transmission of data. Targets are only permitted to transmit when they have been specifically instructed to do so by the Controller.
All bytes within a packet are printable ASCII characters less than ASCII code 127. In this context, the Carriage Return and Line Feed characters are considered printable.
All messages from Controller-to-Target require a response, with one exception: this will be either to return data, which has been requested by the Controller, or to acknowledge reception of an instruction to change the configuration of the Target. The exception to this is when the Controller broadcasts a message (such as Set time/date) using Address 0, when the Target is set to EIA-485 mode.
C–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
C.5 Packet Structure
Start of Packet Target Address Address Delimiter
<
ASCII code 60
(1 character)
Example:
(4 characters)
<0135/TFQ=70.2345{CR}
/
ASCII code 47
(1 character)
Start of Packet Target Address Address Delimiter
>
ASCII code 62
(1 character)
Example:
(4 characters)
>0654/RSW=32{CR}{LF}
/
ASCII code 47
(1 character)
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code
(3 characters)
Code Qualifier
= or ?
ASCII codes 61 or
63
(1 character)
Optional Arguments
(n characters)
Target-to-Controller
Instruction Code
(3 characters)
End of Packet
Carriage Return
ASCII code 13
(1 character)
Code Qualifier
=, ?, !, or *
ASCII codes
61, 63, 33, or 42
(1 character)
Optional Arguments
(From 0 to n characters)
End of Packet
Carriage Return,
Line Feed
ASCII codes 13,10
(2 characters)
C.5.1 Start of Packet
Controller-to-Target: This is the character ‘<’ (ASCII code 60).
Target-to-Controller: This is the character ‘>’ (ASCII code 62).
Because this is used to provide a reliable indication of the start of packet, these two characters may not appear anywhere else within the body of the message.
C–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
C.5.2 Target Address
Up to 9999 devices can be uniquely addressed. In EIA-232 applications, this value is set to 0. In EIA-485 applications, the permissible range of values is 1 to 9999. It is programmed into a Target unit using the front panel keypad.
IMPORTANT
The Controller sends a packet with the address of a Target – the destination of the packet. When the Target responds, the address used is the same address, to indicate to the Controller the source of the packet. The Controller does not have its own address.
C.5.3 Address Delimiter
This is the “forward slash” character ' / ' (ASCII code 47).
C.5.4 Instruction Code
This is a three-character alphabetic sequence, which identifies the subject of the message. Wherever possible, the instruction codes have been chosen to have some significance – e.g., TFQ for transmit frequency, RMD for receive modulation type, etc. This aids in the readability of the message, should it be displayed in its raw ASCII form. Only upper case alphabetic characters may be used (A to Z,
ASCII codes 65 to 90).
C.5.5 Instruction Code Qualifier
This is a single character, which further qualifies the preceding instruction code. Code Qualifiers obey the following rules:
1.
From Controller-to-Target , the only permitted values are:
Symbol Definition
=
(ASCII code 61)
?
(ASCII code 63)
The ‘=’ code is used as the Assignment Operator (AO) and is used to indicate that the parameter defined by the preceding byte should be set to the value of the argument (s) which follow it.
Example: in a message from Controller-to-Target, TFQ=0950.0000 would mean “set the transmit frequency to 950 MHz.”
The ‘?’ code is used as the Query Operator (QO) and is used to indicate that the Target should return the current value of the parameters defined by the preceding byte.
Example: in a message from Controller-to-Target, TFQ? Would mean “return the current value of the transmit frequency.”
C–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
2.
From Target-to-Controller , the only permitted values are:
Symbol Definition
=
(ASCII code 61)
The ‘=’ code is used in two ways: a. If the Controller has sent a query code to a Target
( Example: TFQ? (meaning ‘what’s the Transmit frequency?’), the Target would respond with TFQ=xxxx.xxxx, where xxxx.xxxx represents the frequency in question. b. If the Controller sends an instruction to set a parameter to a particular value, then, providing the value sent is valid, the Target will acknowledge the message by replying with TFQ=(with no message arguments)
?
(ASCII code 63)
!
(ASCII code 33)
*
(ASCII code 42)
#
ASCI code 35)
If the Controller sends an instruction to set a parameter to a particular value, then, if the value sent is not valid, the Target will acknowledge the message by replying (for example) with TFQ? (with no message arguments). This indicates that there was an error in the message sent by the Controller.
If the Controller sends an instruction code which the Target does not recognize, the Target will acknowledge the message by echoing the invalid instruction, followed by the ! character with: Example: XYZ!
If the Controller sends an instruction to set a parameter to a particular value, then, if the value sent is valid, BUT the modulator will not permit that particular parameter to be changed at this time, the Target will acknowledge the message by replying (for example) with
TFQ* (with message arguments).
If the Controller sends a correctly formatted command, BUT the modulator is not in remote mode, it will not allow reconfiguration and will respond with TFQ#
C.5.6 Optional Message Arguments
Arguments are not required for all messages. Arguments are ASCII codes for the characters 0 to 9 (ASCII codes 48 to 57), period (ASCII code 46) and comma (ASCII code 44).
C.5.7 End Of Packet
Controller-to-Target: This is the ‘Carriage Return’ character (ASCII code 13).
Target-to-Controller: This is the two-character sequence ‘Carriage Return’, ‘Line Feed’ (ASCII codes 13 and 10). Both indicate the valid termination of a packet.
C–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
C.6 Remote Commands / Queries
BFS
BRS
BRT O
BRX
BTX
C
CAA A
CAE
CAS
CCF
CDM
CFM
CFO
CID
CLD
A
ACT
AET
AMN
A
A
A
AMT A
AMX A
ANP A
ARB
ARF
A
A
ASI
ATB
A
A
ATF A
B
BBR
BEI
BER
Index Notes: Where has been set to
Column ‘C’
AUPC; XXX
O
= Command and Column ‘Q’ = Query, columns marked ‘ or Command/Query . Under CODE, XXX indicates a priority command; XXX A
X ’ designate instruction code as Command only , Query only indicates a command/query valid only when the SLM-5650A modem type indicates a command/query that is valid only when an optional interface module has been installed in the SLM-5650A.
,
CODE C Q C Q Q C Q Q PAGE
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
C-16
C-9
C-34
C-21
C-21
C-21
C-21
C-21
C-22
C-22
C-29
C-15
C-9
C-15
C-21
C-15
C-40
PAGE CODE
CNM
C-32
C-32
C-32
C-32
C-32
COM
CRA
CRM
CSD
CST
C-32
C-33
C-33
C-33
C-34
C-34
D
DAY
E
E1F O
E2F O
EBA
EBN
EID
ERF O
ERR
G
GBM O
GIP O
I
IAP A
IEP
IMG
IPA
ISP
ITF
L
LCL A
LOP
LPC A
LRS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
C-34
C-24
C-24
C-25
C-25
C-7
C-35
C-25
C-35
C-25
C-16
C-24
C-37
C-16
C-40
C-39
PAGE CODE C
C-22 LUF
C-22
C-22
C-23
C-23
C-29
M
MGC
MIP O
MIS O
MOM
X
X
X
X
C-23
C-37
C-37
C-23
MRC
MSK
N
NUA A
NUE
NUS
X
X
P
PAT
R
RBM
RBO
RBS
RCB
RCI
RCK
RCL A
RCR
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
RCW
RDD
RDF
RDI
RDR
RDS
REA
RFB
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
C-16
C-16
C-16
C-17
C-17
C-36
C-15
C-17
C-17
C-17
C-18
C-15
C-18
C-18
C-7
PAGE CODE
C-26 RFM
C-29
C-40
C-40
C-7
RFO
RFQ
RFT
RIM O
RIP O
C-25
C-25
C-34
C-26
C-26
RMD
RNA A
RNE
C-27
C-16
RNS
RPB A
RPC
RPE
A
A
RPL A
RRD
RRS
RSE
RSF
RSI
RSL
RSW
RTC O
RXF
S
SCT
SMG O
SMI O
SNO
SSI
SWR
X X
C-19
C-20
C-37
C-20
C-9
C-42
C-42
C-28
C-28
C-28
C-36
C-36
C-19
C-19
C-19
C-19
C-19
PAGE CODE C
C-14 T
C-18
C-18
C-14
C-40
C-41
T1F
T2F
TBO
TCI
TCK
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
C-14
C-35
C-27
C-28
C-36
C-36
TCR
TCW
TDE
TDF
TDI
TDR
X
X
X
X
X
X
TFM
TFQ
TFT
TIM
TMD
TMP
TPL
TRD
TRS
TSC
TSE
TSF
TSI
TTC O
TXF
TXO
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
C-10
C-10
C-11
C-9
C-8
C-11
C-8
C-28
C-8
C-28
C-11
C-38
C-38
C-9
C-10
C-10
C-9
C-10
C-11
C-11
C-12
C-12
C-12
C-12
C-38
C-12
C-13
NOTE – Instruction Code Qualifiers, as defined in Sect. C.5.5
, are used as follows in the command/query tables’ ‘Response to Command’ columns:
=
?
Message ok
Received ok, but invalid arguments found
*
#
Message ok, but not permitted in current mode
Message ok, but unit is not in Remote mode
C–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
C.6.1 Initial Setup – Priority Commands / Queries
Before executing any Modem, Unit, Bulk/Global, AUPC, or Optional Interface commands/queries, initial setup should be accomplished with these three commands, prioritized as follows: (Highest Priority) MOM, RFB, ITF (Lowest Priority). Priority commands are indicated by shading throughout these sections. Any change to a higher priority parameter can override any of the parameters of lower priority.
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Description of Arguments
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
Modem
Operating
Mode
Modem RF
Band
MOM=
RFB=
Interface Type ITF=
1 hex byte, value 0 thru C
1 byte, value 0 or 1
1 byte, value 0 thru 7
Command or Query.
Modem Operating Mode, where: x = 0=OM-73
1=Mil-165A
2=IESS-308
3=IESS-309
4=IESS-310
5=TURBO
6=16QAM
7=AUPC
8=RXBURST
9=TXBURST
A=TURBO-FA
B=RXBRSTFA
C=LDPC
Example: MOM=0 (sets OM-73 operating mode)
Command or Query.
Modem RF Band, where:
0=70/140 MHz Band
1=L-Band (950 MHz – 2000 MHz)
Example: RFB=0 (sets 70/140 Band)
Command or Query.
Interface Type, where:
0=EIA-530
1=HSSI
2=Unbalance G.703
3=Balanced G.703
4=GigaBit Ethernet Interface
6=Network Processor Card
7=LVDS Interface
Example: ITF=0 (sets EIA-530 interface type)
MOM=
MOM?
MOM*
MOM#
RFB=
RFB?
RFB *
RFB #
ITF=
ITF?
ITF*
ITF#
MOM?
RFB?
ITF?
MOM=x
(see Description of Arguments)
RFB =x
(see Description of Arguments)
ITF=x
(see Description of Arguments)
C–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
C.6.2 Modulator (Tx) Commands / Queries
Tx Priority System = (Highest priority) MOM, RFB, ITF (See Sect. C.6.1
), TFM, TFT, TMD, TCR, and TDR (Lowest Priority). Priority commands indicated by shading . Any change to a higher priority parameter can override any of the parameters of lower priority.
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Description of Arguments
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
Tx Overhead
Type
Tx FEC Type
Tx Modulation
Type
TFM=
TFT=
TMD=
1 byte, value of
0 thru 2, 4
1 byte, value of
0 thru 6
1 byte, value of
0 thru 4
Command or Query.
Tx Overhead Type, where:
0=None (Unframed)
1=IBS
2=IDR
4=AUPC
Depending on Modem mode, not all selections will be valid.
Example: TFM=0 (selects Unframed mode)
Command or Query.
Tx FEC coding type, where:
0=None (Uncoded)
1=Viterbi
2=Turbo
3=Sequential
4=LDPC ULL (Ultra Low Latency)
5=LDPC LL (Low Latency)
6=LDPC HP (High Performance)
Example: TFT=2 (selects Turbo coding)
Command or Query.
Tx Modulation type, where:
0=BPSK
1=QPSK
2=OQPSK
3=8PSK
4=16QAM
Depending on FEC type, not all selections will be valid.
Example: TMD=1 (selects QPSK)
TFM=
TFM?
TFM*
TFM#
TFT=
TFT?
TFT*
TFT#
TMD=
TMD?
TMD*
TMD#
TFM?
TFT?
TMD?
TFM=x
(see Description of Arguments)
TFT=x
(see Description of Arguments)
TMD=x
(see Description of Arguments)
C–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Tx Code Rate TCR=
Tx Data Rate
Insert Tx BERT
Error
BEI=
Tx SCT
Reference
TDR=
Tx BERT State BTX=
SCT=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Description of Arguments
1 byte, value of
0 thru D
10 bytes
None
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
1 byte, value of 0 thru 2
Command or Query
Tx Code Rate, where:
0 = 1/1 (Uncoded)
1 = 1/2
2 = 3/4
3 = 7/8
4 = 2/3
5 = 5/6
6 = 21/44
7 = 5/16
8 = 17/18
9 = Reserved
A = Reserved
B = .547
C = .456
D = .382
Depending on FEC type, not all selections will be valid.
Example: TCR=1 (selects Rate 1/2)
Command or Query.
Tx Data rate, in kbps, in the form xxxxxx.xxx.
Resolution=1 bps.
Example: TDR=002047.999 (selects 2047.999 kbps)
Command only.
Insert single bit error in Tx BERT
Example: BEI=
Command or Query.
Tx BERT State, where:
0=Off
1=On
Example: BTX=1 (Tx BERT On)
Command or Query.
SCT Clock Reference, where:
0=Internal
1=Data Source Synchronized
2=Loop Timing (Rx-Satellite Clock)
Example: SCT=0 (selects Internal Modem Reference)
C–9
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
TCR? TCR=
TCR?
TCR*
TCR#
Response to Query
TCR=x
(see Description of Arguments)
TDR=
TDR?
TDR*
TDR#
BEI=
BEI?
BEI*
BEI#
BTX=
BTX?
BTX*
BTX#
SCT =
SCT?
SCT*
SCT#
TDR?
N/A
BTX?
SCT?
TDR=xxxxxx.xxx
(see Description of Arguments)
N/A
BTX=x
(see Description of Arguments)
SCT=x
(see Description of Arguments)
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Parameter
Type
Tx BPSK Data
Ordering
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
TBO=
Tx Clock Invert TCI=
Tx Clock
Source
Tx
Reed-Solomon
Code Word
TCW=
Tx Differential
Encoding
TCK=
TDE=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Description of Arguments
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
1 byte
1 byte, value of 0 to 5
1 byte
Command or Query.
Invert Transmit BPSK Data Ordering, where::
0=Standard
1=Non-Standard
Example: TBO=1 (selects Inverted BPSK Ordering)
Command or Query.
Invert Transmit Clock, where:
0=Normal
1=Inverted
Example: TCI=1 (selects Inverted TX Clock)
Command or Query.
Tx Clock Source, where: x=Tx Clock Source:
0=SCT
1=Tx Terrestrial
Example: TCK=1 (selects Tx Terrestrial Clock Source)
Command or Query.
Tx RS encoding, where:
0 = RS(225,205,10)
1 = RS(219,201,9)
2 = RS(208,192,8)
3 = RS(194,178,8)
4 = RS(126,112,7)
5 = RS(220,200,10)
Depending on Modem mode, overhead type, and data rate, not all selections will be valid.
Example: TCW=0 (This is a ‘don’t care’ if RS is Off under TRS)
Command or Query.
Tx Differential Encoding, where: x=Tx Differential Encoding:
0=Off
1=On
Depending on FEC type or Modulation Type, not all selections will be valid.
Example: TDE=1 (selects Tx Differential Encoding On)
Response to
Command
TBO =
TBO?
TBO*
TBO#
TCI =
TCI?
TCI*
TCI#
TCK=
TCK?
TCK*
TCK#
TCW=
TCW?
TCW*
TCW#
TDE=
TDE?
TDE*
TDE#
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
TBO?
TCI?
TCK?
TCW?
TDE?
Response to Query
TBO=x
(see Description of Arguments)
TCI=x
(see Description of Arguments)
TCK=x
(see Description of Arguments)
TCW=x
(see Description of Arguments)
TDE=x
(see Description of Arguments)
C–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Tx Data Fault TDF=
Tx Data Invert TDI=
Tx Frequency TFQ=
Tx Power Level TPL=
Tx
Reed-Solomon
Interleaver
Depth
TRD=
Tx
Reed-Solomon
Encoding
TRS=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Description of Arguments
1 byte, value of 0 thru 2
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
9 bytes
5 bytes
1 byte, value of 0 to 2
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
Command or Query.
Transmit Data Fault, where:
0=None
1=DATA
2=AIS
Example: TDF=0 (selects Data Fault = None)
Command or Query.
Invert Transmit Data, where:
0=Normal
1=Inverted
Example: TDI=1 (selects Inverted TX Data)
Command or Query.
Tx Frequency, 52 to 88 MHz, 104 to 176 MHz, and 950 to 2000 MHz
Resolution = 100Hz.
Example: TFQ=0140.9872
Command or Query.
Tx Output power level, where: s=sign ( + / - ) xx.x = Tx Output power level, +10.0 and –40.0 dBm.
Example: TPL=-13.4
Command or Query.
Tx RS encoding, where:
0 = Interleaver Depth 4
1 = Interleaver Depth 8
2 = Interleaver Depth 16
Depending on Modem mode, overhead type, and data rate, not all selections will be valid.
Example: TRD=0 (This is a ‘don’t care’ if RS is Off under TRS)
Command or Query.
Tx RS encoding, where:
0=Off
1=On
Depending on Modem mode, not all selections will be valid.
Example: TRS=0 (RS encoding is Off)
Response to
Command
TDF =
TDF?
TDF*
TDF#
TDI =
TDI?
TDI*
TDI#
TFQ=
TFQ?
TFQ*
TFQ#
TPL=
TPL?
TPL*
TPL#
TRD =
TRD?
TRD *
TRD #
TRS=
TRS?
TRS*
TRS#
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
TDF?
TDI?
TFQ?
TPL?
TRD?
TRS?
Response to Query
TDF=x
(see Description of Arguments)
TDI=x
(see Description of Arguments)
TFQ=xxxx.xxxx
(see Description of Arguments)
TPL=sxx.x
(see Description of Arguments)
TRD =x
(see Description of Arguments)
TRS=x
(see Description of Arguments)
C–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Tx Scrambler TSC=
Tx Spreading
Equation
Tx Spreading
Factor
Tx Spectrum
Invert
Live Tx Faults
TSE=
TSF=
TSI=
N/A
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Description of Arguments
1 byte, value of 0 thru 6
1 byte, value of 1 thru 4
3 bytes, value of
1 thru 128
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
8 bytes
Command or Query.
Tx Scrambler state, where:
0 = Off
1 = OM-73 Scrambler
2 = V.35 Scrambler
3 = Modified V.35 (Comtech EF Data Closed Network)
4 = Reed-Solomon Synchronous Scrambler
5 = IBS Overhead Synchronous Scrambler
6 = TURBO Scrambler
Depending on Modem mode, FEC type, overhead type, and RS state, not all selections will be valid.
Example: TSC=1 (OM-73 Scrambler On)
Command or Query.
Tx Spreading Equation, where x selects Equation 1 thru 4:
Example: TSE=1 (Tx Equation #1)
Command or Query.
Tx Spreading Factor, where xxx is value from 1 to 128. Values other than 1 are only valid when Modem Type = LDPC.
Example: TSF=001 (Tx Spreading Off)
Command or Query.
Tx Spectrum Invert selection, where:
0=Normal,
1=Tx Spectrum Inverted
Example: TSI=0 (selects normal)
Query only.
Live Tx Faults are returned as a 32 bit Hexadecimal value. Bit values are defined as follows:
80000000 = Modulator Symbol Clock not locked
40000000 = Modulator RF Synthesizer not locked
20000000 = Modulator No IQ Activity
10000000 = Modulator Nyquist Filter Clipping
08000000 = Interface data clock PLLs not locked
04000000 = Interface Terrestrial Clock No Activity
02000000 = Interface SCT PLL not locked
01000000 = Interface No Data Activity
Example: TXF=00000000 indicates No Tx Faults
TSE=
TSE?
TSE*
TSE#
TSF=
TSF?
TSF*
TSF#
TSI=
TSI?
TSI*
TSI#
N/A
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
TSC? TSC=
TSC?
TSC*
TSC#
TSE?
TSF?
TSI?
TXF?
Response to Query
TSC=x
(see Description of Arguments)
TSE=x
(see Description of Arguments)
TSF=xxx
(see Description of Arguments)
TSI=x
(see Description of Arguments)
TXF=xxxxxxxx
(see Description of Arguments)
C–12
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Tx Carrier State TXO=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Description of Arguments
Response to
Command
1 byte, value of 0 thru 3
Command or Query.
Tx Carrier State, where:
0=OFF due to front panel or remote control command
1=ON
2=RTS
3=OFF due to ext H/W Tx Carrier Off command (not a valid argument when used as a command)
Example: TXO=1 (Tx Carrier ON)
TXO=
TXO?
TXO*
TXO#
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
TXO?
Response to Query
TXO=x
(see Description of Arguments)
C–13
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
C.6.3 Demodulator (Rx) Commands / Queries
Rx Priority System = (Highest priority) MOM, RFB, ITF (See Sect. C.6.1
), RFM, RFT, RMD, RCR, and RDR (Lowest Priority). Priority commands are indicated by shading . Any change to a higher priority parameter can override any of the parameters of lower priority.
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Description of Arguments
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
Rx Framing
Mode
Rx FEC Type
RFM=
RFT=
Rx Demod type RMD=
1 byte, value of
0 thru 2, 4
1 byte, value of
0 thru 6
1 byte, value of
0 thru 4
Command or Query.
Rx Overhead Type, where:
0=None (Unframed)
1=IBS
2=IDR
4=AUPC
Depending on Modem mode, not all selections will be valid.
Example: RFM=0 (selects Unframed mode)
Command or Query.
Rx FEC coding type, where:
0=None (Uncoded)
1=Viterbi
2=Turbo
3=Sequential
4=LDPC ULL (Ultra Low Latency)
5=LDPC LL (Low Latency)
6=LDPC HP (High Performance)
Example: RFT=2 (selects Turbo coding)
Command or Query.
Rx Modulation type, where:
0=BPSK
1=QPSK
2=OQPSK
3=8PSK
4=16QAM
Depending on FEC type, not all selections will be valid.
Example: RMD=1 (selects QPSK)
RFM=
RFM?
RFM*
RFM#
RFT=
RFT?
RFT*
RFT#
RMD=
RMD?
RMD*
RMD#
RFM?
RFT?
RMD?
RFM=x
(see Description of Arguments)
RFT=x
(same format as command argument)
RMD=x
(see Description of Arguments)
C–14
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Parameter
Type
Rx FEC Code
Rate
Rx Data Rate
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
RCR=
RDR=
Rx BERT BER N/A
Rx BER N/A
Rx BERT Reset BRS=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
1 byte, value of
0 thru D
10 bytes
6 bytes
6 bytes
None
Description of Arguments
Command or Query.
Rx FEC Code Rate, where:
0 = 1/1 (Uncoded)
1 = 1/2
2 = 3/4
3 = 7/8
4 = 2/3
5 = 5/6
6 = 21/44
7 = 5/16
8 = 17/18
9 = Reserved
A = Reserved
B = .547
C = .456
D = .382
Depending on FEC type, not all selections will be valid.
Example: RCR=1 (selects Rate 1/2)
Command or Query.
Rx Data rate, in kbps, in the form xxxxxx.xxx.
Resolution = 1 bps.
Example: RDR=002047.999 (selects 2047.999 kbps)
Query only.
Unit returns the value of the BERT BER in the form a.b x 10 -c , where:
First three bytes are the value;
Last two bytes are the exponent.
Returns 0.0E00 if the BERT is not synchronized to a pattern.
Example: BBR=4.9E12
Query only.
Unit returns the value of the estimated corrected BER in the form a.b x 10 demodulator is unlocked.
-cc . First three bytes are the value. Last two bytes are the exponent. Returns 99999 if the
Example: BER=4.8E03 (selects BER = 4.8 x 10 -3
Command only.
)
Reset Rx BERT.
Example: BRS=
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
RCR? RCR=
RCR?
RCR*
RCR#
Response to Query
RCR=x
(see Description of Arguments)
N/A
N/A
N/A
BRS=
BRS?
BRS*
BRS#
RDR?
BBR?
BER?
N/A
RDR=xxxxxx.xxx
(see Description of Arguments)
BBR=a.bEcc
(see Description of Arguments)
BER=a.bEcc
(see Description of Arguments)
N/A
C–15
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Rx BERT State BRX=
Rx Eb/No
Rx BERT Errors N/A
Rx Buffer
Programming
Mode
N/A
RBM=
Rx BPSK Data
Ordering
RBO=
Rx Buffer Size RBS=
ReCenter Buffer RCB=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
4 bytes
7 bytes
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
8 bytes
None
Description of Arguments
Command or Query.
Rx BERT State, where:
0=Off
1=On
Example: BRX=1 (Rx BERT On)
Query only.
Returns the value of Eb/No, between 0 and 20 dB, resolution = 0.1 dB.
Returns 99.9 if demod is unlocked.
Example: EBN=12.3 (selects Eb/No = 12.3 dB)
For values greater than 20.0 dB, the reply will be: EBN=+020
Query only.
Read the total number of Bit Errors.
Example: ERR=9999999
Command or Query.
Rx Buffer Programming Mode, where:
0 = Buffer Size is programmed in Bits.
1 = Buffer Size is programmed in milliseconds.
Note: Commands as well as queries are not allowed when either the GigaBit
Ethernet or NP card has been selected as the current interface type.
Example: RBM=0
Command or Query.
Invert Receive BPSK Data Ordering in the form x, where:
0=Standard
1=Non-Standard
Example: RBO=1 (selects Inverted BPSK Ordering)
Command or Query.
Rx Buffer Size (in either bits or milliseconds, see RBM command), where: xxxxxxxx=Rx Buffer Size
Note: Commands as well as queries are not allowed when either the GigaBit
Ethernet or NP card has been selected as the current interface type.
Example: RBS=00000512
Command only.
Forces the software to recenter the receive Plesiochronous / Doppler buffer.
Note: This command is not allowed when either the GigaBit Ethernet or NP card has been selected as the current interface type.
Example: RCB= (ReCenter buffer)
Response to
Command
BRX=
BRX?
BRX*
BRX#
N/A
N/A
RBM=
RBM?
RBM*
RBM#
RBO =
RBO?
RBO*
RBO#
RBS=
RBS?
RBS*
RBS#
RCB=
RCB?
RCB*
RCB#
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
BRX?
EBN?
ERR?
RBM?
RBO?
RBS?
N/A
Response to Query
BRX=x
(see Description of Arguments)
EBN=xxxx
(see Description of Arguments)
N/A
RBM=x
(see Description of Arguments)
RBO=x
(see Description of Arguments)
RBS=xxxxxxxx
(see Description of Arguments)
N/A
C–16
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Rx Clock Invert RCI=
Rx Clock
Source
RCK=
Rx
Reed-Solomon
Code Word
RCW=
Rx Differential
Decoding
RDD=
Rx Data Fault RDF=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
1 byte, value of 0 thru 3
1 byte, value of 0 to 5
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
1 byte, value of 0 thru 2
Description of Arguments
Command or Query.
Invert Receive Clock in the form x, where:
0=Normal
1=Inverted
Example: RCI=1 (selects Inverted RX Clock)
Command or Query.
Rx Clock Source, where:
0=Rx Satellite
1=Internal
2=Tx-Terrestrial
3= External Clock (only valid with the G.703 Option Card)
Note: Commands as well as queries are not allowed when either the GigaBit
Ethernet or NP card has been selected as the current interface type.
Example: RCK=2 (selects Tx-Terrestrial)
Command or Query.
Rx RS encoding in the form x, where:
0 = RS(225,205,10)
1 = RS(219,201,9)
2 = RS(208,192,8)
3 = RS(194,178,8)
4 = RS(126,112,7)
5 = RS(220,200,10)
Depending on Modem mode, overhead type, and data rate, not all selections will be valid.
Example: RCW=0 (This is a ‘don’t care’ if RS is Off under TRS)
Command or Query.
Rx Differential Decoding in the form x, where:
0=Off
1=On
Depending on FEC type or Modulation Type, not all selections will be valid.
Example: RDD=1 (selects Rx Differential Decoding On)
Command or Query.
Receive Data Fault, where:
0=None
1=DATA
2=AIS
Example: RDF=0 (selects Data Fault = None)
Response to
Command
RCI =
RCI?
RCI*
RCI#
RCK=
RCK?
RCK*
RCK#
RCW =
RCW?
RCW *
RCW #
RDD=
RDD?
RDD*
RDD#
RDF =
RDF?
RDF*
RDF#
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
RCI?
RCK?
RCW?
RDD?
RDF?
Response to Query
RCI=x
(see Description of Arguments)
RCK=x
(see Description of Arguments)
RCW=x
(see Description of Arguments)
RDD=x
(see Description of Arguments)
RDF=x
(see Description of Arguments)
C–17
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Rx Data Invert RDI=
Rx Descrambler RDS=
Rx
Reacquisition
Time
Rx Frequency
Offset
Rx Frequency
REA=
N/A
RFQ=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
1 byte, value of 0 thru 6
3 bytes
5 bytes
9 bytes
Description of Arguments
Command or Query.
Invert Receive Data, where:
0=Normal
1=Inverted
Example: RDI=1 (selects Inverted RX Data)
Command or Query.
Rx Scrambler state, where:
0 = Off
1 = OM-73 Scrambler
2 = IESS-V.35 Scrambler
3 = Modified V.35 (Comtech EF Data Closed Network)
4 = Reed-Solomon Synchronous Scrambler
5 = IBS Overhead Synchronous Scrambler
6 = TURBO Scrambler
Depending on Modem mode, FEC type, overhead type, and RS state, not all selections will be valid.
Example: RDS=1 (OM-73 Scrambler On)
Command or Query.
Rx reacquisition time, in seconds, ranging from 0 to 999.
Example: REA=000 (selects 0 seconds)
Query only.
Unit returns the value of the measured frequency offset of the carrier being demodulated.
Values range from ± 0 to ± 30 kHz, 100 Hz resolution.
Returns 99999 if the demodulator is unlocked.
Example: RFO=+02.3 (selects + 2.3 kHz)
Command or Query.
Rx Frequency, 52 to 88 MHz, 104 to 176 MHz, and 950 to 2000 MHz.
Resolution = 100Hz.
Example: RFQ=0140.9872
REA=
REA?
REA*
REA#
N/A
RFQ=
RFQ?
RFQ*
RFQ#
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
RDI? RDI =
RDI?
RDI*
RDI#
Response to Query
RDI=x
(see Description of Arguments)
RDS=
RDS?
RDS*
RDS#
RDS? RDS=x
(see Description of Arguments)
REA?
RFO?
RFQ?
REA=xxx
(see Description of Arguments)
RFO=xxxxx
(see Description of Arguments)
RFQ=xxxx.xxxx
(see Description of Arguments)
C–18
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Parameter
Type
Rx
Reed-Solomon
Interleaver
Depth
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
RRD=
Rx Reed-
Solomon
Decoding
Rx Spreading
Equation
Rx Spreading
Factor
Rx Spectrum
Invert
RRS=
RSE=
RSF=
RSI=
Rx Signal Level N/A
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
1 byte, value of 0 to 2
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
1 byte, value of 1 thru 4
3 bytes, value of
1 thru 128
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
5 bytes
Description of Arguments
Command or Query.
Rx RS encoding, where:
0 = Interleaver Depth 4
1 = Interleaver Depth 8
2 = Interleaver Depth 16
Depending on Modem mode, overhead type, and data rate, not all selections will be valid.
Example: RRD=0 (This is a ‘don’t care’ if RS is Off under RRS)
Command or Query.
Rx RS encoding, where:
0=Off
1=On
Depending on Modem mode, not all selections will be valid.
Example: RRS=0 (RS encoding is Off)
Command or Query.
Rx Spreading Equation, where x selects Equation 1 thru 4:
Example: RSE=1 (Rx Equation #1)
Command or Query.
Rx Spreading Factor, where xxx is value from 1 to 128. Values other than 1 are only valid when Modem Type = LDPC.
Example: RSF=001 (Rx Spreading Off)
Command or Query.
Rx Spectrum Invert, where:
0=Normal
1=Rx Spectrum Invert
Example: RSI=0 (selects Normal)
Query only.
Unit returns the value of the Rx signal level in the form sxx.x, where: s = + (positive) or – (negative) sign xx.x – Rx signal level value in dBm, between +15.0 and –60.0 dBm
Examples:
RSL = +99.9 (RSL > +15.0 dBm)
RSL = +15.0
RSL = -60.0
RSL = -99.9 (RSL < -60.0 dBm)
Response to
Command
RRD =
RRD?
RRD *
RRD #
RRS=
RRS?
RRS*
RRS#
RSE=
RSE?
RSE*
RSE#
RSF=
RSF?
RSF*
RSF#
RSI=
RSI?
RSI*
RSI#
N/A
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
RRD?
RRS?
RSE?
RSF?
RSI?
RSL?
Response to Query
RRD =x
(see Description of Arguments)
RRS=x
(see Description of Arguments)
RSE=x
(See Description of Arguments)
RSF=xxx
(See Description of Arguments)
RSI=x
(see Description of Arguments)
RSL=sxx.x
(see Description of Arguments)
C–19
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
RSW= Rx Demod
Acquisition
Sweep Range
Live Rx Faults N/A
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
8 bytes
8 bytes
Description of Arguments
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
RSW? Command or Query.
Rx acquisition sweep range of demodulator, in kHz, ranging from 0 to 60 kHz.
Example: RSW=0060.000 (selects 60 kHz)
Query only.
Live Rx Faults are returned as a 32 bit Hexadecimal value. Bit values are defined as follows:
80000000 = Demodulator IF not locked
40000000 = Demodulator Data Decoder not locked
20000000 = Demodulator RF Synthesizer not locked
10000000 = Demodulator No IQ Activity
08000000 = Interface De-Multiplexers not locked
04000000 = Interface Buffer Fault
02000000 = Interface Buffer about to slip
01000000 = Interface Buffer has overflowed
00800000 = Interface Buffer has underflowed
00400000 = Interface Buffer Clock PLL not locked
00200000 = Interface Buffer Clock Reference Activity
00100000 = Interface Data/AIS
00080000 = Eb/No Threshold exceeded
00040000 = Composite Power > 40 dBc
00020000 = Composite Power > 20 dBm
00010000 = BERT Sync Loss
Example: RXF=00000000 indicates No Rx Faults
RSW=
RSW?
RSW*
RSW#
N/A RXF?
Response to Query
RSW=xxxx.xxx
(see Description of Arguments)
RXF=xxxxxxxx
(see Description of Arguments)
C–20
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
C.6.4 Modem, Unit Commands / Queries
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Buffer Fill State N/A
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
2 bytes
Clear All Stored
Events
CAE=
Clear All Stored
Statistics
CAS=
Carrier-in-
Carrier (CnC)
Frequency
Offset Range
Carrier-in-
Carrier (CnC)
Delay Monitor
Carrier-in-
Carrier (CnC)
Frequency
Offset Monitor
CCF=
N/A
N/A
None
None
6 bytes
6 bytes
6 bytes
Description of Arguments
Query only. xx = value of the buffer fill state, between 1 to 99%.
Returns 00 if demodulator is unlocked.
Example: BFS=33 (selects 33%)
Command only.
Forces the software to clear the software events log.
Note: This command takes no arguments
Example: CAE=
Command only.
Forces the software to clear the software statistics log.
Note: This command takes no arguments
Example: CAS=
Command or Query.
CnC Sweep Frequency range from 0 to 60.000 kHz
Example: CCF=60.000
Query only.
When CnC is enabled and locked, the delay of the interferer is readable in microseconds.
Example 1: CDM=229500 (229.5 mSec)
Example 2: CDM=999999 (not locked or CnC not enabled)
Query only.
When CnC is enabled and locked, the estimated frequency offset between the desired signal and the interferer is readable in kHz.
Example 1: CFM=+001.0 (1 kHz)
Example 2: CFM=9999.9 (not locked or CnC not enabled)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Response to
Command
N/A
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
BFS?
Response to Query
BFS=xx
(see Description of Arguments)
CAE=
CAE?
CAE*
CAE#
CAS=
CAS?
CAS*
CAS#
CCF=
CCF?
CCF*
CCF#
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
CCF?
CDM?
CFM?
N/A
N/A
CCF=xx.xxx
(see Description of Arguments)
CDM=xxxxxx
(see Description of Arguments)
CFM=xxxx.x
(see Description of Arguments)
C–21
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Parameter
Type
Configured
FAST Options
Circuit ID String CID=
Carrier-in-
Carrier (CnC)
Mode
Carrier Only
Test Modes
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
N/A
CNM=
COM=
Carrier-in-
Carrier (CnC)
Re-Acquisition
Time
CRA=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
16 bytes
Description of Arguments
24 bytes
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
1 byte, value of 0 thru 2
3 bytes
Command or Query.
Unit returns information concerning the Configured FAST Options, and the option field, in the form abcdefghxxxxxxxx, where: a = QOS: 0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed b = Reserved c = Spectrum Spreading d = Management Security: 0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed e = Vipersat Compatibility: 0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed f = Reserved g = Transec Data Rate Option: 0 = Base (5,000 kbps),
1 = 10,000 kbps, 2 = 20,000 kbps, 3 = 51,840 kbps,
4 = 155,520 kbps, 5 = 2,500 kbps h = Vipersat Data Rate Option: 0 = Base (5,000 kbps),
1 = 10,000 kbps, 2 = 20,000 kbps, 3 = 51,840 kbps,
4 = 155,520 kbps, 5 = 2,500 kbps i = Bridged Point to Multipoint: 0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed j = Customer Defined Options: 0-3 x = spare
Command or Query.
Sets or queries the user-defined Circuit ID string, which is a fixed length of 24 characters.
Valid characters include: Space ( ) * + – , . / 0 9 and A thru Z
Command or Query.
CnC Mode of Operation, where:
0= Off
1= On
Example: CNM=0
Command or Query.
Test Mode, where:
0= Normal Mode (no test)
1=Tx CW
2=Tx Alternating 1,0 Pattern
Example: COM=1 (CW Mode)
Command or Query.
CnC re-Acquisition time in seconds, from 10 to 999. This is the time wherein CnC will start searching for the delay and frequency offset if a long duration of unlock occurs.
Example: CRA=010
Response to
Command
N/A
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
CFO?
Response to Query
CFO=abcdefghijxx xxxx
(see Description of Arguments)
CID=
CID?
CID*
CID#
CNM=
CNM?
CNM*
CNM#
COM=
COM?
COM*
COM#
CRA=
CRA?
CRA*
CRA#
CID?
CNM?
COM?
CRA?
CID=x
(see Description of Arguments)
CNM=x
(see Description of Arguments)
COM=x
(see Description of Arguments)
CRA=xxx
(see Description of Arguments)
C–22
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Parameter
Type
Carrier-in-
Carrier (CnC)
Ratio Monitor
RTC Date
Eb/No Alarm
Point
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
N/A
Carrier-in-
Carrier (CnC)
Min/Max Search
Delay
CSD=
DAY=
EBA=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
4 bytes
6 bytes
6 bytes
4 bytes
Description of Arguments
Query only.
When CnC is enabled and locked, the ratio between the interferer and the desired signal power is readable in dB.
Example 1: CRM=+02 (interferer > desired)
Example 2: CRM=LT10 (less than -10 dB)
Example 3: CRM=GT10 (greater than +10 dB)
Example 4: CRM=99.9 (not locked or CnC not enabled)
Command or Query.
CnC min/max delay value in milliseconds, from 0 to 300 ms in the form xxxyyy, where:
xxx=min delay
yyy=max delay
Example: CSD=010300
Command or Query.
A date in the form ddmmyy, where: dd = day of the month (01 to 31), mm = month (01 to 12) yy = year (00 to 99)
Example: DAY=240457 (April 24, 2057)
Command or Query.
Eb/No alarm point in dB, with a range between 0.1 and 20 dB.
Resolution = 0.1 dB.
Example: EBA=12.3
Response to
Command
N/A
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
CRM?
Response to Query
CRM=xxxx
(see Description of Arguments)
CSD=
CSD?
CSD*
CSD#
DAY=
DAY?
DAY*
DAY#
EBA=
EBA?
EBA*
EBA#
CSD?
DAY?
EBA?
CSD=xxxyyy
(see Description of Arguments)
DAY=ddmmyy
(see Description of Arguments)
EBA=xx.x
(see Description of Arguments)
C–23
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Parameter
Type
Equipment ID
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
N/A
Initialize Events
Pointer
IEP=
Software Image IMG=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
17 bytes
None
1 bytes, value of
1 or 2
Description of Arguments
Response to
Command
N/A
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
EID? Query only.
Unit returns information concerning the equipment identification, and the option field, in the form aaaabcdefghijklmx where: aaaa = defines the modem model number (565A = SLM-5650 in this case) b = Advanced FEC: 0 = None, 1 = TPC, 2 = TPC + LDPC c = Advanced FEC Data Rate: 0 = Base (5,000 kbps),
1 = 10,000 kbps, 2 = 20,000 kbps, 3 = 51,840 kbps, 4 = 155,520 kbps,
5 = 2,500 kbps d = Option Card: 0 = None, 1 = G.703, 2 = GigaBit Ethernet,
4 = Network Processor, 5 = LVDS e = Data Rate (Asymmetric Tx) Option: 0 = Base (5,000 kbps),
1 = 10,000 kbps, 2 = 20,000 kbps, 3 = 51,840 kbps,
4 = 155,520 kbps, 5 = 2,500 kbps f = Higher-order modulation: 0 = None, 1 = 8PSK, 2 = 8PSK and 16QAM,
3 = 8PSK+16QAM and 16APSK/32APSK g = Reed-Solomon Codec Option: 0 = None, 1 = Installed h = Transec Module: 0 = None, 1 = FEC2 Card and Transec Module Installed,
2 = FEC2 Card Installed (No Transec) i = AUPC Option: 0 = None, 1 = Installed j = ASYNC Engineering Service Channel: 0 = None, 1 = Installed k = Demod Only l = CnC Data Rate: 0 = None, 1 = up to 512 kbps, 2 = up to 1 Mbps,
3 = up to 2.5 Mbps, 4 = up to 5 Mbps, 5 = up to 10 Mbps, 6 = up to 15 Mbps,
7 = up to 20 Mbps, 8 = up to 25 Mbps, 9 = up to 30 Mbps, A = up to 40 Mbps,
B = up to 51.840 Mbps, C = up to 70 Mbps m = Sequential Encoding/Decoding Option: 0 = None, 1 = Installed x = Asymmetric Rx Data Rate: 0 = None, 1 = 10,000 kbps, 2 = 20,000 kbps,
3 = 51,840 kbps, 4 = 155,520 kbps, 5 = 2,500 kbps
Example: EID=565A0000000000000 indicates SLM-5650A with no options installed
Command only.
Resets internal pointer to allow RNE? queries to start at the beginning of the stored events log.
Command or Query.
Next Reboot Image, where:
1 = Bulk Image #1
2 = Bulk Image #2
Example: IMG=1 (Image #1 will be active after next reboot)
IEP=
IEP#
IMG=
IMG?
IMG*
IMG#
N/A
IMG?
Response to Query
EID=aaaabcdefghi jklmx
(see Description of Arguments)
N/A
IMG=x
(see Description of Arguments)
C–24
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Parameter
Type
IP Address
Local/Remote
Status
Modem
Reference
Clock
Modem Alarm
Mask
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
IPA=
Initialize
Statistics
Pointer
LoopBack Test
Modes
ISP=
LOP=
LRS=
MRC=
MSK=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
18 bytes, numerical
None
1 byte, value of 0 thru 2
1 byte, value of
0, 1, or 3
1 byte, value of 0 thru 3
6 bytes
Description of Arguments
Command or Query.
Used to set the IP address and network prefix for the 10/100 BaseTx Ethernet management port, in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.yy, where: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address, and yy is the network prefix (0-31)
Example: 010.006.030.001.24
Command only.
Resets internal pointer to allow RNS? queries to start at the beginning of the stored statistics log.
Command or Query.
Loopback Test Modes, where:
0=Normal Mode (no test)
1=IF Loopback
2=I/O Loopback #1
Example: LOP=1 (IF Loopback)
Command or Query.
Local/Remote status, where:
0=Local
1=Serial Remote Control
3=Serial + Ethernet Remote Control
Example: LRS=1 (selects Serial Remote)
Command or Query.
Modem Reference Clock (for Frequency Accuracy), where:
0=Internal
1=External 1 MHz
2=External 5 MHz
3=External 10 MHz
Command or Query.
Alarm mask conditions, in the form abcdef, where: a=spare ( must be set to 0 ) b=spare ( must be set to 0 ) c=spare ( must be set to 0 ) d=spare ( must be set to 0 ) e=Demod Faults (0 = unmasked, 1 = masked ) f=Eb/No Threshold Alarm (0 = unmasked, 1 = masked)
Example: MSK=000001
LOP=
LOP?
LOP*
LOP#
LRS=
LRS?
LRS*
LRS#
MRC=
MRC?
MRC*
MRC#
MSK=
MSK?
MSK*
MSK#
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
IPA? IPA=
IPA?
IPA*
IPA#
ISP=
ISP#
N/A
LOP?
LRS?
MRC?
MSK?
Response to Query
IPA= xx.xxx.xxx.xxx.yy
(see Description of Arguments)
N/A
LOP=x
(see Description of Arguments)
LRS=x
(see Description of Arguments)
MRC=x
(see Description of Arguments)
MSK=abcdef
(see Description of Arguments)
C–25
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Live Unit Faults N/A
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
8 bytes
Number of
Unread stored
Events
N/A
Number of
Unread stored
Statistics
N/A
3 bytes
3 bytes
Description of Arguments
Query only.
Live Unit Faults are returned as a 32 bit Hexadecimal value. Bit values are defined as follows:
80000000 = +5.0V Power
40000000 = +3.3V Power
20000000 = +2.5V Power
10000000 = +1.5V Power
08000000 = +12V Power
04000000 = -12V Power
02000000 = +18V Power
01000000 = Cooling Fan
00800000 = Ext Reference Activity
00400000 = 192 MHz Clock not locked
00200000 = 10 MHz Ref Clock not locked
00100000 = M&C FPGA not loaded
00080000 = Mod FPGA not loaded
00040000 = Demod FPGA not loaded
00020000 = Decoder FPGA not loaded
00010000 = Tx Interface FPGA not loaded
00008000 = Rx Interface FPGA not loaded
00004000 = FEC #1 FPGA not loaded
00002000 = FEC #2 FPGA not loaded
00001000 = Option Card FPGA not loaded
00000800 = FPGA DCM not locked
00000400 = NP Card Mailbox Comm Error
00000200 = FIPS Card Mailbox Comm Error
Example: LUF=00000000 indicates No Unit Faults
Query only.
Unit returns the Number of stored Events, which remain Unread, in the form xxx.
Note: This means unread over the remote control.
Example: NUE=126
Query only.
Unit returns the Number of stored Statistics, which remain Unread, in the form xxx.
Note: This means unread over the remote control.
Example: NUS=126
N/A
N/A
Response to
Command
N/A
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
LUF?
NUE?
NUS?
Response to Query
LUF=xxxxxxxx
(see Description of Arguments)
NUE=xxx
(see Description of Arguments)
NUS=xxx
(see Description of Arguments)
C–26
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Parameter
Type
BERT Pattern
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
PAT=
Retrieve next 5 unread Stored
Events
N/A
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
1 byte, value of 0 thru 8
110 bytes
Description of Arguments
Command or Query.
BERT Pattern, where:
0=2047
1=Mark
2=Space
3=1:1
4=1:2
5=2^15-1
6=2^20-1
7=2^23-1
8=MIL-188
Example: PAT=0 (2047 Pattern)
Query only.
Unit returns the oldest 5 Stored Events which have not yet been read over the remote control.
Reply format: {CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Subbody, where Sub-body= Axxxxxxxxddmmyyhhmmss, A being the fault type where:
1=Unit
2=Rx Traffic
3=Tx Traffic
4=Info xxxxxxxx is the Fault Code number, as in LUF?, TXF?, RXF?, or Info Code, which is:
00000000=Power Off
00000001=Power On
00000002=Log Cleared
00000004=Global Config Change
00000005=NP Card Watch Dog Timer
00000006=NP Card Boot Timeout
00000007=Transec Card Boot Timeout
If there are less than 5 events to be retrieved, the remaining positions are padded with zeros.
If there are no new events, the response is RNE*.
N/A
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
PAT? PAT=
PAT?
PAT*
PAT#
RNE?
Response to Query
PAT=x
(see Description of Arguments)
RNE={CR}Axxxxx xxxddmmyyhhmm ss{CR}Axxxxxxxx ddmmyyhhmmss{
CR}Axxxxxxxxdd mmyyhhmmss{CR
}Axxxxxxxxddmm yyhhmmss{CR}Ax xxxxxxxddmmyyh hmmss
(see Description of Arguments)
C–27
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Parameter
Type
Retrieve next 5 unread Stored
Statistics
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
N/A
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
105 bytes
Serial Number N/A
Statistics
Sample Interval
SSI=
Software
Revision
RTC Time
Temperature
N/A
TIM=
N/A
9 bytes
1 byte
43 bytes
6 bytes
3 bytes
Description of Arguments
Query only.
Unit returns the oldest 5 Stored Statistics which have not yet been read over the remote control.
Reply format: {CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Subbody, where Sub-body= AA.ABB.Bddmmyyhhmmss,
AA.A = Minimum Eb/No during sample period. “Loss” is displayed if carrier was lost during the sample period.
BB.B = Average Eb/No during sample period. “Loss” is displayed if carrier was lost during the entire sample period.
If there are less than 5 events to be retrieved, the remaining positions are padded with zeros.
If there are no new events, the response is RNS*.
Query only.
Used to query the unit 9-digit serial number. Unit returns its S/N in the form xxxxxxxxx.
Example: SNO=176500143
Command or Query.
Used to set the sample interval for the Statistics Logging Function.
SSI=x, where x = 0 to 9 in 10 minute steps.
Note: Setting this parameter to 0 disables the statistics logging function.
Example: SSI=3 sets the logging inverval to 30 minutes
Query only.
Unit returns the value of the internal software revision installed in the unit, in the form:
Boot:xx.yy.zz Bulk1:xx.yy.zz Bulk2:xx.yy.zz
Example: SWR=Boot:01.01.01 Bulk1:01.01.01 Bulk2:01.01.01
Command or Query.
A time in the form hhmmss, indicating the time from midnight, where: hh = hours (00 to 23) mm = minutes (00 to 59) ss = seconds (00 to 59)
Example: TIM=231259 (23 hours:12 minutes:59 seconds)
Query only.
Unit returns the value of the internal temperature, in the form of xxx (degrees C).
Example: TMP=+26
SSI=
SSI?
SSI*
SSI#
N/A
TIM=
TIM?
TIM*
TIM#
N/A
Response to
Command
N/A
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
RNS?
N/A SNO?
Response to Query
RNS={CR}AA.AB
B.Bddmmyyhhmm
ss{CR}AA.ABB.Bd
dmmyyhhmmss{C
R}AA.ABB.Bddm
myyhhmmss{CR}
AA.ABB.Bddmmy
yhhmmss{CR}AA.
ABB.Bddmmyyhh
mmss
(see Description for Arguments)
SNO=xxxxxxxxx
(see Description of Arguments)
SSI?
SWR?
TIM?
TMP?
SSI=x
(see Description of Arguments)
SWR=Boot:xx.yy.
zz Bulk1:xx.yy.zz
Bulk2:xx.yy.zz
(see Description of Arguments)
TIM=hhmmss
(see Description of Arguments)
TMP=xxx
(see Description of Arguments)
C–28
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
C.6.5 Bulk Configuration Commands / Queries
Parameter
Type
Configuration
Load
Configuration
Save
Global
Configuration
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
CLD=
CST=
MGC=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
1 byte
1 byte
Command can be 177 bytes or
217 bytes,
Query
Response is always 217 bytes
Description of Arguments
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Command only.
Causes the modem to retrieve a previously stored configuration from Configuration Memory location defined by the one-byte argument (0 to 9).
Example: CLD=4 (retrieve modem configuration from location 4)
Command only.
CLD=
CLD?
CLD*
CLD#
N/A
Command causes the modem to store the current configuration in
Configuration Memory location defined by the one-byte argument
(0 to 9).
CST=
CST?
CST*
CST#
N/A
Example: CST=4 (store the current configuration in location 4)
Command or Query.
Global Configuration of SLM-5650A, in the form: abcdeeeeeefghijabbbbbbklmnoooooo.ooopppp.ppppqcrestuvwxyyy.y
zABCDEFGHHff.fffIJKLLLLLL.LLLMMMM.MMMMNgggPQRSTUVW
XYZZZZ.ZZZAAABCDDDDDDDDEE.EFGHIJKLMNNN.NOOO.OPP
P.PQQ.QR.RSTUVWXXYZZhhhijjjk
llllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll where:
MGC=
MGC?
MGC*
MGC#
MGC? a = Modem Operating Mode b = Modem RF Band c = Modem Interface Type d = Modem Reference Clock eeeeee = Modem Alarm Mask f = Carrier Only Test Modes g = Loopback Test Modes h = Tx BERT State i = Rx BERT State j = BERT Pattern a = CnC Mode bbbbb = CnC Mode k = expansion byte same as CNM same as CSD l = Tx FEC Type m = Tx Modulation Type n = Tx Code Rate oooooo.ooo = Tx Data Rate pppp.pppp = Tx Frequency q = Tx Overhead Type c = NP Bridge Mode r = expansion byte e = NP Secure Mode same as TDR same as TFQ same as TFM same as GBM same as MIS
N/A
N/A
Response to Query
MGC=abcdeeeeeefghijab bbbbbklmnoooooo.oooppp
p.ppppqcrestuvwxyyy.yzA
BCDEFGHHff.fffIJKLLLLL
L.LLLMMMM.MMMMNggg
PQRSTUVWXYZZZZ.ZZZ
AAABCDDDDDDDDEE.E
FGHIJKLMNNN.NOOO.O
PPP.PQQ.QR.RSTUVWX
XYZZhhhijjjk llllllllllllllllllllllllllll llll
(see Description of
Arguments)
C–29
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Description of Arguments s = Tx Reed-Solomon state t = Tx Reed-Solomon code word u = Tx Reed-Solomon interleaver depth v = Tx Spectrum Invert w = Tx Scrambler x = Tx Differential Encoder yyy.y = Tx Power Level z = Tx Clock Source
A = Tx SCT Reference
B = Tx Clock Invert
C = Tx Data Invert
D = Tx Data Fault
E = Tx BPSK Data Ordering
F = Tx Carrier State
HH = expansion bytes ff.fff = CnC Freq Offset Range
I = Rx FEC Type
J = Rx Modulation Type
K = Rx Code Rate
LLLLLL.LLL = Rx Data Rate
MMMM.MMMM = Rx Frequency
N = Rx Overhead Type same as TRS same as TCW same as TRD same as TSI same as TSC same as TDE same as TPL same as TCK same as SCT same as TCI same as TDI same as TDF same as TBO same as TXO same as CCF same as RFT same as RMD same as RCR same as RDR same as RFQ same as RFM same as CRA same as RRS same as RCW same as RRD same as RSI same as RDS same as RDD same as RCI same as RDI same as RDF
Y = Rx BPSK Data Ordering
ZZZZ.ZZZ = Rx Demod Acq Sweep Range
AAA = Rx Reacquisition Time
B = Rx Clock Source
C = Rx Buffer Programming Mode
DDDDDDDD = Rx Buffer Size
EE.E = Eb/No Alarm Point
F = Statistics Sample Interval
GGGGGG = expansion bytes same as RBO same as RSW same as REA same as RCK same as RBM same as RBS same as EBA same as SSI
M = AUPC Local Enable same as ANP
C–30
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Response to Query
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Description of Arguments
OOO.O = AUPC Maximum Power Level
PPP.P
= AUPC Minimum Power Level
QQ.Q = AUPC Eb/No Target Level
R.R = AUPC Max Tracking Rate
S = AUPC Local Carrier Loss Action
T = AUPC Local Carrier Loss Action
U = AUPC Log Sample Interval
V = AUPC ESC Type
W = AUPC ESC Tx Baud Rate
XX = AUPC ESC Tx Format
Y = AUPC ESC Rx Baud Rate
ZZ = AUPC ESC Rx Format hhh = Tx Spread Factor i = Tx Spread Equation jjj= Rx Spread Factor k = Rx Spread Equation llllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll = expansion bytes same as AMX same as AMN same as AET same as AMT same as LCL same as RCL same as ASI same as ACT same as ATB same as ATF same as ARB same as ARF same as TSF same as TSE same as RSF same as RSE
Fill unused expansion bytes with ‘x’
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Response to Query
C–31
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
C.6.6 Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC) Commands / Queries
The instruction codes that follow are valid only when the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem type has been set to AUPC .
Note: Always wait three (3) seconds between consecutive remote modem command/query polls. If Local AUPC is not enabled, queries will return the last known condition. A request for status from the remote modem will then be transmitted, ensuring that the next query will return current status.
Parameter
Type
ASYNC ESC
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
ACT=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
1 byte
Description of Arguments
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
ACT? ACT=
ACT?
ACT*
ACT#
Response to Query
ACT=x
(see Description of Arguments)
AUPC Eb/N0
Target Set Point
AET=
AUPC Minimum
Power Level
AMN=
AUPC
Maximum
Tracking Rate
AUPC
Maximum
Power Level
AUPC Nominal
Power Level
AMT=
AMX=
ANP=
4 bytes
5 bytes
3 bytes
5 bytes
5 bytes
Command or Query.
ASYNC ESC Type, where:
0=RS-232
1=RS-485 2-Wire
2=RS-485 4-Wire
Example: ACT=0 (sets the ASYNC ESC to RS-232)
Command or Query.
AUPC Eb/N0 Target, where: xx.x = AUPC Eb/N0 Target, 3.2 to 16.0 dB.
Example: AET=13.4
Command or Query.
Minimum Tx Output power level, where: s=sign ( + / – ) xx.x = Tx Output power level, +10.0 and –40.0 dBm.
Example: AMN = –13.4
Command or Query.
AUPC Maximum Tracking Rate, where: x.x = Maximum Tracking Rate, 0.5 to 6.0 dBm/minute in increments of .5.
Example: AMT=0.5
Command or Query.
Maximum Tx Output power level, where: s=sign ( + / - ) xx.x = Tx Output power level, +10.0 and –40.0 dBm.
Example: AMX=-13.4
Command or Query.
Nominal Tx Output power level, where: s=sign ( + / - ) xx.x = Tx Output power level, +10.0 and –40.0 dBm.
Example: ANP=-13.4
AET=
AET?
AET*
AET#
AMN=
AMN?
AMN*
AMN#
AMT=
AMT?
AMT*
AMT#
AMX=
AMX?
AMX*
AMX#
ANP=
ANP?
ANP*
ANP#
AET?
AMN?
AMT?
AMX?
ANP?
AET=xx.x
(see Description of Arguments)
AMN=sxx.x
(see Description of Arguments)
AMT=x.x
(see Description of Arguments)
AMX=sxx.x
(see Description of Arguments)
ANP=sxx.x
(see Description of Arguments)
C–32
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Parameter
Type
ASYNC ESC
Rx Baud Rate
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
ARB=
ASYNC ESC
Rx Format
ARF=
AUPC Log
Sample Interval
ASI=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
1 byte
2 bytes
1 byte
Description of Arguments
Command or Query.
Baud Rate, where:
0=110
1=150
2=300
3=600
4=1200
5=2400
6=4800
7=9600
8=19200
9=38400
Example: ARB=0 (sets the ASYNC ESC Rx Baud Rate to 110 Baud)
Command or Query.
Async Format, where:
00=7 Bits, No Parity, 1 Stop Bit
01=7 Bits, Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit
02=7 Bits, Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit
03=7 Bits, No Parity, 2 Stop Bits
04=7 Bits, Even Parity, 2 Stop Bits
05=7 Bits, Odd Parity, 2 Stop Bits
06=8 Bits, No Parity, 1 Stop Bit
07=8 Bits, Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit
08=8 Bits, Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit
09=8 Bits, No Parity, 2 Stop Bits
10=8 Bits, Even Parity, 2 Stop Bits
11=8 Bits, Odd Parity, 2 Stop Bits
Example: ARF=0 (sets the ASYNC ESC Rx Format to 7N1)
Command or Query.
Used to set the sample interval for the AUPC Logging Function in the form x, where: x = 0 to 9 in 10 minute steps.
Note: Setting this parameter to 0 disables the logging function.
Example: ASI=3 (sets the logging inverval to 30 minutes)
ARF=
ARF?
ARF*
ARF#
ASI=
ASI?
ASI*
ASI#
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
ARB? ARB=
ARB?
ARB*
ARB#
ARF?
ASI?
Response to Query
ARB=x
(see Description of Arguments)
ARF=xx
(see Description of Arguments)
ASI=x
(see Description of Arguments)
C–33
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Parameter
Type
ASYNC ESC Tx
Baud Rate
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
ATB=
ASYNC ESC Tx
Format
ATF=
Clear All AUPC
Log Entries
CAA=
Initialize AUPC
Log Pointer
IAP=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
1 byte
2 bytes
None
None
Description of Arguments
Command or Query.
Baud Rate, where:
0=110
1=150
2=300
3=600
4=1200
5=2400
6=4800
7=9600
8=19200
9=38400
Example: ATB=0 (sets the ASYNC ESC Tx Baud Rate to 110 Baud)
Command or Query.
Async Format, where:
00=7 Bits, No Parity, 1 Stop Bit
01=7 Bits, Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit
02=7 Bits, Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit
03=7 Bits, No Parity, 2 Stop Bits
04=7 Bits, Even Parity, 2 Stop Bits
05=7 Bits, Odd Parity, 2 Stop Bits
06=8 Bits, No Parity, 1 Stop Bit
07=8 Bits, Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit
08=8 Bits, Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit
09=8 Bits, No Parity, 2 Stop Bits
10=8 Bits, Even Parity, 2 Stop Bits
11=8 Bits, Odd Parity, 2 Stop Bits
Example: ATF=00 (sets the ASYNC ESC Tx Format to 7N1)
Command only.
Forces the software to clear the software AUPC log.
Note: This command takes no arguments.
Example: AAS=
Command only.
Resets internal pointer to allow RNA? queries to start at the beginning of the stored statistics log.
Response to
Command
ATB=
ATB?
ATB*
ATB#
ATF=
ATF?
ATF*
ATF#
CAA=
CAA?
CAA*
CAA#
IAP=
IAP#
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
ATB?
ATF?
N/A
N/A
Response to Query
ATB=x
(see Description of Arguments)
ATF=xx
(see Description of Arguments)
N/A
N/A
C–34
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Parameter
Type
AUPC Local
Carrier Loss
Action
AUPC Local
Enable
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
LCL=
LPC=
Number of
Unread AUPC
Log Entries
N/A
Retrieve next 5 unread AUPC
Log Entries
N/A
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
1 byte, values of 0 thru 2
1 byte, value of
0 or 1
3 bytes
155 bytes
Description of Arguments
Command or Query.
Tx Output Power level setting when local carrier is lost, where:
0=Hold current output power level
1=Goto Nominal output power level
2=Goto Maximum output power level
Example: LCL=0
Command or Query.
Local AUPC Control, where:
0=Off
1=On
Note: When Local AUPC Control is enabled, modulator output power is automatically controlled by the modem. Power output commands via TPL are not allowed during this mode; although, queries will function as normal.
Example: LPC=1 (Turn on Local AUPC Control)
Query only.
Unit returns the Number of AUPC Log Entries, which remain Unread, in the form xxx.
Note: This means unread over the remote control.
Example: NUS=126
Query only.
Unit returns the oldest 5 AUPC Log Entries which have not yet been read over the remote control.
Reply format: {CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR} Sub-body{CR}Subbody, where Sub-body= AA.ABB.BCCC.CEEE.Eddmmyyhhmmss:
AA.A = Minimum Eb/No during sample period.
BB.B = Average Eb/No during sample period.
CCC.C = Max Output Power during sample period.
EEE.E = Average Output Power during sample period.
If there are less than 5 events to be retrieved, the remaining positions are padded with zeros. If there are no new events, the response is RNA*.
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
LCL? LCL=
LCL?
LCL*
LCL#
Response to Query
LCL=x
(see Description of Arguments)
LPC=
LPC?
LPC*
LPC#
N/A
N/A
LPC?
NUA?
RNA?
LPC=x
(see Description of Arguments)
NUA=xxx
(see Description of Arguments)
RNA=
{CR}AA.ABB.BCC
C.CEEE.Eddmmy
yhhmmss{CR}AA.
ABB.BCCC.CEEE
.Eddmmyyhhmms
s{CR}AA.ABB.BC
CC.CEEE.Eddm
myyhhmmss{CR}
AA.ABB.BCCC.C
EEE.Eddmmyyhh
mmss{CR}AA.AB
B.BCCC.CEEE.E
ddmmyyhhmmss
(see Description of Arguments)
C–35
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Parameter
Type
AUPC Remote
Carrier Loss
Action
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
RCL=
Remote Modem
Pattern
Substitution
RPB=
Remote Modem
AUPC Enable
RPC=
Remote Modem
BERT BER
N/A
Remote Modem
I/O Loopback
RPL=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
1 byte, values of 0 thru 2
1 byte, values of 0 or 1
1 byte, values of 0 or 1
6 bytes
1 byte, values of 0 or 1
Description of Arguments
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
RCL? Command or Query.
Tx Output Power level setting when remote carrier is lost, where:
0=Hold current output power level
1=Goto Nominal output power level
2=Goto Maximum output power level
Example: RCL=0
Command or Query.
Remote Modem Tx Pattern Substitution, where:
0=Off
1=On
Note: For compatibility reasons, only the 2047 Tx pattern can be turned On or Off at the remote modem.
Example: RPB=1 (Turn on remote modem AUPC Control)
Command or Query.
Remote Modem AUPC Control, where:
0=Off
1=On
Example: RPC=1 (Turn on remote modem AUPC Control)
Query only.
Unit returns the value of the remote modem’s BERT BER in the form a.b x 10 three bytes are the value. Last two bytes are the exponent. Returns 0.0E00 if the
BERT is not synchronized to a pattern.
-c . First
Example: RPE=4.0E06
Command or Query.
Remote Modem I/O Loopback Mode, where:
0=Off
1=On
Example: RPL=1 (Turn on remote modem AUPC Control)
RCL=
RCL?
RCL*
RCL#
RPB=
RPB?
RPB*
RPB#
RPC=
RPC?
RPC*
RPC#
N/A
RPL=
RPL?
RPL*
RPL#
RPB?
RPC?
RPE?
RPL?
Response to Query
RCL=x
(see Description of Arguments)
RPB=x
(see Description of Arguments)
RPC=x
(see Description of Arguments)
RPE=a.bEcc
(see Description of Arguments)
RPL=x
(see Description of Arguments)
C–36
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
C.6.7 G.703 Interface Commands / Queries
The instruction codes that follow are valid only when the optional G.703 interface module is installed in the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem.
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Description of Arguments
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
Receive E1
Framing
Receive E2
Framing
External Buffer
Clock
Reference
Rx Ternary
Code
E1F=
E2F=
ERF=
RTC=
1 byte, value of
0 or 1
1 byte, value of
0, 1, 2, or 4
1 byte, value of
0 thru 3
1 byte, value of
0 thru 3
Command or Query.
Receive T1 Framing, where:
0=None
1=G.704
Note: Commands as well as queries are not allowed when either the GigaBit
Ethernet or NP card has been selected as the current interface type.
Example: E1F=0
Command or Query.
Receive E2 Framing, where:
0=None
1=G.704
2=G.742
4=G.745
Note: Commands as well as queries are not allowed when either the GigaBit
Ethernet or NP card has been selected as the current interface type.
Example: E2F=0
Command or Query.
External Buffer Clock Reference, where:
0=External Clock equals Rx Data Rate
1=5 MHz External Clock
2=10 MHz External Clock
3=20 MHz External Clock
Example: ERF=0
Command or Query.
Rx Ternary Code, where:
0=AMI
1=B8ZS
2=B6ZS
3=HDB3
Example: RTC=3 (Set Rx Ternary Code to HDB3)
E1F=
E1F?
E1F*
E1F#
E2F=
E2F?
E2F*
E2F#
ERF=
ERF?
ERF*
ERF#
RTC=
RTC?
RTC*
RTC#
E1F?
E2F?
ERF?
RTC?
E1F=x
(see Description of Arguments)
E2F=x
(see Description of Arguments)
ERF=x
(see Description of Arguments)
RTC=x
(see Description of Arguments)
C–37
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Receive T1
Framing
Receive T2
Framing
Tx Ternary
Code
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
T1F=
T2F=
TTC=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
1 byte, value of
0 or 1
1 byte, value of
0, 1, 3, or 5
1 byte, value of
0 thru 3
Description of Arguments
Command or Query.
Receive T1 Framing, where:
0=None
1=G.704
Note: Commands as well as queries are not allowed when either the GigaBit
Ethernet or NP card has been selected as the current interface type.
Example: T1F=0
Command or Query.
Receive T2 Framing, where:
0=None
1=G.704
3=G.743
5=G.747
Note: Commands as well as queries are not allowed when either the GigaBit
Ethernet or NP card has been selected as the current interface type.
Example: T2F=0
Command or Query.
Tx Ternary Code, where:
0=AMI
1=B8ZS
2=B6ZS
3=HDB3
Example: TTC=3 (Set Tx Ternary Code to HDB3)
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
T1F? T1F=
T1F?
T1F*
T1F#
Response to Query
T1F=x
(see Description of Arguments)
T2F=
T2F?
T2F*
T2F#
TTC=
TTC?
TTC*
TTC#
T2F?
TTC?
T2F=x
(see Description of Arguments)
TTC=x
(see Description of Arguments)
C–38
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
C.6.8 Gigabit Ethernet Interface Commands / Queries
The instruction codes that follow are valid only when the optional 10/100/1000 BaseT Gigabit Ethernet Interface Module is installed in the
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem.
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Description of Arguments
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
GigaBit
Ethernet
Interface
Management IP
Address and
Range
GIP= 18 bytes Command or Query.
Used to set the IP address and network prefix for the GigaBit Ethernet Interface
Management port, in the form aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd.ee, where: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd = IP address, and ee = network prefix (0-31)
Example: 010.006.030.001.24
N/A GIP?
Response to Query
GIP=aaa.bbb.ccc.
ddd.ee
(see Description of Arguments)
C–39
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
C.6.9 Network Processor (NP) Interface Commands / Queries
The instruction codes that follow are valid only when the optional Network Processor (NP) Interface Module is installed in the SLM-5650A Satellite
Modem.
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Description of Arguments
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
Router Ethernet
Interface Traffic
IP Address and
Range
Router Working
Mode
Router Ethernet
Interface
Management IP
Address and
Range
Modem IP
Interface
Security Mode
Router IP
Address Mode
BRT=
GBM=
MIP=
MIS=
RIM=
1 byte, value of
0 or 1
1 byte
18 bytes
1 byte, value of
0 or 1
1 byte, value of
0 or 1
Command or Query.
Used to set the NP card’s Bridged Point to Multipoint mode, where:
0 = Off
1 = On
Example: BRT=0
Command or Query.
Used to set the NP Card’s Working Mode where:
1 = Vipersat Hub
2 = Vipersat Hub Expansion
3 = Vipersat Remote
4 = Vipersat Remote Expansion
5 = Multipoint Hub
6 = Multipoint Remote
7 = Point to Point
8 = GigaBit Bridge
Example: GBM=7
Command or Query.
Used to set the IP address and network prefix for the
NP Interface Management port, in the form aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd.ee, where: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd = IP address, and ee = network prefix (0-31)
Example: MIP=010.006.030.001.24
Command or Query.
Used to set the modem IP Interface security level where:
0 = Normal or Low Level Security, and
1 = High Level Security
Example: MIS=0
Command or Query.
Used to set the NP Card’s IP address mode where:
0 = Single IP Address, and
1 = Dual IP Address
Example: RIM=0
BRT=
BRT?
BRT*
BRT#
GBM=
GBM?
GBM*
GBM#
MIP=
MIP?
MIP*
MIP#
MIS=
MIS?
MIS*
MIS#
RIM=
RIM?
RIM*
RIM#
BRT?
GBM?
MIP?
MIS?
RIM?
BRT=a
(see Description of Arguments)
GBM=a
(see Description of Arguments)
MIP=aaa.bbb.ccc
.ddd.ee
(see Description of Arguments)
MIS=a
(see Description of Arguments)
RIM=a
(see Description of Arguments)
C–40
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Parameter
Type
Router Ethernet
Interface Traffic
IP Address and
Range
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
RI7P=
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
18 bytes
Description of Arguments
Command or Query.
Used to set the IP address and network prefix for the
NP Interface Traffic port, in the form aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd.ee, where: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd = IP address, and ee = network prefix (0-31)
Example: RIP=010.006.030.001.24
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
RIP? RIP=
RIP?
RIP*
RIP#
Response to Query
RIP=aaa.bbb.ccc.
ddd.ee
(see Description of Arguments)
C–41
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
C.6.10 TRANSEC Interface Commands / Queries
The instruction codes that follow are valid only when the optional TRANSEC Interface Module is installed in the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem.
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for
Command or
Response to
Query
Description of Arguments
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
Transec
Ethernet
Interface
Gateway IP
Address
Transec
Ethernet
Interface
Management IP
Address and
Range
SMG=
SMI=
15 bytes
18 bytes
Command or Query.
Used to set the Gateway IP address for the Transec Management port in the form aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, where: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd = IP address
Example: 010.006.030.001
Command or Query.
Used to set the IP address and network prefix for the Transec Management port in the form aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd.ee, where: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd = IP address, and ee = network prefix (0-31)
Example: 010.006.030.001.24
N/A
N/A
SMG?
SMI?
SMG=aaa.bbb.cc
c.ddd
(see Description of Arguments)
SMI=aaa.bbb.ccc
.ddd.ee
(see Description of Arguments)
C–42
Appendix D. MODEM OPTIONS
D.1 Forward Error Correction Options
As standard, the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem is equipped with three F orward E rror C orrection
( FEC ) encoders/decoders: Viterbi, concatenated Reed-Solomon, and Trellis (available with the
8PSK FAST option). The constraint lengths and encoding polynomials are not only Open
Network compatible, but are also Closed Network compatible with the vast majority of existing modems from other manufacturers. The SLM-5650A also provides the capability to disable all
FEC, allowing the modem to run uncoded.
Turbo Coding represents a very significant development in the area of FEC and, optionally, the
SLM-5650A may be fitted with T urbo P roduct C oding ( TPC ) and L owD ensity P arity C heck
( LDPC ) coding.
There are six speed grades of these Advanced FECs; the data rate limits are as follows:
Low Rate 64 kbps to 2.5 Mbps
64 kbps to 5 Mbps
64 kbps to 10 Mbps
64 kbps to 20 Mbps
High Rate 64 kbps to 51.84 Mbps
64 kbps to 155.52 Mbps ( TPC only)
D–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
D.2 Viterbi
The combination of convolutional coding and Viterbi decoding has become an almost universal standard for satellite communications. The SLM-5650A complies with the Intelsat IESS 308 and
309 standards for Viterbi decoding, and has a short constraint length – defined as the number of output symbols from the encoder that are affected by a single input bit – fixed at seven for all code rates.
This constraint length of seven is a de facto standard, which facilitates the SLM-5650A’s interoperability with other manufacturer’s equipment. It provides very useful levels of coding gain, and its short decoding delay and error-burst characteristics make it particularly suitable for low data rate coded voice applications.
A major advantage of the Viterbi decoding method is that the performance is independent of data rate, and does not display a pronounced threshold effect (i.e., does not fail rapidly below a certain value of Eb/No). Note that in BPSK mode, the SLM-5650A permits code rates of 1/2, 3/4, and
7/8.
By choosing various coding rates (Rate 1/2, 3/4 or 7/8) the user can trade off coding gain for bandwidth expansion:
Rate 1/2 coding gives the best improvement in error rate, but doubles the transmitted data rate, and hence doubles the occupied bandwidth of the signal.
Rate 7/8 coding, at the other extreme, provides the most modest improvement in performance, but only expands the transmitted bandwidth by 14 %.
Because the method of convolutional coding used with Viterbi, the encoder does not preserve the original data intact, and is called non-systematic .
Table D-1. Viterbi Decoding Summary
AGAINST
Higher coding gain possible with other methods
FOR
Good BER performance - very useful coding gain.
Almost universally used, with de facto standards for constraint length and coding polynomials
Shortest decoding delay (~100 bits) of any FEC scheme - good for coded voice, VOIP, etc
Short constraint length produce small error bursts; good for coded voice.
No pronounced threshold effect - fails gracefully.
Coding gain independent of data rate.
D–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
D.3 Reed-Solomon Outer Codec
The concatenation of an outer R eedS olomon ( R-S ) Codec with a Viterbi decoder first became popular in the early 1990s as a means to permit significant improvements in error performance without significant bandwidth expansion.
The coding overhead added by the R-S outer Codec is typically around 10%, which translates to a
0.4 dB power penalty for a given link. Reed-Solomon codes are block codes (as opposed to
Viterbi and Sequential, which are convolutional) and, in order to be processed correctly, the data must be framed and de-framed. Additionally, R-S codes are limited in how well they can correct errors that occur in bursts. This, unfortunately, is the nature of the uncorrected errors from Viterbi decoders, which produce clusters of errors that are multiples of half the constraint length. For this reason, the data must be interleaved following R-S encoding, and then de-interleaved prior to decoding. This ensures that a single burst of errors leaving the Viterbi decoder is spread out over a number of interleaving frames, so errors entering the R-S decoder do not exceed its capacity to correct those errors.
D–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
D.4 Closed Network Modes
A 225,205 or 220,200 code is used in closed network mode. For a rate of 225,205 data is put into blocks of 225 bytes, of which 205 bytes are data, and 20 bytes are FEC overhead. The code was chosen because it is compatible with legacy Comtech EF Data modems.
For closed network Viterbi Reed Solomon, an interleaver depth of four or eight is used. The increase in coding gain is at the expense of delay. The interleaving/de-interleaving delay and the delay through the decoder itself can be as high as 25 kbps. At low data rates, this equates to an appreciable part of a second, when combined with the round trip delay makes it highly unsuitable for voice applications. Additionally, the de-interleaver frame synchronization method can add significantly to the time taken for the demodulator to declare acquisition.
Table D-2. Open Network Modes
Code Rate
225, 205
219, 201
208, 192
194, 178
126, 112
219, 201
219, 201
IESS-308
Mode
IESS-309 IBS, VSAT-IBS and Extended
IESS-310
A characteristic of concatenated R-S coding is the very pronounced threshold effect. For any given modem design, there will be a threshold value of Eb/No below which the demodulator cannot stay synchronized. This may be due to the carrier-recovery circuits, or the synchronization threshold of the primary FEC device, or both. In the SLM-5650A, and Rate 1/2 operation, this threshold is around 4 dB Eb/No. Below this value, operation is not possible, but above this value, the error performance of the concatenated R-S system produces exceptionally low error rates for a very small increase in Eb/No.
Do not operate the demodulator near its sync threshold. Small fluctuations in
Eb/No can cause total loss of the link, and the demodulator must then reacquire the signal.
Table D-3. Concatenated RS Coding Summary
FOR
Exceptionally good BER performance - several orders of magnitude improvement in link BER under given link conditions.
Very small additional bandwidth expansion
Interoperable with legacy Intelsat networks
AGAINST
Very pronounced threshold effect - does not fail gracefully in poor Eb/No conditions. Additional coding overhead actually degrades sync threshold, and reduces link fade margin.
Significant processing delay (~25 kbps) - not good for voice, or IP applications
Adds to demod acquisition time.
D–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
D.5 Trellis Coding (FAST Option)
In the other FEC methods described here, the processes of coding and modulation are independent - the FEC codec has no knowledge of, or interaction with, the modulator. However, there are schemes in which the coding and modulation are combined together, where the encoder places FEC symbols in a precise manner into the signal constellation. This can yield an overall improvement in performance, and is used in higher-order modulation schemes such as 8PSK,
16PSK, 16QAM, etc.
When convolution coding is used, the overall coded modulation approach is referred to as T rellis
C oded M odulation ( TCM ). Ungerboeck was an early pioneer, and developed optimum mapping and decoding schemes. However, the decoding scheme was seen as complex, and expensive, and
Qualcomm Inc. developed a variation on the theme, which uses a Viterbi decoder at the core, surrounded by adjunct processing. The scheme is able to achieve performance very close to the optimum Ungerboeck method, but with far less complexity, and is called pragmatic Trellis Coded
Modulation .
Intelsat recognized that, as more and more high-power transponders are put in to service, the transponders are no longer power limited , but bandwidth limited. In order to maximize transponder capacity, they looked at 8PSK as a method of reducing the occupied bandwidth of a carrier, and adopted Qualcomm’s pragmatic TCM, at Rate 2/3.
A Rate 2/3 8PSK/TCM carrier occupies only 50% of the bandwidth of a Rate 1/2 QPSK carrier.
However, the overall coding gain of the scheme is not adequate by itself, and so Intelsat’s IESS-
310 specification requires that the scheme be concatenated with an outer RS codec. When combined, there is a threshold value of Eb/No of around 6 dB, and above approximately 7 dB, the bit error rate is better than 1 x 10 -8 .
The detractions of the concatenated RS approach apply here also, along with more stringent requirements for phase noise and group delay distortion – the natural consequences of the higherorder modulation.
The SLM-5650A fully implements the IESS-310 specification at data rates up to 51.84 Mbps. In accordance with the specification, the R-S outer code cannot be disabled.
Table D-4. 8PSK/TCM Coding Summary
FOR
Exceptionally bandwidth efficient compared to
QPSK
Interoperable with legacy Intelsat networks
AGAINST
Needs concatenated RS outer codec to give acceptable coding gain performance
Demodulator acquisition threshold much higher than for QPSK
8PSK is more sensitive to phase noise and group delay distortion than QPSK
D–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
D.6 Turbo Product Codec (FAST Option)
Turbo coding is an FEC technique developed within the last few years, which delivers significant performance improvements compared to more traditional techniques. Two general classes of
Turbo Codes have been developed, T urbo C onvolutional C odes ( TCC ), and T urbo P roduct
C odes ( TPC ), a block coding technique that is a 2- or 3-dimensional array of block codes.
Comtech EF Data has chosen to implement an FEC codec based on TPC. Encoding is relatively straightforward, but decoding is a very complex process requiring multiple iterations of processing for maximum performance to be achieved.
Unlike the popular method of concatenating an R-S codec with a primary FEC codec, TPC is an entirely standalone method. It does not require the complex interleaving/de-interleaving of the R-
S approach, and consequently, decoding delays are significantly reduced. Furthermore, the traditional concatenated R-S schemes exhibit a very pronounced threshold effect – a small reduction in Eb/No can result in total loss of demod and decoder synchronization. TPC does not suffer from this problem – the demodulator and decoder remain synchronized down to the point where the output error rate becomes unusable. This is considered to be a particularly advantageous characteristic in a fading environment. Typically, in QPSK, 8PSK and 16QAM
TPC modes the demod and decoder can remain synchronized 2-3dB below the Viterbi/Reed-
Solomon or TCM cases .
Table D-5. Available TPC Modes
TPC Code Rate/Modulation
Rate 5/16 BPSK
Rate 21/44 BPSK
Rate 21/44 QPSK, OQPSK
Rate 3/4 QPSK, OQPSK
Rate 3/4 8PSK
Rate 3/4 16QAM
Rate 7/8 QPSK, OQPSK
Rate 7/8 8-PSK
Rate 7/8 16QAM
Data Rate Range
64 kbps to 20 Mbps
64 kbps to 30.545454 Mbps
64 kbps to 61.090909 Mbps
64 kbps to 96.0 Mbps
256 kbps to 144 Mbps
256 kbps to 155.52 Mbps
64 kbps to 112 Mbps
256 kbps to 155.52 Mbps
256 kbps to 155.52 Mbps
Rate 17/18 QPSK, OQPSK
Rate 17/18 8PSK
64 kbps to 120.888888 Mbps
256 kbps to 155.52 Mbps
D–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
D.7 Sequential (FAST Option)
Although the method of convolutional coding and Sequential decoding appears to be very similar to the Viterbi method, there are some fundamental differences. To begin with, the convolutional encoder is said to be systematic – it does not alter the input data, and the FEC overhead bits are simply appended to the data. Furthermore, the constraint length, k, is much longer (Rate 1/2, k=36. Rate 3/4, k= 63. Rate 7/8, k=87). This means that when the decoding process fails (i.e., when its capacity to correct errors is exceeded) it produces a burst of errors which is in multiples of half the constraint length.
An error distribution is produced which is markedly different to that of a Viterbi decoder. This gives rise to a pronounced threshold effect. A Sequential decoder does not fail gracefully – a reduction in Eb/No of just a few tenths of a dB can make the difference between acceptable BER and a complete loss of synchronization.
The decoding algorithm itself (called the Fano algorithm ) uses significantly more path memory
(4 kbps in this case) than the equivalent Viterbi decoder, giving rise to increased latency.
Furthermore, a fixed computational clock is used to process input symbols, and to search backwards and forwards in time to determine the correct decoding path. At lower data rates, there are a sufficient number of computational cycles per input symbol to permit the decoding process to perform optimally. However, as the data rate increases, there are fewer cycles available, leading to a reduction in coding gain. For data rates above ~1 Mbps, Viterbi should be considered the better alternative. The practical upper limit at this time is 2.048 Mbps.
Table D-6. Sequential Decoding Summary
FOR
Higher coding gain (1-2 dB) at lower data rates, compared to Viterbi.
AGAINST
Pronounced threshold effect - does not fail gracefully in poor Eb/No conditions.
Higher processing delay than Viterbi
(~4 k bits) – not good for low-rate coded voice.
Upper data rate limit approximately 2Mbps
Coding gain varies with data rate - favors lower data rates.
D–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
D.8 Low Density Parity Check (LDPC) coding
D.8.1 Introduction
In the past few years there has been an unprecedented resurgence in interest in FEC technology.
The start of this new interest has its origins in the work done by Claude Berrou et al , and the 1993 landmark paper, Near Shannon Limit Error Correcting Coding and Decoding – Turbo Codes .
FEC is considered an essential component in all wireless and satellite communications in order to reduce the power and bandwidth requirements for reliable data transmission.
Claude Shannon, considered by many to be the father of modern communications theory, first established the concept of Channel Capacity in his 1948 paper A Mathematical Theory of
Communication . This places an absolute limit on how fast it is possible to transmit error-free data within a channel of a given bandwidth, and with given noise conditions within that channel. He concluded that it would only be possible to approach this limit through the use of source encoding
– what is familiar today as Forward Error Correction.
Shannon postulated that if it were possible to store every possible message in the receiver, finding the stored message that most closely matched the incoming message would yield an optimum decoding method. However, for all but the shortest bit sequences, the memory required for this, and the time taken to perform the comparisons, makes this approach impractical. For all practical purposes, the memory requirement and the decoding latency become infinite.
For many years, there were few advances in the quest to approach the Shannon Limit. The Viterbi algorithm heralded a major step forward, followed in the early 1990s by the concatenation of a
Viterbi decoder with Reed-Solomon hard-decision block codes. It remained clear, however, that the Shannon Limit was still an elusive target.
Berrou’s work on Turbo Codes showed, through the use of an ingeniously simple approach
(multiple, or iterative decoding passes) that it is possible to achieve performance close to the
Shannon Limit. Berrou’s early work dealt exclusively with iteratively-decoded convolutional codes (i.e., TCC), but in time the iterative approach was applied to TPC. TPC exhibits inherently low decoding latency compared with TCC, and so is considered much more desirable for twoway, interactive satellite communications applications.
In August 1999, Comtech became the first company in the world to offer satellite modems that incorporate TPC. Since its inception, Comtech has continued to develop and refine its implementation of TPC in its products, and now offers a comprehensive range of code rates (from
Rate 5/16 to Rate 0.95) and modulations (from BPSK to 16QAM). However, in the past few years, as part of the general interest in Turbo coding, a third class of Turbo coding has emerged:
L ow D ensity P arity C heck ( LDPC ) Codes.
LDPC is more like TPC than TCC in that it is an iteratively-decoded block code. Gallager first suggested this in 1962 but, at the time, the implementation complexity was considered to be too great; for decades, it remained of purely academic interest. Further interest in LDPC was stimulated in 2003, when the D igital V ideo B roadcasting ( DVB ) committee adopted LDPC codes
(proposed by Hughes Network Systems) as the basis for the new DVB-S2 standard. Now, however, with silicon gates being cheap, plentiful and fast, an LDPC decoder can easily be accommodated in a large F ield P rogrammable G ate A rray ( FPGA ) device.
The LDPC method on its own produces an undesirable ‘flaring’ in the B it E rror R ate ( BER ) vs.
Eb/No characteristic, and for this reason it is desirable to concatenate a short BCH code with
D–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
LDPC. This concatenation produces almost vertical BER vs. Eb/No curves, as can be seen in the performance graphs that are presented later. In order to take full advantage of the coding gain increase that LDPC provides, it became necessary to find an alternative to 8PSK. Comtech EF
Data has therefore developed an 8QAM approach that permits acquisition and tracking at much lower values of Eb/No than 8PSK. Comtech’s implementation of 8QAM is the subject of a U.S.
Patent, granted in 2007.
D.8.2 LDPC versus TPC
Is LDPC better than TPC? The answer must be ‘sometimes, but not always’, and there are issues such as latency that must be taken into consideration. Error free transmission is not possible for values of spectral efficiency (capacity) vs . Eb/No above these limit curves. The horizontal distance to the limit provides a metric of overall performance.
Figure D-1 graphs the performance of various TPC and LDPC modes relative to the Shannon
Limit – the Channel Capacity is shown for both QPSK and 8PSK. It can be seen from this graph that, for Code Rates above 3/4, Comtech’s TPCs are very close (1-1.5 dB) to the Shannon Limit.
However, at 3/4 and below, LDPCs are performing 0.7-1.2 dB better than TPCs. It is clear that, in order to provide the best possible performance over the range of code rates from 1/2 to 0.95, both an LDPC and a TPC codec need to be offered.
Figure D-1. TPC & LDPC Modes Performance (Relative to Shannon Limit)
In order to provide a robust set of LDPC codes with varying degrees of latency, the SLM-5650A has implemented three different block sizes:
The U ltra L ow L atency ( ULL ) code provides the lowest latency, but worst performance of the three block sizes. This code is available in the data rate range from 32 kbps to 2 Mbps and is compatible with the CDM-625 ULL code.
The L ow L atency ( LL ) code provides modest latency and performance over the data rate range of 32 kbps to 5 Mbps.
D–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
The H igh P erformance ( HP ) code provides the best performance but worst latency. This code is available from 32 kbps up to 46 Mbps depending on MODCOD. The HP code is compatible with the CDM-625 LDPC code.
See Appendix B. OPERATIONS REFERENCE for more details on the data rate and symbol rate ranges supported in each code.
D.9 Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS)
As On-The-Move systems with very small dishes (e.g., VSATs) become more popular, there is an increased interest in Spectrum Spreading. To meet this need, D irect S equence S pread S pectrum
( DSSS ) is optionally available in the SLM-5650A.
DSSS works by modulating the normal carrier with a pseudo-random PN sequence (chips) at a much higher chip rate. The chip rate is determined by the carrier’s symbol rate and a multiplying
(spreading) factor.
The SLM-5650A offers spreading in the following LDPC MODCODs:
ULL
BPSK
1/2
LL
BPSK
.382
LL
BPSK
.456
LL
BPSK
.547
HP
BPSK
1/2
The Spreading Factors currently supported are 1(Spreading Off), 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, and 128 up to a maximum chip rate of 23 Mcps. The user can select between four built-in pseudo-random PN sequences so that multiple spread carriers can occupy the same bandwidth in a Code-Division
Multiple Access (CDMA) fashion.
When using large spreading factors, the SLM-5650A also exhibits a large tolerance to jamming – up to 24 dB – and a Low Probability of Detection/Interception. With DSSS enabled, the lower data rate limit has been reduced to 8 kbps. The SLM-5650A Base Modem Web Server Interface provides a Web page to facilitate anti-jamming applications. This page allows the user to configure the modem parameters so that a fixed occupied bandwidth can be maintained.
Lastly, there is no loss in performance with spreading enabled.
D.10 Extended Temperature Option
Extended temperature range is -32° to 50° C. When operating from -32° to 0° C, Tx power accuracy is +/- 1.5 dB.
A heater is installed on the bottom of the chassis. This 300-Watt heater operates at 120 or
240V AC.
When temperatures are below 0° C, allow a 10-minute warm up period upon power-up before the modem boots. To ensure performance specifications, allow an additional 15 minutes, for a total of
25 minutes of recommended warm-up time.
D–10
Appendix E. VIPERSAT
NETWORK APPLICATION
EXAMPLES
E.1 Overview
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem’s optional Network Processor (NP) Interface Module (also referred to as the “NP Interface” or the “card”), when installed and operating in Router Mode
OSPFv2 or BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode, makes point-to-multipoint topologies possible. This appendix provides the following Vipersat Network Application Examples:
• OSPFv2
• BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode
E.2 OSPFv2 in a Shared Outbound Satellite Network
This section examines the challenges and solutions for using the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem and O pen S hortest P ath F irst (OSPF) in a shared outbound/split path satellite network such as
Vipersat.
E.2.1 Shared Outbound Satellite Network Overview
A shared outbound network saves satellite bandwidth and reduces operating expenses by allowing multiple remote terminals to share the same channel from a hub ground station.
Figure E-1 illustrates a satellite shared outbound network. Notably, the outbound interface at the hub is not the same interface at which return traffic received. This is referred to as “split path.”
E–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
Figure E-1. Satellite Shared Outbound Network
E.2.2 OSPF Basics
Certain critical features of the OSPF protocol that impact a shared outbound satellite network are as follows:
• OSPF requires that the communication channel between the interfaces that connect any two given OSPF nodes must have ability to pass traffic bidirectionally .
• A router running the OSPF algorithm will send out “Hello” packets on each interface, when the response from a node on the same subnet as the interface is received, OSPF will create a the neighbor adjacency with that node.
In this way, the subnets and segments of the OSPF network are discovered, mapped and an OSPF database is created. This database is used by all OSPF routers to determine open shortest paths to all remote networks. OSPF nodes that do not follow these rules will not be added to a router's neighbor adjacency database.
E.2.3 OSPF Challenges
Use of a split path violates the requirement whereby OSPF messaging is sent and received on the same interface. Therefore, the hub modems will not achieve “neighbor adjacency” with any of the remote routers. This means that running OSPF on the hub routers will not add any value.
In the example diagram, the SLM-5650A NP Router is essentially a two-port router, thereby requiring that another OSPF node must always be in place “downstream” at the remote.
However, if this downstream router is running OSPF, could the high costs associated with a satellite link be managed and reduced by specifically configuring the router interface? Such a configuration would allow the overall OSPF network to control whether traffic should pass to the
E–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A satellite link, or to a lower-cost link, such a terrestrial fiber, based upon availability. The possibility of such a solution is examined in the following use case.
E.2.4 OSPF Maritime Use Cases
The maritime use cases presented here depicts application of OSPFv2 as part of a deployed network of routers that includes the SLM-5650A Network Processor (NP) Interface.
The primary objective of these use cases is to describe the process of automatically re-routing traffic when alternative transmission links are available in a maritime environment. Specifically, the satellite link should be used when at sea, and the high-speed terrestrial link should be used when at shore. This switch should occur automatically.
If other communication links such as ship-to-ship or back-up lower-speed satellite networks are available, then the OSPF routing protocol will select the best path as defined by link cost.
E.2.4.1 OSPF Use Case: At Shore
When at shore, as depicted in Figure E-2 , the shipboard OSPF network automatically re-routes packets destined to non-shipboard networks over the high-speed, low-cost network.
Figure E-2. OSPF Support at Shore
E–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
E.2.4.2 OSPF Use Case: At Sea
When at sea, all traffic is routed to the satellite network. If other communication links such as ship-to-ship or backup lower-speed satellite networks are available, then the OSPF routing protocol selects the best path as defined by link cost.
Figure E-3. OSPF Support at Sea
E–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
E.2.5 OSPF Deployment Solution
E.2.5.1 OSPF Test Network
Figure E-4 depicts the test network created to demonstrate how OSPFv2 can be used in a largescale Vipersat deployment.
It has been determined that OSPF can be used with a Vipersat and shared outbound topology by enabling a common router feature: IP Tunneling.
Figure E-4. OSPF Laboratory Test Network
E–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
E.2.5.2 OSPF Test Solution
Multi-TDM Tunneling is a technique where a VLAN “tunnel” is set up between the Hub unit and any expansion units that are being used to create an SCPC link with a Remote that is Home Stated to the specified Hub Time-Division Multiplexing (TDM) Modem.
As shown in Figure E-5 , if an IP tunnel is configured from each of the remote Autonomous
System Boundary Routers (ASBRs) to the OSPF routers at the hub, the two routers will attain neighbor adjacency. All of the necessary OSPF messages will be exchanged to include the remote shipboard network into the OSPF domain.
This configuration allows the network to automatically reconfigure to the lower-cost terrestrial link when connected and automatically return to the higher-cost satellite link when the terrestrial link is disconnected.
It is recommended that the hub OSPF router be a backbone router (area 0.0.0.0), and each of the shipboard networks be a single OSPF area. This will reduce the amount of OSPF messaging required to be transmitted over the satellite network.
Figure E-5. OSPF Test Solution
E–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
E.2.6 OSPFv2 Summary
The proposed solution using router-configurable IP tunneling to connect the remotes to the hub
OSPF router satisfies the use case with minimal operator configuration.
While the addition of an IP tunnel will add overhead, the overall reduction in satellite bandwidth using the dynamic shared bandwidth functionality of Vipersat will more than offset the added overhead. Load switching, used in conjunction with OSPF, will allow the bandwidth to be automatically returned to the pool once a lower-cost terrestrial link is connected.
Advantages Disadvantages
• Because IP tunnels are set up from the remote ASBR to the hub backbone router, an additional 20-byte IP header will be added to all packets traversing the satellite interface.
• Allows for automatic path selection via OSPF in a split path configuration with minimal impact to the network.
• Because each ship is its own area, there will be a reduced amount of OSPF traffic over the satellite.
• If the operator uses Vipersat load switching at the remote (i.e. shipboard SLM-5650A NP), then once the terrestrial link is connected, traffic will be redirected to fiber link and the loadswitching algorithm will free the satellite link and return it to STDMA operation. This will free up significant satellite bandwidth automatically for use by other ships still at sea.
• Satellite link availability will still be available to the participating OSPF routers because periodic LSA and Hello packets will not be received on the router interface in case of satellite outage.
• Reduces the number of OSPF nodes in the network.
• Allows for automatic path selection via OSPF in a split path configuration with minimal impact to the network.
• An IP tunnel will have to be configured for each ship to the hub OSPF router.
E–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
E.3 Network Processor (NP) Interface BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint)
Mode
Networks where modems traditionally act as routers – e.g., Vipersat-based satellite communications systems – and include encryption devices are sometimes incompatible or require difficult and unwieldy configurations. Additionally, the NP Interface is limited to 256 allowable route tables. This, in turn, can limit the overall size of the network, particularly when OSPF dynamic routing protocol is used in the NP Interface.
In order to increase the flexibility and scalability of the satellite network with SLM-5650A
Satellite Modems, BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode, an optional FAST feature, has been introduced in the NP Interface’s FW-0000051L Ver. 1.9.1 firmware release.
When BPM Mode is selected, Layer 2 and Layer 3 networks can operate simultaneously – i.e., the users can operate two independent Layer2 networks and one Layer3 network without interfering with each other.
E.3.1 BPM Mode Functional Description
Figure E-6. Ethernet Port Configuration in BPM Mode
The NP Interface features four Ethernet ports: P1 through P4 . When BPM Mode is enabled, the
SLM-5650A Base Modem J5 Ethernet management port effectively becomes the NP Interface’s fifth Ethernet port. All five Ethernet ports are then segregated into three Ethernet switches.
As shown in Figure E-6 :
• NP Ethernet ports P1 and P2, with internal Data WAN Port ‘A’ forms the red switch group referred to as Bridge-Group1 . This group is reserved for bridged Layer 2 traffic only .
• NP Ethernet ports P3 and P4, with internal Management WAN Port ‘B’ forms the blue switch group referred to as Bridge-Group2 . This group is reserved for bridged Layer 2 traffic only .
• The SLM-5650A Base Modem J5 Ethernet port, with internal VS WAN Port ‘C’ forms the green switch group referred to as Router-Group . This set is reserved for routed
Layer 3 traffic and management use only .
E–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
All three switch groups are isolated such that:
• Traffic from NP Interface Port P1 can only transmit to the Data WAN Port ‘A’ or NP
Interface port P2. It will NOT transmit to the NP Interface ports P3 or P4, the Base
Modem J5 Ethernet port, Management WAN Port ‘B’, or VS WAN Port ‘C.’
• The traffic from NP Interface Port P3 can transmit to the Management WAN Port ‘B’ or
NP Interface Port P4. It will NOT transmit to the NP Interface ports P1 or P2, the Base
Modem J5 Ethernet Port, Data WAN Port ‘A’, or VS WAN Port ‘C.’
• The traffic from the Base Modem J5 Ethernet Port can transmit to VS WAN Port ‘C.’ It will NOT transmit to NP Interface Ports P1 through P4, Data WAN Port ‘A’, or
Management Port ‘B.’
Note the following definitions:
• Primary Port: This is the port that can transmit the traffic those ingresses from any port within its group.
Examples:
• NP Interface Port P1 can transmit the traffic coming from Data WAN Port ‘A’ or
NP Interface Port P2.
• NP Interface Port P3 can transmit the traffic coming from Management WAN port ‘B’ or NP Interface Port P4.
• The Base Modem J5 Ethernet port can transmit the traffic coming from VS WAN port ‘C.’
• Expansion Port: This is the port that can transmit the traffic that ingress from its primary port within that group.
Examples:
• NP Interface Port P2 can transmit the traffic coming from NP Interface Port P1 only.
• NP Interface Port P4 can transmit the traffic coming from NP Interface Port P3 only.
• WAN Port: This is a logical port that transmits the packet only to the primary ports, but it can receive the packets from either the primary port or the expansion port.
Examples:
• Data WAN port ‘A’ Bridge-Group1.
• Management WAN port ‘B’ in Bridge-Group2.
• VS WAN port ‘C’ in Router-Group.
E–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
E.3.2 BPM Mode Configuration
BPM Mode is available on the NP Interface as an optional FAST Feature. Once the FAST
Feature Code has been purchased during normal business hours from Comtech EF Data Customer
Support, it is then activated in the NP Interface-equipped modem via the modem front panel.
Once activated, BPM Mode must then be enabled for operation.
See Chapter Sect. 1.3.3.6 Fully Accessible System Topology (FAST) , Chapter
Sect. 5.3.7.10 Utility: FAST or Chapter Sect. 8.6.5.2.2 Admin | FAST Features for more information about FAST Features.
BPM Mode may be enabled for operation via either the SLM-5650A front panel menu
( CONFIG: Remote EthernetConfig
Option Card Addr Network Proc ), or the
NP Interface HTTP/HTTPS Interface ‘ Admin
| Vipersat Modes ’ page.
See Chapter Sect. 5.3.3.9
CONFIG: Remote or Chapter
Sect. 8.6.5.2.1 Admin | Vipersat
Mode (FAST Feature Required) for further details.
E–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
E.3.3 BPM Mode in Hub Data Traffic Networks
Figure Legend
Equipment
1 TDM Modem
2 Hub LAN Data Switch
3 Hub router
Data Type
A STDMA Return Link
B Forward Link
C Network Encryption
4 Other Devices D MAC Learning Disabled (Entire Switch)
5 Hub Demodulator Data Switch E SCPC Return #1
6 Demodulator #1
7 Demodulator #2
8 Demodulator #N
F SCPC Return #2
G SCPC Return #N
Figure E-7. Hub Data Traffic Network
In a point-to-multipoint system, at the hub a split-path topology is used and traffic in the Forward
Link and Return Link directions may be processed by different SLM-5650A modems.
Figure E-7 shows a typical Hub Data Traffic Network for one Layer 2 Network (‘P1/P2/A’ shown in red). The other two networks (‘P3/P4/B’ shown in blue and ‘P5/C’ shown in green) can be used in a similar fashion.
Note that the Hub Demodulators used in this configuration are SLM-5650A modems configured for operation with the optional ‘Demodulator only’ FAST Feature enabled.
E–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
In the Forward Link direction, all traffic is transmitted by the Hub Time-Division Multiplexing
(TDM) Modem. Packets received from the Hub Data Network are received by the Hub TDM
Modem on a Data LAN Port (P1) and forward to the Data WAN.
The packets received by Return Link channels can come into the Hub in one of two ways:
1.
They are processed by the Hub TDM Modem for Self-Organizing Time Division
Multiple Access (STDMA) channels.
2.
Hub Demodulators are used for Single Channel per Carrier (SCPC) channels.
In Figure E-7 , the external hub switch supporting data traffic is shown as two separate switches: the Hub LAN Data Switch , and the Hub Demodulator Data Switch . It is important to note that this is a functional concept only – the physical implementation of this switch can be accomplished in one of three ways:
1.
Two separate switches, as illustrated in Figure E-7 .
2.
One physical switch, partitioned into two logical switches using port isolation. Many commercially available managed switches have this capability.
3.
A data-path router directly connected to the Hub TDM Modem’s P1 port, with the functionality of the Hub Demodulator Data Switch implemented by means of daisychaining the Hub Demodulator units’ Data LAN ports (i.e., connecting the P1 port of one
Hub Demodulator to the P2 port of the next Hub Demodulator).
This third method has the advantage of reducing the required Hub equipment. However, it has the disadvantage of adding between 5 µsec and 0.01 ms of delay per Hub
Demodulator unit traversed, depending on packet size (64 – 1500 bytes @ 1000 Mbps
GigE negotiation between Hub Demodulators and the Hub TDM Modem).
Note also that for return link packets arriving via SCPC channels, care must be taken to avoid potential issues associated with the split path topology inherent in the point-to-multipoint system architecture. In order to forward the packets received from the Hub Demodulator to the Hub expansion port P2, MAC learning on the HUB demodulators switch should be disabled, as indicated by Data Type ‘D’ in Figure E-7 .
E–12
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
E.3.4 Dynamic Hub Demodulators in a Multiple TDM Hubs Configuration
In BPM Mode, multiple Hub TDM Modem configuration is supported along with dynamic assignment of Hub Demodulators.
In a dynamic Hub Demodulator assignment, the Hub Demodulator can be assigned to any Hub
TDM Modem. Packet transmission should therefore be forwarded from the Hub Demodulator to the corresponding Hub TDM Modem. In order to accommodate this, a separate VLAN packet tagging is used.
Packets transmitted from the Hub Demodulator will be tagged with configured VLAN (or doubletagged if the packet already has a VLAN) and then sent to all designated Hub TDM Modems. The corresponding Hub TDM Modem(s) will receive and process these packets, while noncorresponding Hub TDM Modems will ignore them.
With this configuration, as shown in Figure E-8 , the Hub TDM Modem is set to Vipersat Hub per the ‘ Admin | Vipersat Mode ’ Web page (see Chapter Sect. 8.6.5.2.1
) and configured for
Multi-TDM Tunneling Mode per the ‘ LAN | Interface ’ Web page (see Chapter Sect. 8.6.5.4.1
).
This VLAN communication is configurable as Automatic . When Multi-TDM Tunneling Mode is configured as Manual , then a unique VLAN ID has to be entered.
Admin | Vipersat Modes page LAN | Interface page
Hub TDM Modem Config
Figure E-8. Hub VLAN Configuration HTTP/HTTPS Interface Pages
E–13
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
Revision 8
MN-SLM5650A
E.3.5 Remote Data Traffic Handling
Equipment
1 Remote Modem
2 Remote LAN Data Switches
3 Remote Router
4 Other Devices
Figure Legend
Data Type
A Tx / Rx Data Link from Hub
B Network Encryption
Figure E-9. Remote (Spoke) Data Traffic Network
In BPM Mode, the remote role is the same for either point-to-point or point-to-multipoint topologies. No special configuration is required for remote operation.
As shown in Figure E-9 :
• NP Ethernet ports P1 and P2, with internal Data WAN Port ‘A’ forms the red switch group referred to as Bridge-Group1 ;
• NP Ethernet ports P3 and P4, with internal Management WAN Port ‘B’ forms the blue switch group referred to as Bridge-Group2 ;
• The SLM-5650A Base Modem J5 Ethernet port, with internal VS WAN Port ‘C’ forms the green switch group referred to as Router-Group .
The following rules are observed with this configuration:
• NP Interface ports P1, P3, and Base Modem Ethernet Port J5 are the primary ports.
• NP Interface ports P2 and P4 are the secondary ports.
Note that, while the remote LAN switches shown in Figure E-9 are included to illustrate how third party Layer2 switches can be used, their use is not mandatory.
E–14
2114
WEST
7
TH STREET TEMPE ARIZONA
85281
USA
480 • 333 • 2200
PHONE
480 • 333 • 2161
FAX
Изтегляне
Публичната връзка е актуализирана
Публичната връзка към вашия чат е актуализирана. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Публична връзка към документа
Реклама
